advisors excel gage center campus...advisors excel – gage center campus phase 1 – building a...

PROJECT MANUAL

Advisors Excel Gage Center Campus

Building Package No. 1 Building K & Building A

PROJECT NUMBER: SDG 190121 DATE: September 4, 2019

TITLE PAGE

PROJECT MANUAL Advisors Excel Gage Center Campus Building K & Building A Package No. 1

September 4, 2019 SDG PROJECT NUMBER: 190121 OWNER Advisors Excel 2950 SW McClure Rd Topeka, Kansas 66614 ARCHITECT OF RECORD Schwerdt Design Group 2231 SW Wanamaker Rd. Suite 303 Topeka, Kansas 66614 (785) 273-7540 [email protected] CIVIL ENGINEER CFS Engineers 2930 SW Woodside Dr. Topeka, Kansas 66614 (785) 272-4706 [email protected] STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Certus Structural Engineers 900 S. Kansas Ave Suite 400 Topeka, Kansas 66612 (785) 291-0400 [email protected] MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL / PLUMBING ENGINEER Latimer Sommers & Associates 3639 SW Summerfield Dr. Topeka, Kansas 66614 (785) 233-3232 [email protected]

Advisors Excel – Gage Center Campus Phase 1 – Building A & Building K Topeka, Kansas SDG Project No. 190121

SEALS PAGE 000107 - 1

DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE

September 3, 2019 1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD

A. Architect:

1. Greg Schwerdt 2. 2588 3. Responsible for Sections 01-49 except where indicated as prepared by other

design professional of record. END OF DOCUMENT 000107

2019-09-04 09:37-05:00

Advisors Excel – Gage Center Campus Phase 1 – Building A & Building KTopeka, Kansas SDG Project No. 190121



September 3, 2019

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONSAL OF RECORD

C. Structural Engineer:

1. Toby R Taggart, PE2. KS License #168093. Responsible for 033000, 042000, & 051200.

END OF DOCUMENT 000107




September 3, 2019 1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONSAL OF RECORD

B. Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Engineer:

1. James A. Latimer 2. Kansas No. 12842 3. Responsible for:

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPRESSION

SECTION 210500 - AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (Lower Level Building A Only) SECTION 212200 - CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (Building K Only)

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

SECTION 220500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 220501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 220503 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 220519 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES SECTION 220523 - VALVES SECTION 220524 - PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 220529 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS SECTION 220700 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 221116 - PIPING AND FITTINGS SECTION 223600 - PLUMBING SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 225000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 229000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION

DIVISION 23 – HVAC

SECTION 230500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 230501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 230502 - TEMPORARY USE OF PERMANENT HEATING UNITS SECTION 230503 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 230513 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 230519 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES SECTION 230523 - VALVES SECTION 230524 - PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 230529 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL SECTION 230553 - TESTING & BALANCING SECTION 230700 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 230701 - DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 230900 - BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM SECTION 232113 - PIPING AND FITTINGS SECTION 232123 - WET ROTOR CIRCULATOR PUMPS SECTION 232125 - HVAC PUMPS SECTION 232250 - WATER HEATING BOILER SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING SECTION 232500 - WATER TREATMENT



SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 233416 - EXHAUST FANS SECTION 233600 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES SECTION 233713 - GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 238219 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS SECTION 239000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 260500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 260501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 260502 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 260519 - WIRES AND CABLES SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING SECTION 260533 - CONDUITS SECTION 260534 - OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES SECTION 260943 - NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROLS SECTION 262417 - PANELBOARDS SECTION 262726 - SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES AND COVER PLATES SECTION 262816 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES SECTION 262817 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 263000 - MOTORS SECTION 264313 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265700 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS (Building A Only) SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION 269000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 270500 - COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 271200 - CABLE TRAYS SECTION 271500 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS

DIVISION 28 – SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 287210 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

END OF DOCUMENT 000107


TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

Table of Contents

Division Section Title Title Page Seal Page Construction Manager’s General & Supplemental Conditions DIVISION 00 – BIDDING DOCUMENTS 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 0000 General Requirements 01 1000 Summary 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 01 2500A Request for Substitution Form 01 2500B Contractors Statement of Conformance 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2900 Payment Procedures. 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 3333 Electronic Drawings 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 7300 Execution 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 7839 Project Record Documents 01 7900 Demonstration and Training DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 04 2000 Unit Masonry 04 4200 Exterior Stone Cladding


TABLE OF CONTENTS

2

DIVISION 5 – METALS 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 5000 Metal Fabrications 05 5133 Metal Ladders 05 5213 Pipe and Tube Railings 05 7300 Decorative Metal Railings DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITESCONCRETE 06 1000 Rough Carpentry 06 1600 Sheathing 06 4100 Architectural Cabinets DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1326 Self-Adhered Sheet Waterproofing 07 2100 07 2413

Thermal Insulation Polymer based Exterior Insulation & Finish System

07 2726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07 4213 Metal Wall & Soffit Panels 07 5423 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 7200 Roof Accessories 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping 078443 Joint Firestopping 07 9200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames 08 4213 Aluminum-Framed Entrances 08 7100 Door Hardware 08 8000 Glazing DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 2900 Gypsum Board 09 5123 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 9100 Painting


TABLE OF CONTENTS

3

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 1100 Visual Display Units 10 2113 Toilet Compartments 10 2800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT NOT USED

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 2413 Roller Window Shades DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK NOT USED DIVISION 32 – LANDSCAPING NOT USED MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS TOC ON FOLLOWING PAGE END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPRESSION

SECTION 210500 - AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (Lower Level Building A Only) SECTION 212200 - CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (Building K Only)

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

SECTION 220500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 220501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 220503 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 220519 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES SECTION 220523 - VALVES SECTION 220524 - PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 220529 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS SECTION 220700 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 221116 - PIPING AND FITTINGS SECTION 223600 - PLUMBING SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 225000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 229000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION

DIVISION 23 – HVAC

SECTION 230500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 230501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 230502 - TEMPORARY USE OF PERMANENT HEATING UNITS SECTION 230503 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 230513 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 230519 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES SECTION 230523 - VALVES SECTION 230524 - PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 230529 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL SECTION 230553 - TESTING & BALANCING SECTION 230700 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 230701 - DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 230900 - BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM SECTION 232113 - PIPING AND FITTINGS SECTION 232123 - WET ROTOR CIRCULATOR PUMPS SECTION 232125 - HVAC PUMPS SECTION 232250 - WATER HEATING BOILER SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING SECTION 232500 - WATER TREATMENT SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 233416 - EXHAUST FANS SECTION 233600 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES SECTION 233713 - GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 238219 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS SECTION 239000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 260500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 260501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 260502 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 260519 - WIRES AND CABLES SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING SECTION 260533 - CONDUITS


TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2

SECTION 260534 - OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES SECTION 260943 - NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROLS SECTION 262417 - PANELBOARDS SECTION 262726 - SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES AND COVER PLATES SECTION 262816 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES SECTION 262817 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 263000 - MOTORS SECTION 264313 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265700 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS (Building A Only) SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION 269000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 270500 - COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 271200 - CABLE TRAYS SECTION 271500 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS DIVISION 28 – SAFETY AND SECURITY


END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


DIVISION 21 TABLE OF CONTENTS 210000 - 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPRESSION SECTION 210500 - AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (Lower Level Building A Only) SECTION 212200 - CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (Building K Only)


LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 0115 - 1

SECTION 00 0115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled Art Gallery Addition Washburn University dated August 26, 2016, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications.

1.2 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated for Washburn University Art Gallery Addition.

1. Cover:

Sheet G-001 COVER SHEET Sheet G-002 ASSEMBLY TYPES Sheet G-101 LIFE SAFETY PLAN – BUILDING K Sheet G-102 LIFE SAFETY PLAN – SITE PLAN

1. Architectural: Sheet A-101 BUILDING K – FIRST FLOOR PLAN Sheet A-102 BUIDLING K – SECOND FLOOR PLAN Sheet A-111 FIRST FLOOR RCP – BUILDING K Sheet A-112 SECOND FLOOR RCP – BUILDING K Sheet A-121 ROOF PLAN – BUILDING K Sheet A-201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS – BUILDING K Sheet A-211 INT. ELEVATIONS / MILLWORK Sheet A-212 MILLWORK DETAILS Sheet A-301 WALL SECTIONS Sheet A-401 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS Sheet A-501 DETAILS Sheet A-502 DETAILS Sheet A-601 DOOR SCHEDULE Sheet A-602 FRAME ELEVATIONS Sheet A-603 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULES Sheet A-701 FIRST FLOOR FINISH PLAN Sheet A-702 SECOND FLOOR FINISH PLAN

2. Structural: Sheet S-001 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES Sheet S-201 ROOF FRAMING PLAN Sheet S-501 ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS Sheet S-502 STEEL SECTIONS AND DETAILS Sheet S-201 STEEL SECTIONS AND DETAILS



3. Mechanical/ Electrical:

Sheet ME-001 GENERAL NOTES Sheet ME-201 HVAC CONTROLS Sheet ME-202 HVAC CONTROLS Sheet ME-203 HVAC CONTROLS Sheet ME-204 HVAC CONTROLS Sheet ME-301 HVAC CONTROLS Sheet ME-302 HVAC CONTROLS Sheet ME-303 HVAC CONTROLS Sheet ME-304 HVAC CONTROLS

4. Plumbing: Sheet P-101 FIRST FLOOR BELOW GRADE PLUMBING PLAN Sheet P-102 FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN Sheet P-103 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN

5. Mechanical: Sheet M-101 FIRST FLOOR HVAC PLAN Sheet M-102 SECOND FLOOR HVAC PLAN Sheet M-201 FIRST FLOOR HVAC PIPING PLAN Sheet M-202 SECOND FLOOR HVAC PIPING PLAN Sheet M-203 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN – HVAC PIPING

1. MECH / PLUMBING: Sheet MP-101 MECHANICAL DETAILS Sheet MP-102 MECHANICAL DETAILS Sheet MP-103 MECHANICAL DETAILS Sheet MP-104 MECHANICAL DETAILS Sheet MP-105 MECHANICAL DETAILS & SCHEDULES Sheet MP-106 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES Sheet MP-107 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES Sheet MP-108 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES

2. Electrical: Sheet E-101 FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN Sheet E-102 SECOND FLOOR POWER PLAN Sheet E-103 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN Sheet E-201 FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN Sheet E-202 SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN Sheet E-301 FIRST FLOOR HVAC POWER PLAN Sheet E-302 SECOND FLOOR HVAC POWER PLAN Sheet E-401 ELECTRICAL DETAILS Sheet E-402 ELECTRICAL DETAILS Sheet E-403 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION RISER DIAGRAM Sheet E-404 ELECTRICAL DETAILS Sheet E-405 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES Sheet E-406 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES Sheet E-407 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES Sheet E-408 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES Sheet E-409 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES



3. Fire Alarm: Sheet FA-101 LOWER LEVEL FIRE ALARM PLAN Sheet FA-102 SECOND FLOOR FIRE ALARM PLAN Sheet FA-103 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR SERVER ROOM PLAN – CLEAN AGENT

4. Telecommunications:

Sheet T-101 FIRST FLOOR TELECOM PLAN Sheet T-102 SECOND FLOOR TELECOM Sheet T-201 FIRST FLOOR SECURITY Sheet T-202 SECOND FLOOR SECURITY Sheet T-301 FIRST FLOOR SOUND MASKING Sheet T-302 SECOND FLOOR SOUND MASKING Sheet T-401 LOW-VOLTAGE SCHEDULES & DETAILS Sheet T-402 LOW-VOLTAGE SCHEDULES & DETAILS

15. Audio/ Visual:

Sheet AV-101 FIRST FLOOR AUDIO/VISUAL PLAN Sheet AV-102 SECOND FLOOR AUDIO/VISUAL PLAN

END OF SECTION 00 0115


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 0000 - 1

SECTION 01 0000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES General Contractor shall secure and pay for building permit and site grade approval before construction start. General Contractor shall promptly furnish Architect with copy of building permit, grade approval sheet and approvals of other departments and officials having jurisdiction and shall call Architect's attention, in writ-ing, to all notations and requirements made by officials on the approved permit, the grade sheet, the ap-proved set of drawings, and other approval documents. Contract shall not become effective, nor shall the construction start before issuance of building permit. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall secure and pay for all other per-mits, governmental fees, licenses, and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and are legally required at the time the bids are received. Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. Promptly on award of Contract, General Contractor shall give notice to all utility companies and others required to make installations for this Project, in order for them to order equipment and make their instal-lations in a timely manner, not to delay the project and its occupancy--such notification regardless of whether such installations are under the General Contract, under the contract of others, under the Owner or otherwise reasonably inferable as necessary for the completion of the Project.

PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS

Appropriate Materials and Installations By acceptance of this Contract, the Contractor, his Subcontractors and Material Suppliers hold forth that they are knowledgeable of and experienced with the materials and installations required. Before submit-ting Bid, and before procurement of materials selected by Architect subsequent to Bid, Contractor, his Subcontractors and Material Suppliers shall carefully examine the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents, and should any material or its installation be indicated or specified in a manner not approved or not recommended by material manufacturer or not in accordance with applicable code or with good construction practice for the specific installation and the obviously intended results, they shall notify Architect in writing and receive his instructions. Failing to do so, Contractor provide other materials and methods suitable for the installation, as selected by Architect, or if not discovered until after installa-tion, Contractor replace work with suitable materials and methods selected by Architect, and in any event at no increase in Contract Sum. All specification requirements and recommendations of the manufacturer for a material and its installation (including supplementary materials required for such installation) are considered a part of these Specifi-cations for this Project, whether or not the manufacturer's specification or recommendation is repeated herein. No guaranty or warranty may be rescinded or qualified, in whole or in part, by failure of Contrac-tor, subcontractor or materials supplier to notify Architect in advance of Bid designating the modifica-tion(s) that must be made in the Contract Documents in order for a material and/or its installation to fully meet manufacturer's requirements and qualify for such guaranty or warranty.

Drawings Do not scale mechanical and electrical drawings for dimensions. Accurately lay out such work from di-mensions indicated on Architectural Drawings unless such are found in error. Consult Architect for inter-pretations concerning locations of equipment. Consult Drawings for miscellaneous items of each trade and provide same as indicated.



Where Drawings indicate a portion of Work and remainder is shown in outline, parts drawn out apply to other like portions of Work. Where detail is indicated by starting only such detail continues to apply throughout courses or parts in which it occurs and applies to similar parts of Work unless otherwise indi-cated. Unless otherwise indicated, a detail indicates general application of Work at all locations where it logically applies, and other related Work incident thereto shall be provided as required to fully complete Work in manner consistent with detail and other related details and as approved by Architect.

Checking and Comparing Documents and Construction Conditions Drawings and Specifications are intended to be sufficiently accurate and to include sufficient information that an experienced and careful Contractor can build from these and achieve the Architect's intended re-sults. The Contractor has the opportunity and the responsibility to check, compare and verify the accuracy and adequacy of Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents, one with another and with the ac-tual construction in progress, such as, but not limited to (1) floor plan dimensions against foundation di-mensions, (2) schedules against floor plans and details, (3) large scale details against their smaller scale indications and placements, (4) mechanical and electrical plans against each other and against respec-tive architectural plans, and (5) dimensions, grades and levels of the actual project against those indicat-ed on drawings and shop drawings; and he shall promptly report all inconsistencies, inaccuracies, and omissions to Architect and receive his instructions before proceeding with the Work. Contractor shall recognize that the objective of the Contract Documents is to result in the construction of the building, site improvements, and all related work in a manner that all components will fit with each other and all systems will work as obviously intended, and he shall search for and assist in discovering errors, omissions, and ambiguities and report them to the Architect before they become built-in problems. The Contractor shall determine in advance of installation that materials, assemblies and installations will perform properly when completed, such as, by illustration and not by limitation, (1) checking that flow lines and routing of pipes will properly connect with fixtures, manholes, and existing piping with which new work is to be connected, and maintain appropriate gradients, all without conflicting with other piping or structural elements, (2) reporting the discovery of unexpected ground conditions in the excavations for footings, (3) reporting a condition that could result in leaking walls or roofs, (4) checking site grades to provide adequate drainage, (5) verifying that substrates are in condition to produce appropriate results when later finishes are applied, and (6) verifying that specified materials and equipment are approved by the manufacturer for the required code and installation conditions. Frequently the construction will present conditions that have not been contemplated, such as, by illustra-tion and not by limitation, (1) a door requiring a different hardware device, or (2) a toilet grab bar interfer-ing with the installation of a water closet tank, or (3) a mirror interfering with the installation of a soap dis-penser, or (4) a beam or other structural member of a depth or shape that prevents the contemplated in-stallation of a duct or pipe without revision, or (5) a duct, pipe or other installation that cannot be made without revising the ceiling height or enclosure dimensions. Even if the Drawings or Specifications in-clude dimensions or locations for an item, such shall not be interpreted as license to install it that way nevertheless, for the Contractor has the opportunity and shall thoroughly check the appropriateness of each installation before that installation is made, accounting for all other installations and building condi-tions that can be affected; and he shall consult the Architect for instructions and approval of adjustments that need to be made. Wherever ducts, pipes or electric conduit occur in finished spaces and cannot be otherwise concealed, fur-in with framing and finish material to match finish of adjacent ceiling or wall, as appropriate and to ap-proval of Architect. Electrical and mechanical subcontractors shall advise General Contractor in advance of Bid as to furring and extent of coverage that will be required of the General Contractor for ducts, pipes and/or conduit, whether or not such furring is indicated by the drawings.



Performance Where Drawings and/or Specifications designate a standard of performance, (for examples, fire rating, sound transmission class, insulation value, heating output, air velocity, etc.) the complete installation shall perform at least to designated standard.

Architectural-Engineering Services The Architect-Engineering services will be limited to the services set forth in the Owner-Architect Agree-ment, which may vary from the AIA General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. In general, these services will include and be limited to:

Site observations Review and approval or other action on submittals of shop drawings, product data & samples. Preparation of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives. Certifications of Payments due to Contractor. Determining dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion. The Architect will be available by phone to clarify the intent of Drawings and Specifications. No other requirements of the AIA General Conditions regarding the Architect's services shall obligate the Architect to the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, or to any others for the performance of such services. Asbestos-Free Products These Specifications do not knowingly include any material containing asbestos. Contractor shall not install nor permit to be installed any material containing asbestos.

SITE CONDITIONS General All Subcontractors (including but not limited to General, Mechanical and Electrical) shall be bound by the conditions of the site as indicated (1) by the Drawings, (2) by this Specification, (3) by site and subsurface conditions included under Specification Division 2, and (4) by observations of the site.

Prebid Site Visitation and Documents Review Prior to Bid, Contractor and his subcontractors shall each visit the Project site and review the Drawings and Specifications. They hereby declare (1) their inspections of the site and their review of the Drawings and Specifications has been an adequate investigation and, unless called to the Architect's attention in writing at least 48 hours before Bids are received, (2) they have observed no defect or omission that can affect the Work and (3) they have taken into account in the Bid all items and conditions that can affect the Work under the Contract.

Sign Provide one job sign approximately 4' x 8', one-face panel, showing name of building, Owner, architect, engineer and contractor. Neatly paint and letter sign following layout to be prepared by Architect. Mount panel on wood framework with bottom of panel 3'-0" off ground.



SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1

SECTION 01 1000 – SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Work phases. 3. Work under other contracts. 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Use of premises. 6. Owner’s occupancy requirements. 7. Work restrictions 8. Specification formats and conventions.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 01 5000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner’s facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Advisors Excel – Gage Center Campus Phase 1

1. Project Location: Gage Center Shopping Center; Huntoon & Gage Blvd; Topeka, Kansas

B. Owner: Advisors Excel

1. Owner’s Location: 2950 SW McClure Rd : Topeka, Kansas 66614

C. Architect:

1. Schwerdt Design Group, 2231 SW Wanamaker Rd. Suite 303, Topeka, Kansas 66614 2. Contact: Lauren Fitzpatrick (785) 273-7540, [email protected]

D. Construction Manager:

1. MCP Group, Inc. : 3501 SW Fairlawn Rd #100 : Topeka, Kansas 66614 : 785-273-3880 2. Contractor Project Manager: Pat Tolin

E. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Work includes:

General Information on the Project Site: Project is the first phase to convert the former Gage Center Shopping Center into an Advisors Excel office campus. Phase 1 consists of the general renovation of Building K and Building A which will come out in separate building packages.


SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. The Owner has retained McPherson Contractors, Inc. of Topeka, Kansas to be the Construction Manager at Risk. Bid packages will be directed and organized through their office.

1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products (if any) indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner’s equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections.

1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor.

2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner’s inspection.

4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement.

5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer’s field services and for delivery of manufacturer’s warranties to Contractor.

6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible deliver date for Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.

8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at Project site.

9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.

10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor’s operations, Contractor shall repair or replace the.

11. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.

1.7 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving

premises clear and available to Owner, Owner’s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.


SUMMARY 01 1000 - 3

C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.

1.8 OWNER’S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and buildings during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner’s day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 48 hours’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner’s operations.

B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy.

3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupied portions of building.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial services for occupied portions of building.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during times to not disrupt neighboring properties.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.

C. Nonsmoking Buildings: Smoking is not permitted within the building.

1.10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.


SUMMARY 01 1000 - 4

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use Form 012500a Request for Substitution Form and Form 012500b Contractor’s Statement of Conformance, provided in Project Manual.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.



e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses

and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from

ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.



1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012500

PRE-BID REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM 012500A - 1

PRE-BID REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM

TO: Schwerdt Design Group 2231 SW Wanamaker Rd. Suite 303. Topeka, KS 66614 Lauren Fitzpatrick PROJECT: Advisors Excel – Gage Center Campus

CONTRACTOR’S REQUEST, WITH SUPPORTING DATA

A. Reason for Substitution Request: B. Specifications to which this request applies: __________ __________ __________ Section Page Paragraph Product Data for proposed substitution attached (description of product, reference standards,

performance and test data.) Sample is attached. Sample will be sent if requested by Architect/Engineer. C. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified: ORIGINAL PRODUCT PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION Name, brand: ____________________ ____________________ Catalog No.: ____________________ ____________________ Manufacturer: ____________________ ____________________ Significant Variations: ____________________ ____________________ D. Unit costs of original product and proposed substitution. State whether cost is for material only, material installed, or Life Cycle cost of installed product. E. Proposed change in Contract Sum: Credit to Owner: $_______________ Additional Cost to Owner: $_______________ F. Proposed Change in Contract Time: Reduce Increase by ____ days No change G. Effect of proposed substitution on other parts of the Work, or on other Contracts: ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________


CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE 012500B - 1

CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH FORM 012500A REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION

Email in PDF format to [email protected] I / We have investigated the proposed substitution. I / We 1. believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to the originally specified product, except as stated in Paragraph C of

the Pre-Bid Request for Substitution Form; 2. will provide the same warranty as required in AIA A201 General Conditions 3.5.1; 3. will provide the same special warranty or guaranty as specified; 4. have included all cost data and cost implications of the proposed substitution; 5. will pay redesign and special inspection costs caused by the use of this product; 6. will pay additional costs to other contractors caused by the substitution; 7. will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution in the Work; 8. will modify other parts of the Work as may be needed, to make all parts of the Work complete and functioning; 9. waive future claims for added cost to Contractor caused by the proposed substitution. Contractor: _____________________________ _____________________________ Signature Date _____________________________ _____________________________ Firm Telephone _____________________________ Address _____________________________ City, State Zip

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER’S REVIEW AND ACTION Provide more information in the following categories. Resubmit. _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Sign Contractor’s Statement of Conformance. Resubmit. The proposed substitution is approved with the following conditions: _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ The proposed substitution request is rejected. The following changes will be made by Change Order: Addition to / deduction from the Contract Sum: $ _________________ Addition to / deduction from the Contract Time: _____________ days. Schwerdt Design Group By: Date: _______________ Architect


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600 - 1

SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600 - 2

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.



PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900 - 1

SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.



4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 25th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.



3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 5. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 6. Copies of building permits. 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 8. Initial progress report. 9. Report of preconstruction conference. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 11. Performance and payment bonds.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."



7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-

engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide



names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections,that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.



E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.



5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings.

2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format.

3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.



1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."



a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Lines of communications. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs.



g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of record documents. l. Use of the premises. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Parking availability. u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. First aid. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results.



x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind



schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.



b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Site condition reports. 5. Special reports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.




A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

I. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.


A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including work stages and interim milestones. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.



9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in

proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial

Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date

indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.



3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Building flush-out. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

4. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.



2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for commencement of the Work.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:



1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.



B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling.

1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same

locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 1

SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1.4 SUBMITTAL FORMATS

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Construction Manager. 5. Name of Contractor. 6. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 7. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 8. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section

number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 9. Category and type of submittal. 10. Submittal purpose and description. 11. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for

each of multiple items. 12. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 13. Indication of full or partial submittal. 14. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 15. Other necessary identification. 16. Remarks. 17. Signature of transmitter.



B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect and Construction Manager on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.

D. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.

E. Submittals for Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files, or other format indicated by Project software website.

1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Construction Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp.



1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.



3. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record Sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.

G. Certificates:

1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed



by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.

2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

H. Test and Research Reports:

1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use.

1.7 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.



B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

1.8 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it.

1. Submittals by Web-Based Project Software: Architect will indicate, on Project software website, the appropriate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action.





ELECTRONIC DRAWINGS 013333 - 1

SECTION 013333 – ELECTRONIC DRAWINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Architect-Engineer, if requested, may, at their discretion provide the Contractor with one (1) electronic copy of the Contract Document Drawings for distribution to subcontractors and suppliers. The electronic copy will be provided in AutoCAD 2007.

B. The Architect-Engineer shall be paid a service fee of $200.00 per hour, minimum 1 hour. Electronic files of these sheets will be released upon receipt of payment.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Architect’s AIA Document C106-2007 Digital Licensing Agreement will be required to be executed prior to delivery of drawings





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 1

SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 2.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service Owner will pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Owner will pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each temporary utility.

C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.



D. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

E. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

F. Moisture- and Mold-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage and mold.

G. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste-handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top rails

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

C. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

D. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-Off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.



E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Field Offices, General: Owner will provide conditioned interior space for field offices for duration of Project

C. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of minimum of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Provide 1 unfilled chocolate long john donut for each Architect and Owner per meeting. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL

A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

F. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes and their proper curing or drying.

G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.



1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one land-based telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Construction Manager's home office. g. Engineers' offices. h. Owner's office. i. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:

1. Processor: Intel Core i5 or i7. 2. Memory: 4 gigabyte. 3. Disk Storage: 500 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: 24-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM. 5. Full-size keyboard and mouse. 6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet or Gigabit. 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 8. Productivity Software:

a. Microsoft Office Professional, 2010 or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 11.0 or higher. c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.

9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions capable of printing 11x17 sheets

10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 1.0 Mbps upload and 15 Mbps download speeds at each computer.

11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.

12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 2 terrabyte, with automated backup software providing daily backups.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.



2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated within construction limits indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C. Temporary Use of Planned Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas.

2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving."

3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving."

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."



I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 7300 "Execution."

J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

K. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted unless approved by owner prior to use. See elevator specification for temporary use of new elevators.

L. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect

elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

M. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

N. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

O. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary."

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing."



D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 5639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations or As indicated on Drawings.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday.

I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

1. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.



2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work.

B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified for

installed and stored materials. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective and require replacing.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove and replace materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.



C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."



EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of

locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection a. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related

components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

b. Primary operational systems and equipment. c. Fire separation assemblies. d. Air or smoke barriers. e. Fire-suppression systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Electrical wiring systems.

2. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing

finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels

exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.



3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide

temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked

construction to its original condition.

C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.



H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.



3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for

Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.



J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.



4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. List of Incomplete Items: Submit copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.



B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Contractor shall put together initial Punch list. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling



navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.



l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.

Provide written report on completion of cleaning. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect and Engineer will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Engineer’s comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems

contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.



E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

C. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.



2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:



1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.



2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information

recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit three paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity



is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.



3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video

recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

B. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.



m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson

outline.



B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. 1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table

of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop

filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording. 1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1

SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Samples: For waterstops and vapor retarder.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing compounds.



7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Semirigid joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.



2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows: a. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.



1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.

D. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II, gray. At Contractor’s option, supplement with the following:

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inchnominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.



1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer-modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc. b. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company. c. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. d. Sika Greenstreak.

B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through non-movement and movement joints as applicable. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. BoMetals, Inc. b. Sika Corporation c. Vynylex Waterstop & Accessories

2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb or Ribbed with Tear Web as required for movement joint. 3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick nontapered.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Install vapor retarder complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A, five-ply nylon or polyester-cord reinforced, high density polyethylene sheet; 15 mils thick, directly beneath concrete slabs-on-grade; lap and seal joints. Place vapor retarder over 4” minimum drainage gravel subcourse.

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.


a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems.



b. Bon Tool Co. c. Brickform; a division of Solomon Colors. d. ChemMasters, Inc. e. Dayton Superior. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. g. Kaufman Products, Inc. h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Lambert Corporation. j. Metalcrete Industries. k. Nox-Crete Products Group. l. Sika Corporation. m. SpecChem, LLC. n. TK Products. o. Vexcon Chemicals Inc. p. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

1. UltraCure (single use), by McTech Group. 2. HydraCure TM Covers – M5, by PNA Technologies. 3. Transguard 4000, by Reef Industries.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.


a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc. b. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. c. ChemMasters, Inc. d. Dayton Superior. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. f. Kaufman Products, Inc. g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. h. Lambert Corporation. i. Nox-Crete Products Group. j. Right Pointe. k. SpecChem, LLC. l. TK Products. m. Vexcon Chemicals Inc. n. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.


a. AWRC Corporation. b. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. c. ChemMasters, Inc. d. Dayton Superior.



e. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. f. Kaufman Products, Inc. g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. h. Lambert Corporation. i. Metalcrete Industries. j. Right Pointe. k. SpecChem, LLC. l. TK Products. m. Vexcon Chemicals Inc. n. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 or aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.



B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 15 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

4. Do not use Type F, high range water reducing admixture (or all range admixtures at Type F dosages), in concrete for slabs that receive steel trowel finish.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches

before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture plus or minus 1 inch.

B. Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before

adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: 5.5percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. General Interior Slabs-on-Grade (Reinforced): Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd.. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

D. Suspended Slabs or Slabs on Steel Deck: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd.. 4. Slump Limit:4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.



2.13 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH FILL MATERIAL

A. Concrete fill material shall have a minimum compressive strength of 1200 psi at 28 days, a minimum cement content of 200 pounds per cubic yard, and a unit weight of 120 lbs/cu. yd.

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.



J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods and embed plates, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved[ at least 70 percent of] its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 2. Place vapor retarder over granular fill capillary break.

B. Granular Course: Provide 4 inches minimum granular fill over aggregate subbase in areas with vapor sensitive floor coverings.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.



B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.



3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. General Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

B. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.



F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Interior slabs shall be placed within a water tight enclosed shell structure. The minimum ambient air temperature shall be 55 deg F for slab placements.

3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

4. Do not place slabs on subgrade, or base that is more than 20 deg F cooler than concrete. Warm subgrade, or base to decrease temperature differential to 20 deg F or less.

5. Minimum base surface temperature and ambient building air temperature shall be 55 deg F during placement and maintained through curing period.

6. Minimum concrete temperature as measured at the point of discharge shall be 65 deg F. 7. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.



1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 50; and of levelness, F(L) 40; with minimum

local values of flatness, F(F) 34; and of levelness, F(L) 27; for slabs-on-grade. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; for

suspended slabs and slabs on steel deck.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not

less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psiat 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper

attachment to supported equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.



3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.



3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least [one] [six] month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor



elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.



5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite

sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at

28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.



UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Light weight, concrete masonry units 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Embedded flashing 4. Masonry joint reinforcing 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit

masonry.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

B. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. Weep holes/vents.

D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup

constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units.



a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property

specification. 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with

compressive strength requirement.

G. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

H. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.



1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inchesdown both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,

secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide square-edged finish for outside corners to match face of block, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Weight Classification: Light weight.



2. Size: 8” x 8” x 16” Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions for trash enclosures.

3. Faces to Receive Stone Veneer: Where indicated on drawings. 4. Faces to Receive EIFS Finish: Where indicated on drawings 5. Faces to Receive Paint: Where indicated on drawings 6. Standard pattern: smooth face units where shown on drawings:

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products:

a. Capital Materials Corporation; Masonry Cement. b. National Cement Company, Inc.; Masonry Cement.

E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or

crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the

No. 1 sieve.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products:

a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.

I. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inchdiameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inchdiameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 incheso.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feetwith prefabricated corner and tee units.



2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 incheslong minimum, but not exceeding 12

feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs

at 3-inchintervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. 4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to

receive counterflashing. 5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by

extending flashing 1/2 inchout from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

6. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inchat exterior face of wall and down into joint 3/8 inchto form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

7. Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches into wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water.

8. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

9. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inchesinto wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: (note: install all flashings that may be visible with label side down) 1. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene

terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch thick. a. Products:

1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Firestone Building Products; FlashGuard. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.

C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC.

2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.



2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

D. Wetting of CMU: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.



E. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inchhorizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Set stone and cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear

water. 2. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.



E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to mortar on code approved metal lath with galvanized nails to wall sheathing anchored to wall framing. Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side

of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.

Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete for application of sealant.

3.7 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

5. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inchback from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

8. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.



C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking

down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 4. Space weep holes formed from wicking material 16 inches o.c. 5. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with

loose-fill insulation. 6. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.


A. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.

B. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content.

C. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.

3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape

hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone

Handbook."



3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 04 4200 - 1

SECTION 04 4200 - EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Stone panels mechanically adhered unit masonry


1. Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry" for installing inserts in unit masonry for anchoring stone cladding

2. Section 07 2726 “Fluid-Applied Weather Barriers”

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each stone accessory, and manufactured product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone cladding assembly, including dimensions and profiles of stone units.

1. Show locations and details of joints both within stone cladding assembly and between stone cladding assembly and other construction.

2. Show location and details of anchors.

C. Stone Samples for Verification: Sets for each variety, color, and finish of stone required; not less than 12 inches square.

1. Sets shall consist of at least three Samples, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected and will establish the standard by which stone will be judged.


A. Source quality-control reports.

B. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate stone cladding assemblies similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of typical exterior wall area not less than 15 feet long by 10 feet high.

a. Include typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation.

b. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.

1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.

2. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side up when units are installed.

C. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer's name, product name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

D. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.


A. Protection of Stone Panels: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.



1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry, flashing reglets, and similar items to be used by stone cladding Installer for anchoring, supporting, and flashing of stone cladding assembly. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Time delivery and installation of stone cladding to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to stone cladding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIMESTONE

A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568/C 568M.

1. Classification: II Medium-Density.

B. Varietie: Top Ledge Cottonwood

C. Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone from one of the following fabricators:

a. U.S. Stone Industries b. JT Lardner Cut Stone c. Native Stone Company

D. Finish: Split Face or pitch face

E. Pattern: Alternating rows of 10” and 6” tall dimensional stone

F. Thickness: Not less than 3 inches unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Fabricate anchors and expansion bolts embedded within the stone from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304; temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses. Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.

B. Postinstalled Anchor Bolts for Concrete and Masonry: Chemical anchors, torque-controlled expansion anchors or undercut anchors made from stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group A1 or A4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316, for anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.



C. Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers.

1. For stainless steel, use annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; for bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); and for nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M), Alloy Group 1 (A1).

2. For galvanized-steel shelf angles, use carbon-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; for bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); for nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), Grade A; and for washers, ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M); all hot-dip or mechanically zinc coated.

2.3 STONE ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50 to 70, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.

B. Concealed Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricated from stainless steel in thicknesses indicated, but not less than 0.0156-inch thick, and complying with Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

C. Cellular Plastic Weep Hole/Vents: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, of length required to extend from exterior face of stone to cavity behind, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

D. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, of length required to extend from exterior face of stone to cavity behind, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

E. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, of length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes.

F. Sealants for Joints and Filling Kerfs in Stone Cladding: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" and do not stain stone:

1. Joint Sealant: Urethane/Polyurethane, M, NS, 25, T, NT. 2. Joint-Sealant Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Comply with recommendations of ILI’s “Indiana Limestone Handbook”

B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings.

C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds to fit supports.

D. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors and supports.



E. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.

1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles.

F. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.

G. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following:

1. Thickness: 3 inch plus or minus 1/4 inch.

H. Shape stone for type of masonry (pattern) as follows:

1. Sawed-bed, range ashlar with uniform course heights as indicated on Drawings and with random lengths.

I. Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match mockup.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone masonry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

3.3 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set.

1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.

B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use.

C. Arrange stones in sawed-bed ashlar pattern with uniform course heights, random lengths, and uniform joint widths.

D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance and to match on site mock up.

E. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone



accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

F. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with 3/8 inch joints.

G. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.

1. Sealing joints is specified in Section 07 920 "Joint Sealants."

H. Install concealed flashing at continuous shelf angles, lintels, ledges, and similar obstructions to downward flow of water, to divert water to building exterior. Extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

I. Contractor shall engineer the number and size of anchors, clips, bolts, pins, etc. required.

3.4 SETTING MECHANICALLY ANCHORED STONE CLADDING

A. Set stone cladding with mechanical anchors without mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Attach anchors securely to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1242.

C. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with sealant indicated for filling kerfs.

D. Set stone supported on clips or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths and to prevent point loading of stone on anchors. Hold shims back from face of stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.

3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

B. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.

D. Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the average plane of each stone face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane.

E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/8 inch or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within 60 inches of each other, do not vary more than 1/8 inch or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less from one to the other.

F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.



3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description:

1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

2. Defective joints. 3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups. 4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.

B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: Clean stone cladding no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing, using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 1

SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Anchor bolts and embedment’s. 3. Grout.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.


A. Welding certificates.



B. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.

C. Survey of existing conditions.

D. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD or has an adopted in house quality control program acceptable and approved by the engineer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain

finish.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible-washer type with plain

finish.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain

D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55, See Drawings.

1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish at interior locations: Plain. 6. Finish at exterior locations: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTMA153, Class C.

F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55, See Drawings.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish at interior locations: Plain. 5. Finish at exterior locations: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTMA153, Class C.



G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened. 3. Finish at interior locations: Plain. 4. Finish at exterior locations: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTMA153, Class C.

H. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.

I. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.

J. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer with good, resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning."

F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.



1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”.

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.



B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.



3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or Pretensioned.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."



C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing exceeding height limitations of standard,

nonstructural metal framing.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel shapes, masonry shelf

angles, and connections used with cold-formed metal framing. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for standard, interior non-load-bearing,

metal-stud framing, with height limitations and ceiling-suspension assemblies.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

D. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

E. Evaluation Reports: For nonstandard cold-formed steel framing post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections

greater than the following:

a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height.

b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft.

c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height.

d. Interior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 1-inch.

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following: 1. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 2. Headers: AISI S212. 3. Lateral Design: AISI S213.



C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection or Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60

2.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs, or as required by structural performance.

2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches

C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches



C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. b. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. d. Steel Network, Inc. (The).

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1 inch plus

twice the design gap for other applications.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch b. Flange Width: Dimension equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1

inch.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

2.5 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.



b. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. d. Steel Network, Inc. (The).

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1 inch plus

twice the design gap for other applications.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch b. Flange Width: Dimension equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1

inch.

2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole-reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.7 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts, carbon-steel nuts, and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC193, ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.



1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel framing to structure. 2. Type: Torque-controlled expansion anchor, Torque-controlled adhesive anchor or

adhesive anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy

Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

C. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims.

D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion.



C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

B. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.



F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: 24 inchesminimum, see shop drawings.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks, with gap not exceeding 1/8 inch between the end of wall-framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs according to AISI S200, Section C1. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.

2. Install tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.



I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically 48 inches. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges, and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges; terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to building

structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.


F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.



1. Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.6 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of

punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness

indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.


F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inchesof single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at 96-inch

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.



3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Metal bollards. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not

specified in other Sections.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry.

3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."

1.3 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Metal nosings and treads. 4. Paint products. 5. Grout.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Metal bollards. 4. Loose steel lintels.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.



C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316L.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 or Type 316L.

E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90

coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.

H. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.



2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

H. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.



4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated.

1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated. 2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated. 3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes

at 24 inches o.c.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

2.7 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint

approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.



B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

2.8 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch-thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts.

1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards.

C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard.

D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4-inch steel machine bolt.

E. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.

2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.



2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.



D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions and operable partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.

B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.

C. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard.

D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

E. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of sleeve. Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward internal sleeve.

F. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured.

G. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner furnishes padlocks.



H. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.

3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



METAL LADDERS 05 5133 - 1

SECTION 05 5133 - METAL LADDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes prefabricated fixed metal ladders.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A14.3: Ladders – Fixed – Safety Requirements

B. OSHA 1910.27: Fixed Ladders

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used including installation methods.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied color finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

2.2 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.


METAL LADDERS 05 5133 - 2

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Cotterman Co. or an approved comparable product

a. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. b. Siderails: Continuous, 1/4-by-2-inch-by-2-inch steel angles. c. Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter corrugated steel bars, spaced 12-inches on center.

1) Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

2) Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung. d. Stand-off brackets: 7-inch deep spaced no more than 7-feet apart.

C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2604 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION 1. Coordinate and furnish anchorages including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and

miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.

2. Do not begin installation until substrate has been properly prepared. 3. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

1. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets.

B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.



PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings. 2. Steel pipe and tube handrails attached to walls.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings" for stainless-steel wire-rope guard infill

associated with steel pipe and tube railings.

1.3 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.



1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters, including finish.

2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail,

post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.

a. Show method of connecting and finishing members at intersections.




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

F. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings and Steel Pipe Handrails:


a. HME b. Ernest Spencer c. Others as approved by CM/Arch

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:



1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.


2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.4 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

1. Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe, unless otherwise indicated.



D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063-T832.

E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

3. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

3. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.



J. Form Changes in Direction as Follows: 1. As detailed. 2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

K. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer.

D. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

A. Finish: Factory Mill Finish



1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space



between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post.

C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. a. Where aluminum is to come into contact with concrete, coat with a bituminous

coating to prevent corrosion. Coating should not be able to be seen once installed. 2. For steel pipe railings, weld post to metal supporting surfaces.

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections.

C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between

studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood

backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.



DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 1

SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Stainless-steel wire-rope guard infill associated with pipe and tube railings.


1. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for steel railings with stainless-steel wire-rope guard infill.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.

1.4 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not meet structural performance requirements.





1. Manufacturer's product lines of railing infill guards assembled from standard components.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including mechanical finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.



1. Sections of each distinctly different stainless-steel wire-rope. 2. Each type of wire-rope fitting.


A. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches in length.



A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Stainless-steel wire-rope guard infill:


a. Atlantis Rail Systems. b. Cable Connection (The). c. Feeney Wire Rope & Rigging. d. Fortune Rope and Metal Company, Inc. e. Stainless Cable & Railing. f. VIVA Railings LLC.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and are based on the specific system indicated. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."



1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.


A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.


2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

F. Wire Rope and Fittings:

1. Wire Rope: 1-by-19 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 316. 2. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless steel, and

with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.



2.6 FABRICATION

A. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

D. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.

E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.



3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical joints for permanently connecting railing components.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 1

SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.



D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

B. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.


A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Parapet sheathing. 4. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."



2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201/D3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to ASTM D5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.

2.5 SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: , Exterior, Structural I sheathing.

B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company.

2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. Unless noted otherwise. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.



2.6 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For parapet and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Screws for Fastening Sheathing to Wood Framing: ASTM C 1002.

E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329-inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112-inch thick, use screws that comply with

ASTM C 954.

G. Screws for Fastening Composite Nail Base Insulated Roof Sheathing to Metal Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer.

2.8 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

B. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.



1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wall and parapet sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements.



3. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings.

2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.



ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 4100 - 1

SECTION 06 4100 – ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Construction Document Drawings: Additional specifications are located on the drawings.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Architectural wood cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate-faced countertops. 4. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets 5. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative laminate, cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking.

C. Samples:

1. Shop-applied transparent finish 2. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 3. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 4. PVC edge material.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wood Products:

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 2. Industrial Grade Moisture Resistant Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade

150. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. Moisture Resistant Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 MR-10. 5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

B. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

2.2 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom.

B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets; Typical unless noted otherwise:

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush Overlay. 2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows:

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. c. Edges: Grade HGS.

3. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Color: Black

4. Drawer Boxes: dovetail joints, dado bottom 5. Drawer Backs: ½” solid hardwood or hardwood plywood 6. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood 7. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

C. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Finish (where noted, building A only):

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 2. Wood for Exposed Surfaces:

a. Species: Walnut b. Cut: Rotary sliced c. Matching Veneer Leaves: book match d. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center-balance. e. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers from a single flitch with

doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with a continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain.



1. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Color: Black

2. Drawer Boxes: dovetail joints, dado bottom 3. Drawer Backs: ½” solid hardwood or hardwood plywood 4. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood

D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's

full range. 3. Edge Treatment: PVC edge banding.

2.3 ADJUSTABLE SHELVES – PL1 OPEN SHELF

A. Shelf standards & Bracket:

1. Knape & Vogt; 82/182 Series (or equal) a. Color: Black b. Shelf depth: 14” c. Standard spacing: 24” max d. Install proper blocking behind drywall

B. Shelves:

1. 1 ½” thick laminate shelves

a. Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. c. Edges: Grade HGS.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 120 degrees of opening, self-closing.

1. Grass America Inc.; Model # TIMOS GT310 with insertion machine using 8mm dowels, cabinet member base plate to be Grass model #GT182 applied using 5mm Euro Screws.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: 15/32 brushed nickel.

D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel

ball-bearing slides. 2. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high

and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. 3. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide,

provide Grade 1HD-200. 4. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100. 5. For trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide,

provide Grade 1HD-200.



E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013;metal.

1. Rok Hardware; 5mm L-shaped support, SKU: ROKSPL5NH

a. Finish: Polished nickel

F. Grommets: Hardware Concepts; Model # 6740WH


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

2.7 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural wood cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of cabinets.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Base Cabinet Finish:

a. First Coat: Catalyzed vinyl sealer b. Finish Coat: Precatalyzed lacquer.

3. Countertop and Table Top Finish:

a. First Coat: Catalyzed vinyl sealer b. Finish Coat: Conversion varnish

4. Sheen: As approved by Architect.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

1. Use water resistant particleboard at toilet room vanity, kitchen sinks and any other high moisture area.

B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork.



SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326 - 1

SECTION 07 1326 – SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Self-Adhering modified bituminous sheet waterproofing for use in vertical applications 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels.


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproofing.

D. Special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for waterproofing system from same manufacturer or approved by manufacturer.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET WATERPROOFING FOR VERTICAL APPLICATION

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil-thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace Construction Products; W.R.Grace & Co.; Bituthene 3000 or an approved product with the following physical properties:

a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70

deg F (21 deg C); ASTM D 570. g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water

Method. h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet (60 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385.

2.2 SHEET WATERPROOFING FOR VERTICAL BLIND-SIDE APPLICATION

A. Bonded HDPE Sheet for Vertical Applications: Uniform, flexible, multilayered-composite sheet membrane consisting of either an HDPE film coated with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and protective release liner, total 1.4-mm thickness or an HDPE film coated with a modified asphalt layer and a nonwoven geotextile-fabric final layer, total 73-mil (1.9-mm) thickness.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace Construction Products; W.R.Grace & Co.; Preprufe 160R or an approved product with the following physical properties:

a. Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum; ASTM D 412. b. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970. c. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 903, modified. d. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 1876, modified. e. Puncture Resistance: 100 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water

Method. g. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent maximum; ASTM D 570.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.



B. Primer: Liquid solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.

F. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Detail Tape: Two-sided, pressure-sensitive, self-adhering reinforcing tape, 4-1/2 inches wide, with a tack-free protective adhesive coating on one side and release film on self-adhering side.

G. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers.

2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace Construction Products; W.R.Grace & Co.; Hydroduct 220 and Hydroduct Coil 600 or an approved product.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

3. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, and sound; and ready to receive adhesive-coated HDPE sheet.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.



C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Membranes are not intended to function as the primary joint seal. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

F. Pre-strip all slab and wall cracks over 1/16-inch and all construction and control joints with 9-inch wide sheet membrane strip.

G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.

H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.

3.3 VERTICAL APPLICATION

A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

D. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

E. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic.

F. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

H. Install molded-sheet drainage panels with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately.

I. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

3.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.



1. Install perimeter drainage at base of foundation walls. 2. Tie into full wall coverage drainage composite system in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 1

SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 5423 “Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing” for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.

2. Section 09 2900 “Gypsum Board” for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product test reports.

C. Research/evaluation reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2, rigid, cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation. Foam-plastic core and facings shall have a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested individually.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Hunter Panels. d. Rmax, Inc.

2. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.



2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Knauf Insulation. 4. Owens Corning.

2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS

A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced : ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC). b. Roxul Inc. c. Thermafiber Inc.; an Owens Corning company.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 2113 "Brick Masonry."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation and as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Use mineral wool insulation where required for fire rating.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION

A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction according to curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within framing, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching metal wall panels.

2. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated on Drawings. 3. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072413 - 1

SECTION 072413 - POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over cement board sheathing.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Class PB EIFS: A non-load-bearing, exterior wall cladding system that consists of an insulation board attached adhesively, mechanically, or both to the substrate; an integrally reinforced base coat; and a textured protective finish coat.


A. EIFS Performance: Comply with the following:

1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.

2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into EIFS and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.

B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that comply with the following:

1. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch-thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch-thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A.

2. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.

3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other characteristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000 hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 154.

4. Freeze-Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination, or indications of delamination between components when viewed under 5 times magnification after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.

5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass substrate, cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.

6. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested per EIMA 101.03.

7. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch-thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch-thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the



base coat to expanded-polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.of air pressure difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02.

8. Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1-inch-thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch-thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247.

9. Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: Resist wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219. 10. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch-thick EIFS when constructed,

conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following: a. Medium Impact Resistance: 50 to 89 inch-lb.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated.


A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products.

B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes.

1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating

materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.


A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg Ffor a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions required for prefabricated panels by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Pleko LLC. 3. Senergy; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 4. Sto Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.

B. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation.

C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.

D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use, compatible with substrate, and complying with one of the following:

1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, and polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat.

2. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers specified for base coat.

3. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

E. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following:

1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.

2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches and in thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inchesthick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.

4. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per ASTM E 2098; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following:

1. Intermediate-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 10 oz./sq. yd. 2. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd.



3. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 4. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.

G. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the following:

1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use with portland cement.

2. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.

3. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert fillers to which only water is added at Project site.

4. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and inert fillers that is ready to use without adding other materials.

H. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard waterproof formulation complying with one of the following:

1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use with portland cement.

2. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.

I. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.

J. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's complying with the following:

1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers.

2. Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

K. Water: Potable.

L. Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated below; selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated; capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board; and of the following description:

1. For attachment, provide manufacturer's standard fasteners suitable for substrate.

M. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in



ASTM C 1481 and with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below:

1. Multicomponent, nonsag urethane sealant.

B. Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealant compatible with adjacent materials and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

C. Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 MIXING

A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS.

B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.


1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work.

B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind EIFS and deterioration of substrates.

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

1. Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.



3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and in ASTM C 1481.

1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. 2. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and EIFS

manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. 4. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent

sealant from adhering to back of joint. 5. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape

immediately after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal. 6. Recess sealant sufficiently from surface of EIFS so an additional sealant application,

including cylindrical sealant backing, can be installed without protruding beyond EIFS surface.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings.



FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIERS 07 2726 - 1

SECTION 07 2726 - FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-permeable membrane weather barriers.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-penetration

treatments.




A. Product certificates. B. Product test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary weather-barrier materials and weather-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply weather barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by weather-barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect weather-barrier performance. 2. Do not apply weather barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials-only warranty in which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for weather barrier that does not meet specified water and air hold-out criteria. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Weather Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane. 1. Synthetic Polymer Membrane:



a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DuPont Building Innovations; Tyvek Fluid Applied WB System or an approved comparable product by one of the following: 1) BASF Wall Systems 2) Dow Corning Corp. 3) Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.

B. Physical and Performance Characteristics.

1. Air Penetration Resistance (Material): a. 0.0002 cfm/sq. ft. at 75 PA, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. b. Air infiltration greater than 10,000 seconds per 100cc, when tested in accordance

with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 2. Air Penetration Resistance (System/Assembly):

a. Less than or equal to 0.01 cfm/sq. ft. at 75 PA, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2357.

3. Water Vapor Transmission: 25 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B at 25 mils DFT

4. Water Penetration Resistance: Greater than 1000cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. No leakage at 15 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.

5. Tensile Strength: Minimum 169 lbs/sq. in, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412. 6. Estimated Elongation: 420% in accordance with ASTM D 412. 7. Hardness: Passes at a Shore A hardness of 71, when tested in accordance with ASTM D

2240. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

a. Flame Spread: 25 b. Smoke Developed: 25

9. HUV Resistance: 9 months. 10. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): Less than 2% when measured in accordance with ASTM

C 1250. 11. Low Temperature Crack Bridging: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1305.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. General: Accessory materials recommended by weather-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete weather-barrier assembly and compatible with primary weather-barrier material.

B. Primer: Liquid solvent-borne primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing recommended for substrate by weather-barrier material manufacturer.

C. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's recommended glass-fiber-mesh tape.

D. Flashing for use around openings in walls and joints between different building materials: Manufacturer’s recommended fluid-applied elastomeric flashing material and flexible flashing with butyl adhesive layer. 1. Sheet flashing shall be used at transitions between wall material, building corners, and

over gaps in sheathing up to 1-inch wide.

E. Sealant: Weather-barrier manufacturer's elastomeric permeable sealant; compatible with weather barrier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete surface preparation, priming, flashing and detailing of openings, cracks, and material transitions prior to beginning installation of fluid-applied weather barrier system.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT

A. General: Install fluid-applied membrane and accessory materials according to weather-barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier.

B. Sheathing Joints: 1. No joint treatment is required for joints up to 1/16-inch 2. Joints 1/16” to 1/4": Cover with fluid-applied joint compound and trowel smooth 3. Joints 1/4” to 1/2": Apply joint tape to bridge both sides of joint equally. Cover with fluid-

applied joint compound and trowel smooth. 4. Joints 1/2" to 1-inch: Apply sheet flashing primer above and below joint. Center sheet

flashing over joint and press into place per manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Wall Openings: 1. Jambs and Heads: Install fluid-applied elastomeric flashing at openings for full depth of

opening and 2-inches onto the outside face of opening. 2. Sills: Apply primer to substrate. Apply flashing so that a minimum of 2 inches of coverage

is achieved over each substrate.

D. Allow fluid-applied flashing, joint compound and sealant to cure for a minimum of 24 hours before coating with weather barrier.

3.4 FLUID WEATHER-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. General: Apply fluid weather-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous weather barrier according to weather-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply fluid weather-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

B. Install fluid-applied weather barrier prior to installation of windows, doors and louvers.

C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

D. Install weather barrier by power-rolling method in a single coat to achieve a consistent and uniform dry film thickness of 25 mil, or as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.



METAL WALL & SOFFIT PANELS 07 4213 - 1

SECTION 07 4213 - METAL WALL & SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum composite material wall and soffit panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DBVR: Drained and back-ventilated rainscreen system; rainscreen system designed to drain and dry cavity entering water through drainage channels, weeps, and air ventilation.

B. MCM: Metal composite material; cladding material formed by joining two thin metal skins to polyethylene or fire-retardant core and bonded under precise temperature, pressure, and tension.

C. PER: Pressure equalized rainscreen system; rainscreen system designed for no water intrusion with equal pressure between interior system cavity and outside cladding barrier.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, MCM panel Fabricator and

Installer, MCM sheet manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects MCM panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to MCM panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect MCM panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for MCM panel assembly during and after installation.

8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.



B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.



C. Samples: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated.


A. Product test reports.

B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.


A. Maintenance data.




A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warranty on Panel Material: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace MCM that fails within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace MCM panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses indicated on the Drawings, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

E. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Metal composite material wall panel system passes NFPA 285 testing.

2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

A. Metal Composite Material Wall and Soffit Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, MCM wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment assembly components, and accessories required for weathertight system. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 3A

Composites USA Inc.; ALUCOBOND® PLUS or comparable product by one of the following: a. Arconic Architectural Products (USA). b. Mitsubishi Chemical Composites.

B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels (ACM-1): Formed with 0.020-inch-thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings. 1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch. 2. Core: Fire retardant. 3. Exterior Finish: PVDF fluoropolymer with coats and thicknesses that comply with MCM

panel manufacturer's performance and warranty requirements. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of Colorweld 500XL,

Series Three, Premium 3-coat Metallic Finish. 4. Peel Strength: 22.5 in-lb/in. when tested for bond integrity in accordance with

ASTM D1781. 5. Fire Performance: Flame spread less than 25 and smoke developed less than 450, in

accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall and Soffit Panels (ACM-2 & ACM-3): Formed with 0.020-inch-thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings. 1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch. 2. Core: Fire retardant. 3. Exterior Finish: PVDF fluoropolymer with coats and thicknesses that comply with MCM

panel manufacturer's performance and warranty requirements.



a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of Colorweld 500, Series Two, Premium Mica Finish.

b. ACM-2 and ACM-3 will each be a different color. 4. Peel Strength: 22.5 in-lb/in. when tested for bond integrity in accordance with

ASTM D1781. 5. Fire Performance: Flame spread less than 25 and smoke developed less than 450, in

accordance with ASTM E84.

D. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from material compatible with panel facing.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal composite material panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural

panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or

backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite material panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels. 1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material

joinery, and panel-system joint seals.

B. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements specified. 1. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite

material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket system.

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly

including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true to

line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance.



2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.



THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 1

SECTION 07 5423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and

counterflashings. 3. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.



2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing, fastening

spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing. 4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.

E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf

life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.




A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, roofing accessories, and other components of roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. FM Global Listing: Roofing, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FM Global 4450 or FM Global 4470 as part of a built-up roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Global's "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90

D. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): Three-year-aged SRI not less than 64 or initial SRI not less than 82 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

E. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.

2.2 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Firestone Building Products Company; UltraPly Membrane or an approved comparable product by one of the following:



a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. GAF Materials Corporation. c. GenFlex Roofing Systems. d. Johns Manville. e. Versico Incorporated.

2. Thickness for Field Material: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Tan.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.

C. Roof System:

1. Vapor Barrier: Adhere to metal deck with manufacturers recommended foam adhesive 2. Polyisocyanurate Insulation 3. Cover Board: Glass-mat, water resistant gypsum sheathing 4. Roof Field: Adhered 60 mil TPO membrane

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L. f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. g. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.

E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.



2.4 VAPOR RETARDER

A. General: Provide vapor retarder membrane manufactured or approved by TPO roofing manufacturer.

B. Modified Bituminous Sheet: 30 mils thick, minimum, self-adhering sheet consisting of SBS modified bitumen adhesive, factory laminated to a polyethylene top surface.

C. Physical Properties

1. Tensile Strength Minimum: 64 psi; ASTM D 5147 2. Ultimate Elongation Minimum: 52 percent; ASTM D 5147 3. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.017 perm; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method. 4. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Global approved for vapor-retarder

application.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

1. Provide thickness to obtain R-value as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with roofing.

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive. 2. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive. 3. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.

C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensDeck Prime or an approved comparable product by one of the following:

a. Certain Teed Corporation b. Temple-Inland, Inc. c. USG Corporation

2.7 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install self-adhering-sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Seal laps by rolling.

B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system.

3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.



F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of foam insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.

1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.6 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.

E. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

G. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.



E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.

3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for materials and installation of

sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. 3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof

hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project.



4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 8. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable. 9. Include details of special conditions. 10. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 11. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof edge and eave, including fascia, fascia trim and apron flashing, approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories.



2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.




2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.


a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products). c. Owens Corning. d. Polyguard Products, Inc.



2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or

lower.

C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) and Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet:

Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.



1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

I. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

J. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof Edge Flashing and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long sections.

1. Joint Style: Overlapped, 4 inches wide. 2. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. b. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. c. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:



1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:


D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:


E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.




3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

D. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.



D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant unless otherwise indicated.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.




A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 7200 - 1

SECTION 07 7200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof hatch.


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.



A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied color and finish required and for each type of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.


A. Sample warranties.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.



B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

C. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 (AZM150) coated.

D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and mill finish.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

D. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

1. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

E. Sealants: As recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated.

2.3 ROOF HATCHES

A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company. b. Bilco Company (The). c. J. L. Industries, Inc. d. Nystrom, Inc. e. O'Keeffe's Inc. f. Precision Ladders, LLC

2. Type: Thermally broken; Basis of Design: Bilco, Type F-50TB 3. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal

loads. 4. Size: 4’x4’ 5. Curb and Lid Material: Manufacturer’s standard thickness for hatch size indicated. 6. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate; min. R-value = 20 7. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as

outer metal lid. 8. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as

metal curb. 9. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches above the roof insulation, unless

otherwise indicated. 10. Springs: Greased heavy-duty compression spring tubes 11. Hardware:

a. Type 316 Stainless steel latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.




A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating

where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly

on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance.

D. Roof-Hatch Installation: 1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level. 2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating

mechanism and hardware.

E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.

3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 1

SECTION 07 8413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgements: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.


a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. Specified Technologies, Inc. e. Tremco, Inc.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls fire-barrier walls smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

4. W-Rating: Provide penertration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.



1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

B. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.



JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 1

SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints in smoke barriers.





B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified

testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.


A. Product test reports.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide

rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing

agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."



2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Tremco, Inc.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed.

C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Tremco, Inc.

2. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. of joint at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

D. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove

combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

D. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to

achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.



3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of

Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.



JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1

SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 2. Interior/Exterior joints in horizontal traffic and nontraffic surfaces.

B. Related Sections include the following 1. Division 7 Sections for sealing joints in metal panels and flashing 2. Division 8 Section for glazing sealants 3. Division 9 Section for sealing joints in ceramic tile


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.

B. Product certificates.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.

B. Products Selection: Select proposed sealant systems appropriate for joints to be sealed. Submit in accordance with product substitution procedures.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786 b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700 c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.

2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270. c. Sika Corp., Sikaflex – 2c NS d. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.7 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1085.

1. Available Products: a. Bostik Findley; Bostik 300. b. Fuller, H. B. Company; SC-0296. c. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. d. Tremco; Tremco Butyl Sealant.

2.8 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or



harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.



C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1

SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hollow-metal doors and frames.


1. Section 08 1416 “Flush Wood Doors” for wood doors in hollow metal frames. 2. Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware" for hardware in hollow-metal and wood doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. General Contractor shall coordinate and provide rough-in for electric strike and card reader in locations indicated in the Drawings.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.



C. Samples for Verification:

1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches.

D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.



1. Physical Performance: Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.

C. Interior Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8

1. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet.

a. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. b. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. c. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet. d. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. e. Face Dimension: 1 1/4-inch

2. Exposed Finish: Factory Prime.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.4 EXTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb core.

a. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick, end closures or

channels of same material as face sheets.

C. Exterior Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8

1. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet.

a. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. b. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. c. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet. d. Face Dimension: 1 1/4-inch

D. Exposed Finish: Factory primed.

E. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.



2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.



2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.

3. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 4. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 5. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as

face sheets. 6. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of

same material as face sheets. 7. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 8. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.



3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

STEEL FINISHES

G. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between

frames and masonry with grout. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation.

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.



d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1

SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 1113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” 2. Section 08 7100 “Door Hardware” 3. Section 08 8000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.




A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges

representing actual materials to be used. a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.

2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a member in good standing of the Window and Door Manufacturers Association.

B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.



C. Product Performance: Provide documents showing compliance to the following WDMA attributes, validating the specified WDMA Performance Duty Level: 1. Adhesive Bonding Durability: WDMA TM-6 2. Cycle Slam: WDMA TM-7 3. Hinge Loading: WDMA TM-8 4. Screw Holding: WDMA TM-10

a. Door Face b. Vertical Door Edge c. Horizontal Door Edge (applies when hardware is attached)


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or

replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 6. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 7. VT Industries Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."



B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extra Heavy Duty: Public toilets, janitor's closets, assembly spaces, and exits. 3. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets) and private toilets.

D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,

provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

3. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

4. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

F. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no urea-

formaldehyde]. 2. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of

particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

G. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.

H. Mineral-Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality

standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved

for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR FIELD-APPLIED TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 1. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Clear White Birch with no sapwood

visible; Rotary Cut. 2. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Book match. 3. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions. 4. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A.



5. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber. 6. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive

planed before veneering. 7. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape. 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal

glazing clips approved for such use.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment

before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for

pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,

and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

B. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 1

SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.

C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Access Panel Solutions Inc. 2. Audor Products, Inc. 3. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 4. Bauco Access Panel Solutions Inc. 5. Karp Associates, Inc. 6. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

B. Recessed Access Doors: Fabricated from steel sheet in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum board infill. 1. Locations: Wall surfaces. 2. Door: 0.080 aluminum extrusion with drywall inserted into door panel. 3. Frame: 0.080 aluminum extrusion recessed to provide metal with drywall bead flange. 4. Hinges: Spring loaded hinge to allow 90 degree opening of door panel or for removal

from frame. 5. Hardware: Concealed touch latch. 6. Finish: Mill finish with gypsum board ready to be finished to match adjacent surface.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and


ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 2

durability properties of Alloy 5005-H15; with minimum sheet thickness according to ANSI H35.2 (ANSI H35.2M).

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. 1. For recessed doors with gypsum board infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath

attached to door panel.

C. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish

plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.

D. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES 08 4213 - 1

SECTION 08 4213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum-framed interior storefront systems. 2. Aluminum-framed exterior storefront systems. 3. Aluminum-framed exterior manual-swing entrance doors for installation in aluminum-

framed exterior storefront systems. 4. Aluminum-framed interior sliding mall front doors for installation in aluminum-framed

interior storefront systems.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 8000 “Glazing”





B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.


A. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-

framed entrance.

B. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.




A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances to include in maintenance manuals.



B. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

B. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.



C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested

according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,

anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

2.2 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. Manko 4. United States Aluminum. 5. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Exterior-thermally improved; Interior-Nonthermal. 2. Glazing Plane:

a. Exterior: Front Set b. Interior: Center Set

3. Size: 2” x 4 ½” 4. Finish: Exterior-Clear anodic; Interior-Color anodic finish (Black). 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

E. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.



2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EFCO Corporation; Series D318 Durastile Heavy Duty Entrance or an approved comparable product by one of the following: 1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 2. Manko 3. United States Aluminum. 4. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance from single manufacturer.

C. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 2-inchoverall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch-thick, extruded-

aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3 1/2-inch 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."

2.5 SLIDING MALL FRONT DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Series 1010 Sliding Mall Front or an approved comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Manko 3. United States Aluminum. 4. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance from single manufacturer.

C. Sliding Mall Front Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors for manual-sliding operation. 1. Door Construction: 1 3/8-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.070-inch-thick, extruded-

aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.6 SLIDING MALL FRONT DOOR HARDWARE

A. Sliding Mall Front Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."

2.7 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 8000 "Glazing."



B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-milthickness per coat.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable

strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

E. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.



2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. (Exterior Storefront Frames and Doors)

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Black. (Interior Storefront Frames and Doors)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.




A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inchwide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inchwide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.

3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.



GLAZING 08 8000 - 1

SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Glass for windows, doors and storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage or practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage or practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage or practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities


GLAZING 08 8000 - 2

having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,

according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically

or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.

c. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 3

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite 6.0 mm thick and a nominal 1/2-inch-wide interspace. 3. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for

the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass).


GLAZING 08 8000 - 4

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

D. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Condition B, Quality-Q3.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seals. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction in color as selected by

Architect.

2.5 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral or ionoplastic interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications.

1. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:

a. Available Products:

1) Tremco; Spectrem 2 2) Pecora Corporation; Pecora 895 3) Dow Corning; 795


GLAZING 08 8000 - 5

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates

indicated, O. f. Applications: Non-structural glazing applications including cap, toe and heel beads

in wet glazing system.

2.8 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.



GLAZING 08 8000 - 6

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving

sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

8. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 9. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as

specified.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

2. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

3. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. 4. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting

dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

5. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 7

2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged by natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

3.8 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE:

A. Glass Type [GL-3]: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4-inch. 2. At locations where safety glazing required.

B. Glass Type [GL-4]: Clear heat strengthened float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4-inch. 2. At locations where safety glazing required.

3.9 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE:

A. Glass Type [GL-1]: Low-E-coated, clear, insulating glass. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc.; Solarban 60 (2) + Clear 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25mm). 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: PPG Industries, Inc.; clear, heat-strengthened float glass. 5. Low-E Coating: PPG Industries Inc.; Solarban 60 on second surface. 6. Interspace Content: Air. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. 8. Spacer Color: Black


GLAZING 08 8000 - 8

B. Glass Type [GL-2]: Low-E-coated, clear, fully tempered, insulating glass. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc.; Solarban 70XL (2) + Clear 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25mm). 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 5. Low-E Coating: PPG Industries Inc.; Solarban 70XL on second surface. 6. Interspace Content: Air. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 maximum 10. Visible Light Transmittance: 64 percent minimum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 maximum 12. Spacer Color: Black 13. Safety glazing required.

C. Glass Type [GL-5]: Low-E-coated, clear, insulating spandrel glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc.; Solarban 70XL (2) +Clear 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25mm). 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 5. Low-E Coating: PPG Industries Inc.; Solarban 70XL on second surface. 6. Interspace Content: Air. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 maximum 10. Visible Light Transmittance: 64 percent minimum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 maximum 12. Spacer Color: Black



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 1

SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.


1. Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing wall framing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required to meet limiting height criteria as “composite assembly” or as indicated on the Drawings.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.



2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge .

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Depth: 7/8 inch.

G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor or postinstalled, expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):



1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.



B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.



3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 1

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels in non-shower wet areas. 3. Texture finishes. 4. Sound attenuation blankets.


1. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.



B. Samples:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.

2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. Temple-Inland. g. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M gypsum board, tested according to ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 3. Indentation: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 4. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 5. Long Edges: Tapered. 6. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.



2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.



D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Available Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for roller application.

1. Texture: Light spatter (Orange Peel) unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.



1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Architect for visual effect.

I. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Abuse/Impact-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum,



from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install where indicated with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape or adjacent to aluminum reveals.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. Apply single joint compound specified for embedding coat.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. Apply joint compound specified for first coat in addition to embedding coat.

3. Level 3: Where indicated on the drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view that are to receive flat paint, light

texture or lightweight wall covering. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.



F. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123 - 1

SECTION 09 5123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. 2. Concealed suspension systems.


1. Section 09 8436 "Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Units”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NRC: Noise reduction coefficient. B. SAA: Sound absorption average.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For ceiling systems, adhesives and sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6-inches-in size.

D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Tile: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Concealed Suspension-System Members: 6-inch-long Sample of each type. 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type and color.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:



1. Ceiling suspension-system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed

component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before

beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical tile ceilings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

D. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING “ACT-1”

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturer’s of products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Certainteed 3. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG: Millennia ClimaPlus.

C. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III; Form 1, Pattern E,G.

D. Color: White. E. LR – ((Light Reflectance) Not less than 0.84. F. NRC - (Noise Reduction Coefficient) : Not less than 0.70 G. Edge/Joint Type

a. Edge/Joint Detail: Tegular (SLT) H. Thickness: 3/4 inch I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches J. Fire Rating: Class A



2.4 ACOUSTICAL TILES <ACT2>

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide.; MATCH EXISTING CLINIC SPACE

2.5 ACOUSTICAL TILES <ACT3, ACT4, ACT5>

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG Interiors, Inc.; Halcyon Canopies or an approved comparable product by one of the following:

1. CertainTeed, a Division of Saint-Gobain 2. Rockfon (ROXUL, Inc.) 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc 4. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Classification: Provide tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type XII; Form 2 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured).

C. Color: ACT-3: White; ACT-4: Custom Color; ACT-5: Standard color

D. LR: Not less than 0.90.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.95.

F. Edge/Joint Detail: Standard finished Canopies edge, finished to match face

G. Thickness: 1 inch.

H. Modular Size:

1. ACT1: Item No. 99140: 3’-10” x 3’-10” 2. ACT2: Item No. 99140: 3’-10” x 3’-10” 3. ACT3: Item No. 99140: 3’-10” x 3’-10”

2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.

C. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

D. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces.



E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical tiles in-place.

2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM <ACT-1 & ACT-2>

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude ML 15/16” or an approved comparable product by one of the following:

1. CertainTeed, a Division of Saint-Gobain 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation 3. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Direct-Hung, Double-Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G30 (Z90) coating designation.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. Color: White 3. Access: Upward, with initial access openings of size indicated below and located

throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles.

2.8 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Available Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.



D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.

1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile.

2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.

3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no tiles have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.

1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension.

2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

B. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 1

SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient stair accessories. 3. Resilient molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.



C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 3. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company 4. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. 5. Roppe Corporation, USA.

2.2 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

B. Style: Standard Toe

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed if available.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed if available.

H. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. Stair Treads: ASTM F 2169.

1. Type: TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Class: 2 (pattern; embossed, grooved, or ribbed). 3. Thickness: 5/32” and tapered to 5/64” nominal; Light Duty 4. Nosing Style: Square. 5. Nosing Height: 2 inches 6. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.

C. Separate Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.

1. Style: Toeless, by length matching treads. 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard.



D. Intermediate Landing Tile: Matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.

E. Locations: Provide stair accessories in areas indicated on the Finish Schedule.

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.4 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company; Slim Line Series vinyl transition strips or an approved comparable product.

B. Locations: As indicated on the Drawings

1. Carpet to Concrete 2. Carpet to Resilient Flooring 3. Resilient Flooring to Concrete

C. Colors and Profile: As selected by Architect from full range.

2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 7 or more than 10 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:



1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Stair Accessories:

1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint

between units.

C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Remove protective coatings from resilient treads. 3. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 4. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Sealer/Finish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.



PAINTING 09 9100 - 1

SECTION 09 9100 – PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Gypsum board – ceilings and walls 2. Hollow metal doors and frames. 3. Concrete – Traffic surfaces 4. Concrete - Non-Traffic surfaces 5. Concrete masonry units (CMU) 6. Exposed interior ferrous and galvanized metal.


A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include primers.

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each mate-rial and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each ma-terial by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material pro-posed for use.

B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:



1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore) b. Devoe c. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG) d. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W)

D. Colors: As indicated in the Material Color Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent 2. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or



impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrate of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer’s written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Ferrous Metals: Power tool clean per SSPC-SP3 to remove all loose mill scale, rust, paint

and other detrimental foreign matter. 3. Galvanized Surfaces: Solvent clean per SSPC-SP1 to remove grease and oil. If any

oxidation (white rust) has formed, sand and remove all forms of contamination. If the galvanized has been passivated or stabilized, the surface must be abraded per SSPC-SP7 or chemically treat the surface.

D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Paint visible electrical and mechanical components that are not concealed from view to

match adjacent surface. 3. Paint access panels, registers, ducts, exposed piping, exposed insulated pipes, electrical

conduits, surface raceways, electrical boxes and all other electrical and mechanical components unless the Architect rules the existing finish satisfactory.

4. Mechanical and electrical components with finishes of brass, copper, or stainless steel are not to be painted.

5. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detri-mental to formation of a durable paint film.

6. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 7. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,

convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.



8. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed sur-faces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

9. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

10. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match ex-isting unless otherwise indicated.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or other-

wise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent sur-face deterioration.

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of applica-tion method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recom-mended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional

coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thick-ness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appro-priate size for the surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended

spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by

the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other de-fects due to insufficient sealing.

G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,

opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holi-days, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be ac-ceptable.

H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,

or repaint work not complying with requirements.




A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.

B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainted.

3.5 SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Satin, Latex System on walls: Two coats over a primer. a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, alkyd- or latex-based, interior primer, as recommended

by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

1) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216. 2) PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Sealer Quick-Drying 3) S-W: PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer B28W200.

b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Moore: Moorcraft SuperSpec Latex Pearl. 2) PPG: 82 Series Manor Hall Interior Paint, Primer & Stain Repellent. 3) SW: ProMar 200 Latex Low-Sheen ES Enamel B20W1200 Series.

B. Exterior and Interior Hollow Metal doors and Frames:

1. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel System: Two finish coats over a factory primed substrate. a. Primer: None required. All hollow metal doors and frames shall be shop primed. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading

rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils.

1) Moore: Kel-Cote Int. Alkyd Int. Wall & Trim Enamel 2) Devoe: Velour Semi-Gloss Interior Alkyd Enamel DR26 3) S-W: Direct-To-Metal Enamel B55 Series.

C. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:

1. Sealed Concrete. Apply over steel troweled finish smooth concrete slab. a. Primer: None required. Prepare substrate per manufacturers recommendations. b. First and Second Coats: Waterborne, one-component, high-gloss finish, acrylic

sealer applied at a spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1) ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX CG Concrete Guard high-

performance, high solids acrylic concrete sealer. 2) ZEP Manufacturing Company: ZEPTONE SEALER 1996 Interior Non-

Resilient Floor Sealer

D. Concrete Substrates, Non-Traffic Surfaces:

1. Satin, Latex System on board-formed concrete walls: Two coats over a primer. a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, alkyd- or latex-based, interior primer, as recommended

by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.1 mils.

1) Moore: SuperSpec Masonry Acrylic Latex Satin-Fil 172. 2) PPG: Cementitious Waterproofing Block Filler 95-217 3) S-W: Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer A24W8300.



b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Moore: Moorcraft SuperSpec Latex Pearl. 2) PPG: 82 Series Manor Hall Interior Paint, Primer & Stain Repellent. 3) SW: ProMar 200 Latex Low-Sheen ES Enamel B20W1200 Series.

E. Interior Steel Substrates:

1. Eggshell Latex Dry-Fall System over exposed metal deck, ductwork and electrical conduit.

a. Primer: None required. b. Top Coat: Flat, acrylic-latex that falls dry in ten feet, applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

1) Moore: 153 Sweep-Up Spray Latex Flat 2) PPG: Speedhide SuperTech WB Interior Dry-Fog Flat Latex 3) S-W: Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall B42W2

2. Semigloss Alkyd System on interior ferrous metal (guardrails): Two finish coats over shop primed steel.

a. Primer: Spot prime as recommended by finish coat manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

1) Moore: Super Spec HP Universal Alkyd Metal Primer P07 2) PPG: Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel 90-712 Series 3) S-W: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer

b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, alkyd interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.3 mils.

1) Moore: Super Spec HP DTM Alkyd Semi-Gloss P24 2) Devoe: Devguard 4306 Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel 3) S-W: Direct-To-Metal Enamel B55 Series

F. Exterior Steel Substrates:

1. Semigloss Alkyd System on exterior ferrous metal (guardrails): Two finish coats over shop primed steel.

a. Primer: Spot prime as recommended by finish coat manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

1) Moore: Super Spec HP Universal Alkyd Metal Primer P07 2) PPG: Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel 90-712 Series 3) S-W: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer

b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, alkyd interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.3 mils.

1) Moore: Super Spec HP DTM Alkyd Semi-Gloss P24 2) Devoe: Devguard 4306 Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel 3) S-W: Direct-To-Metal Enamel B55 Series



VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 1

SECTION 10 1100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Glass markerboards.



B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints.

C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display units by field measurements before fabrication.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Glassboard Warranty Period: 10 years from date of purchase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GLASS MARKERBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Clarus Glassboards. 2. S.A. Bendheim, LTD. 3. Koroseal Interior Products, LLC.


VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 2

B. Glass Markerboards: 6-mm tempered glass markerboard, with smooth polished edge and eased corners; color coated on back surface. 1. Size: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Color: White.

C. Support Rails: Horizontal, wall-mounted, extruded-aluminum float bracket designed to receive hanger clip at top and bottom of glass marker boards. 1. Finish: Clear anodic.

D. Hanger Clips: Extruded aluminum with finish to match rails; designed to support independent visual display board assemblies by engaging support rail and top trim of board.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality Q3, with exposed edges seamed before tempering.

B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, brackets, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls.



TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2113 - 1

SECTION 10 2113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.


1. Section 10 2800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars and locations of

blocking for surface-mounted toilet accessories. 4. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 5. Show locations of floor drains.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory.

F. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.




A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: One door bumper(s) with associated fasteners. 4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners. 5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 PAINTED STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 3. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 4. Santana Products, Inc. 5. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor and ceiling anchored.

C. Entrance-Screen Style: Floor and ceiling anchored.

D. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung, Flat Panel.

E. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Provide with no-sightline system. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.



1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for pilasters.

2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units of size and material adequate for panel to withstand applied downward load on grab bar of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446, without deformation of panel.

3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

F. Urinal-Screen Construction:

1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction. 2. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral full-

height flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick.

G. Facing Sheets and Closures: hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with nominal base-metal (uncoated) thicknesses as follows:

1. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036 inch (0.91 mm).

2. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.048 inch (1.21 mm).

3. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) [0.036 inch (0.91 mm)].

4. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). 5. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels. 6. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not

less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).

H. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold

doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. a. Latch shall have visible color coded indicator indicating “occupied” or not that is

automatically changed when the door is latched. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized

to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.



C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel anchors compatible with related materials.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

B. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

C. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories and solid blocking within panel where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height

brackets.



a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in closed position.

C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800 - 1

SECTION 10 2800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Underlavatory guards. 4. Custodial accessories.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 8300 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating.

D. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

G. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2 ACCESSORIES GENERAL

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or an approved comparable product by one of the following:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation.



2.3 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Semi-recessed Roll Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle:

1. Product: American Specialties, Inc.; Model No. 04692-6 2. Description: Semi-recessed roll manual paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Semi-recessed 4. Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 800 linear feet, towel 8” diameter x8” wide 5. Operation: Manual 6. Waste Receptacle Operation: Swing out access door with concealed full length piano

hinge, held closed with keyed tumbler lock. 7. Capacity: 18 gallons 8. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 9. Quantity: One per restroom

B. Semi-recessed manual Roll Paper Towel Dispenser:

1. Product: American Specialties, Inc.; Model No. 04523-6 2. Description: Semi-recessed roll manual paper towel dispenser. 3. Mounting: Semi-recessed 4. Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 800 linear feet, towel 8” diameter x8” wide 5. Operation: Manual 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Quantity: One at Mothers Rm K115

C. Surfaced mounted manual Roll Paper Towel Dispenser:

1. Product: American Specialties, Inc.; Model No. 04523-9 2. Description: Surface Mounted roll manual paper towel dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted 4. Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 800 linear feet, towel 8” diameter x8” wide 5. Operation: Manual 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Quantity: One at Break Room K121

D. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Product: American Specialties, Inc.; Model No. 0042 2. Description: Single-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted 4. Capacity: Designed for one standard 10” diameter tissue roll. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (stain). 6. Quantity: One per toilet stall

E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:

1. Product: American Specialties, Inc.; Model No. 0347 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form. 3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 40 oz. (1.18 liter). 5. Materials: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 6. Quantity: One per lavatory



F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:

1. Product: American Specialties, Inc.; Model No. 20852 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover. Bottom equipped with lock and

heavy duty stainless steel piano hinge. 4. Receptacle: Removable waxed paper bags 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 6. Quantity: One per toilet in all Women’s restrooms and one in each single Women or

Unisex toilet room.

G. Sharp Biohazard Container:

1. Product: Stericycle, Locking Wall Cabinet 2. Model No: NDCSS1 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Size: 1.4-qt 5. Receptacle: Removable waxed paper bags 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Quantity: One in each multi-stall restroom.

H. Grab Bars:

1. Product: American Specialties, Inc.; Model No. 3200 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture (peened) in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length (all three equals a set):

a. Straight 36 inches long; horizontal b. Straight 42 inches long; horizontal c. Straight 18 inches long; vertical

6. Quantity: Provide one set at every single stall toilet room and ADA toilet in multi fixture restroom.

2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, Inc.

B. Under lavatory Guard:

1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings.

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white. 3. Quantity: Provide at every lavatory with exposed drain pipes.



2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).

B. Mop and Broom Holder:

1. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Model No. B-239 2. Description: Unit with shelf. Hooks and holders mounted beneath shelf. 3. Length: 34 inches. 4. Hooks: Four. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel. 7. Quantity: Provide one in Janitor K110

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400 - 1

SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire protection cabinets 2. Portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers. 3. Mounting brackets

1.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE


1. Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets and extinguishers including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Schedules and coordination requirements.



1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

2. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finished for fire extinguishers.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets and extinguishers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets and extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

C. Coordinate installation with drywall installation.




A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

D. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

2.3 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsens Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series or an approved comparable product by one of the following:

a. J.L. Industires b. Nystom Building Products c. Potter Roemer

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Stainless sheet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).



1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

F. Door Material: Stainless steel.

G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Clear transparent acrylic sheet

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: NONE REQUIRED. Extinguisher will sit on the bottom of the cabinet. 2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply

on door handle. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,

spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door after painting. 2) Application Process: Individual pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.

a) Letters applied as group adhered to clear plastic will not be accepted.

3) Lettering Color: White 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Finishes:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

a. Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.



2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen’s Manufacturing Company; MP-10. No substitutions will be accepted.

a. Valves: Manufacturer's standard metal with replaceable molded valve stem seals. b. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. c. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.7 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Lettering Color: As selected by Architect b. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets and mounting brackets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

F. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.



ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 1

SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, details of installation, operational clearances and relationship to adjoining Work. 1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements

on Shop Drawings.

C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items.

D. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required.


A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products passing flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MechoShade Systems, Inc.; Mecho/5 Manual Shade System; or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Draper Inc. 2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc. 3. Nysan Shading Systems, LTD

B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.

2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS

A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for

shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.

B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.

C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

E. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Installation Accessories: 1. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top

and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure. 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.



2.3 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.

B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:

1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed.

D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.

F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions and located on the Drawings. At window locations install so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 1 Section Demonstration and Training."



AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 210500-1

SECTION 210500 – AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (Lower Level Building A Only) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

1. The fire protection work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, materi-als, tools, equipment, services, and supervision required to install, test, and place in service a new automatic wet pipe fire sprinkler system, and underground piping in the areas shown on the drawings. The new fire sprinkler system shall include above ground pipe, below ground pipe and associated equipment for a complete operational system including the interconnection to the new fire alarm system.

2. The work shall be as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. This work in-cludes the design, installation, and maintenance of a new wet-pipe sprinkler system for the Lower Level of Building A only in accordance with NFPA 13, Standard for the In-stallation of Sprinkler Systems (2013 Edition) and NFPA 24, Standard for the Installa-tion of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances (2013 Edition).

3. In conjunction with the installation of this work, the fire protection contractor shall install all piping tight to the building structure unless specifically allowed to be installed at low-er elevations by the engineer. All piping elevations shall be indicated on installation drawings and coordinated with all other trades.

4. The design drawings associated with these specifications are conceptual in nature and are not shop drawings but serve as a reference for basic system requirements and con-figuration. The Contractor is to provide a complete shop drawing submittal, including all information required by NFPA 13. Shop drawing submittals shall indicate all pipe lengths, elevations and offsets as coordinated with all systems.

5. Any deviations from the requirements of this specification must be acknowledged in writing with the supplier’s bid offer.

6. The contractor shall provide a unit cost for each piece of equipment (sprinklers, flow switches, valves, length of piping, couplings, etc.) within the sprinkler system with the bid offer.

B. RELATED WORK

The following sections contain information relating to the work under this section:

SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

C. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. The development of the fire sprinkler system(s) design, calculations, and shop drawings shall be coordinated with all other trades. The design, calculations, and shop drawings shall be reviewed by the engineer and the contractor’s NICET III designer.

2. All materials and equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be new and currently listed by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) or approved by Factory Mutual (FM) for the intended application, except as otherwise specified herein.

3. The completion of this work shall be accomplished by a qualified responsible contractor recognized as being fully experienced in the installation of sprinkler systems. The con-tractor shall be licensed in the State of Kansas. The contractor shall also be capable of demonstrating five years of experience in this field.

4. All work shall be done in strict accordance with NFPA 13, and their appendices and other applicable federal, state, and local codes and ordinances; except as otherwise in-dicated on the drawings or specified herein.

5. The fire protection contractor shall notify the Engineer before any changes are made to the original design.



6. All work shall be performed by competent workers skilled in the installation of sprinkler systems.

7. The project foreman shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience and be of a journey-man status. The project foreman shall be on site at all times during the construction and installation of the sprinkler system.

8. Before design and installation, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer, in writing, ev-idence of experience and qualifications specified herein.

D. CODES, PERMITS, AND FEES

1. The contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, tests, inspections, etc. required by

local boards that have jurisdiction over the project. All work shall be executed and in-spected in accordance with all local and state codes, rules, ordinances, or regulations pertaining to the particular type of work involved. Should any changes in the contract drawings and specifications be required to conform to such ordinances, the Engineer shall be notified prior to the time of submitting the bid.

2. After entering into the contract, the contractor shall be held responsible for the comple-tion of all work necessary for a complete and approved installation without extra ex-pense to the Owner/Engineer.

3. The Contractor shall prepare any supplementary detailed diagrams or drawings that may be required by any local or state authority.

E. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

1. The project shall be performed to accommodate the Owner’s schedule. 2. The project shall include shop drawing submittal, all piping, sprinklers, bracing, hang-

ers, and satisfactory completion of a 200 psi hydrostatic pressure test to verify system integrity.

F. SUBMITTALS

1. General

a) The contractor shall submit working drawings and product data to the Engineer for

approval. Both items shall be submitted at the same time, unless specifically agreed upon by the Engineer.

b) No work, fabrication, or installation may proceed without the contractor having re-ceived written approval from the Engineer, Owner's insuring party and local Au-thority Having Jurisdiction, as applicable.

c) Any changes to or deviations from approved drawings will require re-submittal and written approval from the Engineer.

d) Coordinate all pipe routing with Architect prior to the submission of the fire sprin-kler submittals.

2. Working / Shop Drawings. The contractor is responsible for the installation of the sprin-

kler system installation and shall prepare and submit shop drawings as follows:

a) The minimum scale shall be 1/8-inch equals 1 foot 0 inches, clearly indicating the essential details including all specialties, concealed spaces, ventilators, and all possible obstructions.

b) Drawings shall clearly indicate all information or data enumerated in Chapter 23 of NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.

c) Drawings shall be in developed electronically in AutoCAD Version 2004 or higher.

3. Development of the shop drawings, including hanger locations, shall be supervised by a NICET Level III or IV technician certified in automatic sprinkler system design or a reg-



istered professional engineer competent in sprinkler system design. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and sealed by the NICET Level III or IV technician. Hanger spacing and shop drawing preparation shall be performed by a minimum NICET Level II techni-cian.

4. Material and Equipment Data

a) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, prior to the commencement of any

work (fabrication, installation, etc.), the name of the manufacturer and the type or model of each principal item of equipment or material proposed.

b) To accomplish this, it is acceptable to provide the manufacturer's descriptive, illus-trated literature of all equipment, materials and devices.

c) The submittal shall provide positive indication of the specific size and description of the equipment, material or device used on this project. In other words, the data should be site specific, deleting any reference to options that do not apply to the project.

5. Hydraulic Calculations (to be submitted with shop drawings)

a) The sprinkler contractor shall perform hydraulic calculations proving hydraulically

remote areas throughout the building to size the piping for the sprinkler system. b) Hydraulic calculations shall be performed with a computer generated program as

approved by the engineer prior to submittal and on form sheets that include a summary sheet, path summary, detailed work sheets and graph showing a water supply-verses-system demand.

c) Hydraulic calculations shall be performed to include a minimum of a 10 psi pres-sure safety factor at the connection to supply.

6. As-built Drawings. Upon completion of the work, the contractor shall revise all drawings to agree with the construction as actually accomplished with in plus or minus 6 inches accuracy and shall stamp such drawings "As-Built." Those drawings that agree with the construction as accomplished with no changes shall be stamped "As-Built, No Change." One reproducible and one electronic copy in AutoCAD Version 2004 or higher of all as-built drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer.

7. Operations and Maintenance Manuals

a) The contractor shall furnish operating instructions outlining the step-by-step proce-

dures required for system start-up, operation, and testing. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, catalog cuts, diagrams, draw-ings, parts list and descriptive data covering the proper operation and testing of the systems.

b) The contractor shall furnish maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The instructions shall reflect as-built conditions and include simplified diagrams for the system.

c) After approval of the shop drawings and not later than field acceptance testing, the contractor shall provide a list of recommended spare parts and supplies, a current unit price and a source of supply.

d) Posted Instructions.

(1) Framed instructions under glass, showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed by the Owner.

(2) Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance proce-dures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and proce-dures for safely operating and shutting down the system shall be prepared in



typed form and posted beside schematic drawings of the system and framed under glass.

(3) All valves located on the riser and backflow prevention assembly shall be tagged with a brass circular disk stamped with numbers corresponding with the sequence of operating instructions

(4) Proposed drawings/diagrams, instructions, and other sheets shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.

8. Certification and Field Test Reports

a) Hydrostatic and flush test reports shall be completed in accordance with this

Specification and Chapter 25 of NFPA 13. Hydrostatic testing shall be conducted at 200 psi for a period of two hours. NOTE: The Contractor will utilize industry-accepted test reports (NFPA format) that provide sufficient detail on system com-ponents, tests completed, data collected and test results.

b) At least 7 days prior to requesting a final acceptance test of the fire protection sys-tem, the Contractor shall prepare and submit pre-operational test procedures that detail what is to be tested, how the tests are to be conducted and what acceptance (pass/fail) parameters for the various tests and test equipment will be required. The test report shall provide a table indicating final valve position and optimum set-tings on relief valves, pressure gauges, etc.

c) Upon completion of pre-operational testing, three copies of the test reports shall be submitted in booklet form detailing the tests performed, data collected, adjust-ments made, and any other necessary actions required to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria. Each test report shall indicate the final position of all valves and set points on pressure gauges and relief valves on wet pipe sys-tems.

d) Tests shall be completed in accordance with this Specification. The contractor is responsible for providing all test equipment necessary in the performance of field acceptance testing

e) The engineer shall give final acceptance of the system.

G. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1. All sprinkler components shall be in factory packing, inspected for damage, and comply with manufacturer’s rigging and installation instructions.

2. Protect all piping, valves and associated components from physical damage, including effects of weather, water and construction debris.

3. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps, maintain these protective caps in place until being installed or connected.

4. Storage of all materials shall be as allowed by the Owner. Space is limited and outside storage shall not be allowed without Owner approval.

H. MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY SERVICE

1. Furnish service and maintenance of the fire protection system for a one year period

from the Date of Acceptance by the Owner/Engineer of the work. Warranty service shall include all work for the referenced one-year period. All inspection, maintenance and testing shall be per NFPA 25, 2011 Edition.

2. Contractor shall submit all reports to the Owner and the engineer during the one year period.

I. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. The overall fire protection for the building shall be provided in accordance with the fol-

lowing general guidelines, as indicated on the drawings, and as specified herein.



2. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System. Installation of hydraulically designed wet pipe sprinkler system shall be provided as required in the facility by NFPA 13, including but not limited to overhead pipe, underground pipe and backflow preventer.

3. Provide window/door sprinkler where detailed on the architectural drawings. Provide TYCO model: WS window sprinklers as required.

J. SYSTEM DESIGN

1. The wet pipe sprinkler system shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 13 – 2010

Edition. The system shall be designed to 0.1 gpm per square foot over the most 1,500 square feet for light hazard areas an 0.15 gpm per square foot over the remote 1,500 square feet for ordinary hazards areas.

2. Inspector’s test connections, main drains, and auxiliary drains shall be provided in ac-cordance with NFPA 13 and as shown on contract documents. All test connections shall be provided with a sight glass and shall discharge to a location outside the build-ing that will accommodate full flow or as indicated on contract documents.

a) Auxiliary drains shall be provided with a minimum of ¾ inch globe valve, 5/8 inch

hose bibb and brass cap. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

A. GENERAL

1. Material and equipment shall be as specified or as shown and shall be suitable for the service intended. Materials shall be new and unused, except for tests.

2. All materials and equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Fire Protection Equipment Directory dated March 2011, or approved by Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation, except as otherwise specified herein.

3. When two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they shall be products from a single manufacturer.

4. All material and equipment necessary to meet the requirements of these codes shall be provided regardless of whether each item or device is specifically mentioned in this sec-tion or shown on the drawings.

B. PIPE AND FITTINGS

1. Aboveground Pipe

a) Pipe used shall not be subject to a working pressure in excess of 25 percent of the

hydrostatic pressure test required by ASTM A795, A53, A135 or F442, as applica-ble.

b) Schedule 40 black steel pipe shall be used in all areas for pipe 1 inch thru 2 inch. c) Schedule 10 pipe will be allowed for 2 ½ inch and greater. d) All piping shall be galvanized schedule 40 with galvanized fittings for all piping that

goes to the exterior of the building. 2. Joints

a) Joints shall conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. b) Shop welded joints will be permitted. c) Roll-grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with manufacturer's

latest published specification for the pipe material, wall thickness, and size.



d) Mechanical grooved pipe joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Joints shall be made using a UL listed or FM approved combination of fittings, gaskets, and grooves. Rolled pipe grooves shall be dimensionally compatible with the fittings.

e) Fittings for aboveground piping shall be of a type specifically UL Listed and ap-proved for use in the respective sprinkler systems.

f) Steel or cast iron sock-it type fittings for plain end pipe shall not be allowed g) All steel piping two inches and smaller in diameter shall be threaded.

3. Reductions in all pipe types shall be made with one-piece reducing fittings.

C. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. Hangers and supports are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be provided in

accordance with provisions of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, the piping manufacturer and these specifications.

2. Contractor is to review the architectural documents for areas that require specialty hanging requirements.

D. PIPE SLEEVES

1. All penetrations through masonry walls, floors, and ceiling shall be sleeved or core

drilled. 2. Where pipes pass through firewalls, fire partitions, or rated floors, a qualified fire stop-

ping material shall be provided. The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approv-al, supporting documentation that the proposed fire stopping material is UL Listed or FM approved for the type of penetration and required fire rating.

E. VALVES

1. Utilize valves that allow moving parts to be changed out without removing the valve

from the installed position. 2. General Purpose Type: General-purpose valves shall be OS&Y gate valves or indicat-

ing butterfly valves of an FM approved or UL listed for fire protection type. 3. All control and isolation valves shall be electronically supervised. 4. Check valves shall be an FM approved and UL listed for fire protection iron body bronze

trimmed swing check.

F. SPRINKLERS

1. Sprinklers shall conform to the UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory for the required application and for upright, pendent, sidewall, or other locations as required.

2. Ceiling sprinklers shall be white and semi-recessed. Provide white, semi-recessed side wall sprinklers at suite bedroom soffits. Provide brass upright sprinklers in areas with exposed piping.

3. Clearances between deflectors and ceiling, roof decking, roof joists, electric or heating equipment, or other obstructions shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.

4. All sprinklers shall have 175 psi working pressure.

G. SYSTEM SPECIALTIES

1. Waterflow Indicators

a) Waterflow indicators shall be vane type. b) Provide alarm transmitter with retard feature to prevent false alarms. The retard

feature shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds and must be of the instantly recy-cling type.



c) Indicator can be mounted on either vertical or horizontal service. d) Flow switch shall not be installed in a fitting or within 12 inches of any fitting that

changes the direction of waterflow. e) The detector must have the sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that

equals or exceeds the discharge from one sprinkler. f) A tapped ½-inch conduit connection shall be provided. g) Alarm pressure switches shall be proved with dual contacts.

2. All control and isolation valves shall be provided with listed/approved tamper switches. 3. Spare Sprinklers, Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench

a) Provide steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box with capacity to store a minimum

of 20 sprinklers and wrench sized to sprinklers at the sprinkler riser location. b) For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional sprinklers,

amounting to a minimum of 5 units for every installed unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. GENERAL

1. Provide a placard permanently attached to the system riser(s) indicating the hydraulic design details as indicated in NFPA 13.

2. Clearances between deflectors and ceiling, roof decking, roof joists, electric or heating equipment or other obstructions shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufac-tures installation instructions. Close coordination is required when routing piping and locating sprinklers around equipment and structural elements.

3. Install inspectors’ test connection(s) as indicated on the contract documents and where required by NFPA 13 and approved by the Engineer.

B. FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

1. Piping

a) Welding shall be done in strict compliance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code, Section IX. Welding of sprinkler pipe is not allowed on the project site. b) Torch cutting and welding will not be permitted as a means of modifying or joining

sprinkler systems. Sprinkler piping systems shall be joined by roll-grooved fittings as allowed by these Specifications.

2. Supports

a) All supports and hangers shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 and the pipe manu-facturer’s installation instructions, U.L. listing criteria and these Specifications.

b) All supports, hangers and associated assemblies for the attic dry pipe system shall be non-corrosive material.

3. Drain and Test Connections

a) Provisions shall be provided to properly drain all parts of the system. b) System main drain, test drains, and auxiliary drains shall be in accordance with

applicable sections of NPFA 13, Contract Specifications and as shown on the Con-tract Drawings.

c) Direct connection shall not be made between sprinkler drains and sewers. Where possible, sprinkler drains shall discharge outside the building at a point free from possibility of causing water damage. When this is impossible, discharge may be to a sump of sufficient capacity capable of handling full flow under normal system



pressure. Sump and all associated equipment shall be provided by the sprinkler contractor.

d) Install main drain and drain piping at low points of sprinkler piping per NFPA 13, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

C. IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING

1. All drain and test valves provided by the fire protection contractor in accordance with this specification section shall be identified by the attachment of durable metal or plastic tags upon which the valve function or description shall be embossed/engraved.

NOTE: Labeling and posted operating procedures shall incorporate the identifi-cation system established by the Owner/Engineer (as applicable).

2. Tags shall be bound securely to the valve by means of stainless steel wire. In all cas-

es, the tags will be bound in such a position as to present minimum opportunity for loss and maximum visibility. In no case will the tags be attached to hand wheels.

3. Tags for instructional purposes shall be brass, 1” diameter and be machine stamped with the corresponding number as listed in the system maintenance instructions.

D. TESTING AND CLEANING

1. Cleaning shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. 2. Hydrostatic Tests and Flushing

a) Piping shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psi for two hours. b) Prior to the commencement of field tests, one certified copy of the Contractor's Ma-

terial Test Certificate for hydrostatic tests shall be submitted to the Engineer. All tests shall be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer.

3. Acceptance Testing

a) The Contractor shall perform acceptance tests specified in NFPA 13. The follow-

ing tests shall be conducted, but not limited to: (1) Water flow tests (2) Main drain flow tests (3) Alarm and supervision tests (4) Flushing of supply piping (5) Operational tests

b) In the event that any system or component fails to meet the guarantees, and the Contractor has made such alterations and modifications, as he feels necessary to obtain the guaranteed performance, the system(s) shall be retested. The entire expense of the additional tests required demonstrating the effects of such altera-tions and modifications shall be borne by the Contractor. The "entire expense" shall be interpreted as all outside charges incurred during the retesting including engineering fees for witnessing or coordination of testing.

c) All final field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by representatives from the local authority having jurisdiction, insuring interest, Owner, and Engineer.

4. Test Documentation. Documentation specified in Section F of Part I of this specification

shall be submitted to the Engineer within 30 days of completion of satisfactory testing. END OF SECTION 210500


CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 212200 - 1

SECTION 212200 - CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (Building K Only)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS

A. The design, installation, testing and maintenance of the Clean Agent Extinguishing System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements set forth in the latest edition of the following codes, standards, and third party approval agencies:

1. NFPA 2001: Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems 2. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 4. Factory Mutual (FM) 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 6. Requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)

1.3 SUMMARY


1. Piping and piping specialties. 2. Extinguishing-agent containers. 3. Extinguishing agent. 4. Detection and alarm devices. 5. Releasing control panel. 6. Accessories. 7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components. 8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire-alarm system.

B. Section Excludes:

1. Power supply (120/240 VAC) to system control panel. 2. Interface (conduit and wiring) to HVAC units, dampers, electric power supplies, relays, or

shunt-trip breakers. 3. Interface (conduit and wiring) to local/remote fire alarm system 4. Connection to listed central station fire alarm system. 5. Room sealing, other than penetrations made by the suppression system contractor

during system installation. Suppression system contractor shall coordinate room sealing requirements with project’s General contractor and all sub-contractors.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

C. EPO: Emergency Power Off.





B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation indicating that clean agents comply.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by the manufacturer of the Clean Agent Suppression system. b. NICET certified Fire-Alarm Technician, Level III minimum.

2. Comply with recommendations in the “Working Plans” Section of the “System Design” Chapter in NFPA 2001.

3. Comply with the recommendations in the “Documentation” Section of the “Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems” Chapter in NFPA 72.

4. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 5. Include design calculations: Enclosure volume, agent quantity, backup battery, voltage

drop, detector spacing, etc. 6. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

7. Include plans to indicate mounting location of field devices, including size and routing of cable and conduits.

8. Submittals shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer prior to submitting them to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

9. Submittals shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For clean-agent fire-extinguishing system signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer.

1. Indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data.

2. Include design calculations for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection devices, complying with NFPA 72.

3. Include design calculations for weight, volume, and concentration of extinguishing agent required for each hazard area.

4. Include design calculations for enclosure pressure relief/venting as required to avoid structural damage to the hazard enclosure, equipment, or building.

5. Indicate the Following on Reflected Ceiling Plans:

a. Ceiling penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. b. Extinguishing-agent containers if mounted above floor, piping and discharge

nozzles, detectors, and accessories. c. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. d. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, and access panels. 6. Indicate the Following on Occupied Work Area Plans:

a. Controls and alarms. b. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles if mounted in space,

detectors, and accessories. c. Equipment and furnishings.



7. Indicate the Following on Access Floor Space Plans:

a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles, detectors, and accessories.

b. Method of supporting piping. 8. Indicate the Following on Ceiling Plans:

a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles, detectors, and accessories.

b. Method of supporting piping. c. Other equipment located in the ceiling space that is being protected including

sprinkler piping, HVAC equipment, raceways, or conduit.


A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping. 2. Items Penetrating Finished Ceiling Include the Following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

B. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2001, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For extinguishing-agent containers and control panels from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Installer Qualifications:

1. Authorized distributor of the system manufacturer. Shall maintain an inventory of replacement parts.

2. Trained by the system manufacturer to design, install, test, and maintain the clean agent extinguishing system.

3. Provide proof of emergency service available on a twenty-four hour, seven-days-a-week basis.

4. Maintain or have access to a recharging station capable of recharging the largest suppression system within <72> hours after a discharge.

5. Minimum five (5) years’ experience in the design, installation, and testing of clean-agent fire extinguishing systems. A list of systems of similar nature and scope shall be provided upon request.

6. Shall employ a NICET certified special hazard designer, who will be responsible for this project.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For special agent system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Deliver copies to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and include the following: 1. Comply with the “Records” Section of the “Inspections, Testing and Maintenance”

Chapter of NFPA 72. 2. Provide “Record of Completion Documents” according to NFPA 72 article “Permanent

Records” in the “Records” section of the “Inspection, Testing and Maintenance” Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide “Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records” according to NFPA 72 article of

the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer’s user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer’s required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the control panel. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.

C. As-built Drawings: Indicate actual installation configuration at time of project completion including all equipment locations, pipe routing, conduit routing, room configurations, etc.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed. 2. Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and type installed. 3. Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed. 4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in largest hazard

area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. FM Global Compliance: Provide components that are FM Approved and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide."

C. UL Compliance: Provide equipment listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."

D. All devices, components, and equipment shall be new, standard products of the manufacturer’s latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended. The name of the manufacturer, part number, and serial number shall appear on all major components.

E. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a Fike; ECARO-25® system. Equivalents only by prior approval.

B. Description: Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total flooding of the hazard area including the room cavity above the ceiling, below the ceiling, and below the raised floor. System includes separate zones above and below the ceiling and beneath the raised floor. If smoke is detected below the raised floor, extinguishing agent shall be discharged in the underfloor zone only. If smoke is detected below the ceiling, extinguishing agent shall be discharged in zones above and below the ceiling and below the floor. If smoke is detected above the ceiling, extinguishing agent shall be discharged in the zone above the ceiling only.

C. Delegated Design: Design clean-agent fire-extinguishing system and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, and C fires as appropriate for areas being protected, and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.

D. Performance Requirements: (FE-125 per NFPA 2001).

1. Minimum design concentration: 8% by volume in all areas and/or protected spaces at the minimum anticipated temperature within the protected area.

2. Per NFPA 2001, the system design shall not exceed a maximum exposure limit concentration level of 11.5% by volume, unless provisions for room evacuation before agent release are provided. All personnel should be able to leave the protected space prior to the discharge or at least within 5 minutes of the commencement of discharge.

E. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound alarm on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating single-detection device in other zone.

F. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-detection device.

G. Single Detector Release: Devices located in a single zone. Sound alarm on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent.

2.2 SYSTEM OPERATING SEQUENCE

A. Cross-Zone or Verified Detection:

1. Actuating First Detector (Alarm):

a. Visual and audible indication on control panel. b. Visual indication on optional annunciator panel. c. Energize audible and visual alarms inside the protected hazard area (unique

pattern). d. Transfer relays to shut down air-conditioning and ventilating systems serving

protected area, close doors in protected area, and send signal to fire-alarm system.

2. Actuating Second Detector (Pre-discharge):

a. Visual and audible indication on control panel.



b. Visual indication on optional annunciator panel. c. Energize audible and visual alarms inside the protected hazard area (unique

pattern). d. Transfer relays to shut down power to protected equipment. e. Start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge for [30] seconds. f. Initiate system abort sequence.

3. Extinguishing-agent discharge (Release): Pre-discharge time delay expires or manual release switch is operated.

a. Visual and audible indication on control panel. b. Visual indication on optional annunciator panel. c. Energize audible and visual alarms inside and outside the protected area (unique

pattern). d. Release clean agent suppression system agent. e. Release pre-action valve to allow water to fill sprinkler system.

B. System Operating Sequence: Single Detector Release.

1. Actuating First Detector (Pre-discharge):

a. Visual and audible indication on control panel. b. Visual indication on optional annunciator panel. c. Energize audible and visual alarms inside the protected hazard area (unique

pattern). a. Transfer relays to shut down air-conditioning and ventilating systems serving

protected area, close doors in protected area, and send signal to fire-alarm system.

b. Transfer relays to shut down power to protected equipment. c. Start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge for [30] seconds. d. Initiate system abort sequence.

2. Extinguishing-agent discharge (Release):

a. Visual and audible indication on control panel. b. Visual indication on optional annunciator panel. c. Energize audible and visual alarms inside and outside the protected area (unique

pattern). d. Discharge extinguishing agent upon expiration of the discharge time delay. e. Release pre-action valve to allow water to fill sprinkler system.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Clean agent container low pressure switch.

D. Trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal AC voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Supervisory and Trouble Signal Actions:



1. Visual and audible indication on control panel. 2. Visual indication on optional annunciator panel. 3. Transfer relays to send signal to fire-alarm system.

F. Operating manual release switches will cause the immediate discharge of the extinguishing agent, overriding the system’s discharge time delay and abort functions. Panel operation shall duplicate the extinguishing-agent discharge sequence described in the previous paragraphs.

1. Electric manual release switches shall be located at each hazard exit. 2. Push button actuators shall be located on extinguishing agent container solenoid

actuator. Requires a discharge pressure switch to be mounted on the discharge piping. Switch shall be wired to the control panel to indicate system activation when actuator is pressed.

G. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being activated. Release of hand pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the discharge time delay has expired.

H. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.

I. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set pressure.

2.3 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed in NFPA 2001, Section 4.2 "Distribution," for charging pressure of system.

2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-106, Seamless, [Grade A] ; ASTM A-106, Seamless, Grade C; ASTM A-53, ERW, [Grade A]; Schedule 40.

1. Threaded Fittings:

a. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300. b. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300. c. Fittings Working Pressure: 416 psig (2868 kPa) minimum. d. Threaded malleable or ductile iron: Class 300 e. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.

2. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: FM Approved and NRTL listed, ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-106, Seamless, [Grade A] ASTM A-106, Seamless, Grade C; ASTM A-53, ERW, [Grade A] ; Schedule 40.

1. Threaded Fittings:

a. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300. b. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300. c. Fittings Working Pressure: 500 psig (3447 kPa) minimum. d. Threaded malleable or ductile iron: Class 300 e. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.



2. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: FM Approved and NRTL listed, ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-106, Seamless, [Grade A] ; ASTM A-106, Seamless, Grade C; ASTM A-53, ERW, [Grade A] ; Schedule 80 or 160.

1. Threaded Fittings :

a. Forged Steel Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 2000 and Class 3000. b. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 1500. c. Fittings Working Pressure: [2900 psig (19,996 kPa)] minimum, upstream of the

pressure reducer. Pressure rating downstream of pressure reducer determined by system flow calculations.

d. Flanged Joints: Class 1,500 minimum.

2. Forged-Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 3000, socket pattern. 3. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: FM Approved and NRTL listed, ASTM A 47/A 47M

malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606.

D. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

E. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for clean-agent service, and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.

2.5 VALVES

A. General Valve Requirements:

1. UL listed or FM Approved for use in fire-protection systems. 2. Compatible with type of clean agent used. 3. Automatic excessive pressure relief provision. 4. Low pressure gauge.

B. Container Valves: With fast acting rupture disc with solenoid actuator and manual-release lever, capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended flow capacity.

C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent entrapment of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.

D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing agent when container is removed from manifold.



2.6 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS

A. Description: High strength alloy steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure rating that matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure gage.

1. Finish: [White], enamel or epoxy paint. 2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, and connections for multiple storage

containers, as indicated. 3. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and connections for

main- and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage containers. 4. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets consisting of steel

straps and channels; suitable for container support, maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.

B. Location: Located within hazard area, or as near as possible to reduce the required amount of pipe and fittings.

2.7 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT

A. HFC-125 Clean Agent: Pentafluoroethane.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fike®; ECARO-25™ or comparable product by one of the following:

2.8 DISCHARGE NOZZLES

A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type, size, discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.

2.9 MANIFOLD AND ORIFICE UNIONS

A. Description: NRTL-listed device with minimum 2175-psig (15-MPa) pressure rating, to control flow and reduce pressure of IG-55 gas in piping.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice, sized for system design requirements.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple, sized for system design requirements.

2.10 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: FM Approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and features required for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system. Listed and approved for releasing service, and suitable for deluge/pre-action sprinkler service.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fike®; [Cheetah® Xi] or comparable product by one of the following:

B. Power Requirements: [120]-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system components and fire-alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce power at voltage required for initiating devices, notification appliances, trouble signals, supervisory signals, digital alarm communicator transmitter, and auxiliary power.



1. Alarm current draw of the entire clean agent suppression system shall not exceed 80 percent of the control panel’s power supply rating.

C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, steel cabinet.

1. Mounting: [Recessed flush with surface]. 2. Finish: [Red] baked on enamel finish

D. Supervised Circuits:

1. [Two] signaling line circuits (SLC); Capable of supporting up to [254] addressable devices per circuit. Wired NFPA 72, [Class B].

2. Two notification appliance circuits. Wired NFPA 72, [Class B]; can generate Gentex or System Sensor sync protocol.

3. Two auxiliary power circuits (non-resettable) for field devices. 4. One auxiliary power circuit (resettable) for field devices. 5. Three Form-C relay contacts for auxiliary functions. 6. DACT: Connection point for digital alarm communicator transmitter (point ID

communication). 7. Peripherals: RS485 peripheral bus maximum 4000 feet (1219 m), maximum 31 devices.

E. Control-Panel Features:

1. Microprocessor controlled. 2. Ten LED indicators to provide positive indication of system status. 3. System Navigation and Control buttons. 4. 3200 event history buffer. 5. 80 character, backlit LCD to display system and trouble events. 6. Configurable via PC configuration software or one-board configuration menus. 7. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power. 8. Device or Zone enable/disable to interrupt system operation for maintenance with visual

status indication on the panel. 9. Ten LEDs to provide positive indication of system status. 10. 120 VAC or 240 VAC power input. 11. Six optional abort types. 12. Supports up to 31 peripheral bus devices. 13. 253 user defined zones of operation. 14. Simultaneous monitoring and release of clean agent and sprinkler suppression systems. 15. Capable of cross zone; sequential or single detector release suppression system

actuation methods. 16. Compatible with control panel network (128 nodes maximum). 17. Single person walk-test mode.

F. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected hazard-area plans, as well as locations of detectors, aborts, EPOs, and manual stations. Include lamps to indicate device-initiating alarm, electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and stainless-steel or aluminum enclosure.

G. Standby Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium. 2. Batteries sized to operate system for [24] hours and alarm for minimum of [15] minutes.



3. Battery Enclosures: [33 AH] enclosure, constructed from heavy gauge sheet metal; surface or flush mounted.

2.11 OPTIONAL EXPANSION CARDS

A. General Description: Cards mount directly to and receive operational control and power from the main control board.

B. Supplemental Loop Module:

1. Adds two additional signaling line circuits (SLC) to the system, identical in function to the primary SLC circuits provided on the main board.

2. Increases SLC loop capacity from 504 devices to 1016 devices.

C. Supplemental Power Supply:

1. Doubles the systems standby and alarm power capacity. 2. Shares a common power bus with main board allowing complete power distribution. 3. Provides three auxiliary power circuits (non-resettable) for field devices. 4. Supports charging of secondary set of sealed lead calcium batteries.

D. Relay Module:

1. Provides four additional Form-C relay contacts for auxiliary control functions. 2. Main board provides a mounting location for up to two cards.

E. Reverse Polarity Module:

1. Provides two individual, non-supervised, reverse polarity contacts intended for connection to a polarity reversal circuit of a remote station receiving unit with compatible ratings.

F. RS485 Network Module:

1. Provides an intelligent interface between networked panels; up to 128 panels maximum operating on a peer-to-peer communication protocol.

2. Network allows global operation and monitoring of all system points from any panel. 3. Panel network uses standard RS-485 low capacitance cable. 4. Built-in repeater allows up to 4000 feet (1219 m) between network panels.

G. Fiber Optic Network Module:

1. Provides an intelligent interface between networked panels; up to 128 panels maximum operating on a peer-to-peer communication protocol.

2. Network allows global operation and monitoring of all system points from any panel. 3. Panel network uses multi-mode fiber optic cable. 4. Built-in repeater allows up to 6560 feet (2 km) or 9840 feet (3 km) between network

panels based on cable type used (50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm).

2.12 PERIPHERAL BUS DEVICES

A. General Description: Optional components that can be connected to the control panel’s Peripheral Bus to provide remote control and annunciation of system events, and to expand the systems operational capabilities. Maximum of 31 devices can be connected to host control



panels peripheral bus. 24-V dc operational power to peripheral devices supplied by host control panel or NRTL listed remote power supply.

B. Remote Display Units:

1. Provides 80 character LCD that mimics the host control panel display. 2. Allows system status information to be displayed at a remote location. 3. Equipped with an internal audible and five status LEDs that provide instant audible and

visual notification of system status changes.

a. Fourteen Button RDU: Unit is equipped with six hard coded buttons that allow the operator to navigate through system events displayed on the LCD and eight programmable buttons that can be used to initiate system control functions. Switch functions are locked by unit’s security access key.

b. Ten Button RDU: Unit is equipped with ten hard coded buttons that allow the operator to navigate through system events displayed on the LCD and to initiate system Drill, Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset control functions. Switch functions are locked by unit’s security access key.

c. Two Button RDU: Unit is equipped with two hard coded buttons that allow the operator to navigate through system events displayed on the LCD.

C. Ethernet Module:

1. Provides a means to connect the control panel to the customer’s Local or Wide Area Network (LAN/WAN).

2. Allows panel to send its history events to a remote monitoring panel or receive history events from up to 128 monitored panels (maximum), located on or off the protected premises.

3. Mounts within the control panel enclosure or external in custom enclosure.

D. Multi-Interface Module:

1. Provides an interface point that allows connection of the following ancillary devices to the host control panel.

a. Cheetah® Gateway: Provides command and control interface between newer Fike control panels (Cheetah® Xi and CyberCat®) and older Cheetah® classic panels.

b. Printer Interface: Provides connection point for serial or parallel printer. c. PC Graphic Interface: Provides connection point for PC graphic interface.


E. Intelligent Graphic Annunciator:

1. Provides a graphic display of the protected area with LEDs to indicate the location of system devices (pull stations, aborts, detectors, etc.).

2. Steel enclosure with black finish, flush or surface mounted.

F. Remote Annunciator:

1. Provides a tabular based display equipped with 40 LEDs that can be individually configured to annunciate the status of the host control panel (individual zone or point indication).



2. Mounts to a standard 3-gang electrical box, flush or surface mounted.

G. Relay Control Assembly:

1. Provides a mounting location for up to six relay cards (low power CRM4 and high power HPM4).

2. The SPDT relay contacts can be used to perform auxiliary system functions. 3. Mounts within the control panel enclosure.

H. Relay Card:

1. Provides 12 programmable (SPDT) relay contacts that can be used to perform auxiliary system functions.

2. Mounts within the control panel enclosure.

I. Class A Peripheral Bus Card:

1. Allows the panel’s RS485 peripheral bus and 24-V dc auxiliary power output to peripheral devices to be wired in a Class A format.


2.13 ADDRESSABLE MODULES

A. General Requirements:

1. Comply with NFPA 72 and UL 864. 2. 15-30-V dc nominal. 3. Two-wire type. 4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating device communication and

operational status. 5. Available in isolator and non-isolator versions. Isolator version provides complete short

circuit isolation. 6. Receives operational power and communicates from control panel via SLC connection.

B. Control Module:

1. Switches an external power supply (24-V dc) to connected notification appliances. 2. NAC Wiring: NFPA [Class B].

C. Relay Module:

1. Provides two sets of Form-C contacts that switch together (DPDT) to perform auxiliary functions.

2. Input capable of monitoring a dry set of contacts for normally open or normally closed conditions (feedback input).

D. Releasing Module:

1. Switches an external power supply (24-V dc) to connected releasing solenoid or releasing module. **Only one application type can be used at a time.**

2. Wiring: NFPA Class B only.

E. Monitor Module: Includes mini module.

1. Monitors a normally open or normally closed set of dry contacts of an auxiliary device.



2. Provides operational input and device monitoring to the control panel. 3. Wiring: NFPA [Class B].

F. Intelligent Pull Station:

1. Comply with UL 38. 2. Dual-action (push and pull) pull station with key lock reset feature. 3. Red finish with molded white lettering. 4. Provides positive indication of device activation. 5. 5 lb. maximum pull force. 6. Integral monitor module provides operational input to the control panel. 7. Wiring: NFPA [Class B].

2.14 ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DETECTORS


1. Comply with NFPA 2001, NFPA 72, and UL 268. 2. 15 to 30-V dc, nominal. 3. Two-wire type. 4. Self-restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation. 5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on

status.

B. Ionization Detectors: Dual-chamber type, having sampling and referencing chambers, with smoke-sensing element.

C. Photoelectric Detectors: LED light source and silicon photodiode receiving element.

D. Photoelectric Duct Detector: LED light source and silicon photodiode receiving element.

1. Mounting: Inside duct detector housing only. 2. Sampling tubes, sized to fit duct dimensions, transfer smoke to duct housing. 3. Not to be used for open area detection. 4. Optional Remote Reset, Remote Test and Remote LED annunciators available.

E. Combination Type Photoelectric/Heat Detectors: Actuated by either the photoelectric smoke-sensing element or when the temperature exceeds 135 deg F (57 deg C) fixed.

F. Base Mounting: Detector shall be mounted on a twist-lock, fixed base as specified in Article 2.16.

G. Signals to the Central Fire Alarm Control Panel: Any type of local system Alarm, Trouble, or Supervisory event is reported to the central fire alarm control panel as a composite signal for each event type.

2.15 ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTORS


1. Comply with NFPA 2001, NFPA 72, and UL 521. 2. 15 to 30 V dc nominal. 3. Two-wire type.



4. Self-restoring: Detectors do not require resetting after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power on status.

B. Fixed Temperature Type: 1. Set-point Range: 135 deg F (57 deg C) to 174 deg. F (80 deg C) ordinary detection or

175 deg F (79 deg C) to 190 deg F (88 deg C) intermediate detection. 2. Ordinary Range: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) to 174

deg. F (80 deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (9.4 deg C) per minute unless otherwise indicated.

3. Intermediate Range: Actuated by a temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 175 deg F (79 deg C) to 190 deg F (88 deg C).

C. Combination Type Photoelectric/Heat Detectors: Actuated by either the photoelectric smoke-sensing element or when the temperature exceeds 135 deg F (57 deg C) fixed.

D. Base Mounting: Detector shall be mounted on a twist-lock, fixed base as specified in Article 2.16.

2.16 DETECTOR BASES

A. Provide [Four] -inch diameter, [Standard] type bases. Bases shall be equipped with terminals for connection to control units signaling line circuit (SLC) and for connection of optional remote annunciator.

B. Isolator base: Provides complete short circuit isolation for NFPA 72, Class X wiring when used with a compatible isolator sensor.

C. Relay Base:

1. Provides a single Form-C relay for control of auxiliary functions. 2. Activation State: Can be configured to activate or deactivate for up eight different panel

events, based on operational priorities.

D. Sounder Base:

1. Comply with UL 268 and UL 464. 2. Audible Output: 85 dBA at 10 feet 3. Configurable Output Pattern: Can be configured to produce a distinct output pattern for

up to eight different panel events, based on operational priorities. 4. Operating Power: 24-V dc from host control panel or NRTL listed external power supply.

2.17 ADDRESSABLE ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTOR

A. Description: FM Approved or NRTL listed, aspirating smoke detector (ASD) offering very early warning smoke detection, early warning smoke detection and standard smoke detection settings. Unit continuously draws air from the controlled environment through sampling pipe(s) with a series of sampling holes to monitor the environment for smoke.

1. SLC Communication: Detector intelligently communicates with host control panel via signaling line circuit(s).

2. Sensitivity Range: 0.00046%/ft – 4.0%/ft 3. Air Flow: Operates in airflows from 0-4000 ft/min (0-1219 m/min). 4. Area of Protection: Up to 8,000 sq. ft. (743 sq. m).



5. Acclimate Feature: Detector automatically adjusts itself to current environmental conditions to reduce nuisance alarms.

6. Particulate Level Display: Consists of ten amber LEDs that correspond to the current level of smoke detected.

7. Alarm Levels: Five programmable alarm levels with time delays (0-60 sec.) including Alert, Action 1, Action 2, Fire 1, and Fire 2.

8. Sensitivity Modes: Day Time, Night Time and Weekend alarm levels adjustable within user specified parameters to reduce nuisance alarms.

9. Six sets of relay contacts (Form C), programmable, latching or non-latching. 10. Field replaceable filter. 11. Air Flow/ Fault Display: Consists of ten bi-color LEDs that operate to show an increase

or decrease in air flow or unit fault display. 12. Three user interface buttons: Test, Mode and Isolate; security protected with

programmable passcode.

2.18 LINEAR HEAT DETECTION


1. Comply with NFPA 2001, NFPA 72, and UL 521. 2. Temperature Rating: Actuated by a temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 155

deg F (68 deg C). 3. Connects to an addressable monitor module, providing a contact closure input to control

panel.

2.19 DETECTOR REMOTE ACCESSORIES

A. General Description: Provide remote testing and notification devices for each concealed detector. Device(s) shall provide positive indication of detector activation and remote testing capabilities, when applicable to Project. Devices connect to detector base for power and operation.

B. Remote Annunciator: Remote annunciation of detector activation.

C. Remote Test Station: Remote testing of concealed detector; [Magnet] operated.

2.20 SWITCHES

A. General Description: [Semi-recessed] FM Approved or NRTL listed, low voltage, includes contacts for connection to control panel.

B. Manual Release Switch: Unit can manually discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains engaged until unlocked.

1. Stainless steel faceplate. 2. Dual-action requiring two distinct operations to initiate suppression system release. 3. Red plastic release button, keyed reset. 4. "MANUAL RELEASE" caption. 5. Connects to an addressable monitor module, providing a contact closure input to control

panel.

C. Abort Switch: Unit can manually prevent the release of the suppression system while pressed.

1. Stainless steel faceplate. 2. Red plastic abort button, momentary contact (dead-man type).



3. Available with key-operated switch. 4. "SYSTEM ABORT" caption. 5. Connects to an addressable monitor module, providing a contact closure input to control

panel.

D. Main-Reserve Switch: Unit allows transfer of release circuit signal from main supply to reserve supply.

1. Stainless steel faceplate. 2. Black plastic selector button (main/reserve) 3. "CONTAINER SELECT" caption.

E. EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish.

F. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Installed on extinguishing agent container; pneumatic operation.

1. Connects to an addressable monitor module, providing a contact closure input to control panel.

G. Suppression Disconnect Switches: Unit enables releasing circuit (i.e., clean agent or sprinkler) to be disconnected from the control panel.

1. Stainless steel faceplate. 2. Key operated selector switch (armed/disarmed). 3. LEDs to provide indication of switch status (armed/disarmed). 4. “SUPPRESSION DISCONNECT” caption. 5. Connects to an addressable monitor module, providing a contact closure input to control

panel.

H. Discharge Pressure Switches: Installed on suppression piping to provide indication of manual actuation of the clean agent suppression system back to the control panel.

1. Connects to an addressable monitor module, providing a contact closure input to control panel.

2.21 ALARM DEVICES

A. General Requirements: Listed and labeled by an NRTL or FM Approved, low voltage, and surface mounting.

B. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly. Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. Bells, comply with UL 464: High dBa output; <24-V dc> ;vibrating type; minimum 6-inch (150-mm) diameter. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBa minimum, measured 10 feet (3 m) from horn.

D. Horns, comply with UL 464: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBa minimum, measured 10 feet (3 m) from horn.

E. Visible Notification Appliances, comply with UL 1971: Xenon strobe lights with translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.

1. Rated Light Output:



a. Indicated on drawings. b. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Indicated on Drawings. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finish, red.

2.22 INFORMATIONAL SIGNAGE

A. Provide informational signs as required to comply with NFPA 2001 for the specific agent.

2.23 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.

B. Features:

1. 100 event history buffer. 2. Communication Protocols: Modem IIIa2, SIA, and 4/2 3. LEDs for heartbeat, system trouble, and telephone line trouble (one per line). 4. Dual telephone line interface. 5. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 10 minutes with report transmitted to central

station. 6. Communication failure indication. 7. Operating Power: 24-V dc continuous power from control panel.

C. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the control panel and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station, signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 36 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

D. Mounting: Digital alarm communicator transmitter must be mounted adjacent to the control panel within 20 feet (6.1 m) with interface wiring in conduit.

E. Secondary Power: Auxiliary power supply with integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger; UL listed for Fire Protective Signaling System service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting work performance.

1. The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected enclosure against agent loss and/or leakage during the required agent “hold’ period.




3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.

B. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40, steel pipe; malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

C. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Schedule 40, steel pipe; [forged-steel welding fittings; and welded joints].

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Piping between Storage Containers and Orifice Union: Schedule [80], steel pipe; [forged-steel welding fittings; and welded joints].

B. Piping Downstream from Orifice Union: Schedule [40], steel pipe; [forged-steel welding fittings; and welded joints].

3.4 CLEAN-AGENT PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb, according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner. Pipe network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before installing nozzles or discharge devices.

C. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions. Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.

E. All pipe threads shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to the male threads only.

F. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements listed in NFPA 2001, Section 4.2 "Distribution."

1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid, or install pressure relief devices in valved sections of piping systems.

2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13. 3. Install seismic restraints for extinguishing-agent containers and piping systems.

3.5 DETECTION, ACTUATION, ALARM, AND CONTROL SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

A. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and accessories, complying with requirements of NFPA 72 and NFPA 2001, Section "Detection, Actuation, and Control Systems," as required for supervised system application.

B. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, “Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors” Section in the “Initiating Devices” Chapter, for smoke detector spacing.



2. Comply with NFPA 72, “Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors” Section in the “Initiating Devices” Chapter, for heat detector spacing.

3. Smoke ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m). 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any part of

a lighting fixture.

C. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Wall mounted with tops above the finished floor not less than 90 inches (2.29 m), and below the ceiling not less than 6 in. (150 mm). Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

D. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Wall mounted with entire lends not less than 80 in. (2.03 m) and not greater than 96 in. (2.44 m) above the finished floor. Where ceiling height does not permit mounting at minimum height, mount within 6 inches (150 mm) of the ceiling.

E. Combination Audible-Visual Devices: Where combination audible and visual devices are used, mount devices according to Visual Alarm-Initiating Device requirements.

F. Control Unit: [Surface] [Flush] mount, with top of cabinet not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

G. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire-alarm system.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, equipment, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment, and panels according to NFPA 2001.

C. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire-extinguishing system.

D. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of the horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.

E. Install framed operating instructions in a location visible from control unit.

3.8 SYSTEM WIRING

A. Wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 725 and 760, except as otherwise



permitted for limited energy circuits as described in NFPA 72. Installation shall meet all local, state, province and/or country codes.

B. All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or conduit, and must be kept separate from all other building wiring. Runs of conduit shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported and installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions.

C. Conductors shall be sized according to the design documents and color coded to allow easy circuit identification.

D. All wires shall be tagged at all junction boxes.

E. All wires shall be tested for the presence of opens, shorts and grounds prior to connection to control panel. Final wire terminations to control panel shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory trained representative.

F. All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring.

G. Ground control panel and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to control panel.


A. Testing Agency: [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Submit test plan for review and approval by the owner or owner’s designated representative prior to performing tests.

E. Detection, Actuation, Alarm, and Control Systems Tests:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct the visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in it “Completion Documents, Preparation” Table in the “Documentation” Section of the “Fundamental of Fire Alarm Systems” Chapter.

b. Comply with “Visual Inspection Frequencies” Table in the “Inspection” Section of the “Inspection, Testing and Maintenance” Chapter in FNPA 72; retain the “Initial/Reacceptance” column and list only the installed components.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, apply power to control panel and confirm proper unit operation. Comply with “Test Methods” Table in the “Testing” Section of the “Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance” Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems Test:



1. Flow Test: Using nitrogen or other inert gas, perform a flow test on the piping network to verify that flow is continuous and unobstructed through piping and nozzles.

2. Pressure/Leak Test: pneumatically test the piping in a closed circuit for a period of 10 minutes at 40 psi (276 kPa). At the end of 10 minutes, the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 percent of the test pressure. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Room Pressurization Test: After all construction work is complete, conduct a room pressurization test in accordance with NFPA 2001 in each clean agent suppression system hazard area. Test shall confirm enclosures ability to retain the agent concentration level for the required hold time. If the test fails, the suppression system contractor shall coordinate room sealing with the general contractor. Additional tests shall be conducted until successful test results are achieved. Include final test results in project ‘Closeout Submittals’.

G. System will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports: Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the “Fire Alarm System Record of Completion” in the “Documentation” Section of the “Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems” Chapter in NFPA 72 and the “Inspection and Testing Form” in the “Records” Section of the “Inspection, Testing and Maintenance” Chapter in NFPA 72.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. [Train] Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the clean-agent fire-extinguishing systems.

3.11 SERVICE CONTRACT

A. Suppression system installing contractor shall provide two (2) inspections of the systems installed under this contract, during the manufacturer’s one-year warranty period. The first inspection shall be at the six month interval, and the second shall be at the twelve month interval after system acceptance.

B. Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s guidelines and the recommendations of NFPA 72 and NFPA 2001. Use forms provided in NFPA 72 for initial tests and inspections.

C. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.

3.12 WARRANTY

A. Clean Agent System manufacturer shall guarantee all components furnished under this contract against defects in design, materials, and workmanship for no less than one (1) year from the date of system acceptance.



DIVISION 22 TABLE OF CONTENTS 220000 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 220500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 220501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 220503 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 220519 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES SECTION 220523 - VALVES SECTION 220524 - PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 220529 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS SECTION 220700 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 221116 - PIPING AND FITTINGS SECTION 223600 - PLUMBING SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 225000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 229000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION


GENERAL PROVISIONS 220500-1

SECTION 220500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. All contract documents including drawings, alternates, addenda and modifications preceding this specification division are applicable to Mechanical Contractor and his Sub-Contractors, and material suppliers.

1.3 SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITIONS

A. These Specifications are abbreviated form and contain incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the contractor shall", "shall be", "as noted on the Drawings", "according to the drawings", "a", "an", "the" and "all" are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference.

B. Engineer wherever used in these specifications, shall mean LATIMER, SOMMERS & ASSOCIATES, P.A., 3639 SW SUMMERFIELD DRIVE, SUITE A, TOPEKA, KANSAS 66614, PHONE 785-233-3232, FAX 785-233-0647.

C. Contractor, wherever used in these specifications, shall mean any trade contractor that enters into contract with the Owner to perform this section of work.

D. When a word, such as "proper", "satisfactory", "equivalent", and "as directed", is used, it requires Engineer's review.

E. "Provide" means furnish and install. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The contractor(s) responsible for work under this section shall have completed a job of similar scope and magnitude within the last 3 years and be able to document such work upon request. The contractor(s) shall employ an experienced, competent and adequate work force licensed in their specific trade and properly supervised at all times. Commercial Mechanical Contracting shall be the company’s primary nature of business with a minimum of 3 years of commercial experience. Unlicensed workers and general laborers shall be adequately supervised to insure competent and quality work and workmanship required by this contract and all other regulations, codes and practices. At all times the contractor(s) shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal guidelines, practices and regulations. Contractor may be required to submit a statement of qualifications, pertaining to the type of work to be performed, upon request before any final approval and selection. Failure to be able to comply with these requirements is suitable reason for rejection of a bid whether acting as a prime or subcontractor.

1.5 LOCAL CONDITIONS

A. Visit site and determine existing local conditions affecting work in contract. Failure to determine site conditions or nature of existing or new construction will not be considered a basis for granting additional compensation.

1.6 CONTRACT CHANGES



A. Changes or deviations from contract, including those for extra or additional work must be

submitted in writing for review of Architect-Engineer. No verbal orders will be recognized.

1.7 LOCATIONS AND INTERFERENCES

A. Locations of equipment, piping and other mechanical work is indicate diagrammatically by mechanical drawings. Determine exact locations on job, subject to structural conditions, work of other Contractors, access requirements for installation and maintenance to approval of Architect-Engineer.

B. Study and become familiar with the contract drawings of other trades and in particular the general construction plans and details in order to obtain necessary information for figuring installation. Cooperate with other workmen and install work in such a way as to avoid interference with their work. Minor deviations, not affecting design characteristics, performance or space limitation may be permitted if reviewed prior to installation by Architect-Engineer.

C. Any pipe, apparatus, appliance or other item interfering with proper placement of other work as indicated on drawings, specified, or required, shall be removed and if so shown, relocated and reconnected without extra cost. Damage to other work caused by this Contractor, the Subcontractor, or workers shall be restored as specified for new work.

D. Do not scale mechanical and electrical drawings for dimensions. Accurately lay-out work from dimensions indicted on Architectural drawings unless such be found in error.

1.8 PERFORMANCE

A. Final acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that all systems, equipment, apparatus and appliances operate satisfactorily as designed and intended. Work shall include required adjustment of systems and control equipment installed under this specification division.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Contractor warrants to Owner and Architect the quality of materials, equipment, workmanship and operation of equipment provided under this specification division for a period of one year from and after completion of building and acceptance of mechanical systems by Owner.

B. Contractor warrants to Owner and Architect that on receipt of written notice from either of them within one year warranty period following date of acceptance that defects have appeared in materials and/or workmanship, will be promptly corrected to original condition required by contract documents at Contractor's expense.

C. The above warranty shall not supersede any separately stated warranty or other requirements required by law or by these specifications.

1.10 ALTERNATES

A. Refer to General Requirements for descriptions of any alternates which may be included.

1.11 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The intent of these specifications is to allow ample opportunity for Contractor to use his ingenuity and abilities to perform the work to his and the Owner's best advantage, and to permit maximum competition in bidding on standards of materials and equipment required.

B. Material and equipment installed under this contract shall be first class quality, new, unused and without damage. In general, these specifications identify required materials and equipment by naming one or more manufacturer's brand, model, catalog number and/or other identification. The



first named manufacturer or product is used as the basis for design; other manufacturers named must furnish products consistent with specifications of first named product as determined by Engineer. Base bid proposal shall be based only on materials and equipment by manufacturers named, except as hereinafter provided.

C. Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required items of first quality, adequate in every respect for intended use. Such items shall be submitted to Architect-Engineer for review prior to procurement.

D. Materials and equipment proposed for substitutions shall be equal to or superior to that specified in construction, efficiency utility, aesthetic design, and color as determined by Architect-Engineer whose decision shall be final and without further recourse. Physical size of substitute brand shall be no larger than space provided including allowances for access for installation and maintenance. Requests must be accompanied by two copies of complete descriptive and technical data including manufacturer's name, model and catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions, operating characteristics and any other information needed for comparison.

If the Contractor wishes to incorporate products other than those named in the Base Bid Specifications they shall submit a request for approval of equivalency in writing no later than (10) ten calendar days prior to bid date. Substitutions after this may be refused at Engineers option. Equivalents will ONLY be considered approved when listed by addendum.

E. In proposing a substitution prior to or subsequent to receipt of bids, include in such bid cost of altering other elements of project, including adjustments in mechanical electrical service requirements necessary to accommodate such substitution; whether such affected elements to this contract or under separate contracts.

F. Within 10 working days after bids are received, apparent low bidder shall submit to Architect-Engineer for approval three copies of a list of all major items of equipment he intends to provide. As soon as practicable and within 30 working days after award of Contract, Contractor shall submit shop drawings for equipment and materials to be incorporated in work, for Architect-Engineer review. Where 30 day limit is insufficient for preparation of detailed shop drawings on major equipment or assemblies, Contractor shall submit manufacturer's descriptive catalog data and indicate date such detailed shop drawings will be submitted along with manufacturer's certification that order was placed within 30 working day limit.

1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of six sets of shop drawings of all materials and equipment. Architect-Engineer will retain three sets.

B. Contractor shall submit two sets of blue line prints of all fabrication drawings. Cost of drawing preparation, printing and distribution shall be paid for by contractor and included in his base bid.

C. Where catalog cuts are submitted for review, conspicuously mark or provide schedule of equipment, capacities, controls, fitting sizes, etc., that are to be provided. Mark each submitted item with applicable section and paragraph numbers of these specifications, or plan sheet number when item does not appear in specifications. Where equipment submitted does not appear in base specifications or specified equivalent, mark submittals with applicable alternate numbers, change order number or letters of authorization. Each submittal shall contain at least two sets of original catalog cuts. Each catalog sheet shall bear E/M's name and address. All shop drawings on materials and equipment listed by UL shall indicate UL approval on submittal.

D. Contractor shall check all shop drawings to verify that they meet specifications and/or drawings requirements before forwarding submittals to the Architect-Engineer for their review. All shop drawings submitted to Architect-Engineer shall bear contractor's approval stamp which shall indicate that Contractor has reviewed submittals and that they meet specification and/or drawing



requirements. Contractor's submittal review shall specifically check for but not be limited to the following: equipment capacities, physical size in relation to space allowed; electrical characteristics, provisions for supply, return and drainage connections to building systems. All shop drawings not meeting Contractor's approval shall be returned to his supplier for re-submittal.

E. No shop drawing submittals will be considered for review by the Architect-Engineer without Contractor's approval stamp, or that have extensive changes made on the original submittal as a result of Contractor's review .

F. Architect-Engineer will not be responsible for or the cost of returning shop drawing submittals that are submitted to them without Contractor's review and approval stamp.

G. Architect-Engineer's review of shop drawings will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviations from drawings and specifications unless such deviations have been specifically approved in writing by Owner or his representative, nor shall it relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors in shop drawings. No work shall be fabricated until Architect-Engineer's review has been obtained. Any time delay caused by correcting and resubmitting shop drawings will be Contractor's responsibility.

1.13 CAD FILES

A. CAD files will not be available.

1.14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit with shop drawings of equipment, four copies of installation, operating, maintenance

instructions, and parts lists for equipment provided. Instructions shall be prepared by equipment manufacturer.

B. Keep in safe place, keys and wrenches furnished with equipment under this contract. Present to

Owner and obtain receipt for same upon completion of project.

C. Prepare a complete brochure, covering systems and equipment provided and installed under this contract. Submit brochures to Architect-Engineer for review before delivery to Owner. Contractor at his option may prepare this brochure or retain an individual to prepare it for him. Include cost of this service in bid. Brochures shall contain following:

1. Certified equipment drawings/or catalog data with equipment provided clearly marked as outlined above.

2. Complete installation, operating, maintenance instructions and parts lists for each item of equipment.

3. Special emergency operating instructions with a list of service organizations (including addresses and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency service to various parts of mechanical system.

4. As-builts: The Contractor shall mark up a set of contract documents during construction all changes and deviations including change orders. These will be delivered to Architect at the end of the project. After the originals are changed to reflect the blue line set, a copy shall be included in the brochure.

D. Provide brochures bound in three-ring binders with metal hinge. Reinforce binding edge of each sheet of looseleaf type brochure to prevent tearing from continued usage. Clearly print on label insert of each brochure:

1. Project name and address.

2. Section of work covered by brochure, i.e., "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning", and "Plumbing", etc.




A. Contractor shall do cutting and patching of building materials required for installation of work herein specified. Cut no structural members without Architect's approval and in a manner approved by him.

B. Patching shall be by mechanics of particular trade involved and shall meet approval of Architect.

C. Drilling and cutting of openings through building materials requires Architect's review and approval. Make openings in concrete with concrete hole saw or concrete drill. Use of star drill or air hammer for this work will not be permitted.

1.16 MUTILATION

A. Mutilation of building finishes, caused by installation of mechanical work shall be repaired at Mechanical Contractor's expense to approval of Architect.

1.17 SETTING, ADJUSTMENT AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Work shall include mounting, alignment and adjustment of systems and equipment. Set equipment level on adequate foundation and provide proper anchor bolts and isolation as shown, specified or required by manufacturers in installation instructions. Level, shim and grout equipment bases as recommended by manufacturer. Mount motors, align and adjust drive shafts and belts according to manufacturers instructions. Equipment failures resulting from improper installation or field alignment shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide floor or slab mounted equipment with 3-1/2" high concrete bases unless specified otherwise. Mechanical contractor shall form all pads, General contractor shall provide and place all concrete and reinforcing for said pads. Individual concrete pad shall be no less than 4" wider and 4" longer than equipment, and shall extend no less than 2" from each side of equipment.

C. Provide each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor level with suitable structural support, platform or carrier in accordance with best recognized practice. Verify that structural members of buildings are adequate to support equipment and unless otherwise indicated on plans or specified, arrange for their inclusion and attachment to building structure. Provide hangers with vibration isolators where required.

D. Submit details of hangers, platforms and supports together with total weights of mounted equipment to Architect-Engineer for review before proceeding with fabrication or installation.

1.18 START-UP, CHANGEOVER, TRAINING AND OPERATIONAL CHECK

A. Contractor shall perform initial start-up of systems and equipment and shall provide necessary supervision and labor to make first seasonal changeover of systems. Personnel qualified to start-up and service this equipment, including manufacturers technicians when specified, and Owner's operating personnel shall be present during these operations.

B. Factory start-up and associated reports completed by factory representative(s) shall be submitted for all major mechanical equipment including but not limited to boilers, chillers, water heaters, air handlers, FMS system, electronic faucets, slab heating system, kitchen hood make-up air unit, and VFD’s. Reference specifications where applicable.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for training Owner's operating personnel to operate and maintain systems and equipment installed. Keep a record of training provided to Owner's personnel listing the date, subject covered, instructors name, names of Owner's personnel attending and total hours of instruction given each individual.

D. All owner-training sessions shall be orderly and well organized and shall be video taped using CD-ROM format. At the end of the owner training, the "CD" shall become property of the owner.



1.19 FINAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW

A. At final construction review, each respective Contractor and major subcontractors shall be present or shall be represented by a person of authority. Each Contractor shall demonstrate, as directed by Architect/Engineer, that work complies with purpose and intent of plans and specifications. Respective Contractor shall provide labor, services, instruments or tools necessary for such demonstrations and tests.

1.20 OPENINGS, ACCESS PANELS AND SLEEVES

A. This Contractor shall include the installation of all boxes, access panels and sleeves for openings required to install this work, except structural openings incorporated in the structural drawings. Sleeves shall be installed for all pipes passing through structural slabs and walls. Contractor shall set and verify the location of sleeves as shown on structural plans that pass through beams. All floor penetrations shall be sealed to meet fire-rating requirements.



EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES 220501 - 1

SECTION 220501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES

PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 220500)

1.1 GENERAL

A. Provide mechanical systems indicated on drawings, specified or reasonably implied. Provide every device and accessory necessary for proper operation and completion of mechanical systems. In no case will claims for "Extra Work" be allowed for work about which Contractor could have been informed before bids were taken.

B. Contractor shall become familiar with equipment provided by other contractors which require mechanical connections and controls.

C. Electrical work required to install and control mechanical equipment which is not shown on plans or specified under Division 26 shall be included in Contractor's base bid proposal. All temperature control wiring shall be by temperature control contractor.

D. All automatic temperature control devices shall be mounted as indicated in automatic temperature control section of specifications.

E. The cost of larger wiring, conduit, control and protective devices resulting from installation of equipment which was not used for basis of design as outlined in specifications shall be paid for by Mechanical Contractor at no cost to Owner or Architect-Engineer.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for providing supervision to Electrical Contractor to insure that required connections, interlocking and interconnection of mechanical and electrical equipment are made to attain intended control sequences and system operation.

G. Furnish four complete sets of electrical wiring diagrams to Architect-Engineer to be included in the maintenance manuals and three complete sets to Electrical Contractor. Diagrams shall show factory and field wiring of components and controls. Control devices and field wiring to be provided by Electrical Contractor shall be clearly indicated by notation and drawing symbols on wiring diagrams.

H. Contractor shall obtain complete electrical data on mechanical shop drawings and shall list this data on an approved form which shall be presented monthly or on request, to Electrical Contractor. Data shall be complete with wiring diagrams received to date and shall contain necessary data on electrical components of mechanical equipment such as HP, voltage, amperes, watts, locked rotor current to allow Electrical Contractor to order electrical equipment required in his contract.

I. Discrepancies within the plans or between specifications and plans shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to bid, otherwords pricing shall be based on higher quantity, quality and/or higher cost indication.

1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN CONTRACT

A. Consult Division 26 of specifications for work to be provided by Electrical Contractor in conjunction with installation of mechanical equipment.

B. Safety disconnect switches and manual and magnetic motor starters shall be provided by Electrical Contractor. Exceptions will be allowed where mechanical equipment is provided with these devices installed as part of factory built control systems.



1.3 CODES, RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. Provide Work in accordance with applicable codes, rules and regulations of Local and State, Federal Governments and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction.

B. Conform to latest editions and supplements of following codes, standards or recommended practices.

UNIFORM CODES:

Refer to Code Plan Sheet for Building Codes and additional applicable codes.

SAFETY CODES:

National Electrical Safety Code Handbook H30 - National Bureau of Standards. Occupational Safety and Health Standard (OSHA) - Department of Labor.

NATIONAL FIRE CODES:

NFPA No. 14 Standard for the installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems

NFPA No. 54 Gas Appliance & Gas Piping Installation NFPA No. 70 National Electrical Code NFPA No. 89M Clearances, Heat Producing Appliances NFPA No. 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA No. 91 Blower & Exhaust System NFPA No. 101 Life Safety Code NFPA No. 204 Smoke & Heating Vent Guide

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC:

All materials, equipment and component parts of equipment shall bear UL labels whenever such devices are listed by UL.

MISCELLANEOUS CODES:

ANSI A117.1 - Handicapped Accessibility Kansas Maximum Lighting Standards Kansas Thermal Standards ASHRAE 90-1-2010 Kansas State Boiler Code

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

C. Drawings and specifications indicate minimum construction standard. Should any work indicated be sub-standard to any ordinances, laws, codes, rules or regulations bearing on work, Contractor shall promptly notify Architect-Engineer in writing before proceeding with work so that necessary changes can be made. However, if Contractor proceeds with work knowing it to be contrary to any ordinances, laws, rules, and regulations, Contractor shall thereby have assumed full responsibility for and shall bear all costs required to correct non-complying work.

D. Contractor shall secure and pay for necessary permits and certificates of inspection required by



governmental ordinances, laws, rules or regulations. Keep a written record of all permits and inspection certificates and submit two copies to Architect-Engineer with request for final inspection.

E. Contractor shall include in bid any charges by local utility providers to establish new services to the structure. Coordinate with the utility suppliers to verify exact which part of the work is to be performed by whom.



BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220503 - 1

SECTION 220503 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 – GENERAL (Reference Section 220500)

1.1 TESTING PROCEDURES FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Test all lines and systems before they are insulated, painted or concealed by construction or backfilling. Provide fuel, water, electricity, materials, labor and equipment required for tests.

B. Where entire system cannot be tested before concealment, test system in sections. Upon completion, each system shall be tested as an entire system.

C. Repair or replace defects, leaks and material failures revealed by tests and then retest until satisfactory. Make repairs with new materials.

D. Verify that system components are rated for maximum test pressures to be applied. Where specified test pressures exceed component, ratings remove or isolate components from system during tests.

E. Exposed piping and/or insulated piping shall be painted.

1.2 TEST METHODS AND PRESSURES

A. Test methods and pressures shall be as follows:

1. Hydrostatic Test (Closed Systems): a. Hydrostatic test shall be performed using clean unused domestic water. Test

pressures shall be as scheduled for system or 150% of operating pressure where not specified.

2. Hydrostatic Test (Open System): a. Test entire system with 10 foot head of water. Where system is

tested in sections each joint in building except uppermost 10 feet of system shall be submitted to at least 10 foot head of water. Water shall be held in system for 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall hold test pressure without leaks.

3. Pneumatic Test: a. Test entire system with compressed air. Systems operating

above 25 PSI shall be tested at 75 PSI or 15% of operating pressure or whichever is greater. Allow at least 1 hour after test pressure has been applied before making initial test.

b. Curing test, completely isolate entire system from compressor or other sources of air pressure.

4. Pressure Relief and Safety Valve: a. Before installation, test pressure temperature, and safety relief

valves to confirm relief settings comply with specifications. b. Tag items that pass test with date of test, observed relief

pressure setting and inspector's signature. c. Items installed in systems without test tag attached will be

rejected.

B. All systems shall hold scheduled test pressures for specified time without loss of initial test pressure.

C. Upon completion of testing submit five copies of a typewritten report to A/E. Report shall list



systems tested, test methods, test pressures, holding time and all failures with corrective action taken.

D. For test pressure schedules see Sections 221116 of this specification.

1.3 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS

A. After final pressure testing of distribution system thoroughly flush entire system with water until free of dirt and construction debris. Fill system with solution of liquid chlorine or hypochlorite of not less that 50 PPM. Retain treated water in system until test indicates non-spore-forming bacteria have been destroyed or for 24 hours whichever is greater.

B. All points in systems shall have at least 10 PPM of solution at end of retention period. Open and close each valve at least six times in system during sterilization process to sterilize valve parts.

C. When time and concentration conditions have been met, drain system and flush with fresh domestic water until residual cleaning solution is less than 1.0 PPM. Open and close each valve in system six times during flushing operation.

D. Test samples taken from several points in shall system indicate absence of pollution for two full days. Repeat sterilization as required. Acceptance of system will not be given until satisfactory bacteriological results are obtained.

1.4 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

A. After pressure testing of systems and equipment and before operational test thoroughly clean interiors of piping and equipment. Clean equipment as recommended by equipment manufacturers. Where specific instructions are not provided clean equipment systems as follows:

1. Air Handling Systems: Before starting any air system clean all debris, foreign matter and construction dirt from air system and fan. Provide equipment requiring filters, such as air handling units, fan coil units, blower, etc., with throw-away filters. After cleaning air system install temporary filters and run continuously for a minimum of eight hours at full volume before installing permanent filters. Provide temporary throw-away filters in all permanent heating and air conditioning equipment systems being utilized during construction. Prior to testing and balancing systems remove temporary filter media and install clean unused filters of the type specified. Clean filters shall be installed in equipment for final acceptance inspection by Architect and Engineer.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for operation, maintenance and lubrication of equipment installed under this contract.

B. Keep a complete record of equipment maintenance and lubrication and submit two copies with request for final construction review.

C. Records shall indicate types of lubricants used and date or time when next maintenance or lubrication will need to be performed by Owner. Where special lubricants are required, Contractor shall provide Owner with a one year supply as determine by Equipment Manufacturer's recommendations.

1.6 PAINTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT



A. Touch-up painting and refinishing of factory applied finishes shall be by Mechanical Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining proper type of painting materials and color from equipment manufacturer.

B. Unless specified otherwise factory built equipment shall be factory painted. Paint shall be applied over surfaces only after they have been properly cleaned and coated with a corrosion resistant primer.

C. After installation, damage to painted surfaces shall be properly prepared and primed with primers equal to factory materials. Finish coating shall be same color and type as factory finish.

D. Where extensive refinishing is required equipment shall be completely repainted.

1.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows at both ends of marker showing normal direction of flow. Directional arrows shall cover full circumference of pipe. Markers shall be sized for respective pipe/insulation sizes per ASME and ANSI.

B. Marker Type: Vinyl tape type markers (Seton or equal) complying with ASME Al3.1, ANSI and OSHA.

C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 6 inches OD by one of

following methods:

1. Snap-on application of pretensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 4. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not

less than 3/4-inch wide, lapped a minimum of 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 6 inches in diameter and larger by one of following methods:

1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 2. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2

inches wide, lapped a minimum of 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

3. Strapped to pipe or insulation with manufacturer's standard stainless-steel bands.

E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-concealed locations according to the following:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or non-accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced

markers.



F. Submit all labeling systems for review indicating labels, arrows, colors, size to be used for each piping system.

1.8 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Mark all valves with Seton No. 300-BL brass identification tags with system legend, valve number and size stamped on tag. Lettering shall be black 1/2" high. Tags shall be minimum 2" in diameter and attached to valve with Seton No. 16 brass jack chain.

B. Prepare four copies of typewritten list of valve tags. List shall be typed in upper case and contain tag number, valve size, type, function and location. Frame one list under glass and mount near operating instruction in main equipment rooms.

1.9 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Perform necessary excavation to receive Work. Provide necessary sheathing, shoring, cribbing, tarpaulins, etc. for this operation, and remove same at completion of work. Perform excavation in accordance with appropriate section of these specifications, and in compliance with OSHA Safety Standards.

B. Excavate trenches of sufficient width to allow ample working space, and no deeper than necessary for installation work.

C. Conduct excavations so no walls or footings are disturbed or injured. Backfill excavations made under or adjacent to footing with selected earth or sand and tamp to compaction required by Architect-Engineer. Mechanically tamp backfill under concrete and paving in six inch layers to 95% standard density, Reference Division 2.

D. Backfill trenches and excavations to required heights with allowance made for settlement. Tamp fill material thoroughly and moistened as required for specified compaction density. Dispose of excess earth, rubble and debris as directed by Architect.

E. When available, refer to test hole information on Architectural drawings or specifications for types of soil to be encountered in excavations.

1.10 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RELATED WALL/FLOOR ASSEMBLIES

A. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate their through penetrating items. All voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through, shall be firestopped to meet the requirements of ASTM E-814.



THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES 220519 - 1

SECTION 220519 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES

A. Provide thermometers and wells and pressure test plugs as hereinafter specified and shown on the plans so that proper testing and balancing and trouble shooting can be accomplished.

2.2 THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometers shall be red reading mercury-free type having scale length of not less than 9", and scale divisions of 2 degrees F, or less similar and approved equal to Moeller Instrument Company, Inc., Style AJ. Range shall be as specified or as required for the duty. Thermometers and wells must be of at least the quality and design specified. If it complies with these specifications, equipment manufactured by one of the following manufacturers will be acceptable: Moeller, Trerice, Weksler, or Miljoco.

2.3 GAUGES

A. Gauges shall be bourdon tube with minimum 4-1/2" dial and die cast aluminum case with black enamel finish. The movement shall be all stainless steel with Grade A phosphor bronze bourdon tube brazed at socket and tip. The accuracy of the gauge shall be within 1/2 percent of the scale range. The pointer shall be the micrometer adjustment type recalibrated from the front. Pressure, compound, and differential pressure gauges shall have suitable scale ranges, shall be submitted and are subject to the review of the Engineer. Graduations shall be one pound or less on all gauges where this is standard for the required range.

B. Gauges shall have 1/4" IPS connections and shall be Moeller "Vantage" gauges with Case Style No. 2, or approved equal. If it complies with these specifications, equipment manufactured by one of the following manufacturers will be acceptable: Ashcroft, Marsh, Trerice, Moeller, Weksler, Taylor, Weiss, Midwest, or Miljoco.

C. Install a SISCO 1/4" or 1/2" NPT fitting (Test Plug) of solid brass at desired indicated locations. Test plug shall be capable of receiving either a pressure or temperature probe 1/8" o.d. Dual seal core shall be neoprene for temperature to 200oF and shall be rated zero leakage from vacuum to 1000 psig.

D. Contractor shall also furnish the following: (2) two 2 1/2" test gauges with appropriate adapters for test plugs, (2) two 5" stem pocket testing thermometers for 0o to 125oF range and (2) two for 0o to 220oF range.

E. Provide glycerin filled gauges as shown on the plans.

2.4 THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometers shall be installed as hereinafter specified. Where thermometer is scheduled, a thermometer well shall be provided. All thermometer wells shall be constructed of brass or stainless steel and where installed in insulated piping shall have at least 2-1/2" lagging extension. Gauges shall be installed as hereinafter specified. Gauge cocks shall be polished brass A10 1/4" tee handle type with threaded ends. 125 psi rated. Provide gauge cock with 1/4" pipe nipple for connection to gauge cock.

B. Pressure temperature ratings of each well shall be suitable for the system in which it is installed in accordance with specifications and as indicated on the drawings. All wells shall be filled with Silicon and be complete with caps and chains.

C. Thermometers shall have the temperature ranges as required for the intended application and



shall be installed as scheduled.

Thermometer & Test Gauge Cock Installation Schedule (Refer to plans for location and additional locations)

Thermometer Press Gauge Pete's Plug & Well & Gauge Cock

Domestic hot water supply X Domestic cold water service Domestic HW expansion tank

DHW return X X

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All thermometers shall be calibrated using an ice-water bath. Wells shall be packed with thermal mastic.



VALVES 220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 – VALVES


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install necessary valves within piping systems to provide required flow control and to allow isolation for inspection, maintenance and repair of each piece of equipment or fixture, and on each main and branch service loop.

B. Valves installed in piping systems shall be compatible with system maximum test pressure, pipe materials, pipe joining method, and fluid or gas conveyed in system.

C. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall have soldered or screwed end connections are required by piping materials unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings. Install union connection in the line within two feet of each screw end valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from line. Valves 3" and over shall have flange end connections.

D. Each valve shall be installed so that it is easily accessible for operation, visual inspection, and maintenance.

E. Non-rising stem valves shall not be installed at any point in the piping systems. With permission of Architect-Engineer non-rising stem valve may be installed at particular points where space is restricted.

F. Provide 6" and below butterfly valves with latchlock handles for On-Off applications and with Twist-Lock infinite position handle for throttling applications.

G. Install globe valves with pressure on top of disc except that must be completely drained for inspection, maintenance or to prevent freezing shall be installed with stem in horizontal position to insure complete drainage of pipe lines.

H. Gate valves shall not be installed in pipe lines where intended for throttling service or where piping is subject to vibration as part of normal operating conditions.

I. Valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened and backseated.

J. Equivalent valves listed on current comparison charts of specified valve manufacturers by Crane, Centerline, Dyna Quip, Demco, Hammond, Jenkins, Jamesbury, Keystone, or Powell will be acceptable.

2.2 BALL VALVES

A. Ball valves shall be scheduled as type "BLV" valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

B. Provide ball handle with extension or off-set as required to clear piping insulation.

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION

BLV-1 2-1/2" valves and smaller, Apollo #77-100 series bronze full port ball valve 600 PSI-WOG, teflon seats, bronze ball, silicon bronze stem, insulated handle with 1" extension, screwed or solder ends. Reinforced TFE seats shall be provided for steam applications.


VALVES 220523 - 2

2.3 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe valves shall be scheduled as type "GLV" valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:


GLV-1 2-1/2" valves and smaller Stockham Fig. B-24 bronze globe valve, 300 PSI-WOG, union bonnet, rising stem, teflon disc, solder end.

2.4 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug valves shall be scheduled as type PLV valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:


PLV-1 1" valves and smaller Hays 7400 series iron body gas cock, 175 PSI-WOG bronze plug washer and nut, screwed ends.

PLV-2 1-1/4" thru 4" valves, Rockwell-Nordstrom Fig. 142, semi-steel lubricated plug valve, 175 PSI-WOG coated plug, two bolt cover, short pattern screwed ends. Provide complete with standard pattern cast handle.

2.5 CHECK VALVES

A. Check valves shall be scheduled as type "SCV" valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:


SCV-1 2" valves and smaller Stockham Fig. No. B-310T or B-320T bronze check valve, 125 PSI-WOG, spring, brass stem, teflon disc and seat ring, screwed or solder ends as required.

SCV-2 2-1/2" and larger Muessco #101-DT iron body stainless steel trim check valve 150 PSI-ASA with flanged ends.

2.6 BALANCING VALVES

A. Balancing valves shall be scheduled at Type "BAV" valves. Contractor shall provide bronze balancing valves with provisions for connecting differential pressure meter for purposes of setting flow rate through valve. Contractor shall install balancing valves in a manner that allows access to the setting indicator and the gauge connections. Valves shall be shipped in polyurethane block to be used as insulation. Valves shall be as follows:


BAV-1 1/2" thru 6" Armstrong Model CBV 1 or CBV 11 circuit balance valve, 125 PSI-WP at 250 degrees F., meter connections with built-in check valves screwed or flanged ends. Provide complete with polyurethane insulation cover.

B. Balancing valves shall utilize a variable orifice for setting and adjustment. Fixed venturis or orifices are not acceptable. The valves shall be sized to provide a minimum of 1 PSI pressure drop at design flow with the valve in the wide open position. The submittal shall include the device curve or pressure drop chart indicating the operating point of the BAV.


VALVES 220523 - 3

2.7 DOMESTIC WATER AUTO FLOW VALVE


DAFV-1 1/2 and 3/4” [15 and 20mm] Victaulic “ICSS” SERIES 76X : Designed specifically for use in drinking water applications, NSF/ANSI 61-G rated for commercial hot water service (temperature rated to 180F), and certified by the NSF with all wetted parts stainless steel; lead-free construction in compliance with ANS/NSF-372; Series 300 stainless steel body, nickel plated brass union nut, and tamper-resistant flow cartridge 300 series stainless steel. Valve shall be suitable for maximum flow of 12 gallons per minute, and flow rate pre-set accuracy variation of +/-5% over 95% of the control range. Valves shall have a full body rating of 400 psi, but is suitable for working pressures with differential control ranges of 2 - 32 psi or 5 - 60 psi differential. All wetted parts shall comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 372 for minimal lead content. Compact in-line design for tight installations.

VALVE SCHEDULE

SYSTEM SIZE STOP CHECK BALANCE AUTOFLOW VALVE

Domestic Water 1/2"-3" BLV-1 SCV-1 BAV-1 DAFV-1



PIPING SPECIALTIES 220524 - 1

SECTION 220524 - PIPING SPECIALTIES


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATING UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Provide insulating unions and flanges conforming to following specifications and plainly and permanently marked with manufacturers name and pressure class rating. Unions and flanges shall be as follows:

1. Steel pipe to steel pipe screwed end: Provide Stockham malleable iron No. 693-1/2 insulating union with high dielectric strength insulating sleeve and gasket.

2. Steel pipe to steel pipe flanged end: Provide two weld neck flanges of proper pressure rating insulated on both sides with Central or Klingerit Flange Insulation Kit.

3. Iron or steel pipe to copper pipe: Provide Epco Dielectric union or flange with screwed or solder joint as required. Union shall have 250 PSI rating and flange 175 PSI rating at 190 degrees F.

2.2 STRAINERS

A. Install strainers upstream from automatic control valves, steam traps and pumps. Where strainers are an integral part of these items or incorporated in accessory equipment directly upstream, individual line strainers will not be required. Strainers shall be same size as piping. Provide strainers with proper isolation and blow down valves to allow basket removal for cleaning.

1. General: Provide Zurn "Y" type self-cleaning strainers with FIPT blow-off outlet, flanged or screwed end with pressure rating as required by piping system. Provide strainers with removable stainless steel screens with perforations as follows: Service 1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 8

Air .0027 .005 Fuel Oil .005 1/16 Water .005 1/16

B. Equivalent strainers by Armstrong, Dunham Bush, Musseco, Trane, Paget or Yarway.

2.3 UNIONS

A. Provide unions or flanged joint in each line preceding connections to equipment or valves requiring maintenance.

B. Provide Stockham brass seat unions of material and pressure rating required by piping system.

C. Where piping systems of dissimilar materials are jointed together provide proper insulating union as specified under this specification.

D. Equivalent unions by Fairbanks or Grinnell.



2.4 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES

A. Provide in-line triple duty valves in locations shown on plans. Valves shall be capable of providing flow balancing, flow check and positive shut-off. Valve shall have memory bank valve plug. Valves shall be Bell & Gossett triple duty valve.

B. Equivalent valve by Armstrong, Taco, Armtrol, Patterson, Bell & Gossett.

2.5 MANUAL AIR VENTS

A. Provide air vents at all high points of chilled and hot water systems of each water coil, drop in pipe against flow of water and where indicated on plans or required by job conditions.

B. Air vents shall be 1/4" copper drain line with a 1/4" Marsh tee handle cock in air vent line located in an accessible unfinished area. Where air vent above ceilings cannot be made accessible to an exposed location, a 12 x 12 access panel shall be provided at drain cock.

C. Equivalent air vents by Taco, Bell & Gossett, Armstrong.

2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS

A. Provide where shown on plans Watts Series 909 reduced pressure backflow preventor complete with strainers and valves. Provide check valve ahead of backflow preventors.

B. Equivalent backflow preventors by Febco, Lawler.

2.7 EXPANSION TANKS

A. The expansion tank shall be welded steel, constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Code for a working pressure of 125 psi and pre-charged to the minimum operating pressure.

B. Provide expansion tanks as shown on plans. Equivalent: Armstrong, Amtrol, Patterson, Bell & Gossett.



SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE SLEEVES AND SEALS

A. Furnish proper type and size pipe sleeves to General Contractor for installation in concrete or masonry walls or floors. Sleeves are not required for supply and waste piping through wall supporting plumbing fixtures or for cast iron soil pipe passing through concrete slab or grade except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor. Mechanical Contractor shall supervise installation of sleeves to insure proper location and installation.

B. Each sleeve shall be continuous through wall floor or roof and shall be cut flush on each side except where indicated otherwise. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural member except where indicated or approved.

C. Sleeves passing through above grade floors subject to flooding such as toilet rooms, bathrooms, equipment rooms and kitchens shall be cast iron with integral flanges and shall extend 1 inch above finished floor. Size sleeves for and seal space between pipe sleeve with Thunderline Link-Seal.

D. Provide steel pipe sleeves in bearing walls and masonry walls. Opening in non-bearing walls, floors and ceilings may be 20 gauge galvanized pipe sleeves or openings cut with concrete core drill.

E. Pipe insulation shall run continuous through pipe sleeves with 1/4" minimum clearance between insulation and pipe sleeve. Provide metal jackets over insulated pipes passing through fire walls, floors and smoke partitions. Jacket shall be 0.018 stainless steel extending 12 inches on either side of barrier and secured to insulation with 3/8" wide band. Seal annular space between jacket and pipe sleeves with Thunderline High Temperature Link Seal.

F. Pipe wall penetrations exposed to view shall have tight fitting escutcheons or flanges to cover all voids around openings.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide and be responsible for locations of piping hangers, supports and inserts, etc., required for installation of piping under this contract. Design of hangers and supports shall conform to current issue of Manufacturers Standardization Society Specification (MSS) SP-58.

B. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting piping in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into pipe or connected equipment. Support horizontal or vertical pipes at locations of least vertical movement.

C. Where horizontal piping movements are such that hanger rod angularity from vertical is greater than 4 degrees from cold to hot position of pipe, offset hanger, pipe, and structural attachments to that rod is vertical in hot position. Hangers shall not become disengaged by movements of supported pipe.

D. Provide sufficient hangers to adequately support piping system at specified spacing, at changes in piping direction and at concentrated loads. Hangers shall provide for vertical adjustment to maintain pitch required for proper drainage, and for longitudinal travel due to expansion and contraction of piping. Fasten hangers to building structural members wherever practicable.



E. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings support horizontal steel piping as follows:

PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING

Up to 1-1/4" 3/8" 8 Ft. 1-1/2" to 2" 3/8" 10 Ft. 2-1/2" to 3-1/2" 1/2" 12 Ft. 4" and 5" 5/8" 15 Ft.

F. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings support horizontal copper tubing as follows:

NOM. TUBING SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING Up to 1" 3/8" 6 Ft. 1-1/4" to 1-1/2" 3/8" 8 Ft. 2" 3/8" 9 Ft. 2-1/2" 1/2" 9 Ft. 3" and 4" 1/2" 10 Ft.

G. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe with two hangers for each section located close to each hub.

H. Support vertical cast iron soil pipe at every floor, steel and copper tubing at every other floor except where indicated otherwise on drawings.

I. Provide continuous threaded hanger rods wherever possible. No chain, wire, or perforated straps shall be used. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only, where lateral or axial pipe movement occurs provide suitable linkage to permit swing. Provide pipe support channels with galvanized finish for concealed locations and painted finish for exposed locations. Submit design for multiple pipe supports indicating pipe sizes, service and support detail to Architect/Engineer for review prior to fabrication.

J. Provide Grinnell pipe hangers for vertical pipe risers as follows:

PIPE MATERIAL PIPE SIZE HANGER FIG. NO. Copper 1/2" thru 4" CT-121 Steel 3/4" thru 20" 261

K. Provide Grinnell Fig. 194, 195, or 199 steel wall brackets for piping suspended or supported from walls. Brackets shall be prime coated carbon steel.

L. Mount hangers for insulated piping on outside of pipe insulation sized to allow for full thickness of pipe insulation. Provide Grinnell Fig. 167 insulation protection shields sized so that line compressive load does not exceed one-third of insulation compressive strength. Shield shall be galvanized steel and support lower 180 degrees of pipe insulation on copper tubing. Provide wood block at each pipe hanger in thickness of insulation. Insulation vapor barrier jacket shall overlap wood block to maintain vapor barrier.

M. Structural attachments for pipe hangers shall be as follows:

Concrete Structure: Provide Grinnell Fig. No. 285 cast in concrete insert for loads up to 400 lbs. and Grinnell Fig. 281 wedge cast in type concrete insert for loads up to 1200 lbs.



N. Provide Grinnell CLEVIS pipe hangers for horizontal single pipe runs as follows:

PIPE MATERIAL PIPE SIZE HANGER FIG. NO. Copper 1/2" thru 4" CT-65 Steel 3/8" thru 4" 65 Steel 5" thru 30" 260

O. Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 600 channel trapeze pipe hangers for horizontal multiple pipe runs with pipe clamps or pipe rollers as follows:

PIPE MATERIALS PIPE SIZE CLAMP NO. ROLLER NO. Copper 3/8" thru 4" 8600 CP* 8010 CP* Steel 3/8" thru 6" 8500 8010

*Copper Plated

P. Pipe supports for horizontal piping mounted on pipe racks or stanchions shall be Advanced Thermal Systems low friction graphite slide supports or equivalent by Elcen or Grinnell. Where racks and supports are not detailed on drawings submit detailed support drawings to Architect-Engineer for review prior to fabrication.

Q. Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 404 vibration control hangers at locations where piping vibrations would be transmitted to building structure by conventional hangers. Apply hangers within their load supporting range.

R. Provide Elcen Fig. 50 pipe saddle with adjuster to support piping from floor. Provide complete with pedestal type floor stand.

S. Provide necessary structural steel and attachment accessories for installations of pipe hangers and supports. Where heavy piping loads are to be attached to building structure verify structural loading with Architect-Engineer prior to installations.

T. Equivalent hangers and supports by Auto-Grip, Basic Engineer, Bee Line, Elcen, Fee & Mason, Fluorocarbon Company, Unistrut or Super Strut Inc.

2.3 EQUIPMENT ANCHORS

A. Provide floor or foundation mounted equipment such as pumps, boilers, air handling units, etc. with Decatur Engineering Company concrete anchors.

B. Where equipment anchors cannot be installed during forming of floors or foundations anchor equipment with McCulloch Kwik-Bolt concrete anchors.

C. Anchors shall be proper type and size recommended by manufacturer for equipment to be anchored.



PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION 220700 - 1

SECTION 220700 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Reference Section 220500)

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide necessary materials and accessories for installation of insulation for plumbing and mechanical systems as specified and/or detailed on drawings insulation type, jacket, and thickness for specific piping systems or equipment shall be as listed in insulation schedule. Provide insulation materials manufactured by Armstrong Industries, Dow Chemical, Schuller, Knauf Fiberglass or Owens-Corning Fiberglas.

B. Insulation, except where specified otherwise, shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as rested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 procedures not exceeding:

FLAME SPREAD 25 SMOKE DEVELOPED 50 FUEL CONTRIBUTED 50

C. Provide insulation accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tape and glass fabric with same component ratings as listed above. Products or their shipping cartons shall bear label indicating their flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. Use of water soluble treatments such as corn paste or wheat paste is prohibited. This does not exclude approved lagging adhesives.

D. Install insulation over clean dry surfaces with joints firmly butted together. Insulation at equipment, flanges, fittings, etc. shall have straight edges with box type joints with corner beads as required. Where plumbing and heating insulation terminates at equipment or unions, taper insulation at 30 degree angle to pipe with one coat finishing cement and finish same as fittings. Total insulation system shall have neat smooth appearance with no wrinkles, or folds in jackets, joint strips or fitting covers.

E. Undamaged insulation systems on cold surface piping and equipment shall perform their intended functions as vapor barriers and thermal insulation without premature deterioration of insulation or vapor barrier. contractor shall take every reasonable precaution to provide insulation systems with continuous unbroken vapor barriers.

F. Where glass fabric is specified in the following insulation methods provide resin impregnated white open weave glass fabric with 10/20 thread count. Provide glass cloth similar to Alpha Martex wettable glass cloth.

G. Abbreviations for manufacturers of adhesive, mastics and coating specified shall be C.M. for Chicago Mastic Company and B.F. for Benjamin Foster Company.

H. Insulation of removable heads, manholes access covers, etc., shall be fabricated to allow removal without damage to insulation. Provide removable units with vapor-proof cover fabricated to be sealed to equipment vapor barrier.



I. Insulation failing to meet workmanship and appearance standards shall be replaced with an acceptable installation before final acceptance of project will be given. Insulation failing to meet performance requirements of this specification for a period of one year after date of final acceptance or through one heating season and one cooling season, whichever is longer shall be replaced with an acceptable installation. All costs to correct insulation deficiencies and costs to repair damages to other work shall be at Mechanical Contractors expense at no cost to owner.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS AND APPLICATION METHODS (PIPING)

A. Pipe insulation by type shall be as follows:

1. TYPE 1-PHC: Insulation for hot and cold surface piping systems with -60 degrees F to +650 degrees F operating range shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglass ASJ/SSL-11, 4.2 lb. density pipe insulation with white fire retardant ASJ jacket and double self-sealing lap. Average thermal conductivity shall not exceed .26 BTU/Hr. at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Seal longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips with C.M. No. 17-465 or B.F. No. 85-75 vapor barrier adhesive. Insulate valves and fittings as follows:

a. Insulate exposed and concealed valves and fittings with 2" thick glass fiberglass inserts or blankets. Cover fittings with Zeston Products PVC fitting covers or approved equal. PVC fitting covers shall be secured with mechanical fasteners such as tacks or staples for temperatures above 75 degrees F. For cold service all joints and PVC covers shall be sealed with vapor barrier adhesive or by pressure sensitive vapor barrier vinyl tape to maintain vapor barrier.

2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS AND APPLICATION METHODS (EQUIPMENT)

A. Equipment insulation materials and application methods shall be as follows:

1. Type 1-EC: Insulation for cold surface equipment insulation for external surfaces with +40 degrees F to +220 degrees F operating temperature range shall be pipe or sheet insulation as required with 5.5 or 6.0 lb. density. Average thermal conductivity shall not exceed .27 BTU/HR at 75 F mean temperature. Apply insulation directly to metal surfaces and seal insulation joints. Insulation shall be mitered, beveled and built-up as required to provide a smooth and neat exterior surface. On large pumps and equipment provide joints in insulation at points where equipment casing must be disassembled for maintenance and repair. Insulate these joint areas so that insulation can be easily removed from casing joints without removing or damaging adjacent insulation. Finish insulation with two coats of vinyl-lacquer finish, or provide ASJ wrap.

2.4 INSULATION MATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS METHODS (HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, GUIDES, EXPANSION JOINTS, ETC.)

A. Insulation materials and application methods for piping hangers supports, anchors, guides expansion joints, etc., shall be as follows:

1. Insulate hangers and supports from direct contact with cold or hot surfaces (-120oF to 450oF) with "Buckaroos Inc." or approved equal pipe insulation support system. The wood dowel adhered to a PVC disc shall be installed as follows:

2. Up thru 2-1/2" pipe: One "Buckaroo" placed exactly at the hanger location. 3. 3" thru 5-1/2" pipe: Three "Buckaroos" placed in the lower 180 degree arc of the

pipe exactly at the hanger location. 4. 6" pipe and above: Nine "Buckaroos" stratigically placed similar to the 3" thru

5-1/2" pipe sizes and within the length of the hanger protection saddle.



B. The length of the "Buckaroo" insulation support same as the pipe insulation thickness. Provide ASJ type discs to reestablish vapor barrier.

INSULATION SCHEDULE INSULATION SERVICE SIZE TYPE THICKNESS JACKET Domestic Cold Water ½ " thru 2" 1-PHC 1" ASJ Domestic Cold Water 2 ½ " and up 1-PHC 1 ½” ASJ Domestic Hot Water/R ½ " thru 1 ¼ ” 1-PHC 1 ½” ASJ Domestic Hot Water/R 1 ½” and up 1-PHC 2” ASJ Drinking Fount. Drain All Sizes 1-PHC 1" ASJ Roof Drainage All Sizes 1-PHC 1” ASJ Roof Drain Body All 1-EC 1”

2.5 HANDICAP LAVATORIES AND SINK INSULATION

A. Insulate all exposed hot, cold and waste piping associated with handicap lavatories and sinks with Truebro "Handi Lav-Guard" insulation kit model no. 102. Equivalent by Brocar Products Inc. or Proto P-trap and valve covers.



PIPING AND FITTINGS 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - PIPING AND FITTINGS


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS AND FITTINGS

A. Piping used throughout project shall conform to the following specifications. Piping shall be plainly marked with manufacturers name and weight. All materials listed may NOT be required on this project. See piping material schedule at end of this Section for materials to be used for each piping system and additional information. Piping materials shall be as follows:

1. Cast Iron Bell and Spigot Soil Pipe: a. Pipe and fittings shall be gray cast iron bell and spigot ends with lead grooves

and spigot end lead beads. Pipe and fittings shall be coated inside and out with asphaltum preservative and meet requirements of current Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard HS-67 and ASTM Standard A74-69 and shall be marked with the collective trademark of the CISPI and NSF.

b. Seal joints with lead and oakum in accordance with current ANSI Specification A40.8.

c. (Optional) Seal joints with neoprene pipe gaskets meeting current ASTM Standard A564-68.

d. Pipe and fittings by Alabama Pipe, Tyler Pipe or Western Foundry.

2. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe: a. Pipe and fittings shall be gray cast iron with spigot bead and positioning lug.

Pipe and fittings shall be coated inside and out with asphaltum preservative and shall meet requirements of current Cast Iron Pipe Institute Standard 301-69T.

b. All 1½ inch diameter and larger cast iron soil pipe and fittings for above and below grade soil, waste, vent lines, rain water conductors and storm drainage lines shall bear the registered insignia “CI” or “CI” NO HUB® indicating that these items used in the sanitary system comply with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards 301 or ASTM A888.

c. Pipe joints shall be no-hub joint couplings consisting of neoprene rubber sleeve, stainless steel shield and clamp assembly. No-hub cast-iron soil pipe and fittings shall be joined with Tyler Pipe NSF certified couplings that conform to the CISPI 301 standard. Couplings will be installed according to the installation instructions of the manufacturer. All pipe and fittings on which couplings are installed shall bear the registered trademark “CI” signifying they comply with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301.

d. (Optional) Pipe joints shall be MB coupling consisting of cast iron housing with neoprene gasket and 18-8 stainless steel bolts and nuts.

e. Pipe and fittings shall be by Charlotte, Tyler Pipe or AB&I.

3. Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Pipe: Ductile iron shall be ANSI A21.51, AWWA C151. All pipe joints shall be

mechanical unless otherwise indicated. Wall thickness of the pipe shall conform with City of Salina Standards. Pipe shall be color coded by blotches of paint. The Contractor shall submit a "color class" schedule of the pipe as marked by the manufacturer. 1) Inside coating shall be cement-motar lining with seal coat of

bituminous material in accordance with ANSI A21.4. b. American Water Works Associations (AWWA) Standards:

C151-86 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for water, or other liquids.

c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):



1) A21.4-1985 Cement mortar lining for gray-iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for water.

2) A21.10-1987 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 inch through 48 inch for water and other liquids.

3) A21.11-1985 Rubber gasket joints for gray-iron and ductile-iron pressure pipe and fittings.

4) A21.51-1986 Ductile-iron pipe centrifugally cast in metal molds for sand-lined molds for water or other liquids (AWWA C151-1981).

4. Carbon Steel Pipe (1/8" thru 2"):

a. Provide seamless carbon steel conforming to ASTM specification A-106. b. Pipe joints shall be threaded conforming to ANSI Standard B2.1. c. Pipe by Armco, Jones, Laughlin Steel Corp., Youngstown Sheet and Tube

Co., or United States Steel.

5. Carbon Steel Pipe (2-1/2" and above): a. Provide electric resistance welded carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM

Specification A-53. b. Pipe ends shall be beveled for welding. c. Pipe by Armco, Jones and Laughlin Steel Corp., Youngstown Sheet and Tube

Co., or United States Steel.

6. Copper Tube: a. Provide hard temper copper water tube conforming to requirements of current

ASTM Specification B-88. Tubing shall be Type K, L, or M as listed in schedule.

b. Tubing joints shall be soldered or brazed. See schedule for joining method to be used.

c. Pipe by Anaconda, Cerro, Chase, Mueller or Revere Copper.

7. Copper Tube Type ACR: a. Provide hard temper nitrogenized copper refrigerant tube conforming to

requirements of current ASTM B-88. Tubes shall be Type L or K as listed in schedule.

b. Tubing joints shall be brazed. c. Pipe by Anaconda, Cerro, or Mueller.

8. Polyethylene Pipe: a. Provide polyethylene pipe for gas service conforming to ASTM D-1248. Pipe

shall be UV stabilized. SDR of 11. b. Pipe by Driscopipe or equal.

9. Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste Pipe: a. Pipe shall be manufactured from virgin rigid PVC (polyvinyl chrloride) vinyl compounds

with a cell class of 12454 as identified in ASTM D 1784. PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be Iron Pipe Size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. Injection molded PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665. Fabricated PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM F 1866. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. All systems shall utilize a separate waste and vent system. Pipe and fittings shall conform to NSF International Standard 14. Joints shall be properly cleaned, primed and glued.

b. Pipe by Charlotte, Genova, Crest or equal.

10. Polypropylene Chemical Waste and Vent Pipe: a. Provide Schedule 40 polypropylene pipe conforming to current ASTM D635



and D2447-74. b. Pipe by Lab/Line-Enfield Industrial Corp. or Orion equal.

2.2 PIPING FITTINGS

A. Piping fitting used throughout project shall be proper type for installation method used and shall be compatible with piping system material. Fittings listed in piping material schedule shall conform to the following specifications:

1. Carbon Steel Welding Fittings: a. Provide carbon low alloy seamless steel welding fittings conforming to current

ANSI Standard B16.9 and ASTM Specification A234. b. Fittings by Grinnell, Midwest or Tube Turn.

2. Branch Connection Welding Fittings: a. Provide carbon steel weldolet fittings conforming to ANSI Standards B16.9,

B16.11, B31.1.0 and ASTM specification A105, Grade 11. b. Fittings by Bonney Forge.

3. Branch Connection, Welding to Screwed Fitting: a. Provide carbon steel threadolet fitting conforming to ANSI Standards B16.9,

B16.11, B31.1, and ASTM Specification A105, Grade 11. Fittings by Bonney Forge.

4. Carbon Steel Flanges: a. Provide carbon steel flanges conforming to ASTM Specification A181, Grade

1, and ANSI Standard B16.5. b. Flanges by Babcock and Wilcox, Grinnell, Midwest or Tube Turn.

5. Malleable Iron Screwed Fittings: a. Provide screwed malleable iron fittings conforming to ANSI Standard B16.3,

and ASTM Specification A-47 grade 32510. b. Fittings by Crane, Grinnell or Stockham.

6. Cast Iron Screwed Fittings: a. Provide screwed cast iron fittings conforming to ANSI Standard B16.4, B2.1,

and ASTM Specification A-126, Class A. b. Fittings by Crane, Grinnell or Stockham.

7. Wrought Copper Fittings: a. Provide wroughtt solder joint copper tube fitting conforming to ANSI Standard

B16.22 b. Fittings by Anaconda, Chase or Nibco.

8. Cast Bronze Fittings: a. Provide cast bronze solder joint fittings conforming to ANSI Standard B16.18. b. Fittings by Anaconda, Chase or Nibco.

9. Pipe Flange Gaskets: a. Provide 1/16" thick asbestos free gaskets full face or ring type as required.

Gaskets shall be factory cut. b. Gaskets by Durable Mfg. Co. or Garlock Company.

10. Roll Grooved Pipe Couplings: a. Provide Victaulic style #07 or approved equal style (zero flex) couplings with

Grade "E" gasket (EPDM compound) in mechanical areas. Provide Victaulic



style #77 or approved equal style (flexible) couplings with Grade "E" gasket in other areas. Ductile iron housing and nuts and bolts.

11. Polypropylene Joints:

a. Above grade joints shall be mechanical joints conforming to current ASTM Specification C-425. Below grade joints shall be fusion weld connections.

12. Ductile Iron Pipe Joints and Fittings: a. Joints: Ductile iron shall be mechanical joints. All of the latest approved

design of the manufacturer as specified or shown on the drawings. Joints shall be so designed to guarantee a water-tight joint for the life of the pipeline.

b. Fittings: Ductile iron shall be short body mechanical as shown on the drawings, or required of the same pressure design as the pipe. Dimensional control and joint design shall conform to ANSI Standard A21.10 and A21.11. All fittings shall be coated as specified for the pipe. Where rods or ties are shown or called for, fittings shall be provided with anchoring lugs.

c. Joint Materials: Ductile Iron Joint: Mechanical joints, bolts, glands, retainer glands and gaskets, ANSI Standard A21.11.

2.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Piping systems materials and installation shall conform with the following standards and codes.

1. System: Heating and Air Conditioning Piping Code: ANSI Standard B31.1.0 "Power Piping" 2. System: Natural Gas Piping Code: ANSI Standard B31.12 "Fuel Gas Piping" 3. System: Plumbing System Piping Code: International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical Official's "Uniform Plumbing

Code"

B. Pipe sizes indicated on plans and as specified refer to nominal size in inches for steel pipe, cast iron pipe and copper tubing, unless otherwise indicated. Pipes are sized to nearest 1/2". In no case shall piping smaller than size specified be used.

C. Contractor shall provide and be responsible for proper location of pipe sleeves, hangers, supports, and inserts. Install hangers, supports, inserts, etc., as recommended by manufacturer and as specified and detailed on drawings. Verify construction types and provide proper hangers, inserts and supports for construction used. Install inserts, hangers and supports in accordance with manufacturers load ratings and provide for thermal expansion of piping without exceeding allowable stress on piping or supports. Provide solid type hangers and supports where pipe travel exceeds manufacturer's recommendations for fixed hanger and supports.

D. Install piping parallel with building lines and parallel with other piping to obtain a neat and orderly appearance of piping system. Secure piping with approved anchors and provide guides where required to insure proper direction of piping expansion. Piping shall be installed so that allowable stress for piping, valves and fittings used are not exceeded during normal operation or testing of piping system.

E. Install piping so that systems can be completely drained. Provide piping systems with valve drain connections at all low pipe and ahead of all sectionalizing valves whether shown on plans or not. Drain lines shall be as follows:



PIPE SIZE DRAIN SIZE

3/4" thru 2" 3/4" 2-1/2" and above 1"

F. Drain valves on closed piping systems such as chilled water system shall have lock shields and plugged or capped outlets to protect system from inadvertent drainage.

G. Pitch all piping and where possible make connections from horizontal piping so that air can be properly vented from system. Provide air vents as specified at all system high points and at drop in piping in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers where necessary to avoid air pockets in horizontal piping.

H. Provide piping materials and wall thickness for specific piping systems as listed in piping schedule at end of this Section. Steel piping systems 2" and under shall be thread pipe and fittings. Steel pipe systems 2-1/2" and above shall be welded and shall utilize standard welding fittings.

I. Where listed in pipe schedules or noted on drawings, provide piping 2-1/2" and larger with Victaulic style 07 standard couplings. Equivalent fittings by Grinnell.

J. Provide unions or flanged joints in each pipe line preceding connections to equipment to allow removal for repair or replacement. Provide all screwed and control valves with unions adjacent to each piping connection. Provide screwed end valves with union adjacent to valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from line.

K. Piping fitting materials for specific piping systems shall be as listed in piping schedules. Fitting shall be approved factory made type with threaded or weld ends as required. Fittings pressures and temperature ratings shall be equal to or exceed maximum operating temperature and working pressure of piping system. No mitered or field fabricated pipe fittings will be permitted.

L. All pipe threads shall meet ANSI Standard B2.1 for taper pipe threads. Lubricate pipe threads with Astroseal teflon thread sealant and lubricating compound applied full strength. Powdered or made-up compound will not be permitted. Pipe thread compound shall be applied only to male pipe threads.

M. Welded pipe joints shall be made by certified welding procedures and welders. Welding electrodes shall be type and material recommended by electrode manufacturer for materials to be welded. All pipe and fittings ends shall be beveled a minimum of 30 degrees prior to welding.

N. Brazed socket type joints shall be made with suitable brazing alloys. Minimum socket depth shall be sufficient for intended service. Brazing alloy shall be end fed into socket, and shall fill completely annular clearance between socket and pipe or tube. Brazed joints depending solely upon a fillet rather than a socket type joint will not be acceptable.

O. Soft soldered socket type joints shall be made with sill-floss or 95-5 tin-antimony solder as required by temperature and pressure rating of piping system. Soldered socket-type joints shall be limited to systems containing non-flammable and non-toxic fluids. Soldered socket-type joints shall not be used on piping systems subject to shock vibration. Soldered joints depending solely upon a fillet rather than a socket-type joint will not be acceptable.

P. Make changes in piping size and direction with approved factory made fittings. Steel pipe and fittings 2-1/2" and smaller shall be threaded type, pipe and fittings 3" and larger shall be weld end type. Provide fittings suitable for at least 125 PSI working pressure or of pressure rating required for maximum working pressure of system whichever is greater. Where pipe sizes of header or



branch water supply piping do not appear on drawings, size piping to plumbing fixtures as follows:

MAXIMUM QUANTITY PIPE SIZE FIXTURE TYPE OF FIXTURES CW HW

Water Closet (Flush Valve) 1 1-1/4 -- Water Closet (Flush Valve) 2 1-1/2 -- Water Closet (Flush Valve) 5 2 -- Water Closet (Flush Valve) 10 2-1/2 -- Lavatory 1 1/2 1/2 Lavatory 3 3/4 3/4 Lavatory 6 1 1 Service Sink 1 3/4 3/4 Service Sink 4 1 1

2.4 WELDING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for quality of welding and suitability of welding procedures. All welding shall be in accordance with American Welding Society Standard B3.0 and ANSI Standard B31.1.

B. Welding shall be done only by welders who have successfully passed welder qualifications tests in previous 12 months for type of welding required. Each welder shall identify his work with a code marking before starting any welded pipe fabrication. Contractor shall submit three copies of a list of welders who will work on project listing welders code, date and types of latest qualification test passed by each welder.

C. Welded joints shall be fusion welded in accordance with Level AR3 of American Welding Society Standard AWS D10.9 "Standard for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Pipe and Tubing". Welders qualified under National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau will be acceptable.

D. Bevel all piping and fittings in accordance with recognized standards by flame cutting or mechanical means. Align and position parts so that branches and fittings are set true. Make changes in direction of piping systems with factory made welding fittings. Make branch connections with welding tees or forged weldolets.

Ad

vis

ors

Exce

l –

Ga

ge

Ce

nte

r C

am

pu

s

To

pe

ka

, K

an

sa

s

Ph

ase

1 –

Bu

ildin

g A

Bu

ildin

g K

SD

G P

roje

ct

No

. 1

90

12

1

PIP

ING

MA

TE

RIA

L S

CH

ED

UL

E

PIP

ING

FIT

TIN

GS

MA

XIM

UM

WO

RK

ING

FIE

LD

TE

ST

SY

ST

EM

SIZ

ET

YP

ES

CH

ED

.G

RA

DE

AS

TM

MA

TE

RIA

LM

AT

ER

IAL

TY

PE

PR

ES

SU

RE

TE

MP

.P

RE

SS

UR

ET

IME

Fire

Sp

rin

kle

r E

ntr

an

ce

*

Do

me

stic W

ate

r E

ntr

an

ce

*

Do

me

stic H

ot

& H

.W.

Re

turn

1/2

"-6

"L

----

B-8

8C

PC

PS

J8

51

00

to

14

01

30

lb

.1

/2 h

r.

Do

me

stic C

old

Wa

ter

1/2

"-6

"L

----

B-8

8C

PC

PS

J8

54

0 t

o 5

51

30

lb

.1

/2 h

r.

Dra

in L

ine

All

L--

--B

-88

CP

CP

SJ

04

0 t

o 8

0--

--

DW

V A

bo

ve

Gra

de

1-1

/2"-

6"

NH

SV

--A

-88

8/

CIS

PI-

30

0C

IC

IN

H--

75

10

'1

/2 h

r.

DW

V B

elo

w G

rad

e2

"-6

"S

40

--D

-26

65

-88

PV

CP

VC

SW

--7

51

0'

1/2

hr.

Ro

of

Dra

ina

ge

Ab

ove

Gra

de

4 -

12

"N

HS

V--

A-8

88

/

CIS

PI-

30

0C

IC

IN

H--

75

10

'1

/2 h

r.

Ro

of

Dra

ina

ge

Be

low

Gra

de

4 -

12

"S

40

--D

-26

65

-88

PV

CP

VC

SW

--7

51

0'

1/2

hr.

*Re

fer

to C

ivil

Pla

ns a

nd

co

ord

ina

te a

cco

rdin

gly

AB

BR

EV

IAT

ION

S:

BL

K -

Bla

ck

ER

W -

Ele

ctr

ic R

esis

tan

t W

eld

MJ -

Me

ch

an

ica

l Jo

int

PE

- P

oly

eth

yle

ne

SS

- S

ilve

r S

old

er

BS

- B

ell

& S

pig

ot

F -

Fu

sio

n W

eld

NG

- N

eo

pre

ne

Ga

ske

tP

P -

Po

lyp

rop

yle

ne

SV

- S

erv

ice

We

igh

t

CI

- C

ast

Iro

nG

LV

- G

alv

an

ize

dN

H -

No

Hu

bS

- S

ocke

t J

oin

tS

W -

So

lve

nt

We

ld

CP

- C

op

pe

rM

EC

H -

Me

ch

an

ica

lP

- P

oly

vin

yl C

hlo

rid

eS

J -

So

lde

r Jo

int

95

-5 T

in-a

ntim

on

yT

- T

hre

ad

ed

CS

- C

arb

on

Ste

el

MI

- M

alle

ab

le I

ron

PC

- R

olle

d G

roo

ve

d P

ipe

Co

up

ling

SL

- S

ea

mle

ss

V -

Vic

tau

lic

DI

- D

uctile

Iro

nW

- W

eld

ed

NO

TE

S:

1.

R

oll

gro

ove

fittin

gs a

nd

pip

ing

syste

ms is n

ot

acce

pta

ble

fo

r th

e p

roje

ct.

2.

"T

ee

ta

pp

ing

" is

no

t a

cce

pta

ble

fo

r th

e p

roje

ct.

EN

D O

F S

EC

TIO

N 2

21

11

6

PIP

ING

AN

D F

ITT

ING

S 2

21

11

6-7


PLUMBING 223600 - 1

SECTION 223600 - PLUMBING


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICAL WORK REQUIRED

A. Contractor shall provide electrical connections for any equipment which requires electrical connections for power or control. Electrical requirements and work shall be coordinated with Electrical Contractor.

2.2 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Refer to Section 221116 of this specification for piping material specifications and installation instructions.

B. Specific piping materials and joining methods for systems installed under this section shall be as listed in schedule.

2.3 PIPING SYSTEMS VALVES

A. Refer to Section 220523 of this specification for valve type specifications and installation instructions.

2.4 PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION

A. Refer to Section 220700 for insulation type specifications and installation instructions.

2.5 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RATED WALL/FLOOR ASSEMBLIES

A. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate their through penetrating items. All v oids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through, shall be firestopped to meet the requirements of ASTM E-814.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

A. Provide plumbing fixtures as shown on drawings and as specified complete including piping and connections. China fixtures shall be of best grade vitreous ware without pit holes or blemishes and outlines shall be generally true. Architect/Engineer reserves right to reject any piece which in his opinion is faulty. Fixtures fitting against walls shall have ground backs. Exposed piping and fittings shall be chrome plated.

B. Set fixtures true and level with all necessary supports for fixtures installed before plastering is done. Nipples through wall to fixture connections shall be chrome plated brass. Provide silicone sealer around perimeter of lavatories, water closets, and urinals at connection to wall and/or floor.

C. Equivalent fixtures and accessories by following manufacturers will be acceptable. Equivalents by prior approval only.

1. Fixtures: American Standard, Eljer, Kohler, Crane, Elkay, Sloan, Toto, Zurn. 2. Fittings and Supports: Josam, Wade, Zurn 3. Seats: Church, Olsonite, Bemis or Beneke, Toto. 4. Drinking Fountains: Elkay. 5. Flush Valves: Toto, Sloan, Zurn. 6. Lavatory & Sink Trim: Kohler, American Standard, Chicago Faucets, T & S

Brass, Pioneer Industries. 7. Traps, Supplies and Stops: Dearborn, Brass Craft, Central D, Sanitary Dash,

McGuire or as specified under plumbing fixtures. 8. Shower valves: Powers, Zurn, American Standard. 9. Kitchen Sink Faucets: Elkay, Delta Teck, T & S Brass, Zurn. 10. Sinks: Elkay.

D. Supplies and Stops: Dearborn Fig. No. 2700 CW 1/2" compression loose key stop and 3/8" O.D. risers in length required. Provide deep chrome plated brass escutcheons.

E. Traps: Dearborn #FS510 (1-1/2") and/or EFS507 (1-1/4") cast brass body with clean-out and 17 gauge tube outlet "P" trap. Provide deep chrome plated brass escutcheon with set screw.

F. All fixtures shall be cleaned and free of all construction debris. Electric water cooler shall be protected during construction. Any chrome trim with wrench marks shall be removed and new trim installed. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to reject any plumbing fixture.

G. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on plans.





PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 225000 - 1

SECTION 225000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Drains shall be type and style listed below. Unless indicated otherwise provide each drain that does not have an integral "P" trap with a deep seal cast iron "P" trap in connecting piping. Provide ALL drains and floor sinks with PRO SET SYSTEMS trap guards.

B. Floor Drain Type 1: Wade #W-1100: floor drain, dura-coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable nickel bronze strainer. Strainer shall have a 6" round top.

C. Floor SINK Type 1: Wade #W-9110: (8” x 8” x 6”) cast iron floor sink, A.R.E. interior, aluminum dome strainer and 3/4 grate nickel bronze top. Provide with 4” funnel.

D. Floor SINK Type 2: Wade #W-9150: (12” x 12” x 10”) cast iron floor sink, A.R.E. interior, aluminum dome strainer and ½ grate nickel bronze top.

2.2 ROOF AND OVERFLOW DRAINS

A. Roof Drain Type 1

Zurn: ZC100-DP cast iron roof drain with flange, flashing ring with gravel stop and cast iron dome. Provide with adjustable extension assembly and top-set deck plate. Verify existing roofing and structural deck assembly conditions prior to order.

B. Equivalent drains by J,R. Smith, Wade, Zurn, or Josam.

2.3 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES

A. Provide Wade series 3940 cast bronze downspout nozzles with threaded outlet and flange to secure nozzle to wall.

B. Equivalent drains by J.R. Smith, Zurn, or Josam.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Provide cleanout the full size of soil pipe served up to 4" I.D. Cleanouts for soil lines larger than 4" shall be 4". Provide cleanouts in base of soil pipe stacks, ends of sewer main, at changes in direction of over 45 degrees and in horizontal pipe runs exceeding 100 feet at 50 foot intervals.

B. Install cleanouts so they are accessible by extending them through walls, floors, to outside of building or to above grade as required.

C. Where exterior cleanouts do not occur in sidewalks, paved roadways, etc., provide a concrete pad 18" x 18" x 6" thick with top 1-1/2" above finished grade.

1. Floor (Concrete Floor Finish): Wade #W-6000-XS cast iron cleanout with square, heavy duty, scoriated nickel bronze top, adjustable above to finished floor.

2. Floor (Quarry Tile Floor Finish): Same as concrete floor finish. 3. Floor (Tile Floor Finish): Wade #W-6000-TS cast iron cleanout with square


PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 225000 - 2

heavy duty nickel bronze top, recessed for tile and adjustable to finished floor. 4. Floor (Carpet Floor Finish): Wade #W-6000-XS-72 cast iron cleanout with

round, heavy duty nickel bronze top with carpet retainer and adjustable to finished floor after concrete has set.

5. Wall: Wade #W-8450-C cleanout with dura-coated cast iron ferrule and cadmium plated cast iron counter-sunk plug complete with round smooth nickel bronze wall access cover and flush over-wall frame.

D. Verify floor materials used from Architectural plans and provide proper cleanout tops, where they occur in carpet, quarry tile, vinyl tile or ceramic tile.

E. Equivalent by J.R. Smith, Wade, or Josam, Watts Drainage.

2.5 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Wall hydrants shall be Wade series 8700 concealed in cast wall box with connections for 3/4" pipe and hose. Non-freezing type with key and vacuum breaker. Field verify length required for existing wall construction. Cut and patch existing brick exterior to install new wall hydrant.

B. Equivalent by J.R. Smith, Wade, Woodford or Zurn.

2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Sioux Chief 650 Series piston-type water hammer arresters shall be required in piping systems as shown on the drawings. Water hammer arresters shall have sufficient volume of air to dissipate the calculated kinetic energy generated in the piping system. Arresters shall be effective when installed at any angle. Arresters shall be approved for installation with no access panel required. Water hammer arresters shall be ANSI/ASSE 1010 2004 certified. Arresters shall be sized and placed per manufacturer’s instructions.



ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION 229000 - 1

SECTION 229000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 220500) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Contractor shall consult all Architectural Drawings and specifications in their entirety incorporating and certifying all millwork, furniture, and equipment rough-in including utility millwork. furniture, and equipment rough-in including utility characteristics such as voltage, phase, amperage, pipe sizes, duct sizes, including height, location and orientation. Shop drawings incorporating these requirements should be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to installation or rough-in.

END OF SECTION 229000 END OF DIVISION 22


DIVISION 23 TABLE OF CONTENTS 230000 – 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 230500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 230501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 230502 - TEMPORARY USE OF PERMANENT HEATING UNITS SECTION 230503 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 230513 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 230519 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES SECTION 230523 - VALVES SECTION 230524 - PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 230529 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL SECTION 230553 - TESTING & BALANCING SECTION 230700 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 230701 - DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 230900 - BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM SECTION 232113 - PIPING AND FITTINGS SECTION 232123 - WET ROTOR CIRCULATOR PUMPS SECTION 232125 - HVAC PUMPS SECTION 232250 - WATER HEATING BOILER SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING SECTION 232500 - WATER TREATMENT SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 233416 - EXHAUST FANS SECTION 233600 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES SECTION 233713 - GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 238219 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS SECTION 239000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION




A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.


A. All contract documents including drawings, alternates, addenda and modifications preceding this specification division are applicable to Mechanical Contractor and his Sub-Contractors, and material suppliers.

1.3 SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITIONS

A. These Specifications are abbreviated form and contain incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the contractor shall", "shall be", "as noted on the Drawings", "according to the drawings", "a", "an", "the" and "all" are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference.

B. Engineer wherever used in these specifications, shall mean LATIMER, SOMMERS &

ASSOCIATES, P.A., 3639 SW SUMMERFIELD DRIVE, SUITE A, TOPEKA, KANSAS 66614, PHONE 785-233-3232, FAX 785-233-0647.

C. Contractor, wherever used in these specifications, shall mean any trade contractor that enters

into contract with the Owner to perform this section of work.

D. When a word, such as "proper", "satisfactory", "equivalent", and "as directed", is used, it requires Engineer's review.

E. "Provide" means furnish and install.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The contractor(s) responsible for work under this section shall have completed a job of similar scope and magnitude within the last 3 years and be able to document such work upon request. The contractor(s) shall employ an experienced, competent and adequate work force licensed in their specific trade and properly supervised at all times. Mechanical Contracting shall be the company’s primary nature of business. Unlicensed workers and general laborers shall be adequately supervised to insure competent and quality work and workmanship required by this contract and all other regulations, codes and practices. At all times the contractor(s) shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal guidelines, practices and regulations. Contractor may be required to submit a statement of qualifications, pertaining to the type of work to be performed, upon request before any final approval and selection. Failure to be able to comply with these requirements is suitable reason for rejection of a bid whether acting as a prime or subcontractor.


A. Visit site and determine existing local conditions affecting work in contract. Failure to determine site conditions or nature of existing or new construction will not be considered a basis for granting additional compensation.




A. Changes or deviations from contract, including those for extra or additional work must be submitted in writing for review of Architect-Engineer. No verbal orders will be recognized.


A. Locations of equipment, piping and other mechanical work is indicate diagrammatically by mechanical drawings. Determine exact locations on job, subject to structural conditions, work of other Contractors, access requirements for installation and maintenance to approval of Architect-Engineer.

B. Study and become familiar with the contract drawings of other trades and in particular the general construction plans and details in order to obtain necessary information for figuring installation. Cooperate with other workmen and install work in such a way as to avoid interference with their work. Minor deviations, not affecting design characteristics, performance or space limitation may be permitted if reviewed prior to installation by Architect-Engineer.

C. Any pipe, apparatus, appliance or other item interfering with proper placement of other work as indicated on drawings, specified, or required, shall be removed and if so shown, relocated and reconnected without extra cost. Damage to other work caused by this Contractor, the Subcontractor, or workers shall be restored as specified for new work.

D. Do not scale mechanical and electrical drawings for dimensions. Accurately lay-out work from dimensions indicted on Architectural drawings unless such be found in error.

1.8 PERFORMANCE


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Contractor warrants to Owner and Architect the quality of materials, equipment, workmanship and operation of equipment provided under this specification division for a period of one year from and after completion of building and acceptance of mechanical systems by Owner.

B. Contractor warrants to Owner and Architect that on receipt of written notice from either of them within one year warranty period following date of acceptance that defects have appeared in materials and/or workmanship, will be promptly corrected to original condition required by contract documents at Contractor's expense.

C. The above warranty shall not supersede any separately stated warranty or other requirements required by law or by these specifications.

1.10 ALTERNATES

A. Refer to General Requirements for descriptions of any alternates which may be included.

1.11 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The intent of these specifications is to allow ample opportunity for Contractor to use his ingenuity and abilities to perform the work to his and the Owner's best advantage, and to permit maximum competition in bidding on standards of materials and equipment required.

B. Material and equipment installed under this contract shall be first class quality, new, unused and without damage.



C. In general, these specifications identify required materials and equipment by naming one or more manufacturer's brand, model, catalog number and/or other identification. The first named manufacturer or product is used as the basis for design; other manufacturers named must furnish products consistent with specifications of first named product as determined by Engineer. Base bid proposal shall be based only on materials and equipment by manufacturers named, except as hereinafter provided.

D. Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required items of first quality, adequate in every respect for intended use. Such items shall be submitted to Architect-Engineer for review prior to procurement.

E. Materials and equipment proposed for substitutions shall be equal to or superior to that specified in construction, efficiency utility, aesthetic design, and color as determined by Architect-Engineer whose decision shall be final and without further recourse. Physical size of substitute brand shall be no larger than space provided including allowances for access for installation and maintenance. Requests must be accompanied by two copies of complete descriptive and technical data including manufacturer's name, model and catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions, operating characteristics and any other information needed for comparison.

If the Contractor wishes to incorporate products other than those named in the Base Bid Specifications they shall submit a request for approval of equivalency in writing no later than (10) ten calendar days prior to bid date. Substitutions after this may be refused at Engineers option. Equivalents will ONLY be considered approved when listed by addendum.

F. In proposing a substitution prior to or subsequent to receipt of bids, include in such bid cost of altering other elements of project, including adjustments in mechanical electrical service requirements necessary to accommodate such substitution; whether such affected elements to this contract or under separate contracts.

G. Within 10 working days after bids are received, apparent low bidder shall submit to Architect-Engineer for approval three copies of a list of all major items of equipment he intends to provide. As soon as practicable and within 30 working days after award of Contract, Contractor shall submit shop drawings for equipment and materials to be incorporated in work, for Architect-Engineer review. Where 30 day limit is insufficient for preparation of detailed shop drawings on major equipment or assemblies, Contractor shall submit manufacturer's descriptive catalog data and indicate date such detailed shop drawings will be submitted along with manufacturer's certification that order was placed within 30 working day limit.

1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of six sets of shop drawings of all materials and equipment. Architect-Engineer will retain three sets.

B. Contractor shall submit two sets of blue line prints of all fabrication drawings. Cost of drawing

preparation, printing and distribution shall be paid for by contractor and included in his base bid.

C. Where catalog cuts are submitted for review, conspicuously mark or provide schedule of equipment, capacities, controls, fitting sizes, etc., that are to be provided. Mark each submitted item with applicable section and paragraph numbers of these specifications, or plan sheet number when item does not appear in specifications. Where equipment submitted does not appear in base specifications or specified equivalent, mark submittals with applicable alternate numbers, change order number or letters of authorization. Each submittal shall contain at least two sets of original catalog cuts. Each catalog sheet shall bear E/M's name and address. All shop drawings on materials and equipment listed by UL shall indicate UL approval on submittal.



D. Contractor shall check all shop drawings to verify that they meet specifications and/or drawings requirements before forwarding submittals to the Architect-Engineer for their review. All shop drawings submitted to Architect-Engineer shall bear contractor's approval stamp which shall indicate that Contractor has reviewed submittals and that they meet specification and/or drawing requirements. Contractor's submittal review shall specifically check for but not be limited to the following: equipment capacities, physical size in relation to space allowed; electrical characteristics, provisions for supply, return and drainage connections to building systems. All shop drawings not meeting Contractor's approval shall be returned to his supplier for re-submittal.

E. No shop drawing submittals will be considered for review by the Architect-Engineer without

Contractor's approval stamp, or that have extensive changes made on the original submittal as a result of Contractor's review.

F. Architect-Engineer will not be responsible for or the cost of returning shop drawing submittals that

are submitted to them without Contractor's review and approval stamp.

G. Architect-Engineer's review of shop drawings will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviations from drawings and specifications unless such deviations have been specifically approved in writing by Owner or his representative, nor shall it relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors in shop drawings. No work shall be fabricated until Architect-Engineer's review has been obtained. Any time delay caused by correcting and resubmitting shop drawings will be Contractor's responsibility.

1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submit with shop drawings of equipment, four copies of installation, operating, maintenance instructions, and parts lists for equipment provided. Instructions shall be prepared by equipment manufacturer.

B. Keep in safe place, keys and wrenches furnished with equipment under this contract. Present to

Owner and obtain receipt for same upon completion of project. C. Prepare a complete brochure, covering systems and equipment provided and installed under this

contract. Submit brochures to Architect-Engineer for review before delivery to Owner. Contractor at his option may prepare this brochure or retain an individual to prepare it for him. Include cost of this service in bid. Brochures shall contain following:

1. Certified equipment drawings/or catalog data with equipment provided clearly

marked as outlined above. 2. Complete installation, operating, maintenance instructions and parts lists for each

item of equipment. 3. Special emergency operating instructions with a list of service organizations

(including addresses and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency service to various parts of mechanical system.

4. As-builts: The Contractor shall mark up a set of contract documents during construction all changes and deviations including change orders. These will be delivered to Architect at the end of the project. After the originals are changed to reflect the blue line set, a copy shall be included in the brochure.

D. Provide brochures bound in three-ring binders with metal hinge. Reinforce binding edge of each

sheet of looseleaf type brochure to prevent tearing from continued usage. Clearly print on label insert of each brochure:

1. Project name and address. 2. Section of work covered by brochure, i.e., "Heating, Ventilating and Air

Conditioning", and "Plumbing", etc.





B. Patching shall be by mechanics of particular trade involved and shall meet approval of Architect.

C. Drilling and cutting of openings through building materials requires Architect's review and

approval. Make openings in concrete with concrete hole saw or concrete drill. Use of star drill or air hammer for this work will not be permitted.

1.15 MUTILATION

A. Mutilation of building finishes, caused by installation of mechanical work shall be repaired at Mechanical Contractor's expense to approval of Architect.


A. Work shall include mounting, alignment and adjustment of systems and equipment. Set equipment level on adequate foundation and provide proper anchor bolts and isolation as shown, specified or required by manufacturers in installation instructions. Level, shim and grout equipment bases as recommended by manufacturer. Mount motors, align and adjust drive shafts and belts according to manufacturers instructions. Equipment failures resulting from improper installation or field alignment shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide floor or slab mounted equipment with 3-1/2" high concrete bases unless specified otherwise. Mechanical contractor shall form all pads, General contractor shall provide and place all concrete and reinforcing for said pads. Individual concrete pad shall be no less than 4" wider and 4" longer than equipment, and shall extend no less than 2" from each side of equipment.

C. Provide each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor

level with suitable structural support, platform or carrier in accordance with best recognized practice. Verify that structural members of buildings are adequate to support equipment and unless otherwise indicated on plans or specified, arrange for their inclusion and attachment to building structure. Provide hangers with vibration isolators where required.

D. Submit details of hangers, platforms and supports together with total weights of mounted

equipment to Architect-Engineer for review before proceeding with fabrication or installation. 1.17 START-UP, CHANGEOVER, TRAINING AND OPERATIONAL CHECK

A. Contractor shall perform initial start-up of systems and equipment and shall provide necessary supervision and labor to make first seasonal changeover of systems. Personnel qualified to start-up and service this equipment, including manufacturers technicians when specified, and Owner's operating personnel shall be present during these operations.

B. Factory start-up and associated reports completed by factory representative(s) shall be submitted

for all major mechanical equipment including but not limited to boilers, chillers, water heaters, air handlers, BAS system, electronic faucets, slab heating system, kitchen hood make-up air unit, and VFD’s. Reference specifications where applicable.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for training Owner's operating personnel to operate and maintain

systems and equipment installed. Keep a record of training provided to Owner's personnel listing the date, subject covered, instructors name, names of Owner's personnel attending and total hours of instruction given each individual.



D. All owner-training sessions shall be orderly and well organized and shall be video taped using

CD-ROM format. At the end of the owner training, the "CD" shall become property of the owner. 1.18 FINAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW

A. At final construction review, each respective Contractor and major subcontractors shall be present or shall be represented by a person of authority. Each Contractor shall demonstrate, as directed by Architect/Engineer, that work complies with purpose and intent of plans and specifications. Respective Contractor shall provide labor, services, instruments or tools necessary for such demonstrations and tests.


A. This Contractor shall include the installation of all boxes, access panels and sleeves for openings

required to install this work, except structural openings incorporated in the structural drawings. Sleeves shall be installed for all pipes passing through structural slabs and walls. Contractor shall set and verify the location of sleeves as shown on structural plans that pass through beams. All floor penetrations shall be sealed to meet fire-rating requirements.

1.20 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Contractors shall submit professional AutoCAD coordination drawings. Drawings shall include all ductwork, hydronic piping, plumbing piping, and all other mechanical systems. Drawings shall be submitted at ¼” =1’0” scale.




SECTION 230501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES


1.1 GENERAL

A. Provide mechanical systems indicated on drawings, specified or reasonably implied. Provide every device and accessory necessary for proper operation and completion of mechanical systems. In no case will claims for "Extra Work" be allowed for work about which Contractor could have been informed before bids were taken.

B. Contractor shall become familiar with equipment provided by other contractors which require mechanical connections and controls.

C. Electrical work required to install and control mechanical equipment which is not shown on plans or specified under Division 26 shall be included in Contractor's base bid proposal. All temperature control wiring shall be by temperature control contractor.

D. All automatic temperature control devices shall be mounted as indicated in automatic temperature control section of specifications.

E. The cost of larger wiring, conduit, control and protective devices resulting from installation of equipment which was not used for basis of design as outlined in specifications shall be paid for by Mechanical Contractor at no cost to Owner or Architect-Engineer.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for providing supervision to Electrical Contractor to insure that required connections, interlocking and interconnection of mechanical and electrical equipment are made to attain intended control sequences and system operation.

G. Furnish four complete sets of electrical wiring diagrams to Architect-Engineer to be included in the maintenance manuals and three complete sets to Electrical Contractor. Diagrams shall show factory and field wiring of components and controls. Control devices and field wiring to be provided by Electrical Contractor shall be clearly indicated by notation and drawing symbols on wiring diagrams.

H. Contractor shall obtain complete electrical data on mechanical shop drawings and shall list this data on an approved form which shall be presented monthly or on request, to Electrical Contractor. Data shall be complete with wiring diagrams received to date and shall contain necessary data on electrical components of mechanical equipment such as HP, voltage, amperes, watts, locked rotor current to allow Electrical Contractor to order electrical equipment required in his contract.

I. Discrepancies within the plans or between specifications and plans shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to bid, otherwords pricing shall be based on higher quantity, quality and/or higher cost indication.

1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN CONTRACT

A. Consult Division 26 of specifications for work to be provided by Electrical Contractor in conjunction with installation of mechanical equipment.

B. Safety disconnect switches and manual and magnetic motor starters shall be provided by Electrical Contractor. Exceptions will be allowed where mechanical equipment is provided with these devices installed as part of factory built control systems.



1.3 CODES, RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. Provide Work in accordance with applicable codes, rules and regulations of Local and State, Federal Governments and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction.


UNIFORM CODES:

Refer to Code Plan Sheet for Building Codes and additional applicable codes.

SAFETY CODES:

National Electrical Safety Code Handbook H30 - National Bureau of Standards. Occupational Safety and Health Standard (OSHA) - Department of Labor.


NFPA No. 14 Standard for the installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems

NFPA No. 54 Gas Appliance & Gas Piping Installation NFPA No. 70 National Electrical Code NFPA No. 89M Clearances, Heat Producing Appliances NFPA No. 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA No. 91 Blower & Exhaust System NFPA No. 101 Life Safety Code NFPA No. 204 Smoke & Heating Vent Guide

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC:



ANSI A117.1 - Handicapped Accessibility Kansas Maximum Lighting Standards Kansas Thermal Standards ASHRAE 90-1-2010 Kansas State Boiler Code

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

C. Drawings and specifications indicate minimum construction standard. Should any work indicated be sub-standard to any ordinances, laws, codes, rules or regulations bearing on work, Contractor shall promptly notify Architect-Engineer in writing before proceeding with work so that necessary changes can be made. However, if Contractor proceeds with work knowing it to be contrary to any ordinances, laws, rules, and regulations, Contractor shall thereby have assumed full responsibility for and shall bear all costs required to correct non-complying work.

D. Contractor shall secure and pay for necessary permits and certificates of inspection required by



governmental ordinances, laws, rules or regulations. Keep a written record of all permits and inspection certificates and submit two copies to Architect-Engineer with request for final inspection.

E. Contractor shall include in bid any charges by local utility providers to establish new services to the structure. Coordinate with the utility suppliers to verify exact which part of the work is to be performed by whom.



TEMPORARY USE OF PERMANENT HEATING UNITS 230502 – 1

SECTION 230502 - TEMPORARY USE OF PERMANENT HEATING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 230500)

1.1 EXECUTION

A. If the Contractor elects to use permanent equipment for temporary conditioning only that permanent equipment associated with the systems shall be allowed for use as space conditioning during the construction period. The Mechanical Contractor shall take full responsibility for all permanent equipment used for temporary heat during the construction period and shall provide a total of two years warranty covering all parts and labor on all permanent equipment utilized for temporary heat. This warranty shall cover all piping, fittings, valves, pipe and equipment insulation, pumps, boilers, air handling units, exhaust and relief air fans, ductwork, ductwork insulation, diffusers, temperature controls, all electric motors, starters, disconnect switches, fuses, wire and conduit. This warranty shall cover all required maintenance on the system with the exception of filter changes, and shall start on the date shown on the final completion certificate.

1. CAUTION: The Contractor is being warned that the Architect and Engineer will not accept dirty equipment caused by construction contamination.




SECTION 230503 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS


1.1 TESTING PROCEDURES FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Test all lines and systems before they are insulated, painted or concealed by construction or backfilling. Provide fuel, water, electricity, materials, labor and equipment required for tests.

B. Where entire system cannot be tested before concealment, test system in sections. Upon completion, each system shall be tested as an entire system.

C. Repair or replace defects, leaks and material failures revealed by tests and then retest until satisfactory. Make repairs with new materials.

D. Verify that system components are rated for maximum test pressures to be applied. Where specified test pressures exceed component ratings remove or isolate components from system during tests.

1.2 TEST METHODS AND PRESSURES

A. Test methods and pressures shall be as follows:

1. Hydrostatic Test (Closed Systems): a. Hydrostatic test shall be performed using clean unused domestic

water. Test pressures shall be as scheduled for system or 150% of operating pressure where not specified.

2. Hydrostatic Test (Open System): a. Test entire system with 10 foot head of water. Where system is

tested in sections each joint in building except uppermost 10 feet of system shall be submitted to at least 10 foot head of water. Water shall be held in system for 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall hold test pressure without leaks.

3. Pneumatic Test: a. Test entire system with compressed air. Systems operating

above 25 PSI shall be tested at 75 PSI or 15% of operating pressure or whichever is greater. Allow at least 1 hour after test pressure has been applied before making initial test.

b. Curing test, completely isolate entire system from compressor or other sources of air pressure.

4. Pressure Relief and Safety Valve: a. Before installation, test pressure temperature, and safety relief

valves to confirm relief settings comply with specifications. b. Tag items that pass test with date of test, observed relief

pressure setting and inspector's signature. c. Items installed in systems without test tag attached will be

rejected.

B. All systems shall hold scheduled test pressures for specified time without loss of initial test pressure.

C. Upon completion of testing submit five copies of a typewritten report to A/E. Report shall list systems tested, test methods, test pressures, holding time and all failures with corrective action taken.

D. For test pressure schedules see Sections 232113 of this specification.



1.3 LOW SIDE CHARGING

A. Small amounts of refrigerant may be added to the system in the gaseous state through the backseat port of the compressor suction valve. When refrigerant is to be added in this manner, backseat the suction valve and purge the charging line before tightening the connection at the valve port.

B. CAUTION: When low side charging, gaseous refrigerant is drawn from the top of the refrigerant container.

C. Start the compressor, crack the suction valve clear of its backseat and open the valve on the refrigerant container. The compressor will then pump gaseous refrigerant from the container into the system.

1.4 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

A. After pressure testing of systems and equipment and before operational test thoroughly clean interiors of piping and equipment. Clean equipment as recommended by equipment manufacturers. Where specific instructions are not provided clean equipment systems as follows:

1. Air Handling Systems: Before starting any air system clean all debris, foreign matter and construction dirt from air system and fan. Provide equipment requiring filters, such as air handling units, fan coil units, blower, etc., with throw-away filters. After cleaning air system install temporary filters and run continuously for a minimum of eight hours at full volume before installing permanent filters. Provide temporary throw-away filters in all permanent heating and air conditioning equipment systems being utilized during construction. Prior to testing and balancing systems remove temporary filter media and install clean unused filters of the type specified. Clean filters shall be installed in equipment for final acceptance inspection by Architect and Engineer.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for operation, maintenance and lubrication of equipment installed under this contract.

B. Keep a complete record of equipment maintenance and lubrication and submit two copies with request for final construction review.

C. Records shall indicate types of lubricants used and date or time when next maintenance or lubrication will need to be performed by Owner. Where special lubricants are required, Contractor shall provide Owner with a one year supply as determine by Equipment Manufacturer's recommendations.

1.6 PAINTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Touch-up painting and refinishing of factory applied finishes shall be by Mechanical Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining proper type of painting materials and color from equipment manufacturer.

B. Unless specified otherwise factory built equipment shall be factory painted. Paint shall be applied over surfaces only after they have been properly cleaned and coated with a corrosion resistant primer.

C. After installation, damage to painted surfaces shall be properly prepared and primed with primers equal to factory materials. Finish coating shall be same color and type as factory finish.



D. Where extensive refinishing is required equipment shall be completely repainted.

1.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows at both ends of marker showing normal direction of flow. Directional arrows shall cover full circumference of pipe. Markers shall be sized for respective pipe/insulation sizes per ASME and ANSI.

B. Marker Type: Vinyl tape markers (Seton or equal) complying with ASME Al3.1, ANSI and OSHA.

C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 6 inches OD by one of the following methods:

1. Snap-on application of pretensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 4. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4-inch

wide, lapped a minimum of 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 6 inches in diameter and larger by one of following methods:

1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 2. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2

inches wide, lapped a minimum of 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

3. Strapped to pipe or insulation with manufacturer's standard stainless-steel bands.

E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-concealed locations according to the following:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark

each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or non-accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.

F. Submit all labeling systems for review indicating labels, arrows, colors, size to be used for each piping system.

1.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING DUCT SYSTEMS

A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. Markers shall be sized for respective pipe/insulation sizes per ASME and ANSI.

B. Marker Type: Vinyl tape type markers (Seton or equal) complying with ASME Al3.1, ANSI and OSHA.



C. Fasten markers on duct by one of following methods:

1. Taped to insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4-inch wide, lapped a minimum of 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of duct.

D. Locate pipe markers and color bands where duct is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms;

accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-concealed locations according to the following:

1. Near each damper or control device. 2. Near each branch connection at suite room. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or non-accessible enclosures. 4. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 5. On ducts above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced

markers. 6. In each room.

F. Provide tape duct markers on outside air and exhaust air for DOAS-1, 2 systems only. 1.9 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS

A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each mayor item of mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets:

2. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. 3. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. 4. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. 5. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. 6. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar

equipment. 7. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. 8. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. 9. Tanks and pressure vessels. 10. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

B. Optional Sign Types: Vinyl tape signs may be provided instead of engraved plastic, at Installer's option, where lettering larger than 1-inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

2. Terms on Signs: Distinguish between multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.

C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of flow.

1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.




A. Perform necessary excavation to receive Work. Provide necessary sheathing, shoring, cribbing, tarpaulins, etc. for this operation, and remove same at completion of work. Perform excavation in accordance with appropriate section of these specifications, and in compliance with OSHA Safety Standards.

B. Excavate trenches of sufficient width to allow ample working space, and no deeper than necessary for installation work.

C. Conduct excavations so no walls or footings are disturbed or injured. Backfill excavations made under or adjacent to footing with selected earth or sand and tamp to compaction required by Architect-Engineer. Mechanically tamp backfill under concrete and paving in six inch layers to 95% standard density, Reference Division 2.

D. Backfill trenches and excavations to required heights with allowance made for settlement. Tamp fill material thoroughly and moistened as required for specified compaction density. Dispose of excess earth, rubble and debris as directed by Architect.

E. When available, refer to test hole information on Architectural drawings or specifications for types of soil to be encountered in excavations.

1.12 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RELATED WALL/FLOOR ASSEMBLIES




ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 – 1

SECTION 230513 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Consult Division 26 of specifications for work to be provided by E/C in conjunction with installation of mechanical equipment.

B. Electrical work required to install and control mechanical equipment which is not shown on plans or specified under Division 26 shall be included in M/C's base bid proposal.

C. The cost of larger wiring, conduit, control and protective devices resulting from installation of equipment which was not used for basis of design as outlined in Section 230500 of specifications shall be paid for by M/C at no cost to Owner or A/E.

D. M/C shall be responsible for providing supervision to E/C to insure that required connections, interlocking and interconnection of mechanical and electrical equipment are made to attain intended control sequences and system operation.

E. Furnish six complete sets of electrical wiring diagrams to A/E and three complete sets to E/C. Diagrams shall show factory and field wiring of components and controls. Control devices and field wiring to be provided by E/C shall be clearly indicated by notation and drawing symbols on wiring diagrams.

F. M/C shall obtain complete electrical data on mechanical shop drawings and shall list this data on an approved form which shall be presented on request to A/E. Data shall be complete with wiring diagrams received to date and shall contain necessary data on electrical components of mechanical equipment such as HP, voltage, amperes, watts, locked rotor current to allow E/C to order electrical equipment required in the contract.

G. Safety disconnect switches and manual and magnetic motor starters shall be provided by E/C. Exceptions will be allowed where mechanical equipment is provided with these devices installed as part of factory built control systems.




SECTION 230519 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES

A. Provide thermometers and wells and pressure test plugs as hereinafter specified and shown on the plans so that proper testing and balancing and troubleshooting can be accomplished.

2.2 THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometers shall be red reading mercury-free type having scale length of not less than 9", and scale divisions of 2 degrees F, or less similar and approved equal to Moeller Instrument Company, Inc., Style AJ. Range shall be as specified or as required for the duty. Thermometers and wells must be of at least the quality and design specified. If it complies with these specifications, equipment manufactured by one of the following manufacturers will be acceptable: Moeller, Trerice, Weksler, or Miljoco.

2.3 GAUGES

A. Gauges shall be bourdon tube with minimum 4-1/2" dial and die cast aluminum case with black enamel finish. The movement shall be all stainless steel with Grade A phosphor bronze bourdon tube brazed at socket and tip. The accuracy of the gauge shall be within 1/2 percent of the scale range. The pointer shall be the micrometer adjustment type recalibrated from the front. Pressure, compound, and differential pressure gauges shall have suitable scale ranges, shall be submitted and are subject to the review of the Engineer. Graduations shall be one pound or less on all gauges where this is standard for the required range.

B. Gauges shall have 1/4" IPS connections and shall be Moeller "Vantage" gauges with Case Style No. 2, or approved equal. If it complies with these specifications, equipment manufactured by one of the following manufacturers will be acceptable: Ashcroft, Marsh, Trerice, Moeller, Weksler, Taylor, Weiss, Midwest, or Miljoco.

C. Install a SISCO 1/4" or 1/2" NPT fitting (Test Plug) of solid brass at desired indicated locations. Test plug shall be capable of receiving either a pressure or temperature probe 1/8" o.d. Dual seal core shall be neoprene for temperature to 200oF and shall be rated zero leakage from vacuum to 1000 psig.

D. Contractor shall also furnish the following: (2) two 2 1/2" test gauges with appropriate adapters for test plugs, (2) two 5" stem pocket testing thermometers for 0o to 125oF range and (2) two for 0o to 220oF range.

E. Provide glycerin filled gauges as shown on the plans.

2.4 THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometers shall be installed as hereinafter specified. Where thermometer is scheduled, a thermometer well shall be provided. All thermometer wells shall be constructed of brass or stainless steel and where installed in insulated piping shall have at least 2-1/2" lagging extension. Gauges shall be installed as hereinafter specified. Gauge cocks shall be polished brass A10 1/4" tee handle type with threaded ends. 125 psi rated. Provide gauge cock with 1/4" pipe nipple for connection to gauge cock.



B. Pressure temperature ratings of each well shall be suitable for the system in which it is installed in accordance with specifications and as indicated on the drawings. All wells shall be filled with Silicon and be complete with caps and chains.

C. Thermometers shall have the temperature ranges as required for the intended application and shall be installed as scheduled.

Thermometer & Test Gauge Cock Installation Schedule (Refer to plans for location and additional locations)

Thermometer Press Gauge Pete's Plug & Well & Gauge Cock

+ Hot water entering and leaving Boiler Plant X X Boiler Plant expansion tanks X Suction and discharge flange of each pump* X X *Provide single trumpet type gauge, Marsh Flow Conditioning Corporation or equal.

+ Refer to plans and details for locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All thermometers shall be calibrated in an ice-water bath. Wells shall be packed with thermal mastic.



VALVES 230523-1

SECTION 230523 - VALVES PART 1 – GENERAL (Reference Section 230500) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install necessary valves within piping systems to provide required flow control and to allow isolation for inspection, maintenance and repair of each piece of equipment or fixture, and on each main and branch service loop.

B. Valves installed in piping systems shall be compatible with system maximum test pressure, pipe

materials, pipe joining method, and fluid or gas conveyed in system.

C. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall have soldered or screwed end connections are required by piping materials unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings. Install union connection in the line within two feet of each screw end valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from line. Valves 3" and over shall have flange end connections.

D. Each valve shall be installed so that it is easily accessible for operation, visual inspection, and

maintenance.

E. Non-rising stem valves shall not be installed at any point in the piping systems. With permission of Architect-Engineer non-rising stem valve may be installed at particular points where space is restricted.

F. Provide 6" and below butterfly valves with latchlock handles for On-Off applications and with

Twist-Lock infinite position handle for throttling applications.

G. Install globe valves with pressure on top of disc except that must be completely drained for inspection, maintenance or to prevent freezing shall be installed with stem in horizontal position to insure complete drainage of pipe lines.

H. Gate valves shall not be installed in pipe lines where intended for throttling service or where

piping is subject to vibration as part of normal operating conditions.

I. Valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened and backseated.

J. Equivalent valves listed on current comparison charts of specified valve manufacturers by Crane, Centerline, Dyna Quip, Demco, Hammond, Jenkins, Jamesbury, Keystone, or Powell will be acceptable.

2.2 BALL VALVES

A. Ball valves shall be scheduled as type "BLV" valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

B. Provide ball handle with extension or off-set as required to clear piping insulation.

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION BLV-1 2-1/2" valves and smaller, Apollo #77-100 series bronze full port ball valve 600

PSI-WOG, teflon seats, bronze ball, silicon bronze stem, insulated handle with 1" extension, screwed or solder ends. Reinforced TFE seats shall be provided for steam applications.


VALVES 230523-2

2.3 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe valves shall be scheduled as type "GLV" valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION GLV-1 2-1/2" valves and smaller Stockham Fig. B-24 bronze globe valve, 300

PSI-WOG, union bonnet, rising stem, teflon disc, solder end. 2.4 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug valves shall be scheduled as type PLV valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION PLV-1 1" valves and smaller Hays 7400 series iron body gas cock, 175 PSI-WOG

bronze plug washer and nut, screwed ends. PLV-2 1-1/4" thru 4" valves, Rockwell-Nordstrom Fig. 142, semi-steel lubricated plug

valve, 175 PSI-WOG coated plug, two bolt cover, short pattern screwed ends. Provide complete with standard pattern cast handle.

2.5 CHECK VALVES

A. Check valves shall be scheduled as type "SCV" valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION SCV-1 2" valves and smaller Stockham Fig. No. B-310T or B-320T bronze check valve,

125 PSI-WOG, spring, brass stem, teflon disc and seat ring, screwed or solder ends as required.

SCV-2 2-1/2" and larger Muessco #101-DT iron body stainless steel trim check valve

150 PSI-ASA with flanged ends. 2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly valves shall be scheduled as Type "BFV" valves. Valve specifications by type number shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION BFV-1 3" thru 8" Stockham series LD611-BS2-E ductile iron drilled lug body, lever

operator 150 lb. bronze disc, type 316 stainless steel stem and Nordel (EPT) sleeve.

2.7 BALANCING VALVES

A. Balancing valves shall be scheduled at Type "BAV" valves. Contractor shall provide bronze balancing valves with provisions for connecting differential pressure meter for purposes of setting flow rate through valve. Contractor shall install balancing valves in a manner that allows access to the setting indicator and the gauge connections. Valves shall be shipped in polyurethane block to be used as insulation. Valves shall be as follows:

TYPE NO. SPECIFICATION BAV-1 1/2" thru 6" Armstrong Model CBV 1 or CBV 11 circuit balance valve, 125

PSI-WP at 250 degrees F., meter connections with built-in check valves screwed or flanged ends. Provide complete with polyurethane insulation cover.


VALVES 230523-3

B. Balancing valves shall utilize a variable orifice for setting and adjustment. Fixed venturis or orifices are not acceptable. The valves shall be sized to provide a minimum of 1 PSI pressure drop at design flow with the valve in the wide open position. The submittal shall include the device curve or pressure drop chart indicating the operating point of the BAV.

2.8 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES, AFV-1:

A. Design

1. The GPM for the automatic flow control valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to within 5% of the specified GPM over at least 95% of the control range. The flow control cartridge regulator shall be constructed by the product manufacturer and shall not be field constructed.

2. For ½”-2”, the flow cartridge regulator shall be removable from the Y-body housing without the use of special tools to provide access for regulator change-out, inspection and cleaning without breaking the main piping.

3. Each valve shall have two P/T ports. 4. All automatic flow control devices shall be supplied by a single source and certified flow

tests, witnessed by a professional engineer, shall be available. 5. Pump head requirement: The required differential pressure for the pump head shall be

between 2 to 5 PSI nominally based on flow requirements for the valve. 6. Cartridge regulator nominal pressure service shall be from 2-60 PSI. The cartridge shall

utilize a reinforced rolling seal separating the static cartridge section from the dynamic cartridge section. The cartridge regulator shall provide differential pressure control for flow limit control.

7. Cartridge regulator flow control areas shall be simple orifices. 8. Cartridge regulator valve housing shall incorporate integral ball shutoff valve leaving the

valve housing and union nut tail piece entry to valve body incorporating tail pieces in sweat, male and female NPT threads.

B. Construction.

1. Cartridge regulator valve housing shall be de-zincification resistant brass body incorporating integral ball Shutoff valve leaving the valve housing rated at 400 PSI at 250°F service. Ball isolation valve shall have Teflon seats. EPDM O-ring seals of pressure control areas and leakage paths, and union nut tail piece entry to valve body shall be used. Valve body shall incorporate selectable tail pieces in sweat, male and female NPT threads.

2. Machined cartridges may be dezincification resistant brass or stainless steel. 3. Drawn cartridges shall be stainless steel. 4. Spring compensation of the internal flow cartridge body shall not use fixed shims. A

crimped sheet metal design is not acceptable. 5. Differential pressure control cartridges shall utilize reinforced EPDM rolling seal

connecting static and moving cylinders of cartridge regulator. 6. Flow control Cartridge Regulator shall maintain fixed differential pressure across flow

control orifice. 7. The internal flow cartridge shall be permanently marked with the orifice size and cartridge

style. 8. For ½” through 2” pipe sizes: An assembly shall consist of dezincification brass Y-type

body, integral brass body ball valve and O-ring type union and tailpiece appropriate to piping application.

9. For 2 ½” and larger, wafer style body between two flanges shall be used. Flow Limiting Wafer Body shall be ductile-iron body suitable for mounting wafer style between standard 150# or 300# flanges. Flow limiting cartridge shall be bolted to mounting plate, with EPDM O-ring seal between cartridge and mounting plate.

10. All valve sized between ½” and 2” shall be factory leak tested at 100 psi air under water.


VALVES 230523-4

C. Minimum Ratings:

1. ½” through 2” pipe size: 400 PSIG at 250°F 2. 2 ½” through 4” pipe size: 375 PSIG at 250°F 3. 6” through 30” pipe size: 250°F

D. Install automatic flow control valves on the return side of coils after control valve and appropriate to control valve operation. Provide option for handle and port extensions of sufficient length to clear insulation thickness on cold-water applications. Hot water applications do not require the valve to be insulated.

E. Install, on the supply side of equipment/coil, an integrated ball isolation valve and Y-strainer with

union (20 mesh) with brass drain valve with integral ¾” hose-end connection with cap, and one pressure/temperature reading port for valves ½” to 2” in size. Basket type strainers are not acceptable. Valve body shall incorporate tapped and plugged connection points for additional P/T ports.

F. Automatic flow limiting devices shall be selected for a (2-60) PSI differential pressure control

range. G. All valves shall be factory tagged with the Floor, Unit, Coil (or Valve) number designated by the

designer. valve tag data shall include but not be limited to Product Name, Product Manufacturer and Model number , Design Flow Rate, Operational Pressure Range and Date of Service. Valve tags shall be flexible plastic weatherproof tag tie wrapped to valve handle hole or valve body. Valve tags shall be laser printed. Valve tagging data shall be supplied to commissioning or testing and balancing agency in electronic database format capable of being imported to commonly supplied database and spreadsheets found on personal computers for use in verification forms.

H. Valves and associated specialties required for coil/equipment installation shall be supplied to the

field boxed in groups associated and sorted by floors and units. Valve tag data shall be affixed to box package exterior. Coil Valve components shall have specialty packaging combining required installation components and installation sheets in one package. The valve package shall be labeled with the data shown on the valve tag. Valve packages shall be wrapped, or separated from other boxed packages in floor groups by paper, cardboard or foam in place material. No expanded packaging pellets shall be used.

I. Auto Flow value shall be B&G model: AC circuit sentry J. Equivalents: Nexus, Autoflow by Flow Design, Bell & Gossett, Griswold and Pro Hydronics.

Note: In general, autoflow valves shall be used throughout all HVAC piping systems and balancing valves shall not be used unless noted otherwise.

2.9 VALVE KITS

A. Provide Bell & Gossett Model AC3YB (or similar based on pipe size and flow rate) valve kits for

each all equipment required to have 3-way control valves. Provide AC2Y for all equipment required to have a 2-way valve. Coordinate hose kits with equipment manufacturer representative.

B. VALVE KIT COMPONENTS

1. Automatic flow control valve, AFV-1 2. Manual Air Vent: bronze body nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 225° F

operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; and having


VALVES 230523-5

1/8 inch discharge connection and ½ inch inlet connection. 3. Ball Isolation Valve & Strainer

a. The Valve shall have integral ball shutoff valve capable of 600 PSI service at 60°F , integral “Y” pattern strainer at 20 mesh, and union ended connection with configurable tail piece of female sweat, female NPT or male NPT.

b. The valve shall have one plugged ¼” NPT Female threaded accessory ports. c. The valve shall have ¼” NPT Female threaded accessory port with installed

Pressure/Temperature measurement port utilizing double core elastomeric isolation for hypodermic insertion of temperature or pressure measuring instrument. The port shall have a cap.

d. The valve shall have ¼” female threaded NPT port in the end of the threaded

strainer cap for the blow down of the strainer or the emptying of the coil. A drain valve shall be installed in the fitting and shall have a ball isolation valve and garden hose capped drain fitting.

e. The valve shall have ½” female threaded NPT port suitable for use in bypass piping considerations. The port shall always be plugged.

f. The valve shall have an EPDM O-ring installed in the mating area of the tail piece flange and the body.

g. B & G model: UBY

4. Ball Isolation Valve (in bypass line) a. The Valve shall have integral ball shutoff valve capable of 600 PSI service at

60°F and union ended connection with configurable tail piece of female sweat, female NPT or male NPT.

b. The valve shall have one plugged ¼” NPT Female threaded accessory ports. c. The valve shall have one ¼” NPT Female threaded accessory port with installed

Pressure/Temperature measurement port utilizing double core elastomeric isolation for hypodermic insertion of temperature or pressure measuring instrument. The port shall have a cap.

d. The valve shall have 1/4” female threaded NPT port in the end of the threaded strainer cap for the emptying of the coil. A drain valve shall be installed in the fitting and shall have a ball isolation valve and garden hose capped drain fitting.

e. The valve shall have an EPDM O-ring installed in the mating area of the tail piece of flange and the body.

f. B&G Model: UBV 5. Accessory Union

a. The Union shall have union ended connection with configurable tail piece of female sweat, female NPT male NPT.

b. The union shall have one ¼” NPT Female threaded accessory port with installed Pressure/Temperature measurement port utilizing double core elastomeric isolation for hypodermic insertion of temperature or pressure measuring instrument. The port shall have a cap.

c. The union shall have one ¼” female threaded NPT port in the end of the threaded strainer cap for the air venting of the coil. An air venting valve shall be installed in the fitting.

d. The valve shall have an EPDM O-ring installed in the mating area of the tail piece flange and the body.

e. B&G motel: UA


VALVES 230523-6

C. EQUIVALENTS: NEXUS, AUTOFLOW BY FLOW DESIGN, BELL & GOSSETT (B & G).

VALVE SCHEDULE SYSTEM SIZE STOP CHECK BALANCE AUTOFLOW

Heating Hot Water ½” – 2 ½” BLV-1 SCV-1 BAV-1 AFV-1 & kit




SECTION 230524 - PIPING SPECIALTIES


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATING UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Provide insulating unions and flanges conforming to following specifications and plainly and permanently marked with manufacturers name and pressure class rating. Unions and flanges shall be as follows:

1. Steel pipe to steel pipe screwed end: Provide Stockham malleable iron No. 693-1/2 insulating union with high dielectric strength insulating sleeve and gasket.

2. Steel pipe to steel pipe flanged end: Provide two weld neck flanges of proper pressure rating insulated on both sides with Central or Klingerit Flange Insulation Kit.

3. Iron or steel pipe to copper pipe: Provide Epco Dielectric union or flange with screwed or solder joint as required. Union shall have 250 PSI rating and flange 175 PSI rating at 190 degrees F.

2.2 STRAINERS

A. Install strainers upstream from automatic control valves, steam traps and pumps. Where strainers are an integral part of these items or incorporated in accessory equipment directly upstream, individual line strainers will not be required. Strainers shall be same size as piping. Provide strainers with proper isolation and blow down valves to allow basket removal for cleaning.

1. General: Provide Zurn "Y" type self-cleaning strainers with FIPT blow-off outlet, flanged or screwed end with pressure rating as required by piping system. Provide strainers with removable stainless steel screens with perforations as follows:

Service 1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 8 Air .0027 .005 Fuel Oil .005 1/16 Water .005 1/16

B. Equivalent strainers by Armstrong, Dunham Bush, Musseco, Trane, Paget or Yarway.

2.3 UNIONS

A. Provide unions or flanged joint in each line preceding connections to equipment or valves requiring maintenance.

B. Provide Stockham brass seat unions of material and pressure rating required by piping system.

C. Where piping systems of dissimilar materials are jointed together provide proper insulating union as specified under this specification.

D. Equivalent unions by Fairbanks or Grinnell.

2.4 MANUAL AIR VENTS

A. Provide air vents at all high points of chilled water, hot water, heat pump loop systems of each water coil, drop in pipe against flow of water and where indicated on plans or required by job conditions.



B. Air vents shall be 1/4" copper drain line with a 1/4" Marsh tee handle cock in air vent line located in an accessible unfinished area. Where air vent above ceilings cannot be made accessible to an exposed location, a 12 x 12 access panel shall be provided at drain cock.

C. Equivalent air vents by Taco, Bell & Gossett, Armstrong.

2.5 AIR SEPARATORS / ELIMINATOR

A. Provide Spirotherm VDN air and dirt separators for systems as indicated on plans. B. Integral drain valve, side valve, and auto air valve. C. Equivalent by prior approval only. 2.6 AUTOMATIC FILL VALVES AND PIPING SYSTEM RELIEF VAVLES A. Automatic fill valve shall be B and G, B7-12, 3/4” with B and G, model 790, ¾”, 75 psi relief valve. 2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS

A. Provide where shown on plans Watts Series 909 reduced pressure backflow preventor complete with strainers and valves. Provide check valve ahead of backflow preventors.

B. Equivalent backflow preventors by Febco, Lawler.

2.8 EXPANSION TANKS

A. Expansion tanks shall be welded steel, constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Code for a working pressure of 125 psi and pre-charged to the minimum operating pressure.

B. Provide expansion tanks as shown on plans. Equivalent: Armstrong, Amtrol, Patterson, Bell & Gossett.

2.9 FLEXIBLE PUMP CONNECTIONS

A. Thermotech FJX stainless steel bellows type. Equivalent by Hyspan, Mason or Resistoflex.

2.11 AUTO AIR VENTS

A. Provide air vents at all high points of hot water geoexchange, and snow melt systems as shown on the plans. Provide B and G, model 98 series.




SECTION 230529 - SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE SLEEVES AND SEALS

A. Furnish proper type and size pipe sleeves to General Contractor for installation in concrete or masonry walls or floors. Sleeves are not required for supply and waste piping through wall supporting plumbing fixtures or for cast iron soil pipe passing through concrete slab or grade except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor. Mechanical Contractor shall supervise installation of sleeves to insure proper location and installation.

B. Each sleeve shall be continuous through wall floor or roof and shall be cut flush on each side except where indicated otherwise. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural member except where indicated or approved.

C. Sleeves passing through above grade floors subject to flooding such as toilet rooms, bathrooms, equipment rooms and kitchens shall be cast iron with integral flanges and shall extend 1 inch above finished floor. Size sleeves for and seal space between pipe sleeve with Thunderline Link-Seal.

D. Provide steel pipe sleeves in bearing walls and masonry walls. Opening in non-bearing walls, floors and ceilings may be 20 gauge galvanized pipe sleeves or openings cut with concrete core drill.

E. Pipe insulation shall run continuous through pipe sleeves with 1/4" minimum clearance between insulation and pipe sleeve. Provide metal jackets over insulated pipes passing through fire walls, floors and smoke partitions. Jacket shall be 0.018 stainless steel extending 12 inches on either side of barrier and secured to insulation with 3/8" wide band. Seal annular space between jacket and pipe sleeves with Thunderline High Temperature Link Seal.

F. Pipe wall penetrations exposed to view shall have tight fitting escutcheons or flanges to cover all voids around openings.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide and be responsible for locations of piping hangers, supports and inserts, etc., required for installation of piping under this contract. Design of hangers and supports shall conform to current issue of Manufacturers Standardization Society Specification (MSS) SP-58.

B. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting piping in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into pipe or connected equipment. Support horizontal or vertical pipes at locations of least vertical movement.

C. Where horizontal piping movements are such that hanger rod angularity from vertical is greater than 4 degrees from cold to hot position of pipe, offset hanger, pipe, and structural attachments to that rod is vertical in hot position. Hangers shall not become disengaged by movements of supported pipe.

D. Provide sufficient hangers to adequately support piping system at specified spacing, at changes in piping direction and at concentrated loads. Hangers shall provide for vertical adjustment to maintain pitch required for proper drainage, and for longitudinal travel due to expansion and contraction of piping. Fasten hangers to building structural members wherever practicable.



E. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings support horizontal steel piping as follows:

PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING

Up to 1-1/4" 3/8" 8 Ft. 1-1/2" to 2" 3/8" 10 Ft. 2-1/2" to 3-1/2" 1/2" 12 Ft. 4" and 5" 5/8" 15 Ft.

F. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings support horizontal copper tubing as follows:

NOM. TUBING SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING

Up to 1" 3/8" 6 Ft. 1-1/4" to 1-1/2" 3/8" 8 Ft. 2" 3/8" 9 Ft. 2-1/2" 1/2" 9 Ft. 3" and 4" 1/2" 10 Ft.

G. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe with two hangers for each section located close to each hub.

H. Support vertical cast iron soil pipe at every floor, steel and copper tubing at every other floor except where indicated otherwise on drawings.

I. Provide continuous threaded hanger rods wherever possible. No chain, wire, or perforated straps shall be used. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only, where lateral or axial pipe movement occurs provide suitable linkage to permit swing. Provide pipe support channels with galvanized finish for concealed locations and painted finish for exposed locations. Submit design for multiple pipe supports indicating pipe sizes, service and support detail to Architect/Engineer for review prior to fabrication.

J. Provide Grinnell pipe hangers for vertical pipe risers as follows:

PIPE MATERIAL PIPE SIZE HANGER FIG. NO.

Copper 1/2" thru 4" CT-121 Steel 3/4" thru 20" 261

K. Provide Grinnell Fig. 194, 195, or 199 steel wall brackets for piping suspended or supported from walls. Brackets shall be prime coated carbon steel.

L. Mount hangers for insulated piping on outside of pipe insulation sized to allow for full thickness of pipe insulation. Provide Grinnell Fig. 167 insulation protection shields sized so that line compressive load does not exceed one-third of insulation compressive strength. Shield shall be galvanized steel and support lower 180 degrees of pipe insulation on copper tubing. Provide wood block at each pipe hanger in thickness of insulation. Insulation vapor barrier jacket shall overlap wood block to maintain vapor barrier.

M. Structural attachments for pipe hangers shall be as follows:

Concrete Structure: Provide Grinnell Fig. No. 285 cast in concrete insert for loads up to 400 lbs. and Grinnell Fig. 281 wedge cast in type concrete insert for loads up to 1200 lbs.



N. Provide Grinnell CLEVIS pipe hangers for horizontal single pipe runs as follows:

PIPE MATERIAL PIPE SIZE HANGER FIG. NO.

Copper 1/2" thru 4" CT-65 Steel 3/8" thru 4" 65 Steel 5" thru 30" 260

O. Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 600 channel trapeze pipe hangers for horizontal multiple pipe runs with pipe clamps or pipe rollers as follows:

PIPE MATERIALS PIPE SIZE CLAMP NO. ROLLER NO. Copper 3/8" thru 4" 8600 CP* 8010 CP* Steel 3/8" thru 6" 8500 8010 *Copper Plated

P. Pipe supports for horizontal piping mounted on pipe racks or stanchions shall be Advanced Thermal Systems low friction graphite slide supports or equivalent by Elcen or Grinnell. Where racks and supports are not detailed on drawings submit detailed support drawings to Architect-Engineer for review prior to fabrication.

Q. Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 404 vibration control hangers at locations where piping vibrations would be transmitted to building structure by conventional hangers. Apply hangers within their load supporting range.

R. Provide Elcen Fig. 50 pipe saddle with adjuster to support piping from floor. Provide complete with pedestal type floor stand.

S. Provide necessary structural steel and attachment accessories for installations of pipe hangers and supports. Where heavy piping loads are to be attached to building structure verify structural loading with Architect-Engineer prior to installations.

T. Equivalent hangers and supports by Auto-Grip, Basic Engineer, Bee Line, Elcen, Fee & Mason, Fluorocarbon Company, Unistrut or Super Strut Inc.

2.3 EQUIPMENT ANCHORS

A. Provide floor or foundation mounted equipment such as pumps, boilers, air handling units, etc. with Decatur Engineering Company concrete anchors.

B. Where equipment anchors cannot be installed during forming of floors or foundations anchor equipment with McCulloch Kwik-Bolt concrete anchors.

C. Anchors shall be proper type and size recommended by manufacturer for equipment to be anchored.



MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 230548 - 1

SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. Furnish and install vibration isolation devices for rotating or reciprocating mechanical equipment and piping systems attached thereto.

B. Work shall include all material and labor required for installation of the resilient mounting and suspension systems, adjusting each mounting system, and measurement of isolator system performance. Specific mounting arrangements for each item of mechanical equipment shall be as described herein and as indicated by schedules and details on the drawings.

C. The M/C and the vibration isolation manufacturer or his regularly designated and factory authorized representative shall perform the following tasks in addition to the supply and installation of isolation equipment:

1. Obtain the approved manufacturer's name, model number, and other necessary identifying data for each item of mechanical and electrical equipment to be resiliently mounted. Coordinate all resilient mounting systems with the exact equipment to be furnished in regard to physical size, isolator locations, weight, rotating speed, etc. Direct contact and cooperation between the vibration isolation device fabricator and the equipment manufacturer will be required.

2. Obtain all necessary data in regard to piping systems which are to be resiliently supported so that proper isolators can be selected. Select piping system isolators for proper coordination with the physical arrangement of pipe lines and with the physical characteristics of the building.

3. Submit shop drawings as required by other portions of this specifications. These drawings shall include specification information as follows: a. Manufacturer's model number for each isolator, the machine or pipeline to which

it is to be applied, and the number of isolators to be furnished for each machine or pipeline.

b. For steel spring mounts or hangers - free height, deflected height, solid height, isolator loading, and diameter of spring coil.

c. For elastomer or glass fiber isolators - free height, deflected height, and isolator loading.

d. Dimensional and weight data for concrete inertia bases, steel and rail bases, and details of isolators attachment.

4. Provide on-the-job supervision as required during installation of resiliently mounted equipment and piping to assure that the vibration isolators are installed in strict accordance with normally accepted practices for critical environments.

5. Replace at no extra cost to the Owner any isolators which do not produce the required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct operating height, or which in any way do not produce the required isolation.

6. Cooperate with the other Contractors engaged in this project so that the installation of vibration isolation devices will proceed in a manner that is in the best interest of the Owner.

7. Notify the A/E of any project conditions which affect vibration isolation system installation or performance and which are found to be different from conditions indicated by the drawings or described by the specifications. Should vibration isolation system installation proceed without such notification any remedial work required to achieve proper isolator performance shall be accomplished by the M/C at no additional cost to the Owner.



8. Be alert for possible "short-circuiting" of vibration isolation systems by piping supports, electrical connections, temperature control connections, drain lines, building construction, etc., and notify the involved Contractor as to these problems or potential problems. Where such situations cannot be easily resolved, notify the A/E so that preventive or remedial action can take place on a timely basis. Any remedial measures required shall be undertaken by the Contractor responsible at no additional cost to the Owner.

9. Equivalent: Mason Industries

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS

A. GENERAL

1. The vibration isolation systems described herein and identified by type letter designations shall be applied to specific classifications of mechanical and electrical equipment as indicated by this specification.

2. The minimum static deflection of the isolators for each classification of mechanical or electrical equipment shall be as indicated by this specification.

B. TYPE A ISOLATION

1. The equipment shall be suspended with steel spring vibration isolators which are complete with neoprene-in- shear isolators for high frequency noise control. The neoprene-in-shear isolators shall provide static deflection of 0.20 inches minimum. In addition, elastomer washers shall be furnished as necessary to prevent metal-to-metal contact.

2. Hanger rod misalignment of up to 15 degrees relative to vertical shall not cause "short-circuiting" of the isolation components due to metal-to-metal contact.

3. Spring hangers shall utilize freestanding springs which are unhoused except for the required partial and open housing assembly. Spring hangers shall be selected for reasonably uniform deflection taking into consideration any difference in machine weight at each supporting point, but deflection of each hanger shall not be less than that specified for each classification of mechanical equipment. The spring deflection from the point of rated deflection to the point at which the spring is solid shall not be less than one-half of the rated static deflection. The yield point of the steel used in the springs shall be sufficiently great so that the springs may be compressed to shorted turns without danger of spring failure.

4. Resilient hangers shall be installed as near as possible to the supporting overhead structure. The machine suspension points shall be in a rigid and heavy portion of the building structure. Suspension of machines from lightweight floor slabs shall be avoided, particularly at the center of structural spans.

5. Suspension rods shall be attached to rigid members of the machine structure. When such attachment points do not exist, a heavy steel framework shall be furnished to support the machine with suspension rods attached to this framework.

C. TYPE B ISOLATION

1. The equipment shall be suspended with double deflection neoprene-in-shear hangers which are complete with elastomer washers as required to prevent metal-to-metal contact.

2. Hangers shall be installed as near as possible to the supporting overhead structure. Suspension points shall be on a rigid portion of both the overhead structure and equipment framework.



D. Resilient Mountings for Specific Classifications of Equipment shall be as follows:

1. Equipment Power-HP Rotating Mounting Static Location or as noted Speed-RPM Type Diff.**

Suspended Equipment 0 - 7½ 500 and Up A .75"

E. ISOLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

1. All piping which connects to resiliently mounted equipment shall be suspended with resilient hangers or supported by floor mounted isolators for a distance of 100 pipe diameters from the connected machine or within the mechanical equipment room whichever is the greater distance. The first three supports from the connected machine shall have the same static deflection as indicated for the machine; the next two supports shall have static deflection at least equal to one-half of the static deflection indicated for the machine mounting, and remaining pipe supports shall provide static deflection of 0.35 inches minimum. These remaining isolators may be elastomer.

2. Steel spring hangers shall be as specified for Type A isolation except that a scale shall be attached to the hanger housing to indicated deflection. Elastomer hangers shall be as specified for Type B isolation. Floor mounts shall be free standing steel spring in excess of 0.35 inches is required. Floor mounts, where static deflection of 0.35 inches or less is required, shall be double deflection neoprene-in-shear.

3. Vertical pipe risers shall be resiliently mounted, preferably with each riser anchored near the center of the run. The risers shall be supported at the anchor points with steel spring or double deflection neoprene-in-shear isolators which provide static deflection of at least 0.35 inches. Isolators for the remainder of each run shall be steel spring type specifically designed to control load shifting due to pipe expansion and contraction. At least 0.35 inches deflection shall be maintained under all conditions.

4. Flexible neoprene connectors shall be used to connect all piping to all isolated equipment except equipment for which flexible connectors are not permitted by code. For this application provide swing connectors changing direction a minimum of 3 times before joining isolated equipment. Swing connections should be made within approximately 6 feet of the isolated equipment. Connectors shall be manufactured of multiple plys of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded and cured in hydraulic presses. No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement. Connectors up to and including 2" diameter may have treaded ends. Connectors 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be manufactured with floating steel flanges.

5. All connections shall be rated a minimum of 150 psi at 220 degrees F. All flanged equipment shall be directly connected to neoprene elbows in the size range 2 inches through 6 inches or any larger available size if the piping makes a 90 degree turn at the equipment. All straight through connections shall be made with either flanged or screwed connectors properly pre-extended as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent additional elongation under pressure.

6. Drain connections from isolated equipment to floor drains shall be at least 1" free from drain or use rubber hose.

F. ISOLATION OF FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER EQUIPMENT

1. All fractional horsepower fans, pumps, etc., which are mounted on or suspended from floors that are not on-grade shall be isolated with neoprene-in-shear isolators furnished by the vibration isolation supplier except where such isolators are furnished as an integral part of the machine.



TESTING AND BALANCING 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - TESTING & BALANCING


1.1 GENERAL

A. Testing and balancing of the building air and hydronic systems will be to be completed near the end of construction. The Mechanical Contractor has responsibility to cooperate with, make adjustments for, and provide any equipment necessary for the TAB agency to complete the job.

B. Acceptable Testing and Balancing Firms: Energy Management and Control Corporation, Topeka, Kansas Doyle Services, Lenexa, Kansas Allied Laboratories, Lawrence, Kansas

1.2 SYSTEM PREPARATION FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Prior to requesting testing and balancing agency to perform their work the installing contractor shall make all necessary inspections and adjustments to insure that systems are completely installed and operating in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract documents.

B. The following checks shall be performed on each system installed under this contract. A report sheet shall be prepared for each system indicating checks made, corrective action taken where required, date, and name of person making inspection. Submit one copy to testing and balancing agency and two to A/E. Testing and balancing agency will not begin until checklist has been received and reviewed.

1. Air Handling Systems (including Hood and Kitchen Systems): a. Clear system of all foreign objects and clean system. b. Verify fan rotation. c. Check bearing condition and lubrication. d. Check fan wheel clearances and fan alignment. e. Check motor security to mounting base. f. Check alignment of drive. g. Check vibration isolator adjustment. h. Verify that proper filter media is installed. i. Verify that all control dampers are installed and operable without

binding or sticking. j. Confirm that all fire, smoke and volume dampers are installed

and in full open position. k. Verify that all air terminal units are installed. Confirm that all air

openings in walls above ceilings have been provided. l. Check for and repair all excessive air leaks in duct systems, at

equipment connections and at coils. m. Air leaks shall not exceed SMACNA parameters for system

pressure. n. Verify that ductwork is constructed and installed in accordance

with contract drawings and/or approved ductwork shop drawings.

2. Hydronic Systems: a. Confirm pump shaft alignment, grouting and fastening of pump

base. b. Verify that all pump vibration isolators are properly adjusted and

that flexible connections are properly restrained and aligned. c. Check pump bearing for proper lubrication and condition. d. Verify pump rotation and impeller size.



e. Confirm that total system has been hydrostatically tested, flushed, filled, vented and water treated as required.

f. Confirm that all strainer baskets are in place, clean and are the proper type.

g. Verify that all pressure reducing and control valves are operating properly.

h. Confirm that all expansion tanks are installed and contain proper air charge.

i. Verify that access to all balancing valves and flow stations in walls and ceilings have been provided.

j. Inspect and clean all coils and correct fin damage. k. Confirm that fittings have been provided for flow and temperature

measurements at all coils, heat exchangers and pumps. l. Verify that all piping connections to 3-way valves and coils are

proper for flow direction as indicated by manufacturer and temperature control contractor.

C. The Mechanical Contractor shall make changes in pulleys, belts, dampers, etc.,

as required by the test and balance agency, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. The Mechanical Contractor shall install new filters in the air handlers and clean all strainers in the water system just prior to the beginning of the testing and balancing.

E. The control manufacturer or his representative shall assist the test and balance agency in setting automatic dampers, valves, etc., as required.

1.3 AIR AND WATER BALANCE

A. The Contractor shall procure the services of an independent air balance and testing agency, approved by the A/E, which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment and air distribution and exhaust systems and all water flow circuits. All work by this agency shall be done under engineer employed by them. All instruments used by this agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If requested the tests shall be conducted in the presence of the A/E responsible for the project and/or his representative. The testing and balancing firm shall be certified by NEBB or AABC and all work shall be performed in accordance with these organizations' published procedure manuals.

B. Air balance and testing shall not begin until systems have been completed and are in full working order. All heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems and equipment shall be in full operation during each working day of testing and balancing.

C. The Mechanical Contractor shall make changes in pulleys, belts, dampers, etc., as required by the test and balance agency, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. The Mechanical Contractor shall install new filters in the air handlers and clean all strainers in the water system just prior to the beginning of the testing and balancing.

E. The control manufacturer or his representative shall assist the test and balance agency in setting automatic dampers, valves, etc., as required.

F. The balancing agency shall prepare a certified report of all tests performed. The report shall be written on standard forms prepared by NEBB or AABC or facsimiles thereof. The balancing agency shall submit 3 copies of this report to the Mechanical Contractor who shall submit them to the A/E for review and distribution.



G. The Balancing reports shall include the line drawing of each ductwork system as installed, a line drawing of the heating and cooling water piping as installed; an elevation of each air handling unit as installed showing outdoor air return air an supply air ductwork connections, coil arrangements and damper arrangements, a psychometric chart on each air handling unit, with a cooling coil, showing outdoor temperature, return air temperature, mixed air temperature at a minimum outdoor air condition, coil leaving air condition at full cooling coil water flow. The balancing report shall also include all NEBB or AABC forms completed as required by each respective certification.

H. The TAB firm shall cycle each air handling unit through its control sequence of operation to verify proper operation. Any inconsistency with contract documents shall be reported to A/E and temperature control contractor. Temperature control contractor shall take prompt action to correct any control inconsistency as reported by the TAB firm.

I. During installation of the mechanical systems the testing and balancing agency shall make no less than (3) inspection visits to the project site. Proper placement and installation of all control and balancing devices shall be verified by these inspections. The mechanical contractor shall make all corrections in control and balancing device locations as requested by the TAB firm. Following each inspection visit the TAB firm shall report to the A/E all items noted, action taken, and progress of control device installation. The last inspection and balancing shall be performed in the presence of a professional engineer active in the design of mechanical building systems.



PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION 230700-1

SECTION 230700 - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Reference Section 230500) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide necessary materials and accessories for installation of insulation for plumbing and mechanical systems as specified and/or detailed on drawings insulation type, jacket, and thickness for specific piping systems or equipment shall be as listed in insulation schedule. Provide insulation materials manufactured by Armstrong Industries, Dow Chemical, Schuller, Knauf Fiberglass or Owens-Corning Fiberglas.

B. Insulation, except where specified otherwise, shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as rested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 procedures not exceeding:

FLAME SPREAD 25

SMOKE DEVELOPED 50 FUEL CONTRIBUTED 50

C. Provide insulation accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tape and glass fabric with same component ratings as listed above. Products or their shipping cartons shall bear label indicating their flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. Use of water soluble treatments such as corn paste or wheat paste is prohibited. This does not exclude approved lagging adhesives.

D. Install insulation over clean dry surfaces with joints firmly butted together. Insulation at equipment, flanges, fittings, etc. shall have straight edges with box type joints with corner beads as required. Where plumbing and heating insulation terminates at equipment or unions, taper insulation at 30 degree angle to pipe with one coat finishing cement and finish same as fittings. Total insulation system shall have neat smooth appearance with no wrinkles, or folds in jackets, joint strips or fitting covers.

E. Undamaged insulation systems on cold surface piping and equipment shall perform their intended functions as vapor barriers and thermal insulation without premature deterioration of insulation or vapor barrier. Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution to provide insulation systems with continuous unbroken vapor barriers.

F. Where glass fabric is specified in the following insulation methods provide resin impregnated white open weave glass fabric with 10/20 thread count. Provide glass cloth similar to Alpha Martex wettable glass cloth.

G. Abbreviations for manufacturers of adhesive, mastics and coating specified shall be C.M. for Chicago Mastic Company and B.F. for Benjamin Foster Company.

H. Insulation of removable heads, manholes access covers, etc., shall be fabricated to allow removal without damage to insulation. Provide removable units with vapor-proof cover fabricated to be sealed to equipment vapor barrier.



I. Insulation failing to meet workmanship and appearance standards shall be replaced with an acceptable installation before final acceptance of project will be given. Insulation failing to meet performance requirements of this specification for a period of one year after date of final acceptance or through one heating season and one cooling season, whichever is longer shall be replaced with an acceptable installation. All costs to correct insulation deficiencies and costs to repair damages to other work shall be at Mechanical Contractors expense at no cost to owner.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS AND APPLICATION METHODS (PIPING)

A. Pipe insulation by type shall be as follows:

1. TYPE 1-PHC: Insulation for hot and cold surface piping systems with -60 degrees F to +650 degrees F operating range shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglass ASJ/SSL-11, 4.2 lb. density pipe insulation with white fire retardant ASJ jacket and double self-sealing lap. Average thermal conductivity shall not exceed .26 BTU/Hr. at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Seal longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips with C.M. No. 17-465 or B.F. No. 85-75 vapor barrier adhesive. Insulate valves and fittings as follows:

a. Insulate exposed and concealed valves and fittings with 2" thick glass

fiberglass inserts or blankets. Cover fittings with Zeston Products PVC fitting covers or approved equal. PVC fitting covers shall be secured with mechanical fasteners such as tacks or staples for temperatures above 75 degrees F. For cold service all joints and PVC covers shall be sealed with vapor barrier adhesive or by pressure sensitive vapor barrier vinyl tape to maintain proper vapor barrier.

2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS AND APPLICATION METHODS (EQUIPMENT)

A. Equipment insulation materials and application methods shall be as follows:

1. Type 1-EC: Insulation for cold surface equipment insulation for external surfaces with +40 degrees F to +220 degrees F operating temperature range shall be pipe or sheet insulation as required with 5.5 or 6.0 lb. density. Average thermal conductivity shall not exceed .27 BTU/HR at 75 F mean temperature. Apply insulation directly to metal surfaces and seal insulation joints. Insulation shall be mitered, beveled and built-up as required to provide a smooth and neat exterior surface. On large pumps and equipment provide joints in insulation at points where equipment casing must be disassembled for maintenance and repair. Insulate these joint areas so that insulation can be easily removed from casing joints without removing or damaging adjacent insulation. Finish insulation with two coats of vinyl-lacquer finish, or provide ASJ wrap.

2.4 INSULATION MATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS METHODS (HANGERS, SUPPORTS,

ANCHORS, GUIDES, EXPANSION JOINTS, ETC.)

A. Insulation materials and application methods for piping hangers supports, anchors, guides expansion joints, etc., shall be as follows:

1. Insulate hangers and supports from direct contact with cold or hot surfaces (-120oF

to 450oF) as shown on plans.



INSULATION SCHEDULE

INSULATION SERVICE SIZE TYPE THICKNESS JACKET Hot Water 2-1/2” and Up 1-PHC 2” ASJ Hot Water ½” thru 1” 1-PHC 1” ASJ Hot Water 1 ¼” thru 2” 1-PHC 1-1/2” ASJ *Refrigerant Suction & Liquid All Sizes 1-PHC 1” ASJ Condensate Drain All Sizes 1-PHC ½” ASJ Strainers -- 1-EC ½” -- *Provide minimum .016” thick aluminum jacket with band clamps and aluminum fitting covers over all pipe insulation located on exterior of building. Ductless split system requires insulation of both suction and liquid. Verify with manufacturer. Refer to VRF sections for VRF refrigerant piping and insulation. END OF SECTION 230700


DUCTWORK INSULATION 230701 - 1

SECTION 230701 - DUCTWORK INSULATION


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Provide necessary materials and accessories for installation of interior and exterior ductwork insulation as specified and/or detailed on drawings. Insulation type and thickness for specific ductwork systems shall be as listed in insulation schedule in this section of specification. Provide insulation materials manufactured by Schuller, Knauf Fiberglass, Certain/Teed, or Owens-Corning Fiberglas.

B. Insulation and application adhesives, except where specified otherwise, shall have fire and smoke hazard rating as tested by ASTM E-84 procedure not exceeding:

FLAME SPREAD 25 SMOKE DEVELOPED 50 FUEL CONTRIBUTED 50

C. Insulation shall meet ASTM C411 performance test and shall be installed in conformance with NFPA Standard 90A.

D. Install interior duct liner insulation cut to insure tight fitting corner, and longitudinal joints. Apply liner to sheet metal with 100% coverage of adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturers recommended applications rate. Coat all edges of liner with adhesive. Provide mechanical fasteners on surfaces 18" or wider in addition to liner adhesive with fastener clips set flush with duct liner surface. Provide fasteners as follows:

1. Low Velocity Ductwork (Velocities less than 2000 FPM): Provide fasteners within 3" of leading edge of each section 12" O.C. around joint perimeter and 3" from longitudinal joints 12" O.C. Elsewhere space fasteners 18" O.C. except not more than 6" from longitudinal joints and not 12" from corner break.

E. Provide round sheet metal ductwork with exterior thermal insulation of type and thickness listed in insulation schedule. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted together with longitudinal and end joint strips sealed with vapor barrier adhesive. Insulate fittings with insulation thickness equal to adjoining insulation with cover overlapping 2" onto adjacent covering.

F. Eliminate ductwork insulation on exposed round ductwork unless noted otherwise in ductwork insulation schedule.

G. Duct insulation materials by type shall be as follows:

1. Type 1-DIL: Internal acoustical and thermal duct insulation for low and high velocity ductwork shall be 2 lb. density for 1/2" thick and 1.5 lb. density for 1" thick duct liner with 1.08 @ 1000 FPM friction coefficient and .24 BTUH thermal conductivity at 75 degrees mean temperature.

2. Type 2-DEW: External thermal insulation for low, medium and high pressure duct shall be 1.0 lb. density standard duct insulation type IV with foil-scrim-craft facing and .27 BTUH thermal conductivity at 75 degrees mean temperature.

3. Type 3-DEW: External thermal insulation for low pressure ductwork. Fiberglass with .23 Btuh thermal conductivity at 75oF mean temperature and fire retardant polyethylene .003" thick jacket. Insulation shall be premanufactured sleeve type for installation over round low velocity ductwork.


DUCTWORK INSULATION 230701 - 2

H. Specific insulation materials and installation methods for ductwork systems shall be as follows:

DUCT INSULATION DUCTWORK SYSTEM TYPE THICKNESS

Low Pressure Rectangular 1-DIL 1/2" Supply Downstream of VAV Box High Pressure Rectangular 2-DEW 1-1/2” Or Round Supply Relief and Return Air Boots 1-DIL 1/2" Low Pressure Round Ductwork (<12”) 3-DEW or 2-DEW 1-1/2" Low Pressure Round (>12”) 2-DEW 1-1/2” All exposed round or oval duct in high finish areas shall be double wall.



BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230900-1

SECTION 230900 - BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Description

B. Approved Building Automation System Manufacturers

C. Quality Assurance

D. System Performance

E. Submittals

F. Warranty

G. Ownership of Proprietary Material

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The Building Automation System shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in these

specifications. System must be fully integrated and coordinated with mechanical equipment

DDC controllers furnished and installed in the equipment manufacturer's factory as specified in

those sections. The intent of the BAS is to integrate all mechanical equipment into one system

for monitoring, control, and alarming associated with the building. It is the BAS manufacturer's

responsibility to provide all the design, engineering, and field coordination required to ensure all

equipment sequence of operations are met as specified and the designated BAS operators

have the capability of managing the building mechanical system to ensure occupant comfort

while maintaining energy efficiency.

B. The BAS shall meet both BACnet and LonTalk communication standards to ensure the system

maintains "interoperability" to avoid proprietary arrangements that will make it difficult for the

Owner to consider other BAS manufacturers in future projects. These open protocol

communication standards are discussed in more detail later in this specification.

C. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for

control of mechanical systems and terminal devices on this project.

D. The BAS shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control

system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall have access to

all valid system data. An operator shall be able to log onto any workstation on the control

system and have access to all appropriate data.

The mechanical systems and terminal devices shall be provided with factory mounted DDC

controls that will permit each system to operate in a stand-alone fashion. As such, in the event of a

BAS network communication failure, or the loss of an individual controller, the other DDC

controllers shall continue to independently operate and communicate to the BAS.

E. Communication between DDC controllers and all workstation(s) shall be over a high-speed

network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the

controller identifier or location to view or control a point (object). Application Specific

Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the Building Controllers to update point information

and alarm information globally.



F. The BAS manufacturer shall provide all hardware and software necessary to implement the

functions and sequence of operations specified.

1.3 APPROVED BAS MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. The BAS/ATC Contractor shall be the local office of a nationally recognized

organization. Bids by wholesalers, contractors and franchised dealers, or any firm whose

principal business is not that of manufacturing and installing of Automatic Temperature

Controls and BAS/ATC systems will not be acceptable. The manufacturer must be the

installer and be employed by the manufacturer. The ATC Contractor shall have a ten year

experience record in the design and installation of computerized building systems similar in

scope and performance to that specified herein, and shall provide evidence of this history

as condition of acceptance within 30 days after award of bid for review.

2. The temperature control system shall be a Trane Tracer system. The system shall include

web access through Trane Tracer ES. The system shall be complete in all respects

including labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary, as shown on the drawings

and specified herein. The system shall be installed by personnel regularly employed by the

manufacturer. Contact Kevin Guinan at 913 523 6739 for pricing and information.


A. BAS Manufacturer Qualifications

1. The BAS manufacturer shall have an established business office within 50 miles of the

project site and must provide 24 hours/day, 7 days/week response in the event of a

customer warranty or service call.

2. The BAS Manufacturer shall have factory trained and certified personnel providing all

engineering, service, startup, and commissioning field labor for the project from their local

office location. BAS manufacturer shall be able to provide training certifications for all local

office personnel upon request.

3. The BAS shall be provided by a single manufacturer and this manufacturer's equipment must

consist of operator workstation software, Web-based hardware/software, Open Standard

Protocol hardware/software, Custom application Programming Language, Graphical

Programming Language, Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers, and Application

Specific Controllers. All other products specified herein (i.e., sensors, valves, dampers,

actuators, etc.) need not be manufactured by the BAS manufacturer listed in Section 2.02 of

this specification.

4. Independent representatives of BAS manufacturers are not acceptable. BAS vendor must

be corporate owned entity of BAS manufacturer.

B. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of all applicable standards and codes, except when

more detailed or stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents, including

requirements of this Section.

1. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed.

2. National Electrical Code -- NFPA 70.

3. Federal Communications Commission -- Part J.

4. ASHRAE/ANSI 135-1995 (BACnet) - (System Level Devices) - Building Controllers and

PC Operator Workstations communicating on an Ethernet/1P protocol shall permit



interoperability with other various building system manufacturers that are BACnet

approved systems.

5. EIA-709.1 LonTalk Standard and EIA 901.2 (LonMark Certification) - (Unit Level Devices) -

Custom Application Controllers and Application Specific Controllers shall use FIT-10A

transceivers and support the LonTalk communication protocol utilizing Standard Network

Variable Types (SNVT) as defined by Echelon Corporation. This standard communication

protocol provides interoperability with hundreds of other various building system

manufacturers' control systems and devices.

6. All products used in this installation shall be currently manufactured, and shall have been

applied to a minimum of three previous projects. This installation shall not be used as a

test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner's representative in

writing prior to bid date. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion

of this contract.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Standards. The BAS system shall conform to the following:

1. Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of 20 dynamic points.

All current data shall be displayed within 20 seconds of the operator's request.

2. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within 30

seconds.

3. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the

operator and the reaction by the device shall be 10 seconds. Analog objects shall start to

adjust within 10 seconds.

4. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over

the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation

will be current within the prior 60 seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it

is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds.

6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of

running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for

selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

7. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable

frequency from at least once every 5 seconds. The controller shall scan and update the

process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency.

8. Multiple Alarm Annunciations. All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within 5

seconds of each other.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. BAS manufacturer shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers' standard specification data

sheets on all hardware and software being provided for this project. No work may begin on

any segment of this project until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for

conformity with the plan and specifications. Five (5) copies are required. All shop drawings

shall be provided to the Owner electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats once they have been

approved and as-built drawings have been completed.

B. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall

not relieve the BAS manufacturer of furnishing quantities required based upon contract

documents.

C. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to

determine compliance with the specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting and

understanding the system to be installed.



D. Submit the following within 20 days of contract award:

1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantities, manufacturers

and model numbers.

2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, pressure drop, model number

(including pattern and connections), flow, CV, body pressure rating, and location.

3. A schedule of all control dampers including damper size, pressure drop, manufacturer, and

model number

4. Provide all manufacturers' technical cut sheets for major system components. When technical

cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically

applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means.

5. Each submitted product literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification

page and section number and/or drawing number associated with the product. Include:

a. Building Controllers

b. Custom Application Controllers

c. Application Specific Controllers

d. Operator Workstations

e. Portable Operator Terminals 1.

Auxiliary Control Devices

g. Proposed Building Automation System architectural diagram depicting various

controller types, device locations, addresses, and communication cable requirements

h. Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations, as

well as terminal tie-ins to DDC controls provided by mechanical equipment

manufacturers. Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled.

i. Points list showing all system objects and the proposed English language object names.

j. Sequence of operation for each controlled mechanical system and terminal end devices.

k. Provide a BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each

BACnet system level device (i.e. Building Controller & Operator Workstations) type.

This defines the point list for proper coordination of interoperability with other building

systems if applicable for this project.

1. Provide LonMark Certification and functional profile SNVT's for unitary-level controllers

(i.e. chillers, RTU's, AHU's, Terminal VAV boxes, FCU's, UV's, etc.) for interoperability

with other building systems if applicable for this project.

m. Color printouts of proposed operator graphics including a list of points for workstation

display.

E. Project Record Documents: Upon completion of installation, submit three (3) copies of record

(as-built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion

and include:

1. Project Record Drawings - These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One

set of electronic media including CAD .dwg or .dxf drawing tiles shall also be provided.

2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists signed off by trained factory

(equipment manufacturers) and field (BAS) commissioning personnel.

3. Operating and Maintenance (0 & M) Manuals - These shall be as-built versions of the

submittal product data. In addition to the information required for the submittals, Operating

& Maintenance manual shall include:

a. Names, address and 24-hour/7-day per week telephone numbers of Contractor personnel

managing and installing equipment, along with service personnel responsible for supporting

the ongoing warranty and services of the control system.

b. Procedures for operating the BAS including logging on/off, alarm management,

generation of reports, trends, overrides of computer control, modification of setpoints,

and other interactive system requirements.



c. Description of the programming language including syntax, statement descriptions,

algorithms, calculations, point database creation and modification, program creation

and modification, and operator use of the editor.

d. Explanation of how to design and install new points, new DDC controllers, and other

BAS hardware.

e. Preventative Maintenance and calibration procedures; hardware troubleshooting; and

hardware repair and/or replacement procedures.

f. Documentation of all software program logic created for Custom Programmable

Controllers including the overall point database. Provide one set of magnetic media

containing files of the software and point database.

g. One set of electronic media containing files of all operator color graphic screens for the

project.

h. A list of recommended spare parts including pricing, manufacturer, supplier, and part

numbers.

i. Documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all third party

hardware/software products provided including personal computers, printers, hubs,

sensors, valves, etc.

j. Original issue media for all software provided, including operating systems,

programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.

k. Licenses, Guarantee, and Warranty documents for all equipment and systems. 1.

Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a

schedule of tasks (inspection, cleaning, calibration, etc.) and task descriptions.

F. Training Manuals: The BAS manufacturer shall provide a course outline and copies of training

manuals at least two weeks prior to the start of any corporate training class to be attended by

the Owner.

1.7 W ARR ANTY

A. Warrant all work as follows:

1. BAS system labor and materials shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twelve (12)

months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. BAS failures during the warranty period

shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge to the Owner. The BAS manufacturer shall

respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours of the initiated call and will

occur during normal business hours (8AM-5PM).

2. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to

the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifying that the BAS is operational,

and has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date

of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of the warranty period.

3. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware

updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty period. Written

authorization by the Owner must be granted prior to the installation of these updates.

4. The BAS manufacturer shall provide a web-accessible Users Network for the proposed

System and give the Owner free access to question/answer forum, graphics library, user

tips, upgrades, and training schedules for a one year period of time correlating with the

warranty period.

1.8 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. All project developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. This

includes but is not limited to:

B. Operator Graphic files



C. As-built hardware design drawings

D. Operating & Maintenance Manuals

E. BAS System software database

F. Controller application programming databases

G. Application Specific Controller configuration files

H. Required Licensed software

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Description

B. Architecture/Communication

C. Operator Interface

D. Application and Control Software

E. System Controllers

F. Programmable Controllers

G. Auxiliary Control Devices

2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. See drawings for BAS schematics and sequences of operation.

2.3 ARCHITECTURE/COMMUNICATION

A. This project shall be comprised of a high speed Ethernet network utilizing BACnet/IP

communications between System Controllers and Workstations. Communications between System

Controllers and sub-networks of Custom Application Controllers and/or Application Specific

Controllers shall utilize LonTalk (FTTIO) or BACnet MSTP (RS485) communications.

1. Each System Controller shall perform communications to a network of Custom Application

and Application Specific Controllers using BACnet/MSTP (RS485) or LonTalk (FIT10) as

defined by the BACnet or LonTalk standard.

a. Each System Controller shall function as a BACnet Router to each unit controller

providing a unique BACnet Device ID for all BACnet/MSTP controllers within the

system.

b. All LonTalk Unit Controllers shall conform to the LonTalk standard and conform to a

LonMark Profile.

c. Points within LonTalk unit controllers shall be exposed as standard BACnet points within

the System Controller without need for manual intervention by an operator.

2. Components



a. If provided, the wireless comm interface shall be addressed using rotary switches with

numerical indication to simplify and reduce installation time and minimize risk of

incorrect addressing. Two position DIP switches are not acceptable.

b. Wireless Comm Interface certifications shall include:

i. TFP-13651127 - Canada Compliance ii. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment iii. UL 94 - The Standard for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices

and Appliances: 5 VA flammability rating iv. UL 873 - Temperature regulating and indicating equipment v. ZigBee Building Automation, BACnet Tunneling Device

3. The Owner will provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, network switches,

and routers necessary for the high speed Ethernet network. An active Ethernet port will be

provided adjacent to each System Controller and operator interface (PC) for connection to

this high speed Ethernet network.

B. If wireless equipment controllers and auxiliary control devices are to be used, they shall conform

to:

1. IEEE 802.15.4 radios to minimize risk of interference and maximize battery life, reliability,

and range.

2. Operating range shall be a minimum of 200 feet; open range shall be 2,500 ft. (762 m) with

less than 2% packet error rate.

3. To check for proper operation, wireless zone temperature sensors shall include a signal

strength and battery condition indicators on the zone sensor display or using LED's on non-

display models.

4. To maintain robust communication, two-way communications shall be used between the

wireless zone sensor and receiver to allow channel switching based on varying channel

traffic and signal strength.

5. The wireless zone sensor and receiver addresses shall be held in non-volatile memory to

ensure operation through system voltage disturbances and to minimize the risk of incorrect

association.

6. The wireless zone sensor and receiver shall be addressed using rotary switches with

numerical indication to simplify and reduce installation time and minimize risk of incorrect

addressing. Two position DIP switches are not acceptable.

7. Installation and replacement of failed sensors shall be accomplished automatically after

power up.

8. To allow local troubleshooting without specialized tools, error codes shall be displayed on

the digital display through a blinking pattern on the non-display models. Error codes shall

include: not associated, address to 000, improper software configuration, input voltage too

high, or general sensor failure. Codes shall be indicated on inside of sensor back cover.

9. Certifications shall include FCC CFR47 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES - Section 15.247

& Subpart E

2.4 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Owner provided PC shall be able to access all information in the system. The operator interface

shall reside on the Enterprise wide network, which is same high-speed communications

network as the System Controllers. The Enterprise wide network will be provided by the owner

and supports the Internet Protocol (IP).

1. Each PC based operator interface shall include the following:



a. Hardware type

I . PC

2. Laptop

b. Operating Systems

1. Windows XP

2. Windows 7

c. Minimum Hardware

I. Pentium Core 2 DUO or better

2. 4 GB RAM

3. 100 GB hard drive space

4. Internet Browser compatible with operator interface requirements outlined in the

operator interface section

5. Java Runtime Environment (JRE) V6.0 or higher

2. Operator Interface

a. The operator interface shall be accessible via a web browser.

b. The operator interface shall support the following Internet web browsers:

1. Internet Explorer 8.0+

2. Firefox 4.0+

3. Chrome 10.0+

c. The operator interface shall support the following mobile web browsers:

1. iOS (iPacl/iPhone) V4.0+

2. Android (Tablet) V4.0+

3. Android (Phone) V2.3+

d. System Security

1. Each operator shall be required to login to the system with a user name and

password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data.

2. User Profiles shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system

functions as assigned by the system administrator.

3. Each operator shall be allowed to change their user password

4. The System Administrator shall be able to manage the security for all other users

5. The system shall include pre-defined "roles" that allow a system administrator to

quickly assign permissions to a user.

6. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded.

7. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off

following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable.

8. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.

e. Database

1. Database Save. A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be

able to archive the database on the designated operator interface PC.



2. Database Restore. The system operator shall also be able to clear a panel database

and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system.

f. On-Line Help and Training

1. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the operator in operation

and configuration of the system.

2. On-line help shall be available for all system functions and shall provide the

relevant data for each particular screen.

g. System Diagnostics

1. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all network connections,

building management panels, and controllers.

2. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operators.

h. Equipment & Application Pages

1. The operator interface shall include standard pages for all equipment and

applications. These pages shall allow an operator to obtain information relevant to

the operation of the equipment and/or application, including:

Animated Equipment Graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor

plan in the System. This includes:

(1) Each Chiller, Air Handler, VAV Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and Cooling

Tower. These graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the

points list.

(2) Animation capabilities shall include the ability to show a sequence of

images reflecting the position of analog outputs, such as valve or damper

positions. Graphics shall be capable of launching other web pages.

ii Alarms relevant to the equipment or application without requiring a user to

navigate to an alarm page and perform a filter.

iii Historical Data (As defined in Automatic Trend Log section below) for the

equipment or application without requiring a user to navigate to a data log page

and perform a filter.

i. System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall include at least

one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for each chilled water

and hot water system, and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of each

building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary

graphics using colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone set point.

1. Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system status, to view a

summary of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of

equipment, to use point and-click navigation between zones or equipment, and to

edit set points and other specified parameters.

2. Graphic imagery — graphics shall use 3D images for all standard and custom

graphics. The only allowable exceptions will be photo images, maps, schematic

drawings, and selected floor plans.

3. Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying different Image lies for

changed object status.

4. Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm condition using color or

other visual indicator.



5. Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard format such as BMP,

JPEG, PNG, or GIF. Web-based system graphics shall be viewable on browsers

compatible with World Wide Web Consortium browser standards. Web graphic

format shall require no plug-in (such as HTML and JavaScript) or shall only require

widely available no-cost plug-ins (such as Active-X and Macromedia Flash).

Custom Graphics

1. The operator interface shall be capable of displaying custom graphics in order to

convey the status of the facility to its operators.

2. Graphical Navigation. The operator interface shall provide dynamic color graphics

of building areas, systems and equipment.

3. Graphical Data Visualization. The operator interface shall support dynamic points

including analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files.

4. Custom background images. Custom background images shall be created with the

use of commonly available graphics packages such as Adobe Photoshop. The

graphics generation package shall create and modify graphics that are saved in

industry standard formats such as GIF and JPEG.

k. Graphics Library. Furnish a library of standard FIVAC equipment such as chillers, air

handlers, terminals, fan coils, unit ventilators, rooftop units, and VAV boxes, in 3-

dimensional graphic depictions. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible

with the graphics generation package program.

1. Manual Control and Override.

1. Point Control. Provide a method for a user to view, override, and edit if applicable,

the status of any object and property in the system. The point status shall be

available by menu, on graphics or through custom programs.

2. Temporary Overrides. The user shall be able to perform a temporary override

wherever an override is allowed, automatically removing the override after a

specified period of time.

3. Override Owners. The system shall convey to the user the owner of each override

for all priorities that an override exists.

4. Provide a specific icon to show timed override or operator override, when a point,

unit controller or application has been overridden manually.

m. Engineering Units

1. Allow for selection of the desired engineering units (i.e. Inch pound or SI) in the

system.

2. Unit selection shall be able to be customized by locality to select the desired units for

each measurement.

3. Engineering units on this project shall be [IP] [SI].

4. Scheduling. A user shall be able to perform the following tasks utilizing the operator interface:

a. Create a new schedule, defining the default values, events and membership.

b. Create exceptions to a schedule for any given day.

c. Apply an exception that spans a single day or multiple days.

d. View a schedule by day, week and month.

e. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar.

f. Modify the schedule events, members and exceptions.



4. Trend Logs

a. Trend Logs Definition.

1. The operator interface shall allow a user with the appropriate security permissions to

define a trend log for any data in the system.

2. The operator interface shall allow a user to define any trend log options as

described in the Application and Control Software section.

b. Trend Log Viewer.

1. The operator interface shall allow Trend Log data to be viewed and printed.

2. The operator interface shall allow a user to view trend log data in text-based (time

—stamp/value).

3. The operator shall be able to view the data collected by a trend log in a graphical

chart in the operator interface.

4. Trend log viewing capabilities shall include the ability to show a minimum of 5

points on a chart.

5. Each data point trend line shall be displayed as a unique color.

6. The operator shall be able to specify the duration of historical data to view by

scrolling and zooming.

7. The system shall provide a graphical trace display of the associated time stamp

and value for any selected point along the x-axis.

c. Export Trend Logs.

1. The operator interface shall allow a user to export trend log data in CSV or PDF

format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet

packages.

5. Alarm/Event Notification

a. An operator shall be notified of new alarms/events as they occur while navigating

through any part of the system via an alarm icon.

b. Alarm/Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms/events

from any operator interface.

I. The operator shall be able to sort and filter alarms from events. Alarms shall be

sorted in a minimum of 4 categories based on severity.

2. Alarm/event messages shall use full language, easily recognized descriptors.

3. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear

alarms/events.

4. All alarms/events that have not been cleared by the operator shall be stored by the

building controller.

5. The alarm/event log shall include a comment field for each alarm/event that allows a

user to add specific comments associated with any alarm.

c. Alarm Processing.

1. The operator shall be able to configure any object in the system to generate an

alarm when transitioning in and out of a normal state.

2. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, states, and

reactions for each object in the system.



6. Reports and Logs.

a. The operator interface shall provide a reporting package that allows the operator to

select reports.

b. The operator interface shall provide the ability to schedule reports to run at specified

intervals of time.

c. The operator interface shall allow a user to export reports and logs from the building

controller in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications

including spreadsheets and word processing. Acceptable formats include:

I. CSV, HTML, XML, PDF

d. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer.

e. Provide a means to list and access the last 10 reports viewed by the user.

f. The following standard reports shall be available without requiring a user to manually

configure the report:

1. All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand report showing all current

alarms.

2. All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing all overrides

in effect.

3. Commissioning Report: Provide a one-time report that lists all equipment with the

unit configuration and present operation.

4. Points report: Provide a report that lists the current value of all points

7. VAV Air System. An operator shall be able to view and control (where applicable) the

following parameters via the operator interface:

a. System Mode

b. System Occupancy

c. RTU static pressure setpoint

d. R T U a c t u a l s t a t i c p r e s s u r e c . A i r

H a n d l e r o c c u p a n c y s t a t u s f . A i r H a n d l e r

S u p p l y a i r c o o l i n g a n d h e a t i n g s e t

p o i n t s

g. VAV box minimum and maximum flow

h. VAV box drive open and close overrides

i. VAV box occupancy status

j. VAV box Airflow to space

k. Average space temperature I.

Minimum space temperature in.

Maximum space temperature

2.4 APPLICATION AND CONTROL SOFTWARE

A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software

applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur

at the operator interface.

1. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the

system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start,

optimal stop, and night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to [10]

events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define



advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following:

a. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week.

b. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year

as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule

for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an

exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule

for that day of the week.

c. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or

holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will

be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday

period.

d. Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start

algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment

prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy

time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that

have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify

the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes

to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined time limit.

2. Trend Log Application

a. Trend log data shall be sampled and stored on the System Controller panel and shall

capable of being archived to a BACnet Workstation for longer term storage.

I. Trend logs shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time.

2. Trend log intervals shall be configurable as frequently as 1 minute and as

infrequently as 1 year.

b. Automated Trend Logs.

1. The system controller shall automatically create trend logs for defined key

measurements for each controlled HVAC device and HVAC application.

2. The automatic trend logs shall monitor these parameters for a minimum of 7 days

at 15 minute intervals. The automatic trend logs shall be user adjustable.

3. Alarm Event Log

a. Any object in the system shall be configurable to generate an alarm when transitioning in

and out of a normal or fault state.

b. Any object in the system shall allow the alarm limits, warning limits, states, and

reactions to be configured for each object in the system.

c. An alarm/event shall be capable of triggering any of the following actions:

1. Route the alarm/event to one or more alarm log

i The alarm message shall include the name of the alarm location, the device that

generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself.

2. Route an e-mail message to an operator(s)

3. Log a data point(s) for a period of time

4. Run a custom control program

4. VAV System Coordination. Provide applications software to properly coordinate and control the

VAV system to ensure equipment safety and minimize energy use. This application shall

perform the following functions:



a. Startup and shutdown the air handler safely. Ensure the VAV boxes are open

sufficiently when the air handler is running, to prevent damage to the ductwork and

VAV boxes due to high air pressure.

b. Calibrate VAV boxes.

c. Fan Pressure Optimization (ASHRAE 90.1) - Minimize energy usage by controlling system

static pressure to the lowest level while maintaining zone airflow requirements. System

static pressure controlled to keep the "most open" zone damper between 65% and 75%

open.

1. The Fan Pressure Optimization application shall have the ability to identify and display

the discharge air setpoint of the air-handler and the VAV box that serves the critical

zone (e.g., the zone with the most open VAV box damper). This information shall

dynamically update with changes in the location of the critical zone.

2. During commissioning, and with the engineer/owner, the controls contractor shall

confirm the performance of Fan Pressure Optimization by conducting a field

functional test that demonstrates critical zone reset.

d. Ventilation Optimization (ASHRAE 62) — properly ventilate all spaces while minimizing

operating energy costs, using measured outdoor air flow. Dynamically calculate the

system outdoor air requirement based on "real time" conditions in the spaces (i.e., number

of occupants, CO2 levels, etc.) minimizing the amount of unconditioned outdoor air that

must be brought into the building.

c. Demand Controlled Ventilation — the active ventilation setpoint shall modulate between

the occupied ventilation and occupied standby ventilation setpoint; Reset the setpoint

based on CO2 levels in the space.

5. Point Control. User shall have the option to set the update interval, minimum on/off time,

event notification, custom programming on change of events.

6. Timed Override. A standard application shall be utilized to enable/disable temperature

control when a user selects on/cancel at the zone sensor, operator interface, or the local

operator display. The amount of time that the override takes precedence will be selectable

from the operator interface.

7. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling

2.5 SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

A. There shall be one or more independent, standalone microprocessor based System Controllers to

manage the global strategies described in Application and Control Software section.

1. The System Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system,

database, and programming requirements.

2. The controller shall provide a USB communications port for connection to a PC

3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals

to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central

monitoring and alarms.

4. All System Controllers shall have a real time clock.

5. Data shall be shared between networked System Controllers.

6. The System Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory

circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:

a. Assume a predetermined failure mode.

b. Generate an alarm notification.

c. Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the

failure.



d. Automatically reset the System Controller to return to a normal operating mode.

7. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be

rated for operation at -40 C to 50 C (-40 F to 122 Fj.

8. Clock Synchronization.

a. All System Controllers shall be able to synchronize with a NTP server for automatic

time synchronization.

b. All System Controllers shall be able to accept a BACnet time synchronization command

for automatic time synchronization.

c. All System Controllers shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if applicable.

9. Serviceability

a. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor.

b. The System Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current

operating mode of the controller.

c. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal connectors.

d. The System controller shall utilize standard DIN mounting methods for installation and

replacement.

10. Memory. The System Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information

indefinitely without power to the System controller

11. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal

voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage

12. BACnet Test Labs (BTL) Listing. Each System Controller shall be listed as a Building

Controller (B-BC) by the BACnct Test Labs.

2.6 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

A. Software

1. To meet the sequence of operation for each zone control, the controller shall use programs

developed and tested by the controller manufacturer that are either factory loaded or

downloaded with service tool to the controller.

2. Stand-Alone Operation: Each piece of equipment specified in section A shall be controlled by a

single controller and provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure. In case

of communications failure stand-alone operation shall use default values or last values for

remote sensors read over the network such as outdoor air temperature.

3. For controlling ancillary devices and for flexibility to change to sequence of operation in the

future, the controller shall be capable running custom programs written in a graphical

programming language.

B. Environment Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Storage: -55 to 203 °F (-48 to 95°C) and 5 to 95% Rh, non-condensing.

2. Operating: -40 to 158 °F (-40 to 70 °C) and 5 to 95% Rh, non-condensing.

3. Controllers used indoors shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure at a minimum

4. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type

waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 F to 158 F [-40 C to 70 C].



C. Input/Output:

1. For flexibility in selection and replacement of valves, the controllers shall be capable of

supporting all of the following valve control types 0-IOVDC, 0-5VDC, 4-20tnA, 24VAC

floating point, 24VAC - 2 position (Normally Open or Normally Closed).

2. For flexibility in selection and replacement of sensors, the controllers shall be capable of

reading sensor input ranges of 0 tol OV, 0 to 20mA, pulse counts, and 200 to 2OKohm.

3. For flexibility in selection and replacement of binary sensors, the controller shall support dry

and wetted (24VAC) binary inputs.

4. For flexibility in selection and replacement devices, the controller's shall have binary output

which are able to drive at least 12VA each.

5. For flexibility in selection and replacement of motors, the controller shall be capable of

outputting 24VAC (binary output), DC voltage (0 to 10VDC minimum range) and PWM (in

the 80 to 100 Hz range).

6. For future needs, any 1/0 that is unused by functionality of equipment control shall be

available to be used by custom program on the controller and by another controller on the

network.

7. For future expansion and flexibility, the controller shall have either on board or through

expansion, 50 hardware input/output points. Expansion points must communicate with the

controller via an internal communications bus. Expansion points must be capable of being

mounted up to 200 meters from the controller. Expansion points that require the BACnet

network for communication with the controller are not allowed.

D. Serviceability — The controller shall provide the following in order to improve serviceability of the

controller.

1. Diagnostic LEDs shall indicate correct operation or failures/faults for all of the following:

power, sensors, BACnet communications, and 1/0 communications bus.

2. All binary output shall have LED's indicating the output state.

3. All wiring connections shall removable without the use of a tool.

4. Software service tool connection through all of the following methods: direct cable

connection to the controller, connection through another controller on BACnct link and

through the controller's zone sensor.

5. For safety purposes, the controller shall be capable of being powered by a portable

computer for the purposes of configuration, programming, and testing programs so that this

work can be accomplished with the power off to the equipment.

6. Capabilities to temporarily override of BACnet point values with built-in time expiration in

the controller.

7. BACnet Mack Address shall be set using decimal (0-9) based rotary switches.

8. Configuration change shall not be made in a programming environment, but rather by a

configuration page utilizing dropdown list, check boxes, and numeric boxes.

9. BACnet trending objects resident on controller

a. Minimum of 20,000 trending points total on controller

b. Shall be capable of trending all BACnet points used by controller

c. Shall be capable of 1 second sample rates on all points

E. Software Retention: All Zone Controller operating parameters, setpoints, BIOS, and sequence of

operation code must be stored in non-volatile memory in order to maintain such information for

months without power.

F. Transformer for the controller must be rated at minimum of 115% of ASC power consumption, and

shall be fused or current limiting type. 24 VAC, +1- 15% nominal, 50-60 Hz, 24 VA plus binary

output loads, for a maximum of 12 VA for each binary output.



G. Agency Approval: The controller shall have meet the Agency Compliance:

1. UL916 PAZX, Open Energy Management Equipment

2. UL94-5V, Flammability

3. FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Limit

2.7 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:

1. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum with

reinforced corner bracing.

2. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades arc to be suitable for

medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.

3. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application.

4. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible

seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for a

maximum leakage rate of 10 CFM per square foot at 2.5" w.c. differential pressure.

5. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.

6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one

damper actuator per section.

B. Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade types as scheduled on drawings.

C. Electric damper/valve actuators.

1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent

damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.

2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return

mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.

3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise

spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.

4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2-

10 VDC or 4-20 ma operating range.

5. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual

positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with

more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.

6. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and

shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make

electrical connections.

7. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.

8. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's

rated torque.

D. Control Valves

1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service as

scheduled or shown.

2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to

provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings:

a. Water Valves:

1. Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.

2. Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or



100% of total system (pump) head.

b. Steam Valves: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.

E. Water Valves:

1. Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design

conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service.

2. Sizing Criteria:

a. Two-position service: Line size.

b. Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the pressure drop

through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply and

return mains, or [5] psi, whichever is greater.

c. Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop through

the coil exchanger (load), [5] psi maximum.

d. Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250, spring

loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-way valves to have

replaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball.

e. 2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and Teflon

packing.

3. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans or as follows:

a. Heating coils in air handlers - normally open.

b. Chilled water control valves - normally closed.

c. Other applications - as scheduled or as required by sequence of operation.

4. Zone valves shall be sized to meet the control application and they shall maintain their last

position in the event of a power failure.

F. Steam Valves:

1. Body and trim materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design conditions

and service. Linear ports for modulating service.

2. Sizing Criteria:

a. Two-position service: pressure drop 10% to 20% of inlet psig.

b. Modulating service 15 psig or less: pressure drop 80% of inlet psig.

c. Modulating service 16 to 50 psig: pressure drop 50% of inlet psig.

d. Modulating service over 50 psig: pressure drop as scheduled on plans.

G. Binary Temperature Devices

1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type,

with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-

30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover.

2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-

actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator,

UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F)

setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover.

3. Low-Limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at

least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall

respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.



H. Temperature Sensors

1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor.

2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum

of 1.5m [5 feet] in length.

3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure rating

of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.

4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display,

and/or communication port as shown on the drawings.

5. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement.

Differential accuracy shall be within 0.1 C [0.2 F].

6. [Optional] The space temperature, setpoint, and override confirmation will be annunciated by

a digital display for each zone sensor. The setpoint will be selectable utilizing buttons.

I. Humidity Sensors

1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 80% with accuracy of ±5% R.H.

2. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.

3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 95% R.H. It shall be

suitable for ambient conditions of -40 C to 75 C [-40 F to 170 F].

4. Humidity sensor's drift shall not exceed 1% of full scale per year.

J. Static Pressure Sensors

1. Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable.

2. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus

50% greater than calibrated span without damage.

3. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure

of 150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting

brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service.

4. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof

pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure shall be

3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets,

and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service.

K. Low Limit Thermostats

1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element bm [20 ft]

minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one foot

section.

2. Low limit shall be manual reset only.

L. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors

1. Carbon Dioxide sensors shall measure CO2 in PPM in a range of 0-2000 ppm. Accuracy

shall be +1- 3% of reading with stability within 5% over 5 years. Sensors shall be duct or

space mounted as indicated in the sequence of operation.

M. Flow Switches

1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.

2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot

duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 Type enclosure unless

otherwise specified:

3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-



acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 Type enclosure, with scale range and

differential suitable for intended application, or as specified.

4. Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices.

N. Relays

1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, configuration,

and coil voltage suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay.

Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans.

Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1

Type enclosure when not installed in local control panel.

0. Transformers and Power Supplies

1. Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished with

over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.

2. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current output

shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peak-to-Peak.

Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for

50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection.

3. Unit shall operate between 0 C and 50 C.

4. Unit shall be UL recognized.

P. Current Switches

1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. The

switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements

of the DDC system.

Q. Power Monitors

1. Selectable rate pulse output for kWh reading, 4-20 mA output for kW reading, N.O.

alarm contact, and ability to operate with 5.0 amp current inputs or 0-0.33 volt inputs.

2. 1.0% full-scale true RMS power accuracy, + 0.5 Hz, voltage input range 120-600 V,

and auto range select.

3. Under voltage/phase monitor circuitry.

4. NEMA 1 enclosure.

5. Current transformers having a 0.5% FS accuracy, 600 VAC isolation voltage with 0-

0.33 V output. If 0-5 A current transformers are provided, a three-phase

disconnect/shorting switch assembly is required.

R. Thermal Energy Meters

1. Matched RTD or thermistor temperature sensors with a differential temperature accuracy

of ±0.15°F.

2. Flow meter that is accurate within ±1% at calibrated typical flow rate and does not exceed

±2% of actual reading over an extended 50:1 turndown range.

3. Unit accuracy of ±1% factory calibrated, traceable to NIST with certification.

4. NEMA 1 enclosure.

5. Panel mounted display.

6. UL listed.

7. Isolated 4-20 ma signals for energy rate and supply and return temperatures and flow.

S. Pressure Transducers



1. Transducer shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field adjustable.

2. Transducer sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions of positive

or negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span without damage.

3. Water pressure transducer shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of

150 psi minimum. Transducer shall be complete with 4 to 20 mA output, required mounting

brackets, and block and bleed valves.

4. Water differential pressure transducer shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof

pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum static

pressure shall be 300 psi. Transducer shall be complete with 4 to 20 mA output, required

mounting brackets, and five-valve manifold.

T. Local Control Panels

1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 Type construction with hinged

door, and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with color-

coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for

field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per

control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field

connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each

local panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examination

B. General Workmanship

C. Wiring

D. Installation of Sensors

E. Flow Switch Installation

F. Valve and Damper Actuator Installation

G. Identification of Hardware and Wiring

H. BAS DDC Controllers

I. Programming

J. Cleaning

K. Training

L. Field Quality Control

M. Acceptance



3.2 EXAMINATION

A. The Contract Documents shall be thoroughly examined for coordination of control devices their

installation, wiring, and commissioning. Coordinate and review mechanical equipment

specifications, locations, and identify any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions that shall be

reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

B. The BAS manufacturer shall inspect the jobsite in order to verify that control equipment can be

installed as required, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the

Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

3.3 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit, parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and

parallel to walls) wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by National Electric Code (NEC).

Control panels shall be attached to structural walls or properly supported in a free-standing

configuration, unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose.

Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service.

D. Verify integrity of all control wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds

prior to commencing the startup and commissioning procedures.

E. All control device installation, and wiring shall comply with Contract Documents, acceptable

industry specifications, and industry standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility.

Installation and wiring shall be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard

practices referenced in Contract Documents.

3 . 4 W I R I N G

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the National, Local Electrical Codes, and

Section 16000 of these Contract Document specifications. Where the requirements of this

section

differ with those in Section 16000, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.

B. Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations; including ceiling return air

plenums, approved cables outside of electrical raceway can be used provided that the

following conditions are met:

1. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits

shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)

2. All cables shall be UL listed for application (i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL

listed specifically for that purpose).

C. Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduits containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing

high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the

two via control relays and transformers.

D. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or

perpendicular to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m [10 ft]

intervals. Such bundled cable shall be fastened to the structure, using industry approved

fasteners, at 1.5 m [5 ft] intervals or more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.



E. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to

wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within

enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to

devices and terminals.

F. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120Vac. If only higher voltages are

available for use, the BAS manufacturer shall provide step-down transformers to achieve the

desired control voltages.

G. All control wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required

splices

shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.

H. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all

penetrations in accordance with Contract Documents and National and/or Local Codes.

I. Conduit and wire sizing shall be determined by the BAS manufacturer in order to maintain

manufacturer's recommendation and must meet National and Local Codes.

J. Control and status relays are to be located in pre-fabricated enclosures that meet the application.

These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures as

coordinated. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 starter enclosures.

K. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network bus

cabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from all control power

wiring.

L. Adhere to Section 16000 requirements for installation of electrical raceways.

M. BAS manufacturer shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated

(as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.

N. Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and

shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall

not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight,

flexible metal conduits shall be used.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A. Sensors required for mechanical equipment operation shall be factory installed and wired as

specified in mechanical equipment specifications. BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for

coordinating these control devices and ensuring the sequence of operations will be met, Installation

and wiring shall be in accordance with the BAS manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Sensors that require field mounting shall meet the BAS manufacturer's recommendations and

be coordinated with the mechanical equipment they will be associated.

C. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment the sensor will operate.

D. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by

the block wall framing. For installation in dry wall ceilings, the low voltage sensor wiring can be

installed exposed in the wall and must meet applicable National and Local Electrical Codes.

E. All wires attached to wall mounted sensors shall be sealed off to prevent air from transmitting

in the associated conduit and affecting the room sensor readings.



F. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow.

G. Install space static pressure sensor with static sensing probe applicable for space installation

where applicable.

H. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type.

Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each

bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

I. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in matched thermowells. Install all

liquid temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells for adequate thermal

conductance.

J. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building drywall. EMT conduit is acceptable

within mechanical equipment and service rooms.

K. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at

manufacturer's recommended location and coordinated with Engineer.

3.6 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of flow switch with Mechanical Contractor who will be responsible for

installing a thread-o-let in steel piping applications. Copper pipe applications will require the

use CxCxF Tee, and no pipe extensions or substitutions will be allowed.

B. Mount a minimum of 5 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream, or two feet,

whichever is greater, from pipe fittings and other inline potential obstructions.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, which will require proper flow direction,

horizontal alignment with flow switch mounting on the top of pipe.

3.7 VALVE & DAMPER ACTUATOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount and link multiple control damper actuators where required, per manufacturer's

instructions.

B. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power

the actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the

linkage.

C. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper

smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions. Coordinate any installation

problems with Sheet metal Contractor.

D. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by both the actuator

and valve manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted in the factory as an

approved design arrangement and shall not be field modified.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. All field wiring and cabling, including that within factory mounted, and wired control panels and

devices for mechanical equipment, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a

cable identifier and other descriptive information for troubleshooting, maintenance, and service

purposes. BAS manufacturer to coordinate this labeling requirement with mechanical

equipment manufacturer as it relates to controls.



B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item

served and correlate them to the BAS design drawings.

C. Identify control panels with minimum 1-cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

D. Identifiers shall match record documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that

removal of the component does not remove the label

3.9 BAS DDC CONTROLLERS

A. Provide a separate DDC Controller for individual HVAC mechanical equipment. DDC

Controllers shall be factory mounted, installed, and wired by mechanical equipment

manufacturer as specified. BAS manufacturer to furnish and coordinate DDC controllers and

control devices and ensure that installation and wiring adhere to BAS manufacturer's design

recommendations. For those mechanical equipment units that do not have factory installed

controls specified, the BAS manufacturer shall field mount controls and coordinate all

installation and termination information to ensure the specified sequence of operations are met.

B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a

minimum of 15% spare I/O point capacity for each point type (analog or digital) found at each

location. If input points are not universal, 15% of each type is required. If outputs are not

universal, 15% of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of

point used in each controller.

C. Future use of spare I/O point capacity shall require providing the field instrument and control

device, field wiring, engineering, programming, and commissioning. No additional Controller

boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.

3.10 PROGR AM M ING

A. Provide sufficient internal memory for all controllers to ensure specified sequence of operations,

alarming, trending, and reporting requirements are achieved. BAS manufacturer shall provide a

minimum of 25% spare memory capacity for future use.

B. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface

without the use of a written point index.

C. Software Programming

1. Provide programming for individual mechanical systems to achieve all aspects of the

sequence of operation specified. It is the BAS manufacturer's responsibility to ensure all

mechanical equipment functions and operates as specified in sequence of operations.

Provide sufficient programming comments in controller application software to clearly

describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the

language used in the sequence of operations.

D. BAS Operator's Interface

1. When Operator Workstation is specified, provide color graphics for each piece of mechanical

equipment depicting sufficient I/O to monitor and troubleshoot operation. Additionally,

provide individual floor plans of the building allowing an operator to quickly view the overall

floor plan area for any out of tolerance conditions that may need addressing. These

standard graphics shall depict all points dynamically as specified in the points list and/or

indicated in sequence of operation.



The BAS manufacturer shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up,

and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this

section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface data base,

and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation

of the operator interface.

3. Demonstration: A complete demonstration of the capabilities of the BAS system shall be

performed by the BAS manufacturer's field personnel. The BAS manufacturer shall

dedicate a minimum of (4) hours on-site with the Owner representatives, and Engineer to

demonstrate a complete functional test of all the BAS system requirements. This BAS

demonstration shall constitute an acceptance inspection, and will represent the process of

approving the BAS as designed and specified.

3.11 CLEANING

A. The BAS manufacturer's installing contractor(s) shall clean up all debris resulting from their

installation activities on a daily basis. The installation contractors shall remove all cartons,

containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste

shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Owner, Construction Manager,

General Contractor, and/or Mechanical Contractor.

B. At the completion of work in any area, the installation contractor shall clean all of their work,

equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris.

C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint

damage. Any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the

adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with

new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.12 TRAINING

A. Provide minimum of (2) classroom training sessions, and (4) hours for each session, throughout

the contract period. The training will be provided for personnel designated by the Owner.

B. The Owner training shall enable personnel to proficiently operate the BAS by being able to

create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical points for individual

controllers; and add additional controllers when required.

C. These objectives will be divided into three logical groupings; participants may attend one or

more of these, depending on level of knowledge required:

1. Day-to-day BAS Operators

2. BAS Troubleshooting & Maintenance

3. Maintenance Manager: Parts Inventory

D. Provide course outline and materials prior to schedule training session. The instructor(s) shall

provide one copy of training material per student.

E. The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained and experienced in teaching this technical material.


A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable

local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Contract Documents.



B. BAS manufacturer shall continually monitor the field installation for building code compliance and

quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines

and properly supported.

C. BAS installing Contractor(s) shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities

having jurisdiction over the work.

3.14 ACCEPTANCE

A. The BAS will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in

this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any

tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be

exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's

representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.




SECTION 232113 - PIPING AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 230500) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS AND FITTINGS

A. Piping used throughout project shall conform to the following specifications. Piping shall be plainly marked with manufacturers name and weight. All materials listed may not be required on this project. See piping material schedule at end of this Section for materials to be used for each piping system. Piping materials shall be as follows:

1. Copper Tube:

a. Provide hard temper copper water tube conforming to requirements of current

ASTM Specification B-88. Tubing shall be Type K, L, or M as listed in schedule.

b. Tubing joints shall be soldered or brazed. See schedule for joining method to be used.

c. Pipe by Anaconda, Cerro, Chase, Mueller or Revere Copper.

2. Polypropylene Pipe (PP-R):

a. Pipe shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11. The pipe shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. All pipe shall be made in a three layer extrusion process. Piping shall contain a fiber layer (faser) to restrict thermal expansion. All pipe shall comply with the rated pressure requirements of ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11. All pipe shall be certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11.

b. Fittings shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389. The fittings shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. All fittings shall be certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11.

c. Manufacturer shall warrant pipe and fittings for 10 years to be free of defects in materials or workmanship. Warranty shall cover labor and material costs of repairing and/or replacing defective materials and repairing any incidental damage caused by failure of the piping system due to defects in materials or workmanship.

d. Pipe by Aquatherm or approved equal. e. Provide with pipe saddle supports as required to achieve hangar spacing as listed in

these specifications.

3. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe:

a. SDR9 PEX piping shall be manufactured using the Engel method (PEX-a) in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 and tested for compliance by an independent, third-party agency.

b. Minimum degree of cross-linking shall be between 70-89% when tested in accordance with ASTM D2765, Method B.

c. Piping to have a minimum material designation of PEX 5106. d. Potable water piping shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 and bear the “NSF-pw”

marking.



e. Temperature and pressure requirements in accordance with PPI TR-3: 73.4°F at 80psi, 180°F at 100psi and 200°F at 80psi.

f. Pipe by Uponor or approved equal.

5. Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste Pipe:

a. Provide Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride plastic drain wast and vent pipe conforming to ASTM D2665-88. Joints shall be properly cleaned, primed and glued.

b. Pipe by Charlot, Genova, Crest or equal.

2.2 PIPING FITTINGS


1. Carbon Steel Welding Fittings:

a. Provide carbon low alloy seamless steel welding fittings conforming to current

ANSI Standard B16.9 and ASTM Specification A234. b. Fittings by Grinnell, Midwest or Tube Turn.

2. Branch Connection Welding Fittings:

a. Provide carbon steel weldolet fittings conforming to ANSI Standards B16.9, B16.11, B31.1.0 and ASTM specification A105, Grade 11.

b. Fittings by Bonney Forge.

3. Branch Connection, Welding to Screwed Fitting:

a. Provide carbon steel threadolet fitting conforming to ANSI Standards B16.9, B16.11, B31.1, and ASTM Specification A105, Grade 11. Fittings by Bonney Forge.

4. Carbon Steel Flanges:

a. Provide carbon steel flanges conforming to ASTM Specification A181, Grade

1, and ANSI Standard B16.5. b. Flanges by Babcock and Wilcox, Grinnell, Midwest or Tube Turn.

5. Malleable Iron Screwed Fittings:

a. Provide screwed malleable iron fittings conforming to ANSI Standard B16.3,

and ASTM Specification A-47 grade 32510. b. Fittings by Crane, Grinnell or Stockham.

6. Cast Iron Screwed Fittings:

a. Provide screwed cast iron fittings conforming to ANSI Standard B16.4, B2.1, and ASTM Specification A-126, Class A.

b. Fittings by Crane, Grinnell or Stockham.



7. Wrought Copper Fittings:

a. Provide wrought solder joint copper tube fitting conforming to ANSI Standard B16.22

b. Fittings by Anaconda, Chase or Nibco.

8. Cast Bronze Fittings:

a. Provide cast bronze solder joint fittings conforming to ANSI Standard B16.18. b. Fittings by Anaconda, Chase or Nibco.

9. Pipe Flange Gaskets:

a. Provide 1/16" thick asbestos free gaskets full face or ring type as required.

Gaskets shall be factory cut. b. Gaskets by Durable Mfg. Co. or Garlock Company.

10. Roll Grooved Pipe Couplings:

a. Provide Victaulic style #07 or approved equal style (zero flex) couplings with

Grade "E" gasket (EPDM compound) in mechanical areas. Provide Victaulic style #77 or approved equal style (flexible) couplings with Grade "E" gasket in other areas. Ductile iron housing and nuts and bolts.

11. Polypropylene fittings:

a. Fittings shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin meeting the short-term properties and

long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389. The fittings shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. All fittings shall be certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11.

b. Fittings by Aquatherm or approved equal. 2.3 PIPING INSTALLATION


1. System: Heating and Air Conditioning Piping Code: ANSI Standard B31.1.0 "Power Piping" 2. System: Natural Gas Piping Code: ANSI Standard B31.12 "Fuel Gas Piping" 3. System: Plumbing System Piping 4. Code: International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical Official's "International

Plumbing Code" 5. Reference Division 1 for applicable codes and code plan sheet T1.3.

B. Pipe sizes indicated on plans and as specified refer to nominal size in inches for steel pipe, cast iron pipe and copper tubing, unless otherwise indicated. Pipes are sized to nearest 1/2". In no case shall piping smaller than size specified be used.



C. Contractor shall provide and be responsible for proper location of pipe sleeves, hangers, supports, and inserts. Install hangers, supports, inserts, etc., as recommended by manufacturer and as specified and detailed on drawings. Verify construction types and provide proper hangers, inserts and supports for construction used. Install inserts, hangers and supports in accordance with manufacturers load ratings and provide for thermal expansion of piping without exceeding allowable stress on piping or supports. Provide solid type hangers and supports where pipe travel exceeds manufacturer's recommendations for fixed hanger and supports.

D. Install piping parallel with building lines and parallel with other piping to obtain a neat and orderly

appearance of piping system. Secure piping with approved anchors and provide guides where required to insure proper direction of piping expansion. Piping shall be installed so that allowable stress for piping, valves and fittings used are not exceeded during normal operation or testing of piping system.

E. Install piping so that systems can be completely drained. Provide piping systems with valve drain

connections at all low pipe and ahead of all sectionalizing valves whether shown on plans or not. Drain lines shall be as follows:

PIPE SIZE DRAIN SIZE 3/4" thru 2" 3/4" 2-1/2" and above 1"

F. Drain valves on closed piping systems such as chilled water system shall have lock shields and plugged or capped outlets to protect system from inadvertent drainage.

G. Pitch all piping and where possible make connections from horizontal piping so that air can be

properly vented from system. Provide air vents as specified at all system high points and at drop in piping in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers where necessary to avoid air pockets in horizontal piping.

H. Provide piping materials and wall thickness for specific piping systems as listed in piping

schedule at end of this Section. Steel piping systems 2" and under shall be thread pipe and fittings. Steel pipe systems 2-1/2" and above shall be welded and shall utilize standard welding fittings.

I. Where listed in pipe schedules or noted on drawings, provide piping 2-1/2" and larger with

Victaulic style 07 standard couplings. Equivalent fittings by Grinnell.

J. Provide unions or flanged joints in each pipe line preceding connections to equipment to allow removal for repair or replacement. Provide all screwed and control valves with unions adjacent to each piping connection. Provide screwed end valves with union adjacent to valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from line.

K. Piping fitting materials for specific piping systems shall be as listed in piping schedules. Fitting shall be approved factory made type with threaded or weld ends as required. Fittings pressures and temperature ratings shall be equal to or exceed maximum operating temperature and working pressure of piping system. No mitered or field fabricated pipe fittings will be permitted.

L. All pipe threads shall meet ANSI Standard B2.1 for taper pipe threads. Lubricate pipe threads

with Astroseal teflon thread sealant and lubricating compound applied full strength. Powdered or made-up compound will not be permitted. Pipe thread compound shall be applied only to male pipe threads.



M. Welded pipe joints shall be made by certified welding procedures and welders. Welding electrodes shall be type and material recommended by electrode manufacturer for materials to be welded. All pipe and fittings ends shall be beveled a minimum of 30 degrees prior to welding.

N. Brazed socket type joints shall be made with suitable brazing alloys. Minimum socket depth shall

be sufficient for intended service. Brazing alloy shall be end fed into socket, and shall fill completely annular clearance between socket and pipe or tube. Brazed joints depending solely upon a fillet rather than a socket type joint will not be acceptable.

O. Soft soldered socket type joints shall be made with sill-floss or 95-5 tin-antimony solder as required by temperature and pressure rating of piping system. Soldered socket-type joints shall be limited to systems containing non-flammable and non-toxic fluids. Soldered socket-type joints shall not be used on piping systems subject to shock vibration. Soldered joints depending solely upon a fillet rather than a socket-type joint will not be acceptable.

P. Make changes in piping size and direction with approved factory made fittings. Steel pipe and

fittings 2-1/2" and smaller shall be threaded type, pipe and fittings 3" and larger shall be weld end type. Provide fittings suitable for at least 125 PSI working pressure or of pressure rating required for maximum working pressure of system whichever is greater.

2.4 WELDING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for quality of welding and suitability of welding procedures. All welding shall be in accordance with American Welding Society Standard B3.0 and ANSI Standard B31.1.

B. Welding shall be done only by welders who have successfully passed welder qualifications tests

in previous 12 months for type of welding required. Each welder shall identify his work with a code marking before starting any welded pipe fabrication. Contractor shall submit three copies of a list of welders who will work on project listing welders code, date and types of latest qualification test passed by each welder.

C. Welded joints shall be fusion welded in accordance with Level AR3 of American Welding Society

Standard AWS D10.9 "Standard for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Pipe and Tubing". Welders qualified under National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau will be acceptable.

D. Bevel all piping and fittings in accordance with recognized standards by flame cutting or

mechanical means. Align and position parts so that branches and fittings are set true. Make changes in direction of piping systems with factory made welding fittings. Make branch connections with welding tees or forged weldolets.

Advis

ors

Excel – G

age C

ente

r C

am

pus

Topeka, K

ansas

Ph

ase

1 –

Bu

ildin

g A

Bu

ildin

g K

SD

G P

roje

ct

No

. 1

90

12

1

PIP

ING

MA

TE

RIA

L S

CH

ED

UL

E

PIP

ING

FIT

TIN

GS

MA

XIM

UM

WO

RK

ING

FIE

LD

TE

ST

SY

ST

EM

SIZ

ET

YP

ES

CH

ED

.G

RA

DE

AS

TM

MA

TE

RIA

LM

AT

ER

IAL

TY

PE

PR

ES

SU

RE

TE

MP

.P

RE

SS

UR

ET

IME

Dra

in L

ine

All

L--

--B

-88

CP

CP

SJ

040 to 8

0--

--

Hot W

ate

r1/2

"-3"

L--

--B

-88

CP

CP

SJ

85

210

125 lb.

1hr.

Natu

ral G

as

2-1

/2"

& U

pE

RW

40

--A

-53

CS

CS

W5

55 to 8

575 lb.

1hr.

Natu

ral G

as

1/2

" -

2"

SL

40

--A

-106

CS

MI

T

555 to 8

575 lb.

1/2

hr.

AB

BR

EV

IAT

ION

S:

BLK

- B

lack

ER

W -

Ele

ctr

ic R

esis

tant W

eld

MJ -

Mechanic

al Join

tP

E -

Poly

eth

yle

ne

SS

- S

ilver

Sold

er

BS

- B

ell

& S

pig

ot

F -

Fusio

n W

eld

NG

- N

eopre

ne G

asket

PP

- P

oly

pro

pyle

ne

SV

- S

erv

ice W

eig

ht

CI -

Cast Ir

on

GLV

- G

alv

aniz

ed

NH

- N

o H

ub

S -

Socket J

oin

tS

W -

Solv

ent W

eld

CP

- C

opper

ME

CH

- M

echanic

al

P -

Poly

vin

yl C

hlo

ride

SJ -

So

lde

r Jo

int

95

-5 T

in-a

ntim

on

yT

- T

hre

aded

CS

- C

arb

on S

teel

MI -

Malle

able

Iro

nP

C -

Rolle

d G

rooved P

ipe C

ouplin

gS

L -

Seam

less

V -

Vic

taulic

DI -

Ductile

Iro

nP

P-R

("A

quath

erm

")W

- W

eld

ed

Note

s:

Roll

gro

ove fittings a

nd p

ipin

g s

yste

ms a

re n

ot accepta

ble

for

the p

roje

ct.

"Tee tapin

g"

is n

ot accepta

ble

for

the p

roje

ct.

EN

D O

F S

EC

TIO

N 2

32113

PIP

ING

AN

D F

ITT

ING

S 2

32113-7


WET ROTOR CIRCULATOR PUMP 232123-1

SECTION 232123 –WET ROTOR CIRCULATOR PUMPS

PART I – GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contractor shall furnish and install Grundfos Magna3 variable speed wet rotor in–line circulator pumps in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and plans.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

The work in this section is subject to the requirements of applicable portions of the following standards:

A. Hydraulic Institute

B. ANSI – American National Standards Institute

C. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials

D. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

E. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association

F. NEC – National Electrical Code

G. ISO – International Standards Organization

H. UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

I. CSA –Canadian Standards Association

J. ETL – ETL Listed Mark by Intertek Testing Services

1.3 INSTALLATION REFERENCES

The wet runner pump manufacturer shall have minimum 10 years of experience in the country of the installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 WET ROTOR CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A. Pump shall be of the in-line wet rotor design. Oil lubricated pumps and shaft coupled pumps shall not be accepted.

B. The pump shall be a standard product of a single pump manufacturer. The pump, motor, and variable speed drive shall be an integral product designed and built by the same manufacturer.

C. The enclosure shall be marked “Enclosure Type 2.”

D. The pump shall be certified and listed by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) for U.S. and Canada to comply with:

1. UL778 2. UL 60730-1A 3. CAN/CSA No. 108


WET ROTOR CIRCULATOR PUMP 232123-2

E. The pump shall be labeled on the nameplate as having an Energy Efficiency Index (EEI) of no greater than 0.20.

2.2 RATINGS

A. Maximum Pressure: 175 PSIG

B. Minimum Media Temperature: 14 °F

C. Maximum Media Temperature 230 °F

D. Maximum Continuous Media Temperature: 203 °F

E. Maximum Sound Pressure Level: 43dB(A)

F. Voltage: [1x115V +/-10%][1x208-230V +/-10%]

G. Maximum Energy Efficiency Index: 0.20

2.3 MOTOR

A. Motor shall be 4-pole permanent-magnet (PM motor) and tested with the pump as one unit by the same manufacturer. Conventional asynchronous squirrel-cage motors shall not be acceptable.

2.4 INSTALLATION

The pump shaft shall be installed horizontally per manufacturer’s recommendations. The terminal box shall be located as per manufacturer’s recommendations. The system shall be vented out from a higher location form the pump. The required inlet pressure by the pump shall be available at the pump inlet.

2.5 TESTING

A. The pumps shall be factory performance and hydrostatic tested as a complete unit prior to shipment. The testing shall be done in accordance with ISO 9906 Annex A. No test certificate is required.

2.6 WARRANTY

A. The warranty period shall be a non-prorated period of 24 months from date of installation, not to exceed 30 months from date of manufacture. Warranty shall cover pump, motor and terminal box as a complete unit.



HVAC PUMPS 232125-1

SECTION 232125 - HVAC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 230500) 1.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install where shown on plans hot water and chilled water circulating pumps of the in-line and end suction centrifugal design as indicated in pump schedule on the drawings.

B. Provide Grundfos pumps. Equal by B&G.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 END SUCTION PUMPS

A. Pumps shall be base-mounted, single-stage, end suction design with true back pull-out, capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. Provide with suction diffuser and impellar casing gauge-cock fittings.

B. Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron with integrally-cast pedestal support. The impeller shall

be cast bronze, enclosed-type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.

C. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the pump shaft by an internally-flushed mechanical seal

with ceramic seal seat of at least 98% alumina oxide content, and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation at 225 deg. F. A replaceable bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal.

D. Pumps shall be rated for minimum of 175 psi working pressure. Casings shall have gauge ports

at nozzles and vent and drain ports at top and bottom of casing.

E. Pump bearing housing assembly shall have heavy-duty regreaseable ball bearings, replaceable without disturbing piping connections and have foot support at coupling end.

F. Base plate shall be of structural steel or fabricated steel channel configuration fully enclosed at

sides and ends, with securely welded cross members and fully open grouting area. A flexible-type coupler, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, shall be employed between the pump and motor, and it shall be equipped with a suitable coupling guard as required. Contractor to level and grout each unit according to manufacturer's instructions.

G. The motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be the size, voltage and enclosure called for

on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall be laser realigned by Contractor after installation and grouting of base. Provide TEFC high efficiency motors suitable for VFD operation.

H. Each pump shall be factory tested. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least

one coat of high-grade machinery enamel prior to shipment.

I. Each unit shall be checked by the Contractor and regulated for proper differential pressure, voltage and amperage draw. This data shall be noted on a permanent tag or label and fastened to the pump for Owner's reference.

J. Provide motors with shaft grounding rings.



WATER HEATING BOILER 232250-1

SECTION 232250 –WATER HEATING BOILER

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Provide water heating boiler as hereinafter specified, shown on the plans and scheduled on the plans.

B. Products shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.

1.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Lochinvar – as scheduled on plans 2. Pre-approved equal

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 013300 Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data including certified performance and rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories.

C. Complete Package information Product Data including:

1. System summary sheet (where applicable)

2. Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances and location and size of each field connection

3. Power and control wiring diagram

4. Submittals on furnished specialties and accessories.

D. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted

1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. B. Replacement and Repair: All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired

or replaced as directed by the Architect Engineer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver materials to the site in such a matter as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs if required for handling.

B. Materials damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a matter that they could

withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle

carefully to avoid damage.



1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:

A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Data. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication

instructions, and replacement parts lists.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER HEATING BOILER

A. General

1. Provide Lochinvar. model FTX400N fire tube gas fired hydronic water heater where indicated

on plans. Equivalents by prior approval only. 2. Water heater shall have natural gas input of 400,000 BTUH input with a rated output of

392,000 BTUH. 3. The water heater shall be CSA tested and certified with a minimum thermal efficiency of 97.2

percent at full fire. 4. The water heater shall be ASME inspected and stamped and National Board, registered for

160 PSIG working pressure. Provided with a pressure relief valve set for 50 PSIG. 5. Turn down shall be min 10:1.

B. Heat Exchanger

1. Vertical multi-pass fire tube design, water completely encloses the combustion chamber and fire tubes. Tubes shall be rolled into a powder coated, ASME boiler quality, carbon steel tube sheet.

2. The heat exchanger shall be sealed to 160 PSIG, unlined cast iron or bronze headers with high temperature silicone “O” rings.

3. Low water volume heat exchanger shall be explosion-proof on the water side and shall carry a 25 year warranty against thermal shock.

4. The headers shall be secured to the tube sheet by stud bolts with flange nuts to permit inspection and maintenance without removal of external piping connections.

5. The water heater shall be capable of operating in full condensation mode. 6. The boiler flue connection, combustion air opening, gas connection, water connections and

electrical connections shall be located on the rear. 7. The primary heat exchanger shall have accessible boiler drain valves with hose bibs to drain

the water section of the primary heat exchanger.

C. Burners

1. The combustion chamber shall be of the sealed combustion type employing a high temperature burner mounted in a vertical orientation.

2. The burner shall be capable of firing at 100% rated input when supplied with 14.0” WC of inlet gas pressure, so as to maintain service under heavy demand conditions.

D. Control System

1. The boiler shall be equipped with 100 percent safety shutdown. 2. The ignition shall be Hot Surface Ignition type with full flame rectification by remote sensing

separate from the ignition source. 3. The igniter will be located to the side of the heat exchanger. 4. The ignition control module shall include an LED that indicates six (6) individual diagnostic

flash codes. 5. An external viewing port shall be provided, permitting visual observation of burner operation.

E. Gas Train



1. The boiler shall have a firing/leak test valve and pressure test valve as required by CSD-1. 2. The boiler shall have dual-seated main gas valve. 3. Gas control trains shall have a redundant safety shut-off feature, main gas regulation, shut-

off cock and plugged pressure tapping to meet the requirements of ANSI Z21.13/CSA 4.9.

F. Boiler Control

1. The following controls shall be provided: a. High limit control with manual reset b. Flow switch, mounted and wired c. 60 PSIG ASME pressure relief valve. d. Temperature and pressure gauges e. Emergency power off

2. The boiler shall be equipped with modulating temperature controller with LCD display that incorporates an adjustable energy-saving pump control relay and freeze protection and is factory mounted and wired to improve system efficiency, six water sensors included.

G. Firing Mode

1. Provide electronic modulating control of the gas input to the boiler.

H. Boiler Diagnostics.

1. Provide external LED panel display.

a. “Power on” – green b. Call for heat – Amber c. Burner firing – Blue d. Service - Red

2. Provide monitoring of all safeties, internal/external interlocks with fault display by a min 3-1/2” LCD display: a. System status b. Ignition Failure c. Blower speed error d. Low 24 VAC e. Manual reset high limit f. Blocked vent g. Controller alarm h. Flow switch fault i. Sensor failure

1. Inlet sensor 2. Outlet sensor 3. System sensor 4. Air sensor 5. Indirect HW sensor 6. Indirect HW tank sensor 7. Cold water protection sensor

j. Internal control fault k. Id card fault l. Cascade communications error m. Auto reset high limit n. Low water cut-off o. Low gas pressure p. High gas pressure

I. Combustion Chamber: The combustion chamber wrapper shall be sealed and encased in insulation



to reduce standby radiation losses, reducing jacket losses and increasing unit efficiency. J. Cabinet

1. The corrosion resistant galvanized steel jackets shall be finished with a baked-on powder

coat, which is suitable for outdoor installation, applied prior to assembly for complete coverage, and shall incorporate louvers in the outer panels to divert air past heated surfaces.

2.2 OPERATING CONTROLS

A. The boiler shall have the ability to receive a 0 to 10 VDC signal from the Central Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) to vary the setpoint control or firing rate. The boiler shall have an alarm contact for connection to the central EMCS system.

B. The boiler shall be equipped with MOD bus communications compatibility.

C. Boiler shall be provided with an integrated modulating digital controller, mounted and wired.

D. The control shall have the ability to provide cascade control of up to (4) boilers as a single system via a 2 wired communication.

E. The system sensor shall be shipped loose for field installation. Inlet/outlet sensors shall be factory-installed.

.

2.3 INTAKE AIR AND DIRECT VENT

A. The boiler shall meet safety standards for direct vent equipment as noted by the 2012 Uniform Mechanical Code and ASHRAE 15-1994, section 8.13.6

B. Intake air piping shall be Sch 40 PVC ASTM D1785 with allowable air temperature of 158°F.

C. Vent piping hsall be Sch 40 CPVC ASTM D2846 with allowable vent gas temperature of 212°F.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. The boiler shall be completely assembled, wired and fire-tested prior to shipment from the factory. B. The boiler shall be furnished with the sales order, ASME Manufacturer’s Data Report, inspection

sheet, wiring diagram, rating plate, combustion analysis and installation and operating manual.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and piping to receive domestic water heating boiler for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine piping and roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections

before boiler installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping connections, fittings, and specialties.



3.3 CLEANING A. Clean all connected piping internally, prior to connection to domestic water heating boiler, according

to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment start-up and certified training session.

B. Factory authorized start up technician shall review installation and test operation and adjust as required all safeties, operating controls, static and full load gas supply pressure, gas manifold and blower air pressure, amp draw of blower.

C. A copy of the start-up report shall be made and sent to both the contractor and to the Engineer.



REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-1

SECTION 232300 – REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 230500) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. All piping used on this project shall be manufactured in the United States. No piping will be allowed from any other country.

B. Piping used throughout project shall conform to the following specifications. Piping shall be

plainly marked with manufacturers name and weight. All materials listed may not be required on this project. See piping material schedule at end of this Section for materials to be used for each piping system. Piping materials shall be as follows:

1. Copper Tube Type ACR:

a. Provide hard temper nitrogenized copper refrigerant tube conforming to requirements

of current ASTM B-88, ANSI H23.1 and ASTM B-280. Tubes shall be Type ACR (Air Conditioning and Refrigeration) as listed in schedule.

b. Tubing joints shall be brazed. c. Pipe by Anaconda, Cerro, or Mueller.

2.2 PIPING FITTINGS


1. Wrought Copper Fittings:

a. Provide wrought solder joint copper tube fitting conforming to ANSI Standard

B16.22 b. Fittings by Anaconda, Chase or Nibco.

2.3 PIPING INSTALLATION


1. System: Heating and Air Conditioning Piping Code: ANSI Standard B31.1.0 "Power Piping" 2. System: Plumbing/HVAC System Piping Code: International Plumbing Code – 2006, International Mechanical Code - 2006

B. Pipe sizes indicated on plans and as specified refer to nominal size in inches for copper tubing,

unless otherwise indicated. Pipes are sized to nearest 1/2". In no case shall piping smaller than size specified be used, unless directed by a manufacturer.

C. Contractor shall provide and be responsible for proper location of pipe sleeves, hangers,

supports, and inserts. Install hangers, supports, inserts, etc., as recommended by manufacturer and as specified and detailed on drawings. Verify construction types and provide proper hangers, inserts and supports for construction used. Install inserts, hangers and supports in accordance with manufacturers load ratings and provide for thermal expansion of piping without exceeding allowable stress on piping or supports. Provide solid type hangers and supports where pipe travel exceeds manufacturer's recommendations for fixed hanger and supports.



D. Install piping parallel with building lines and parallel with other piping to obtain a neat and orderly

appearance of piping system. Secure piping with approved anchors and provide guides where required to insure proper direction of piping expansion. Piping shall be installed so that allowable stress for piping, valves and fittings used are not exceeded during normal operation or testing of piping system.

E. Size and route all refrigerant piping as directed by the Manufacturer. Manufacturer shall provide

required installation details to the contractor for installation of all refrigerant piping. F. Provide piping materials and wall thickness for specific piping systems as listed in piping

schedule at end of this Section. G. Piping fitting materials for specific piping systems shall be as listed in piping schedules. Fitting

shall be approved factory made type with threaded or weld ends as required. Fittings pressures and temperature ratings shall be equal to or exceed maximum operating temperature and working pressure of piping system. No mitered or field fabricated pipe fittings will be permitted.

H. Brazed socket type joints shall be made with suitable brazing alloys. Minimum socket depth shall

be sufficient for intended service. Brazing alloy shall be end fed into socket, and shall fill completely annular clearance between socket and pipe or tube. Brazed joints depending solely upon a fillet rather than a socket type joint will not be acceptable.

I. Make changes in piping size and direction with approved factory made fittings. Provide fittings

suitable for at least 125 PSI working pressure or of pressure rating required for maximum working pressure of system whichever is greater.

PART 3 – EXECUTION OF TESTING AND CHARGING OF REFRIGERANT LINES

3.1 TESTING

A. After the system is installed and before any piping is installed, the entire refrigeration circuit

must be thoroughly leak tested. The following test procedure is recommended: 1. Remove and plug the connection points of any controls or relief valves that could be

damaged by test pressure. Since the compressor is not included in the leak test, front seat both the compressor suction and discharge valves.

2. Open the liquid line shut-off valve at the condenser, any auxiliary valves in the hot gas and liquid lines and the liquid line solenoid valve(s). If the solenoid valve(s) is not equipped with a manual opening device, apply control power to the solenoid(s), opening the valve(s).

3. Connect a cylinder of oil-pumped, dry nitrogen to the frontseat port of the compressor discharge valve, if the valve is so equipped. If not, make the connection at the liquid line charging valve.

4. NOTE: It is important that the pressure of the nitrogen by controlled by a reducing valve. Control is absolutely necessary because the pressure within a full cylinder of nitrogen is in excess of 2,000 psi at room temperature. It is recommended that the nitrogen be charged to the system through the valve of a gauge manifold.

5. Set the pressure regulator on the nitrogen cylinder at 150 psig or the leak test pressure specified by local code.

6. Open the shut-off valve on the cylinder and the valve of the manifold and charge enough nitrogen into the system to raise the pressure to 150 psig, or to the pressure required by local code. Close the manifold valve.

7. Using a rubber or rawhide mallet, tap each solder connection sufficiently hard to start any leak that might subsequently open from thermal expansion and contraction or vibration.



8. Test all pipe joints for leaks. First check the manifold gauge. If the pressure is dropping, a major leak is present.

9. Large leaks are detected by the sound of escaping gas. Smaller leaks are located by brushing each connection with a soap solution and watching for telltale bubbles. Adding a small amount of glycerin to the soap solution improves the bubbling action. Make certain that all joints are inspected thoroughly. Mark carefully any spots where leaks occur.

10. After the bubble test is completed, close the cylinder shut-off valve and bleed the test pressure through the unused part of the manifold. Repair any leaks found.

11. Leaks are repaired by disassembling the connection, cleaning the fitting and remaking. No attempt should be made to repair a leak by simply adding brazing material.

12. After the system is assumed to be free of leaks, charge enough refrigerant through the liquid line charging valve to raise the system pressure to approximately 10 psig. Remove the refrigerant connection and charge enough nitrogen into the system to raise the test pressure to 150 psig, or to the local code requirement.

13. Check all parts of the system with a halide torch, or electronic leak detector. The presence of escaping refrigerant will color the flame of the halide torch green if the leak is small or a dense blue if it is large. An electronic leak detector indicates the presence of a leak by a gauge reading, signal light or an audible sound. If any leaks are found, relieve the test pressure and repair the faulty area. Recharge the system, as described previously, and allow it to remain under pressure for 24 hours. If, at the end of this period, there is no applicable pressure change, the system may be considered free of leaks.

14. NOTE: The system pressure will change approximately 3 psig with each 10oF rise or fall in ambient temperature.

15. With the testing complete, relieve the test pressure and reconnect any valves or controls that were disconnected previously.

3.2 EVACUATION

A. To speed the evacuation, connect the vacuum pump to as many points of the system as

possible. Register the vacuum developed by the pump, a reliable vacuum gauge or an electronic vacuum gauge is connected to the liquid line charging valve. The compressor valves are then cracked off of their backseats, moving the valve disc to an intermediate position between the backseat and the frontseat of the valve. Open the liquid line charging valve.

B. The vacuum pump is started and operated until a vacuum equivalent to 500 microns is

registered by the vacuum gauge. C. When the system has been evacuated, close the suction valve on the vacuum pump and

then stop the pump. Backseat one of the compressor valves and remove the vacuum pump connection. Through this valve port, charge enough oil pumped dry nitrogen into the system to raise the pressure to atmospheric. Reevaluate the system. Any moisture remaining in the system is absorbed by the dry nitrogen gas and is removed by the second evacuation.

D. After the 500 micron vacuum reading has been reestablished, close the vacuum pump

suction valve and stop the pump. Backseat the compressor valves and allow the system to stand under vacuum for a minimum of 12 hours.

E. Inspection before charging: perform a preliminary inspection of the system before the

charging is started. The following procedure is recommended:

1. Compressor motor lubricated (open compressor): Adequate crankcase oil level (7/8 of the way up on sightglass).

2. Gauges installed to register suction and discharge pressures, gauge valves open.



3. Proper voltage at compressor motor. 4. Proper overload heaters installed in compressor motor starter. 5. Motor coupling aligned and tightened (open compressor). 6. It is the responsibility of the person starting the equipment to check all wiring for

tightness, control sequence and the electrical interlocks. 7. The easiest way to check the functioning of the control system is to disconnect the

compressor motor leads at the starter and then operate all of the controls, including the safety devices.

8. Condenser (Air Cooled) Fan Motors lubricated and ready to operate. 9. Fan rotation correct.

F. High Side Charging: The initial volume of refrigerant should be charged into the high side of the system, in liquid form, through the liquid line charging valve. The following procedure is suitable for most systems.

G. Connect a cylinder of refrigerant to the liquid line charging valve. Before tightening the

connection at the charging valve, crack the valve on the refrigerant cylinder and allow enough refrigerant gas to escape through the loose connections to purge air from the connecting line. Tighten the connection. Refrigerant charging should not be one man alone unless he can clearly see the compressor and its gauges while he is performing the charging operation.

H. Close the liquid line shut-off valve. I. Close the system electrical disconnect switches and the unit on-off switch. Start the chilled

water pump or system fan. This sequence of events will normally energize the control system.

J. Lower the setting of the conditioned air or chilled water temperature controller. The closing of

the controller contacts should start the condenser water pump or the air cooled condenser fan and open the liquid line solenoid valve(s). However, since the system is under vacuum, the low pressure control is open, preventing the compressor from starting at this time.

K. With the refrigerant cylinder inverted, open the valve on the cylinder and then the liquid

charging valve, allowing liquid refrigerant to enter the system. When the refrigerant pressure at the suction side of the compressor rises to the cut-in setting of the low pressure control, the compressor will start. The compressor will then pump refrigerant vapor from the evaporator into the condenser where it will be condensed and stored.

L. NOTE: The low pressure control may stop the compressor during the charging operation.

This is a normal occurrence. The compressor will be restarted in a few moments when suction pressure is again established.

M. Continue charging until the estimated refrigerant charge has entered the system. At this

point, close the liquid line charging valve and the valve on the refrigerant cylinder. Open the liquid line shut-off valve. Observe the liquid flow through the liquid line sightglass. If the flow contains bubbles of flash gas, additional refrigerant is required. Refrigerant is added by again closing the liquid line shut-off valve and repeating the charging procedure. Stop the charging and reopen the liquid line shut-off valve. Small amounts of refrigerant are added in this manner until the sightglass is clear.

N. Allow the system to continue to operate, frequently checking the liquid line sightglass and the

compressor suction and discharge pressure gauge reading should appear high, system load and temperature conditions considered, there is a good possibility that the system is overcharged. To remedy this condition, remove refrigerant in small amounts until the pressure reading returns to normal. Refrigerant is removed by simply opening the refrigerant cylinder and charging valves allowing the liquid to return to the cylinder. It is good practice to



leave the refrigerant drum connected to the charging valve until the system has completed a 72 hour test run. This permits the addition or removal of refrigerant, as necessary, to establish proper system charge. The 72 hour test run is discussed in the chapter that follows. Once the system charge is established, remove the charging line and replace the seal cap on the port of the liquid line charging valve.

3.3 LOW SIDE CHARGING

A. Small amounts of refrigerant may be added to the system in the gaseous state through the

backseat port of the compressor suction valve. When refrigerant is to be added in this manner, backseat the suction valve and purge the charging line before tightening the connection at the valve port.

B. CAUTION: When low side charging, gaseous refrigerant is drawn from the top of the

refrigerant container. C. Start the compressor, crack the suction valve clear of its backseat and open the valve on the

refrigerant container. The compressor will then pump gaseous refrigerant from the container into the system.

3.4 REFRIGERANT INSULATION

Classification/Piping O.D.

Air-conditioned location Non-air conditioned location

1.Typical Conditioned Location

2.Special Conditioned Location

3.Typical Unconditioned Location

4.Special Unconditioned Location

Liquid Pipe

Ø1/4 inches ˃1/2 inches ˃1/2 inches ˃1/2 inches ˃1/2 inches

Ø3/8 inches

≥ Ø1/2 inches

˃1/2 inches ˃1/2 inches ˃1/2 inches ˃1/2 inches

Vapor Pipe

Ø3/8 inches

˃1/2 inches ˃3/4 inches ˃3/4 inches

˃1 inch

Ø1/2 inches

Ø5/8 inches

Ø3/4 inches

Ø7/8 inches

Ø1 inch

Ø1-1/8 inches

˃3/4 inches

Ø1-1/4 inches

˃1 inch ˃1 inch

Ø1-3/8 inches

Ø1-1/2 inches

Ø1-3/4 inches

3.5 EXECUTION

A. Coordinate installation of DSS system refrigerant piping with manufacturer.

B. All piping shall be sized, installed, insulated per manufacturer recommendations,

requirements and drawings submitted. A manufacturer representative shall be present on site and verify installation.

Ad

vis

ors

Ex

ce

l –

Ga

ge

Cen

ter

Ca

mp

us

Ph

ase

1 –

Bu

ildin

g A

& B

uild

ing

K

To

pe

ka

, K

an

sas

S

DG

Pro

ject

No.

190

12

1

RE

FR

IGE

RA

NT

PIP

ING

232300-6

PIP

ING

MA

TE

RIA

L S

CH

ED

ULE

PIP

ING

F

ITT

ING

S

MA

XIM

UM

N

OR

MA

L

WO

RK

ING

F

IELD

TE

ST

SY

ST

EM

S

IZE

T

YP

E S

CH

ED

. G

RA

DE

A

ST

M

MA

TE

RI

AL

M

AT

ER

IAL

TY

PE

P

RE

SS

. T

EM

P.

PR

ES

SU

RE

T

IME

Refr

igera

nt

Lin

es**

A

ll A

CR

--

--

B

-88

C

P

CP

S

S

225

30 to

12

5

300 P

SI

1 H

R

AB

BR

EV

IAT

ION

S:

SS

-Silv

er

So

lder

C

P -

Co

pper

** N

o r

efr

igera

nt p

ipin

g s

hall

be insta

lled u

ntil an a

ppro

ve

d r

efr

igera

nt p

ipin

g s

yste

m d

iagra

m h

as b

een p

rovid

ed b

y t

he m

anufa

ctu

rer.

C

ontr

acto

r sh

all

verify

all

siz

es a

nd r

ou

ting w

ith m

anufa

ctu

rer

prior

to insta

llation.

Note

s:

1. C

ontr

acto

r m

ay n

ot

use T

ee-D

rill

bra

nch takeoff

s.

2.

All

pip

ing s

hall

pass p

ressure

testing

an

d s

ha

ll be inspecte

d b

y t

he

Engin

eer

prior

to t

he insta

llation o

f in

sula

tio

n.

EN

D O

F S

EC

TIO

N 2

3230

0


WATER TREATMENT 232500 – 1

SECTION 232500 - WATER TREATMENT


Furnish and install where shown on plans chemical water improvement chemicals, service and equipment for the chemical treatment of each heating water and cooling water system.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CHEMICAL WATER IMPROVEMENT

A. The water treatment chemical and service supplier shall be a recognized specialist, active in the field of industrial water treatment whose major business is in the field of water treatment.

B. Contractor shall provide a Fremont First Filter System and separate chemical pot feeder as indicated on the plans. Pipe complete and anchor to pad.

C. Furnish one year's supply of the recommended Water Improvement Services formula for control of scale, sludge, and corrosion of the closed recirculating system. Formulation shall not contain any ingredients which are harmful to system materials of construction.

D. The water treatment supplier shall furnish basic water test equipment, including one year's supply of reagents. This kit shall include an apparatus for determining the amount of treatment in the system water. Where specialized or supplementary equipment is required, it shall be furnished as part of the offering.

E. Provide a water management and service program for a period of one year from start-up of the system to include the following: Initial water analysis and recommendations, system start-up assistance, training of operating personnel, periodic field service and consultation, all performed by a qualified full-time local representative; customer field water test reports and technical assistance will be provided at no additional charge.



DUCTWORK 233113-1

SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Reference Section 230500) 1.1 GENERAL

A. Construct ductwork as detailed on drawings and as detailed in the latest edition of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's Association (SMACNA) Duct Manual. Details shown on project plans shall indicate specific construction methods to be used on this project, and shall be used in lieu of any alternate methods shown in SMACNA Duct Manual.

B. Construct and install ductwork to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of

operation. Support and securely anchor ductwork and equipment from structural framing of building. Provide suitable intermediate metal framing where required between building structural framing.

C. Construct ductwork in accordance with operating static pressure range. Ductwork pressure

classifications shall be as follows:

1. Low Pressure Ductwork: System operating static pressure 1.5" positive or negative of W.G. or less and velocities less than 2500 FPM.

2. High Pressure Ductwork: System operating static pressure 3" positive or negative of W.G. or less and velocities less than 4500 FPM.

D. All metal ductwork scheduled for interior thermal and acoustical liner is not sized on plans to

include the proper thickness of insulation. Add 1" or 2" in height and width of ductwork as required to accommodate insulation thickness. Mount specialties such as turning vanes, campers, etc., to ductwork with that section insulated "Build Outs" to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

E. Construct low pressure system ductwork to conform to latest edition of low pressure duct

construction standards of SMACNA Duct Manual.

F. Construct medium and high pressure system ductwork to conform to latest edition of high pressure duct construction standards of SMACNA Duct Manual.

G. Provide spiral wound duct on all round ductwork greater than 10" dia.

Provide longitudinal seam duct on all round ductwork 10" dia or less.

H. Sealing of low and high pressure ductwork shall be as follows:

1. Option #1: Low and high pressure ductwork: Including supply, return and exhaust. Provide Hard Cast, Inc. “Duct Seal 321” fiber reinforced water based duct sealant in accordance with manufacturers' directions on all joints, connectors, etc.

2. Option #2: Low and high pressure rectangular ductwork: Provide "Ductmate" systems as manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc. or an approved equal system.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR STEEL

A. Provide new commercial quality, bright spangled galvanized sheet steel manufactured in the U.S.A.


DUCTWORK 233113-2

2.2 STAINLESS STEEL

A. For dish machine exhaust provide new commercial quality, bright type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be welded.

2.3 INSTALLATION

A. All ductwork shall be installed in strict accordance with latest edition of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Exposed ductwork and ductwork with external insulation shall be painted unless noted otherwise.



DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300-1

SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 – GENERAL (Reference Section 230500) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL SPECIALTIES

A. Specialties shall be factory fabricated items designed for low, medium or high velocity systems as required. Submit shop drawings on all specialties required with shop drawings of ductwork layout. Specialties shall be as follows:

1. Turning Vanes: High Pressure Aero/Dyne or equal 26 gauge H-E-P high

efficiency profile air foil vanes mounted 2-1/8" on center on 24 gauge runners. Air turns by Barber-Coleman will be acceptable on low pressure only. Note: Turning vanes to be provided on all supply, return and exhaust ducts.

2. Extractors (Low Velocity): Carnes #1250 all aluminum air volume extractor. Unit shall be adjustable from full open to full closed position. Provide channel supports where recommended by manufacturer (length over 16", height over 8"). Provide Young end bearings and rod with regulator as hereinafter specified. Equivalent by Price.

3. Dampers: Provide 24 gauge minimum galvanized metal blades supported on duct with metal supports and locked in position with locking type damper arm by Carnes, Greenheck, Air Balance, Louvers & Dampers, FAP, Pottorff and Cesco

4. Backdraft Dampers: Unless backdraft dampers are specified with a particular piece of equipment. Provide Cesco #BDA or equal with 16 gauge aluminum blade with oiled bearings mounted in steel frame. Blades shall be balanced and connected with tie bar. Provide end seals and blade seals. Equivalent by Ruskin, Greenheck, Air Balance, Air Stream, Titus, Louvers & Dampers, FAP, Pottorff and Cesco.

5. Backdraft dampers: Where backdraft dampers are shown on plans installed behind wall louvers or roof relief vents, provide Cesco #BDA-101-H heavy-duty construction counter balanced to assist air flow complete with end seals and blade seals. Equivalent by Ruskin, Greenheck, Air Balance, Air Stream or Titus, Louvers & Dampers, FAP.

6. Flexible Connections: Metaledge Ventglas prefabricated flexible connection of 3-1/4" wide heat and fire resistant neoprene coated glass fabric with two 3" wide 24 gauge metal strips attached to each edge. Vent Fabrics, Inc., Duro-dyne Corp. or equal.

7. Access Doors: Provide access doors in ductwork ceiling, walls, or floors for access to ductwork valves, controls, piping etc., installed under this contract. Doors and frame shall be formed of not lighter than USS #14 gauge and #16 gauge steel, respectively. Hinges shall be concealed loose pin spring type. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver, cam action type. Doors and frames shall be furnished in prime coat of Higgins, Milcor, Donley or equal.

8. Round take-off fittings: Round take-off fittings to medium and high pressure rectangular ductwork in sizes 12" and larger shall be made with Wesco bell mouth fittings or approved equal. Factory fabricated 90 degree conical tees or 45 degree tees with 1/2" flange acceptable.

9. Round take-off fittings: Round take-off fittings from supply diffusers or registers to low pressure supply ductwork shall be Flexmaster #FLDE complete with locking damper and air scoop. Equivalent by Atco, Air Control Products.

10. Smoke Dampers: Prefco Model #5020 motorized fire/smoke damper. Power open, locked and reset, spring closed.

11. Equivalent by Ruskin, Nailor, Greenheck, Air Balance. 12. Equivalent by Wiremold, Cleavaflex, Flexmaster.


DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300-2

13. Low Pressure Flexible Duct: Thermaflex GK-M rated for +6" W.G. max. and -1" W.G. max. for duct sizes 4" to 14", +6" W.G. max. and -0.5" W.G. max for duct sizes 14" to 16", +4" W.G. max. and -0.5" W.G. max for duct sizes 18" to 20". Rated for 3500 FPM maximum velocity. UL listed "UL-181 Standards Class I Duct Material" complying with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. Duct shall be composed of an acoustically rated inner polymeric liner duct bonded to coated steel wire helix. Fiberglass insulation and tear resistant metalized polyester flim outer vapor barrier.

14. Equivalent by Wiremold, Cleavaflex, Flexmaster. 15. Ruskin and IAC shall be considered equivalent duct silencers. 16. Fire Dampers: Greenheck “FD-150X” low profile 1 1/2 hr rated, UL555.

Stacked blade design for minimum reduction of cross sectional area of penetrations and ducts. 165 degree fusible link.

a) Equivalent by Nailor, Greenheck, Ruskin, Air Balance. 17. Combination fire/smoke damper:

a) Greenheck model: FSD-212 combination fire smoke damper.

• Galvanized 3-Vee Style Blades.

• UL 555S Leakage Class II.

• UL 555 1-1/2 Hour Fire Resistance Rating. b) Honeywell ML402 Actuator, 120VAC c) Greenheck model: RRL Resettable Link, 165 degree setting, electric sensor

thermostat. 2.2 INSTALLATION

A. All ductwork accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements SMACNA, NFPA 90A and 90B, UL listings and drawing details.



EXHAUST FANS 233416 - 1

SECTION 233416 - EXHAUST FANS

PART 1- GENERAL (Reference Section 230500)


A. Provide where shown on plans exhaust fans as hereinafter specified. Reference the exhaust fan schedule on plans.

B. Equivalent by Carnes, Cook, Greenheck, Penn, ACME, Powerline, JennAire, Twin-City.

1.2 CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS

A. Exhaust fans shall be upblast centrifugal direct driven type. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. Windbands shall have a rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to curbcaps with a welded seam.

B. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream.

C. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants.

D. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance and a means of inspecting, cleaning and servicing the exhaust fan.

E. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators.

F. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings.

G. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.

H. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts.

I. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing.

J. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment.

K. Provide insulated curbs sloped for pitch of roof. Refer to schedule.

L. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring.

M. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance.

N. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification.



VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES 233600-1

SECTION 233600 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install where shown on plans shut-off terminal units. All variable volume boxes shall be by one manufacturer.

1.2 EQUIVALENTS

A. Trane, E.H. Price, and Titus. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS

A. Provide units with capacities as scheduled. Provide where indicated on plans or schedules hydronic or reheat coils with capacities and characteristics as scheduled.

B. The VAV boxes on this project shall be controlled by DDC controls that are provided by the BAS

contractor. Refer to the BAS spec section and the control drawings on the project plans for further information. It shall be the responsibility of the VAV box manufacturer to accept, install, and wire the DDC controls on the unit(s) at the factory prior to shipment to the jobsite. This will include the DDC controller, electric actuator, and differential pressure sensor. The box manufacturer shall provide the 24 VAC transformer and the fan start/stop relay, if required.

C. The BAS Contractor will generate the necessary software to field-install and commission. Field

wiring connections for the space sensor and communications bus will also be provided and installed by the BAS Contractor.

D. Casing shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel.

E. Interior surface of unit casing is acoustically and thermally lined with 1 inch, 1.9 lb/cu. ft., R-Value

4.2, density glass fiber with high density facing. Insulation is UL listed and meets NFPA-90A and UL 181.

F. The VAV box shall be a flow control device with an integral electric actuator with electronic

pressure independent controls. Box inlet is die cast aluminum and tapered to fit standard round flexible ductwork. Maximum leak rate is 1 percent at 4 inches WG. inlet static pressure. Integral multiple point, averaging flow sensing ring to provide primary air flow measurement with " 5 percent of unit rated airflow with 1-1/2 diameters of straight duct upstream of unit. Integral flow taps and calibration chart provided on each unit.

G. All units shall be UL listed and ARI certified performance.

2.2 HOT WATER COIL

A. Hot water coil shall be slip and drive connected as an integral part of the terminal unit. If insulation is scheduled it shall be field supplied and furnished. One and two row coils shall be constructed using ½” o.d. copper tubes, with rippled corrugated aluminum fins. Fin spacing shall be as scheduled or as required to meet capacity. Coil connections shall be either right or left hand. All hot water coils to be pre-tested under water at 350 psi.


VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES 233600-2

B. Coil Piping: Hot water coils shall be piped with the supply at the bottom, and 2-TOW coils shall also be piped for counter-flow operation. Field verify reheat coil orientation prior to piping and installation.



GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 233713 – 1

SECTION 233713 - GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Reference Section 230500)

Provide where shown on plans grilles, registers, and diffusers. Refer to schedule on plans.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified. Set all units with rubber gaskets for air tight connection with mounting surface, see drawings for types, sizes, air flow and quantity.

B. Install all registers with curve of louver away from line of sight. Unless noted otherwise, provide duct mounted diffusers and registers with standard margins. Finish shall be off white when mounted in ceiling, prime coat when mounted on wall finish.

C. Provide proper mounting supplies and arrangements for areas shown. Check Architectural drawings for ceiling and all construction.

D. Equivalent by Titus, E.H. Price, Krueger, Louvers and Dampers, Greenheck and RUSKIN.

2.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA requirements, where balancing dampers are not provided in duct work preceeding diffusers, provide opposed blade balancing damper in neck of diffuser.



PACKAGED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 237413-1

SECTION 237413 – PACKAGED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Packaged rooftop unit.

B. Heat exchanger.

C. Refrigeration components.

D. Unit operating controls.

E. Roof curb.

F. Electrical power connections.

G. Operation and maintenance service.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

B. AHRI 360 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.

C. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2013 - Energy Standard for New Buildings Except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings.

D. California Administrative Code - Title 24 Establishes the minimum efficiency requirements for

HVAC equipment installed in new buildings in the State of California.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit drawings indicating components, dimensions, weights and loadings, required

clearances, and location and size of field connections.

B. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, service clearances and

electrical requirements.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data.

B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, start-up and operating instructions, installation

instructions, and maintenance procedures.

1.5 HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting

units.

B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until installation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever

occurs first. (ALL EQUIPMENT)



B. OEM provides several Extended Warranty options to include:

(1) Whole Unit Labor Warranty (Year 1 plus)

(2) Compressor Warranty Option

C. Provide 5 year extended warranty for compressors including parts and labor.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. All work on units shall be accomplished by OEM factory trained and authorized servicing

technicians.

B. In conjunction with and supporting Factory warranty OEM shall furnish complete factory

authorized service and maintenance of packaged rooftop units for two years from Date of

Substantial Completion by manufacturer.

C. OEM shall provide quarterly, annual, and bi-annual maintenance in compliance with or

exceeding ASHRAE Standard 180-2008.

D. Include maintenance items as recommended in manufacturer's operating and maintenance

data.

E. Submit copy of service call work order or report to the Owner, and include description of work

performed.


A. Unit shall conform to UL 2010/CSA 22.2 #236 for construction of packaged air conditioner and

shall have UL/CSA label affixed to rooftop package.

1. In the event the unit is not UL/CSA approved, the manufacturer shall, at his

expense, provide for a field inspection by a UL/CSA representative to verify

conformance to UL/CSA standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform

required modifications to the unit to comply with UL/CSA, as directed by the

UL/CSA representative, at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one set of spare filters.

1.10 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall furnish and install packaged rooftop air conditioning unit(s) as shown and

as scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with this

specification and perform at the conditions specified, scheduled or as shown on the contract

drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. GENERAL

1. Manufacturer of packaged unitary rooftop products shall have had a minimum of

five years successful experience in the manufacture and service support of the

rooftop packages. Manufacturers with less than five years experience in the

production of rooftop units shall not be acceptable.



B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

1. Trane IntelliPak Symbio 800

2. Substitutions: [Prior approval required] as indicated under the general and/or

supplemental conditions of these specifications.

C. Base bid shall be Trane packaged rooftop air conditioning units with approved alternate being

York. Alternates must still comply with the performance and features as specified herein and as

indicated on the design documents. Job will be awarded on basis of specified product.

Substitutions must be selected and approved within 14 calendar days after award of contract.

D. Packaged rooftop air conditioning units shall be manufactured by Trane.

2.2 UNIT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to plans for scheduled unit performance requirements.

B. Scheduled performance is based on AHRI 360 test conditions.

C. Supply [and relief] air is corrected to 1000 feet above sea level.

D. The unit electrical service is 208 3-phase volts with "across-the line" starter.

2.3 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION

A. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be cooling only VAV packaged rooftops as specified on the

contract documents and within these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based

upon AHRI Standard 340/360. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weathertight casing with

compressors, air cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, filters, supply and/or

relief fan motors and drives, and unit controls.

B. Unit(s) shall be Trane Intellipak Symbio 800 as manufactured at the factory. Package units shall

be constructed for installation on a roof curb providing full perimeter support under air handler

section and pedestal support under condenser section.

C. Unit(s) shall be factory run tested to include the operation of all fans, compressors, heat

exchangers, and control sequences.

D. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate

caution areas.

2.4 UNIT CASING

A. Cabinet: Exterior panels shall be zinc coated galvanized steel painted with a slate gray baked

enamel finish durable enough to withstand a minimum of 672 hours consecutive salt spray

application in accordance with standard ASTM B117. Screws shall be magnigard coated.

Refrigeration components and compressor shall be accessible through removable louvered

panels as standard.

Unit air handling section shall have a pitched roof and laminated double-wall construction with

polyurethane foam core injected between sheet metal panels. Insulation value shall be R9. All

interior surfaces shall be suitable for cleaning per ASHRAE 62. All access doors and panels

shall have closed cell gaskets. All door, roof and base panels shall have a thermal break.



Unit base shall be watertight with heavy gauge formed load-bearing members and curb

overhang. Unit lifting lugs shall accept chains or cables for rigging. Lifting lugs shall also serve

as unit tie down points.

B. Access Doors: Access doors shall be hinged with a single, exterior mounted, height and

tension adjustable handle to provide positive latching at three points. Access doors shall

provide a door stop mechanism to latch the door in the open position to prevent unsafe door

closure by wind. Serviceable compartments in the air handler such as filters, evaporator coil,

supply fan and variable frequency drives shall have doors of laminated, double-wall

construction. This construction shall use a polyurethane foam core between the exterior sheet

metal pane and the interior line, with an insulating value of R9. Three single wall doors shall be

provided for access to the control panel.

2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Provide Phase Voltage Monitor. Shall protect 3-phase equipment from phase loss, phase

reversal and phase imbalance. Any fault condition shall produce a Failure Indicator LED and

send the unit into an auto stop condition. cULus approved.

B. Provide Unit Interrupt Rating (Short Circuit Current Rating-SCCR). A 5,000 Amp rating Amp

rating shall be applied to the unit enclosure using a non-fused circuit breaker for disconnect

switch purposes. Fan motors, compressors, and electric heat circuits shall be provided with

series rated circuit breakers that will provide the unit rated level of protection. The unit shall be

marked with approved cULus markings and will adhere to cULus regulations

C. Provide Non-Fused Disconnect. External handle mounted on the control box door shall be

provided to disconnect unit power with the control box door closed for safety.

D. Provide unit mounted 115 volt convenience outlet. Shall be wired and powered from a factory

mounted transformer. Unit-mounted, non-fused disconnect with external handle shall be

furnished with factory powered outlet.

2.6 PRE EVAPORATOR COOLER AIR FILTERS

A. Provide Air Filters. Filters shall mount integral within unit casing and be accessible via hinged

access panels.

B. Provide filter monitoring. A factory-installed, differential pressure transducer shall be piped to

both sides of the [pre evaporator filter] [final filter] to indicate status. Transducer shall maintain

+/- 5 percent accuracy within operating temperature limits of -20°F to 120°F. Transducer shall

be mounted in a unit control box and report status through unit control display.

C. Provide MERV 8 panel filters. Filters shall be [2-inch][4-inch] thick, MERV 8 disposable

synthetic media, and shall slide into an extruded aluminum rack.

2.7 FANS – SUPPLY

A. Supply fan shall be two single width, single inlet 9-blade plenum fans. Fan blades shall be aluminum airfoil. Plenum fans shall be direct-driven. Entire assembly shall be completely isolated from unit and fan board by 2" deflection spring isolation.

B. Beltless fan shall not require routine maintenance such as fan bearing lubrication, belt

tensioning and replacement, sheave alignment, and setscrew torque checks.



C. Supply fan motors shall be open drip-proof. All supply fans shall be dynamically balanced in factory. Each motor shall have its own Variable Frequency Drive.

D. Supply fan shall be test run in unit and shall reach rated rpm. All 60 Hz supply fan motors shall

meet the Energy Independence Security Act of 2007 (EISA).

E. Provide a Supply Airflow Measurement (Piezometer). The Plenum supply fan shall have an

airflow measurement device to measure differential pressure and to calculate fan airflow. The

device shall be capable of measuring airflow within ± 5 percent total accuracy when operating

within the stable operating region of the fan curve. Fan airflow performance and noise levels

shall not be affected by the installation of the device. The fan inlet shall not be obstructed by

the airflow measurement device.

F. Provide variable frequency drive (VFD) bypass. Supply fan bypass control shall provide airflow

at 60 Hz in the event of drive failures.

2.8 EVAPORATOR COIL SECTION

A. Provide heavy duty aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Evaporator coil shall

be inter- circuited to maintain active coil face area at part load conditions. Coil shall also utilize

internally enhanced tubing for maximum efficiency.

B. Provide electronic expansion valve. Shall be electronically controlled by the Symbio™ 800 unit controller. This fully integrates expansion valve control with unit operation to ensure optimal equipment reliability and efficiency. Expansion valves shall be 2500 step valves for precise refrigerant control and shall be driven closed during off cycles to minimize refrigerant migration and protect compressors. Valve position shall be displayed at the user interface to assist field diagnostics.

C. Provide stainless steel pressure transducer. Shall provide accurate measurement of high and

low side refrigeration system pressure over the entire operating range. System pressures and saturation temperatures shall be displayed at the user interface to improve field diagnostics. The transducer is accessible as it shall be located close to the compressor manifold set. Durable weather proof automotive grade electrical connectors shall be used to ensure reliability.

D. Provide double sloped drain pan to assure positive drainage of condensate from the unit

casing.

2.9 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER SECTION

A. Condenser coils shall have all Aluminum Microchannel coils. All coils shall be leak tested at the

factory to ensure pressure integrity. The condenser coil is pressure tested to 650 psig.

Subcooling circuit(s) shall be provided as standard.

B. Provide subcooling circuit(s) integral with condenser coils to maximize efficiency and prevent

premature flashing of liquid refrigerant, to a gaseous state, ahead of the expansion valve.

C. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive, condenser fans with aluminum blades and zinc plated

steel hubs. Condenser fan motors shall be three-phase motors with permanently lubricated ball

bearings, built-in current and thermal overload protection and weather-tight slingers over motor

bearings.

D. Provide factory-installed louvered steel coil guards around perimeter of condensing section to

protect the condenser coils, refrigerant piping and control components from damage resulting

from hail, flying debris, and vandalism. Louvered panels shall be fabricated from heavy gauge,



pre-painted galvanized steel with a baked, polyurethane enamel finish, and be rigid enough to

provide permanent protection for shipping and pre-/post- installation. Course wire mesh is not

an acceptable material for coil guards.

E. Provide low ambient variable speed condenser fan control to allow the unit to start down to 0

degrees F and operate down to -10 degrees F.

2.10 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

A. Compressor shall be industrial grade, energy efficient direct drive 3600 RPM speed scroll type.

The motor shall of a suction gas cooled hermetic design. Compressor shall have a centrifugal

oil pump with dirt separator, oil sight glass, and oil charging valve. Crankcase heaters will be

standard on each compressor to minimize amounts of liquid in the oil sump when unit is off.

B. Provide with thermostatic motor winding temperature control to protect against excessive motor

temperatures resulting from over-/under-voltage or loss of charge. Provide high and low

pressure cutouts, and reset relay.

C. Provide factory-installed compressor lockout thermostat to prevent compressor operation at low

ambient conditions.

D. Provide coil frost protection compressor unloading based on refrigerant circuit suction

temperature to prevent coil frosting with minimum energy usage.

E. Trane® eFlex™ variable speed compressors shall be capable of speed modulation from 25 Hz to a maximum of 100 Hz. The minimum unit capacity shall be 15% of full load or less. The compressor motor shall be a permanent magnet type. Each compressor shall have a crankcase heater installed, properly sized to minimize the amount of liquid refrigerant present in the oil sump during off cycles. Compressors shall be equipped with a bearing oil injection system that optimizes bearing and scroll set lubrication, sealing, and controls the oil circulation rate. Optimal bearing lubrication shall be provided by a gerotor oil pump.

Each variable speed compressor shall be matched with a specially designed variable frequency drive which modulates the speed of the compressor motor and provides several compressor protection functions. Control of the variable speed compressor and inverter shall be integrated with the Symbio 800 unit controller to ensure optimal equipment reliability and efficiency.

F. Provide high efficiency units that shall meet ASHRAE 189.1-2011 and Consortium for Energy

Efficiency (CEE) Advanced Tier Commercial Unitary AC and HP Specification for utility rebate requirements.

H. Provide Compressor Isolation (Optional Suction & Standard Discharge Valves). Factory

installed valves both upstream and downstream of each compressor set shall enables isolation of compressors from the rest of the refrigeration system if service is required.

2.11 RELIEF SECTION

A. Provide Relief Fan – Direct Drive & Variable Speed with Statitrac Control. The eDrive™ relief fan shall be [one] [two] [three] single-width, single-inlet, 5-blade direct-drive plenum fan(s) with backward inclined, high efficiency welded aluminum impeller that is dynamically balanced as an assembly. Fan shall be beltless and maintenance free throughout its operating life. Fan shall be balanced to G6.3 per AMCA 204. No external vibration isolation is necessary. Motor shall contain power electronics for speed control and be managed by the equipment controller.



The modulating relief discharge dampers and ECM shall be modulated in response to building pressure. A differential pressure control system, (Statitrac™), shall use a differential pressure transducer to compare indoor building pressure to outdoor ambient atmospheric pressure. The relief fan shall be turned on when required to lower building static pressure setpoint. The (Statitrac™) control system shall then modulate the discharge dampers and ECM to control the building pressure to within the adjustable, specified dead band that shall be adjustable at the human interface panel.

B. Provide Ventilation Override Mode. With the ventilation override module installed, the unit shall

be programmed to transition to up to 5 different programmed sequences for Smoke Purge, Evacuation, Pressurization, Purge, Purge with duct control sequence and Unit off. The transition shall occur when a binary input on the VOM is closed (shorted); this would typically be a hard wired relay output from a smoke detector or fire control panel.

2.12 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION

A. Provide 0-100 Percent Modulating Economizer. Shall be operated through the primary

temperature controls to automatically utilize OA for "free" cooling. Automatically modulated

return and outside air dampers shall maintain proper temperature in the space. Economizer

shall be equipped with an automatic lock out when the outdoor high ambient temperature is too

high for proper cooling.

Minimum position control shall be standard and adjustable at the Human Interface Panel or with

a remote potentiometer or through the building management system. A spring return motor

shall ensure closure of OA dampers during unit shutdown or power interruption. Mechanical

cooling shall be available to aid the economizer mode at any ambient.

B. Provide demand control ventilation (DCV) system fully integrated with unit economizer.

Controller shall minimize fresh air intake during periods of low occupancy based on parts per

million space CO2 in response to a customer defined parts per million CO2 setpoint. CO2

setpoint, and minimum DCV fresh air damper position shall be programmable at the human

interface, or building management system.

2.13 DAMPERS A. Provide Ultra Low Leak Economizer Dampers. Economizer return and outside air dampers

shall be provided with chlorinated polyvinyl chloride gasketing added to the damper blades and rolled stainless steel jamb seals to the sides of the damper assembly. The economizer shall have a functional life of 60,000 opening and closing cycles. Dampers shall be AMCA 511 Class 1 certified with a maximum leakage rate of 4 cfm/sq-ft at 1.0 inch wg. pressure differential thus meeting requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2013, California Title 24-2013, and IECC-2012.

Fault Detection and Diagnostic (FDD) control shall also be provided with ultra low leak economizers. FDD control shall monitor the commanded position of the economizer compared to the feedback position of the damper. If the damper position is outside +/- 10% of the commanded position, a diagnostic shall be generated.

IntelliPak units ordered with ultra low leak economizers shall be listed on the California Energy Commission Registry for factory compliance with Title 24 Economizer and FDD requirements. A label shall be applied to the unit identifying construction with the ultra low leak economizer and FDD controls.



2.14 ROOF CURB

A. Provide factory supplied roof curb, heavy gauge zinc coated steel with supply and return air

gasketing. Ship knocked down and provide instructions for easy assembly. Coordinate with

structure improvements specific to each site.

B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors Association

guidelines for rooftop equipment support.

2.15 SYMBIO 800 CONTROLS

A. Provide Symbio 800 BACnet based Controls - The controller shall be an application-specific,

programmable controller that is factory installed and designed to control packaged HVAC

equipment. A 7” user interface features a touch-sensitive color screen that provides facility

managers with at-a-glance operating status, performance monitoring, scheduling changes and

operating adjustments. Other advanced features include automated controller backup on SD

card and optional features such as secure remote connectivity, wireless building

communications, mobile device connectivity and custom programming and expandable I/O

B. Provide Power Meter. Factory installed power meter shall measure unit energy usage to 0.2%

accuracy (ANSI C12.20) and communicate through the Symbio 800 controller enabling viewing

through user interface or building automation system.

C. Provide Controls Expansion Hardware. Symbio 800 shall have field applied controls capability. Factory installed expansion hardware (XM70) shall have 19 inputs/outputs.

D. Provide Rapid Restart. Option shall provide immediate start up upon power failure. A backup

generator shall be required on site before unit start up. Rapid Restart shall begin immediately after recovery from a power loss and work by restarting the compressors and supply fan quickly to provide full cooling within two to three minutes.

E. Provide Multi Zone Variable Air Volume (Discharge Air Temperature). Option shall provide all

necessary controls to operate a VAV rooftop from the discharge air temperature, including discharge air microprocessor controller and discharge air sensor. The controller shall coordinate the economizer control and the stages of cooling with discharge air temperature reset capabilities. Includes factory installed and tested VFDs to provide supply fan motor speed modulation.

F. Provide Trane BACnet Communication Protocol. The Symbio 800 controller shall support

standard BACnet® communication protocol through a RS485, two-wire communication link or BACnet®/IP.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as specified by structural

documents.

B. Verify that proper power supply is available.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect

ductwork. Install roof mounting curb level.



3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. OEM Startup is performed by factory trained and authorized service technicians confirming

equipment has been correctly installed and passed specification checklist prior to equipment

becoming operational

B. Package rooftop unitary manufacturers shall maintain service capabilities no more than 60

miles from the jobsite.

C. The manufacturer shall furnish an alternative price for:

1. Extended compressor warranty for 5 years.

D. The manufacturer shall furnish complete submittal wiring diagrams of the package unit as

applicable for field maintenance and service.



CABINET UNIT HEATERS 238219-1

SECTION 238219 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

A. Provide cabinet unit heaters as scheduled on plans. 1.2 PERFORMANCE DATA

A. Capacity: Unit capacities certified under Industry Room unit heater Air Conditioner Certification Program in accordance with ARI Standard 440-93.

B. Safety: All standard units are Underwriters Laboratory labeled and approved.

1.3 CONCEALED/RECESSED BASIC UNIT

A. Basic unit includes coil(s), coil supports, fans and fan casings, motor fan board and drain pan. Drain pan insulation is closed cell sheet liner. Steel parts exposed to moisture are galvanized. Fan board assembly and drain pan are easily removable. Exposed panels on recessed units are of 18-gauge steel and ship separate from the unit.

1.4 FINISH

A. All cabinet parts and exposed recessed panels are cleaned, bonderized, phosphatized, and painted with custom color to be selected by Architect. Standard finish meets ASTM B117 specifications (salt spray test).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FANS

A. The aluminum fan wheels are centrifugal forward-curved and double-width. Fan wheels and housings are constructed of formed sheet metal.

2.2 MOTORS

A. All permanent split capacitor motors are run tested in assembled units. All motors have integral thermal overload protection and are permanently lubricated. Motors are capable of starting at 78 percent of rated voltage and operating at 90 percent of rated voltage on all speed settings. Motors can be operated at 10 percent over voltage without undue magnetic noise and with a temperature rise by the winding resistance method not exceeding 50 C at full speed, and 55 C at reduced speeds.

B. All units shall be provided with integral disconnecting means.

2.3 COILS

A. All water coils are burst tested at 450 psig (air) and lead tested at 300 psig (air under water).

B. Maximum main coil working pressure is 300 psig. Maximum entering water temperature is 200 F. Tubes and U-bends are 3/8" OD copper. Fins are aluminum and are mechanically bonded to the copper tubes. Connections are expanded to accept standard 3/8" OD copper tubing.


CABINET UNIT HEATERS 238219-2

2.4 PIPING PACKAGES

A. All piping packages are burst tested at 450 psig (air) and leak tested at 300 psig (air under water). The piping packages maximum working pressure is 300 psig. The maximum entering water temperature on the electric water valve is 200 F.

B. The piping package is designed so that any condensation is directed into the UniTrane auxiliary

drain pan. Insulation of piping package is not required. Trane stop valves are ball type.

2.5 FILTERS

A. Filters are concealed from sight and easily removable without displacing front panels and with no additional tools required. Filters are either one-inch throwaway or one-inch pleated media throwaway.

2.6 DAMPERS

A. All dampers are 18-gauge steel. Single piece, counterbalance 100 percent return and fresh air mixing damper seals on unit filter and gasket material.

2.7 CONTROLS

A. All controls for the CUH’s will be provided by and field installed by the BAS contractor.

2.8 INSTALLATION

A. Unit leveling and Drain Line Pitch: Set unit level by checking the casing. Provide a drain line pitch of one-inch drop per ten feet.



ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION 239000 – 1

SECTION 239000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION





END OF DIVISION 23


DIVISION 26 TABLE OF CONTENTS 260000-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 260500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 260501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES SECTION 260502 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 260519 - WIRES AND CABLES SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING SECTION 260533 - CONDUITS SECTION 260534 - OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES SECTION 260943 - NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROLS SECTION 262417 - PANELBOARDS SECTION 262726 - SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES AND COVER PLATES SECTION 262816 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES SECTION 262817 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 263000 - MOTORS SECTION 264313 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265700 – EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS (Building A Only) SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION 269000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION




A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.


A. All contract documents including drawings, alternates, addenda and modifications preceding this division of this specification are applicable to contractors, subcontractors, and material suppliers.

1.3 SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITION

A. These Specifications are abbreviated form and contain incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "shall be", "as noted on the drawings", "according to the drawings", "a", "an", "the" and "all" are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference.

B. Engineer, wherever used in these specifications shall mean LATIMER, SOMMERS &

ASSOCIATES, P.A., 3639 SW Summerfield Drive, Suite A, Topeka, Kansas 66614, 785-233-3232, FAX 785-233-0647.

C. Contractor, wherever used in these specifications, shall mean any trade contractor that enters

into contract with Owner to perform this section of work.

D. When a word, such as "proper", "satisfactory", "equivalent", and "as directed" is used, it required Engineer's review.


F. Architect-Engineer hereinafter abbreviated A/E shall mean both the Design Architects and the

Design Engineers.

G. Electrical Contractor, hereinafter abbreviated E/C shall mean the person or company and their subcontractors who enter into contract with the Owner to perform the electrical division work.

H. Mechanical Contractor, hereinafter abbreviated M/C shall mean the person or company and their

subcontractors who enter into contract with the Owner to perform the mechanical division work.

I. General Contractor, hereinafter abbreviated G/C shall mean the person or company and their subcontractors who enter into contract with the Owner to perform the general division work.

J. Equipment and/or materials manufacturer hereinafter abbreviated E/M shall mean the

manufacturer of equipment or materials specified or referred to.



1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The contractor(s) responsible for work under this section shall have completed a job of similar scope and magnitude within the last 3 years and be able to document such work upon request. The contractor(s) shall employ an experienced, competent and adequate work force licensed in their specific trade and properly supervised at all times. Commercial Electrical Contracting shall be the company’s primary nature of business. Unlicensed workers and general laborers shall be adequately supervised to insure competent and quality work and workmanship required by this contract and all other regulations, codes and practices. At all times the contractor(s) shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal guidelines, practices and regulations. Contractor may be required to submit a statement of qualifications, pertaining to the type of work to be performed, upon request before any final approval and selection. Failure to be able to comply with these requirements is suitable reason for rejection of a bid whether acting as a prime or subcontractor.


A. Visit site and determine existing local conditions affecting work in contract. B. Failure to determine site conditions or nature of existing or new construction will not be

considered basis for granting additional compensation. 1.6 CONTRACT CHANGES



A. Locations of equipment, conduit and other electrical work is indicated diagrammatically by electrical drawings. Layout work from dimensions on Architectural and Structural Drawings. Verify equipment size from manufacturers shop drawings.

B. Study and become familiar with contract drawings of other trades and in particular general

construction drawings and details in order to obtain necessary information for figuring installation. Cooperate with other workmen and install work in such a way to avoid interference with their Work. Minor deviations, not affecting design characteristics, performance or space limitation may be permitted if reviewed prior to installation by A/E.

C. Any conduit, apparatus, appliance or other electrical item interfering with proper placement of

other work as indicated on drawings, specified, or required, shall be removed and if so shown relocated and reconnected without extra cost. Damage to other Work caused by this contractor, subcontractor, workers or any cause whatsoever, shall be restored as specified for new work.

D. Do not scale electrical drawings for dimensions. Accurately layout work from dimensions

indicated on Architectural drawings unless such be found in error. 1.8 PERFORMANCE


1.9 WARRANTY

A. E/C warrants to Owner and Architect the quality of materials, equipment, workmanship and operation of equipment provided under this specification division for a period of one year from and after completion of building and acceptance of electrical systems by Owner.



B. E/C warrants to Owner and Architect that on receipt of notice from either of them within one year

of warranty period following date of acceptance all defects that have appeared in materials and/or workmanship, shall be promptly corrected to condition required by contract documents at E/C's expense.

C. The warranty above expressed shall not supersede any separately stated warranty or

requirements required by law or by these specifications.

1.10 CAD FILES

A. CAD files will not be available. 1.11 ALTERNATES

A. Refer to General Requirements and description for alternate bid items.

1.12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION

A. The intent of these specifications is to allow ample opportunity for E/C to use ingenuity and ability to perform the work to his and Owner's best advantage, and to permit maximum competition in bidding on standards of materials and equipment required.

B. Material and equipment installed under this contract shall be first class quality, new, unused and

without damage. C. In general, these specifications identify required materials and equipment by naming first the

manufacturer whose product was used as the basis for the project design and specifications. The manufacturer's product, series, model, catalog and/or identification numbers shall set quality and capacity requirements for comparing the equivalency of other manufacturer's products. Where other manufacturers names are listed they are considered an approved manufacturer for the product specified, however; the listing of their names implies no prior approval of any product they may propose to furnish as equivalent to the first named product unless specific model or catalog numbers are listed in these specifications or in subsequent addenda. Where other than first named products are used for Electrical Contractor base bid proposal it shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to determine prior to bid time that the proposed materials and equipment selections are products of approved manufacturers which meet or exceed the specifications and are acceptable to the Engineer.

D. Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required items of first quality, adequate in every respect for intended use. Such items shall be submitted to Architect-Engineer for review prior to procurement.

1. If the Contractor wishes to incorporate products other than those named in the Base Bid

Specifications they shall submit a request for approval of equivalency in writing no later than (10) ten calendar days prior to bid date. Substitutions after this may be refused at Engineers option. Equivalents will ONLY be considered approved when listed by addendum.

E. Materials and equipment proposed for substitution shall be equal to or superior to that specified in

construction efficiency, utility, aesthetic design, and color as determined by Architect-Engineer whose decision shall be final and without further recourse. Physical size of substitute brand shall be no larger than space provided including allowances for access, forward two copies of complete descriptive and technical data including manufacturer's name, model and catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions, operating characteristics and any other information needed for comparison.



F. Within 10 working days after bids are received, apparent low bidder shall submit to A/E for

approval three copies of a list of all major items of equipment he intends to provide. As soon as practicable and within 3 working days after award of contract, E/C shall submit shop drawings for equipment and materials to be incorporated in work for Architect/Engineer's review. Where 30 working day limit is insufficient for preparation of detailed shop drawings on major equipment or assemblies, E/C shall submit manufacturer's descriptive catalog data and indicate date such detailed shop drawings will be submitted along with manufacturer's certifications that order was placed within 30 working day limit.

1.13 DRAWINGS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of eight sets of shop drawings of all materials and equipment. Architect/Engineer will retain four sets.

B. Where catalog cuts are submitted for review, conspicuously mark or provide schedule of

equipment, capacities, controls, sizes, etc., that are to be provided. Mark each submitted item with applicable section and paragraph numbers of these specifications, or plan sheet number when item does not appear in specifications or specified equivalent, mark submittals with applicable alternate numbers, change order number or letters of authorization. Each submittal shall contain at least two sets of original catalog cuts. Each catalog sheet shall bear equipment manufacturer’s name, address and phone number. All shop drawings on materials and equipment listed by UL shall indicate UL approval on submittal. Electrical Contractor shall check all shop drawings to verify that they meet specifications and/or drawing requirements before forwarding submittals to the Architect/Engineer for their review. All shop drawings submitted to Architect/Engineer shall bear Contractor's approval stamp which shall indicate that Contractor has reviewed submittals and that they meet specification and/or drawing requirements. Contractor's submittal review shall specifically check for but not be limited to the following: electrical characteristics, provisions for supply, and drainage connections to building systems. All shop drawings not meeting contractor's approval shall be returned to supplier for re-submittal.

C. No shop drawing submittals will be considered for review by the Architect/Engineer without

Contractor's approval stamp, or that have extensive changes made on the original submittal as a result of contractor's review.

D. Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for or the cost of returning shop drawing submittals that

are submitted to them without Contractor's review and approval stamp.

E. Architect/Engineer's review of shop drawings will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviations from drawings and specifications unless such deviations have been specifically approved in writing by Owner or the representative, nor shall it relieve Contractor of responsibility for error in shop drawings. No work shall be fabricated until A/E's review has been obtained. Any time delay caused by correcting and resubmitting shop drawings will be Contractor's responsibility.

F. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

1. Submit with shop drawings of equipment, three sets of operating and

maintenance instructions and parts lists for all items of equipment provided. Instructions shall be prepared by equipment manufacturer.

2. Keep in safe place, keys and wrenches furnished with equipment under this contract. Present to Owner and obtain receipt for same upon completion of project.

3. Prepare a complete brochure, covering systems and equipment provided and installed under his contract. Submit brochures to Architect/Engineer for review



before delivery to Owner. Contractor at his option may prepare this brochure or retain an individual to prepare it for him. Include cost of this service in bid. Brochures shall contain following:

a. Certified equipment drawings/or catalog data with equipment

provided clearly marked as outlined under Section this specification.

b. Complete installation, operating, maintenance instructions and parts lists for each item of equipment.

c. Special emergency operating instructions with a list of service organizations (including addresses and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency service to various parts of system.

d. As-Builts: The Contractor shall mark up a set of contract documents during construction noting all changes and deviations including change orders. These will be delivered to Architect at end of the project. After the originals are changed to reflect the blue line set, a copy shall be included in the brochure.

4. Provide brochure bound in black vinyl three- ring binders with metal hinge.

Reinforce binding edge of each sheet of looseleaf type brochure to prevent tearing from continued usage. Clearly print on label insert of each brochure:

a. Project name and address. b. Section of work covered by brochure, i.e., Electrical.



B. Patching shall be by mechanics of particular trade involved and shall meet approval of Architect. C. Drilling and cutting of openings through building materials requires Architect's review and

approval. Make openings in concrete with concrete hole saw or concrete drill. Use of star drill or air hammer for this work will not be permitted.

1.16 MUTILATION

A. Mutilation of building finishes, caused by installation of electrical equipment, fixtures, outlets and other electrical devices shall be repaired at Contractor's expense to approval of Architect.


A. Work shall include mounting, alignment and adjustment of systems and equipment. Set equipment level on adequate foundations and provide proper anchor bolts and isolation as shown or specified. Level, shim, and grout equipment bases as recommended by manufacturer. Mount motors, align and adjust drive shafts and belts according to manufacturer's instruction. Equipment failures resulting from improper installation or field alignment shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide electrical floor mounted equipment with 3-1/2" high concrete bases unless shown or

specified otherwise. Electrical contractor shall size all pads, General contractor shall form all pads, provide and place all concrete for said pads. Individual concrete pad shall be no less than 4" wider and 4" longer than equipment, and shall extend no less than 2" from each side of equipment.



C. Provide each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor

level with suitable structural support, platform or carrier in accordance with best recognized practice. Electrical contractor shall arrange for attachment to building structure, unless otherwise indicated on drawings or as specified. Provide hangers with vibration eliminators where required. Contractor shall verify that structural members of building are adequate to support equipment. Submit details of hangers, platforms and supports together with total weights of mounted equipment to Architect/Engineer for review before proceeding with fabrication or installation. Provide 3-1/2" high concrete housekeeping pad as specified above where two or more conduits penetrate floor below panelboards.

1.18 START-UP, CHANGEOVER, TRAINING AND OPERATION CHECK

A. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for training Owner's operating personnel to operate and maintain systems and equipment installed. Keep a record of training provided to Owner's personnel listing the date, subject covered, instructor's name, names of Owner's personnel attending and total hours of instruction given each individual.

B. Factory start-up and associated reports completed by factory representative(s) shall be submitted

for all major electrical equipment including but not limited to fire alarm, switchgear, generator, theatre dimming and lighting, CCTV, security, paging, switchgear monitoring and their associated controls. Reference specifications where applicable.

C. All owner training sessions shall be orderly and well organized and shall be video recorded using

CD-ROM format. At the end of the owner training, the "CD" shall become the property of the Owner.


A. At final construction review, Electrical Contractor and the major sub-contractors shall be present or shall be represented by a person of authority. Each Contractor shall demonstrate, as directed by Architect/Engineer, that the work complies with purpose and intent of plans and specifications. Respective Contractor shall provide labor, services, instruments or tools necessary for such demonstrations and tests.


A. Electrical Contractor shall provide all boxes, access panels and sleeves for openings required to install his work, except structural openings incorporated in the structural drawings. Sleeves shall be installed for all pipes passing through structural slabs and walls. Electrical Contractor shall set and verify the location of sleeves as shown on structural plans that pass through beams, only if so shown. All floor and wall penetrations shall be sealed to meet fire rating requirements.



EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES 260501-1

SECTION 260501 - EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) 1.1 GENERAL

A. Provide electrical systems indicated on drawings, specified or reasonably implied. Provide every device and accessory necessary for proper operation and completion of electrical systems. In no case will claims for "Extra Work" be allowed for work about which Electrical contractor could have been informed before bids were taken.

B. Electrical Contractor shall be familiar with equipment provided by other Contractors which require

electrical connections and control. Follow circuiting shown on drawings for lighting, power and equipment connections.

C. Make required electrical connections to equipment provided under Architectural and Mechanical

divisions of this project. Receive and install electric control devices requiring field installation, wiring, and service connection. Equipment supplied by the automatic temperature control contractor shall be installed by the mechanical or automatic temperature control subcontractor. Make required internal field wiring modifications indicated on wiring diagrams of factory installed control systems for control sequence specified. These field modifications shall be limited to jumper connections and connection of internal wiring to alternate terminal block lugs. The cost for field modifications requiring rewiring of factory installed control systems for equipment provided by General or Mechanical Contractors shall be included in base bid of the respective contractor. All temperature control wiring shall be by a licensed electrician under the supervision of temperature control contractor.

D. Check electrical data and wiring diagrams received from Mechanical Contractor of compliance

with project voltages, wiring, controls and protective devices shown on electrical drawings. Promptly bring discrepancies found to attention of Architect-Engineer for a decision.

E. Provide safety disconnect switches, contactors, and manual and magnetic motor starters for

mechanical and electrical equipment requiring such devices. Omit these devices where included as part of factory installed prewired control systems provided with mechanical equipment. With exception of factory installed devices, provide safety disconnect switches, contacts and motor starters by one manufacturer to allow maximum interchangeability of repair parts and accessories for these devices.

F. To maximum extent possible electrical controls in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, and control

rooms shall be grouped in accessible locations and arranged according to function. Where possible use group control panels and combination starters in lieu of individually enclosed devices.

I. Discrepancies within the plans or between specifications and plans shall be brought to the

attention of the Engineer prior to bid, otherwords pricing shall be based on higher quantity, quality and/or higher cost indication.

1.2 CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. Provide work in accordance with applicable rules, codes, ordinances and regulations of Local, State, Federal Governments, and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction.



EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK AND CODES 260501-2

SAFETY CODES: National Electrical Safety Code Handbook H30 - National Bureau of Standards Occupational Safety and Health Standard (OSHA) Department of Labor Safety Code for Elevators ANSI A17.1


NFPA No. 54 Gas Appliances & Gas Piping Installation NFPA No. 70 National Electric Code NFPA No. 90A Air Conditioning & Ventilation Systems

NFPA No. 91 Blower and Exhaust Systems NFPA No. 101 Life Safety Code

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.:



ANSI A117.1 - Handicapped Accessibility Kansas Maximum Lighting Standards Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

C. Drawings and specifications indicate minimum construction standard, should any work indicated be sub-standard to any ordinances, laws, codes, rules or regulations bearing on work, Contractor shall promptly notify Architect/Engineer in writing before proceeding with work so that necessary changes can be made. However, if Electrical Contractor proceeds with work knowing it to be contrary to any ordinances, laws, rules, and regulations he shall thereby have assumed full responsibility for and shall bear all costs required to correct non-complying work.

D. Electrical Contractor shall secure and pay for necessary permits and certificates of inspection

required by governmental ordinances, laws, rules or regulations. Keep a written record of all permits and inspection certificates and submit two copies to Architect/Engineer with request for final review.

E. Contractor shall include in bid any charges by local utility providers to establish new services to

the structure. Coordinate with the utility suppliers to verify exact which part of the work is to be performed by whom.



BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260502-1

SECTION 260502 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) 1.1 IDENTIFICATION OF WIRING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Provide identification and warning signs to wiring and equipment as listed in schedule. Signs and tags shall be as follows:

TYPE 1: Laminated phenolic plastic with black Gothic condensed lettering

by Seton or Wilco.

TYPE 2: Self-sticking 1/2" wide plastic tape with high gloss surface and embossed lettering by Brady or Dymo.

TYPE 3: Self-sticking polyester sign with wording and size conforming to

ANSI Standard Z35.1-1964 and OSHA 19.0.144iii(2) Specifications, by Brady or as approved.

TYPE 4: Self-sticking flexible vinyl with oil resistant adhesive for -20

degrees to 300 degrees F. temperatures by Brady or as approved.

B. Provide lighting and power panelboards with Type 1 sign minimum of 1-1/4" x 6" indicating panel

designation and electrical characteristics. Mount inside of panel door on circuit breaker trim flange just below breakers.

C. Provide disconnect switches, motor starters and controllers with Type 1 sign 3/4" x 5" indicating

equipment served and Brady No. AE-46125 danger sign.

D. Provide electrical equipment and accessible wiring enclosures operating at voltage above 240 volts with Type 3 Brady No. AE-46125 warning sign and Brady Style B, 1-1/8" x 4-1/2" voltage marker applied to front door or cover of device or enclosure. Provide large equipment such as transformers and main distribution equipment with Type 3 sign Brady No. AE-46639.

E. Provide feeders and branch circuit home runs with Type 4 wire marker indicating circuit number

and power source. Provide feeders phase identification letter at each terminal point in addition to its circuit number.

F. Provide Type 2 tape at feeder terminal lugs to switchboards and panelboards. Tape shall

indicate conduit size, conductor type and AWG size. Tape shall be located to be easily read with conductors installed.

G. All wires for branch circuit work shall be color coded.

H. ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE DEDICATED HOT, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND

WHERE INDICTED ON THE DRAWINGS. COMMON NEUTRALS ARE NOT ALLOWED FOR SINGLE PHASE BRANCH CIRCUITS. A MINIMUM OF ONE GROUNDING EQUIPMENT CONDUCTOR PER STRAP IS ALLOWED PER THE NEC UNLESS PLANS INDICATE A DEDICATED EQUIPMENT GROUND FOR SINGLE PHASE BRANCH CIRCUITS. ALL CONDUITS SHALL HAVE AT LEAST ONE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR.



1.2 TESTS RECORDING AND REPORTING TESTS AND DATA

A. Record nameplate horsepower, amperes, volts, phase service factor and other necessary data on motors and other electrical equipment furnished and/or connected under this contract.

B. Record motor starter catalog number, size and rating and/or catalog number of thermal-overload

units installed in all motor starters furnished and/or connected under this contract. See motor starter specification for instructions for proper sizing of thermal-overload units.

C. Record amperes-per-phase at normal or near-normal loading of each item of equipment furnished

and/or connected. D. Record correct readings of each feeder conductor after energized and normally loaded, and again

after balancing of feeder loads as required by current readings.

E. Record voltage and ampere-per-phase readings taken at service entrance equipment after completion of project with building operating at normal electrical load.

F. Submit at least two (2) typewritten copies of data noted above to Architect-Engineer for review

prior to final inspection.

G. Keep a record of all deviations made from routes, locations, circuiting, etc. shown on contract drawings. Prior to final inspection submit one new set of project drawings with all deviations and changes clearly indicated.


A. Perform necessary excavation to receive work. Provide necessary sheathing, shoring, cribbing, tarpaulins, etc. for this operation, and remove same at completion of work. Perform excavation in accordance with appropriate section of these specifications, and in compliance with OSHA Safety Standards.

1. Excavation:

a. Excavate trenches of sufficient width to allow ample working space, and

no deeper than necessary for installation work. b. Conduct excavations so no walls or footings are disturbed or injured.

Backfill excavations made under or adjacent to footing with selected earth or sand and tamp to compaction required by A/E. Mechanically tamp backfill under concrete and savings in 6" layers to 95% standard density, Reference Division 2.

2. Backfill:

a. Backfill trenches and excavations to required heights with allowance

made for settlement. Tamp fill material thoroughly and moistened as required for specified compaction density. Dispose of excess earth, rubble and debris as directed by Architect.

3. Soil Conditions:

a. When available, refer to test hole information on architectural drawings

or specifications for types of soil to be encountered in excavations.


WIRES AND CABLES 260519-1

SECTION 260519 - WIRES AND CABLES PART1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Unless noted otherwise conductors referred to are wires and cable. Provide code grade soft annealed copper conductors with specified colored insulation to conform with color coding specified. Provide conductors No. 8 gauge and larger stranded and conductors No. 10 gauge and smaller shall be solid.

B. Use no conductors smaller than No. 12 gauge unless specifically called for or approved by

Engineer. Size wire for volt branch circuits for 3% maximum voltage drop. Size feeder circuits for 2% maximum voltage drop. Combined voltage drop of feeders and branch circuits shall not exceed 5% maximum.

C. Provide conductors for listed applications as follows:

1. Lighting and Receptacle Circuits: Type THWN, or THWN/THHN 600 volt, 75

degrees C (167oF) thermoplastic insulated building conductor or better. 2. Lighting and Receptacles Circuits with No. 8 or larger conductors, motor circuits,

power and feeder circuits and building service feeders: Type THHN/THWN 600 volts, 75 degrees C (167oF) thermoplastic insulated building conductor.

D. Provide conductors by Essex, Southwire, Cerro, General, Encore or approved equivalent.

2.2 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION

A. Run conductors in conduit continuous between outlets and junction boxes with no splices or taps pulled into conduits.

B. Neatly route, tie and support conductors terminating at switchboards, motor control centers,

panelboards, sound equipment, etc., with Thomas & Betts Ty-Rap cable ties and clamps or equivalent by Electrovert or Panduit.

C. Make circuit conductor splices with Buchanan crimped-on solderless connectors and snap-on

nylon insulators or equivalent.

D. Make fixture and device taps with Scotchlok self-stripping electrical tap connectors. E. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal strips and other similar terminal points with

insulated solderless terminal connectors. Terminate all stranded conductor terminal points with insulated solderless terminal connectors. Provide Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon insulated terminals and connectors or equivalent by API/AMP, Blackburn, Buchanan or Scotchlok "Wire Nuts".

F. Where a total of six or more control and feeder conductors terminate in a multiple device panel or

enclosure that has no built-in terminal blocks provide Buchanan 600 volt heavy duty Type HO sectional terminal blocks with mounting channel and No. 23 see-thru covers. Equivalent terminal blocks by General Electric, Square D or Westinghouse.

G. Wrap conductor taps and connections requiring additional insulation with a minimum of three

overlapped layers of 3M scotch vinyl plastic electrical type No. 88 or equivalent.


WIRES AND CABLES 260519-2

H. Install no conduits or wiring in air ducts, except that required to power devices that directly perform work upon air in the ductwork. No wiring shall be installed in any portion of grease ducts or airstreams of kitchen exhaust.

2.3 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. Provide continuous color feeders, branch and control circuits. Colored insulation shall be same color for like circuits throughout.

B. Identify the same phase conductor of same voltage system with same color throughout. C. Provide conductors with color coding in accordance with NEC. Where more than one standard

voltage system is installed in same conduit, provide same colored conductors with stripe to indicate system voltage.

2.4 FIRE BARRIER

A. Provide sleeves through all fire-rated walls and fill voids surrounding sleeves and interior to sleeves around cables with Nelson "Flameseal" fire stop putty with U.L. listed 3 hour rating installed as per manufacturers recommendations.

B. Equivalent by Dow, Chemelex, 3M.



GROUNDING 260526-1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) 1.1 GENERAL

A. Supplement grounded neutral of secondary distribution system with equipment grounding system,

installed so that metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment and other conductive items operate continuously at ground potential and provide low impedance path for ground fault currents.

B. System shall comply with National Electrical Code, modified as indicated on drawings and as

specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUND RODS

A. Ground rods shall be minimum 3/4" diameter by 10'-0" long copper rods. 2.2 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide equipment ground bus in base of low voltage, switchgear brazed or otherwise adequately connected by an approved method to 3/4" diameter by 10'-0" long ground rods. Where required, to meet requirement so specified tests, extra rods shall be installed at no additional cost to Owner. Rods shall be located no closer than 6 feet from each other or any other electrode and shall be interconnected by a bare copper conductor brazed to each ground rod below grade.

B. Provide in conduit a green insulated copper ground conductor to main metallic water service

entrance and connect by means of adequate ground clamps. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect ground conductor to building side of dielectric water fittings. Jumper across dielectric union. Bond conduit to ground conductor at each end. Provide jumper with ground clamps around dielectric main water fitting.

C. Connect system neutral ground and equipment ground system to common ground bus. Ground

secondary services at supply side of each individual secondary disconnecting means and at related transformers in accordance with National Electric Code. Provide each service disconnect enclosure with neutral disconnecting means which interconnects with insulated neutral and uninsulated equipment ground sub to establish system common ground point. Neutral disconnecting links shall be located so that low voltage neutral bar with interior secondary neutrals can be isolated from common ground bus and service entrance conductors.

D. Equipment grounding conductors for branch circuit home runs shown on the drawings shall

indicate an individual and separate ground conductor for that branch circuit which shall be terminated at the branch circuit panelboard, switchboard, or other distribution equipment. No sharing of equipment grounding conductors sized according to the size of the overcurrent device and NEC Table 250-95 shall be allowed.

E. Required equipment grounding conductors and straps shall be sized in compliance with N.E.C.

Table 250-95. Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided with green type TW 600 volt insulation. Related feeder and branch circuit grounding conductors shall be connected to ground bus with approved pressure connectors. Provide feeder servicing several panelboards with a continuous grounding conductor connected to each related panelboard ground bus. Installation shall include necessary precautions regarding terminations with dissimilar metals.


GROUNDING 260526-2

F. Provide low voltage distribution system with a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each single or three-phase feeder. Single phase 120 volt branch circuits for lighting and power shall consist of phase and neutral conductors and a green ground conductor installed in common metallic conduit which shall serve as grounding conductor. Provide flexible metallic conduit utilized in conjunction with above single phase branch circuits with suitable green insulated grounding conductors connected to approved grounding terminals at each end of flexible conduit. Single phase branch circuit installed in nonmetallic conduits shall be provided with separate grounding conductor. Install grounding conductor in common conduit with related phase and/or neutral conductors. Where parallel feeders are installed in more than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment grounding conductor.

G. Contractor shall determine number and size of pressure connectors to be provided on equipment

grounding bars for termination of equipment grounding conductors in panelboards and other electrical equipment. In addition to active circuits, provide pressure connectors for panel spares and blank spaces.

H. Provide electrical expansion fitting with an external flexible copper ground securely bonded by

approved grounding straps on each end of fitting except where UL approved built-in copper grounding device is provided.

I. Provide steel and aluminum conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to metallic

housing of electrical equipment with ground busing and connect each bushing with bare copper conductor to ground bus in electrical equipment. Electrically non-continuous metallic conduits containing ground wiring only shall be bonded to ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit.

J. Grounding conductors shall be as shown on plans or if not specifically shown shall be no smaller

than that required by the NEC.

2.3 GROUNDING TEST

A. Test complete equipment grounding system at each service disconnect enclosure ground bar with Vibroground test unit manufactured by Associated Research Inc. Resistance, without chemical treatment or other artificial means shall not exceed five (5) ohms to ground.

B. Electrical Contractor shall oversee grounding tests at successful completion of installation of

grounding system and shall submit certified test reports of ground tests to A/E. END OF SECTION 260526


CONDUITS 260533-1

SECTION 260533 - CONDUITS PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL CONDUIT

A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit: Conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized and shall bear a UL label. Conduit shall also meet Federal Specification W-WC-581 and ANSI C80.1.

B. EMT Conduit: Conduit shall be galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing and bear and

Underwriters' Laboratory label. Conduit shall conform to Federal Specification WWC-563 and ANSI specification C80.3.

C. Contractor may use either rigid steel or EMT for all main feeder circuits to switchboards and

panelboards unless specifically indicated on plans.

D. Outside and Wet Location Flexible Conduit: Flexible conduit shall have a water resistant non-sleeving polyvinyl chloride jacket with a general temperature range of -40 degrees C to + 60 degrees C. Conduit shall bear a UL label.

E. MC cable and flexible metal conduit: Where allowable by Code, MC cable and flexible metal

conduit (FMC) with conductors and ground may be used only in the firm of 8’ whips (or less) for branch circuit drops from JBs to individual lighting fixtures, VAV boxes, small exhaust fans, and other fractional HP equipment.

FMC shall be used for connections to larger motors, pumps, air handlers, transformers or other mechanical or vibrating equipment mounted on resilient mounts and vibration isolators.

In all cases, the flexible conduit and/or MC cable shall contain a dedicated equipment grounding

conductor. MC/FMC shall not be looped or routed fixture-to-fixture or box-to-box. Usage shall be for individual termination only and may not be used to serve receptacles recessed in walls or be concealed in walls or ceilings.

2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Couplings shall be steel threaded type and box connectors shall be steel insulated bushings and malleable iron or steel locknuts. Unilets shall be malleable iron with blank cover.

B. EMT Conduit: Couplings and box connectors shall be die cast set screw type. Unilets shall be

malleable iron with blank cover.

C. Flexible Conduit: Connectors shall be threaded type iron with insulated throat. D. Where conduits cross building expansion joints provide O-Z expansion fittings type "AX", "TE",

"EX", or "EXE" as required.

E. Provide grounding bushings where feeder conduit attaches to panelboard backbox. Bond grounding bushing to ground bus.


CONDUITS 260533-2

2.3 PLASTIC CONDUIT

A. Provide rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) type EPC 40 heavy wall plastic conduit meeting current NEMA Standard TC-2. Conduit shall be listed UL 651 for underground and exposed use.

B. Plastic conduit may only be used for exterior underground applications or circuits beneath slabs

on grade. Provide galvanized rigid steel (GRS) radius bends and risers as conduits rise above grade or above floor slab.

C. Provide exterior underground conduit with metal detection strip.

Provide matching plastic fittings. Fittings shall meet the same standards and specifications as the conduit on which it is installed.

D. Joining and bending of conduit and installation of fittings shall be done only by methods

recommended. Conduit and fittings shall be primed and then solvent welded. Below grade conduits shall be tested to 4 psi of air pressure for minimum of 1 hour to assure below grade conduit is water tight.

E. Provide conduit support spacing as recommended for the highest ambient temperature expected.

F. Provide interlocking conduit spacers for multiple runs of underground conduits installed in same

trench.

G. Provide expansion couplings on long runs regardless of ambient temperatures. Determine amount of conduit expansion and contraction from published charts or tables.

H. Plastic conduit and fittings shall be by a Products Division of Continental Oil Company.

2.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Align conduit terminations at panelboards, switchboards, motor control equipment, junction boxes, etc. and install true and plumb. Provide supports or templates to hold conduit alignment during rough-in stage of work.

B. Install conduit continuous between outlet boxes, cabinets and equipment. Make bends smooth

and even without flattening or flaking conduit. Radius of bends shall not be shorter than radius listed table 346-10 (b) of NEC. Long radius elbows may be used where necessary.

C. Ream and clean conduit before installation and plug or cover openings and boxes to keep conduit

clean during construction. D. Install no conduits or other raceways sized smaller than permitted in applicable NEC Tables.

Where conduit sizes shown on drawings are smaller than permitted by code, Contractor shall include cost for proper size conduit in his base bid. In no case reduce conduit sizes indicated on drawings or specified without written approval of Architect-Engineer. Fasten conduit securely in place with approved straps, hangers, and steel supports. Provide O-Z cable support to support conductors in vertical raceways as required by NEC Table 300-19 (a) of NEC.

E. Low voltage wiring including fire alarm and other low voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit

unless noted otherwise. 2.5 INSERTS, HANGERS

A. Support vertical and horizontal conduit runs at intervals not greater than 10 feet, within 3 feet of any bend and at every outlet or junction box.


CONDUITS 260533-3

B. Install multiple runs of conduits as follows:

1. Where a number of conduits are to be run exposed and parallel, group and support with trapeze hangers.

2. Fasten hanger rods to structural steel members with suitable beam clamps and to concrete structures with inserts set flush with surface. Install concrete inserts with reinforced rod through opening provided in inserts.

3. Inserts shall be Grinnell figure 279, 281, 282, or 285 or equivalent as required by load and concrete thickness.

4. Provide beam clamps suitable for structural members and conditions. 5. Provide 3/8" minimum diameter steel hangers rods galvanized or cadmium plated

finish. 6. Trapeze hangers shall be Kindorf Series 900 channel with fittings and

accessories as required.

Attach each conduit to trapeze hanger with Steel City No. C-105 clamps for rigid conduit and Steel City No. C-106 clamps for electrical metallic tubing. (EMT).

C. Install clamps for single conduit runs as follows:

1. Support individual runs by approved pipe straps, secured by toggle bolts on

hollow masonry; expansion shields and machine screws or standard preset inserts on concrete or solid masonry; machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces; and wood screws on wood construction. Use of perforated strap not permitted.

2. Install exposed conduits in damp locations with clamp backs under each conduit clamp to prevent accumulation of moisture around conduits.

D. Provide inserts, hangers and accessories with finish as follows:

1. Galvanized: Concrete inserts and pipe straps. 2. Galvanized or Cadmium Plated: Steel bolts, nuts, washers and screws. 3. Painted with Prime Coat: Individual hangers, trapeze hangers and rods.

E. Equivalent hangers and support systems by Binkley, Fee and Mason, Kin-Line or Unistrut.

2.6 BUSHINGS AND LOCKNUTS

A. Enter outlet boxes squarely and securely clamp conduit to outlet box with bushing on inside and locknut on outside.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Provide proper type and size sleeves to General Contractor for electrical ducts, busses, conduits, etc. passing through building construction. Supervise installation to insure proper sleeve location. Unless indicated or approved install no sleeves in structural members.

B. Provide cast iron sleeves extending 1 inch above finished floor where sleeves pass through floors

subject to flooding such as toilet rooms, bathrooms, equipment rooms and kitchen. Seal opening between pipe and sleeve with Thunderline Corp. Link Seal.

C. Unless specified otherwise provide 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeves through floors and

non-bearing walls. Where piping passes through exterior walls, equipment room walls, air plenum walls and walls between areas that must be isolated from occupied areas, seal space between sleeves and piping, air or water tight are required with Thunderline Corp. Link Seal.

D. Provide O-Z Electrical Manufacturing Co., Inc. Type "FSK" or "WSK" or equivalent thruwall and

floor seals where conduits pass through concrete foundation walls below grade.


CONDUITS 260533-4

E. Provide Zurn Z-195 or equivalent flashing sleeve through walls and floors with waterproof

membrane. Seal annular space between conduit and sleeve with Thunderline Link Seal or O-Z type CSM sealing bushing.

F. All holes or voids created by the electrical contractor to extend pipe through fire rated floors and

walls shall be sealed with an intumescent material capable of expanding up to 8 to 10 times when exposed to temperatures of 250 degrees F. It shall have ICBO, BOCAI and SBCCI (NRB 243) approved ratings to 3 hours per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). Acceptable Material: 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Putty, Strip and sheet forms.



OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 260534-1

SECTION 260534 - OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Provide electrical service outlets, including plug receptacles, lamp receptacles, lighting fixtures and switches with Steel City, Raco, or equivalent four inch code gauge steel knockout boxes galvanized or sheradized of required depth for service or device.

B. Provide code gauge galvanized steel raised covers on outlet boxes installed in plaster finish. Set

to plaster grounds with outside edge of cover flush with plaster finish.

C. Provide 3/8" or larger fixture stud in each outlet box scheduled to receive lighting fixture. Select covers with proper opening for device installed in outlet box.

D. Use of utility of "Handy" boxes acceptable only where single gang flush outlet box in masonry is

"dead-end" with only one conduit entering box from end or back.

E. Use no sectional outlet boxes.

F. Provide Appleton FS or FD unilets for surface mounted exterior work. Provide complete with proper device cover and gasket. Provide blank cover and gasket when used as junction box.

2.2 LOCATION OF OUTLET BOXES

A. Locate outlet boxes generally from column centers and finished wall lines. Install ceiling outlet boxes at suspended ceiling elevations.

B. Accurately locate lighting fixtures and appliance outlet boxes mounted in concrete or in plaster

finish on concrete. Install outlet boxes in forms to dimensions taken from bench marks, columns, walls, or floors. Rough-in lighting fixtures and appliance outlet boxes to general locations before installation of walls and furring and reset to exact dimensions as walls and furring are constructed. Set outlet boxes true to horizontal and vertical finish lines of building.

C. Install outlet boxes accessible. Provide outlet boxes above piping or ductwork with extension

stems or offsets as required to clear piping and ductwork. D. Install top of switch outlet boxes 48" above floor unless otherwise called for or required by

wainscot, counter, etc. Install bottom of receptacle outlet boxes 16" above floor unless otherwise called for on drawings. Adjust mounting heights to nearest masonry joint for minimum cutting in case of flush outlets.

E. Install clock and other outlet boxes at elevations indicated on drawings or as directed by

Architect. Do not install outlet boxes "back to back" in walls and partitions. 2.3 PULL BOXES, WIREWAYS AND GUTTERS

A. Provide Alwalt, Keystone, Universal or equivalent code gauge pull boxes, wireways, and gutters indicated or required for installation, sized to conform with NEC rules. Provide complete with necessary fittings, interconnecting nipples, insulating bushings, conductor supports, covers, gaskets, partitions, etc. as required.


OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 260534-2

B. Special items may be fabricated locally, to same general design and specifications as those listed in specified manufacturer's catalogs. Provide free of burrs, sharp edges, unreamed holes, sharp pointed screws or bolts, and finished with one coat of suitable enamel inside and out, prior to mounting.

C. Provide sectional covers for easy removal.



NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943-1

SECTION 260943 - NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Addressable Fixture Lighting Control – 26 09 43.16

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

B. cULus Listing/Certification

1. Certified as Energy Management Equipment (UL 916)

2. Certified as Emergency Lighting Equipment (UL 924)

3. Meet Heat and Smoke Release for Air-Handling Spaces (UL 2043)

C. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) / Industry Canada (IC)

D. Local Building Codes


A. Lighting Control System includes computer-based software that provides control, configuration, monitoring and reports. System includes the following components:

1. Central Control Unit 2. System Server 3. 0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts or 0-10V LED Drivers 4. System Field Devices (Input and Output Modules) 5. Lighting Control System Software 6. Wall Stations - Low Voltage/Wireless 7. Communication Wire 8. Occupancy Sensors – Low Voltage/Wireless 9. Photo Sensors – Low Voltage 10. Area Lighting Controllers (dim/switch a group of luminaires) 11. Relay based Lighting control panels 12. Wireless Interface Module 13. Interface to Audio Visual equipment (e.g. LCD Touch Screen Panel) 14. Interface to customizable Energy dashboard 15. AC Phase Cut Dimming Module (Forward & Reverse)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Bill of Materials: Complete list of all parts needed to fully install selected system components.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop and Wiring Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing control system, as supplied, including one-line diagrams, wire counts, coverage patterns, interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring and physical dimensions of each item.



D. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that lighting controls are compatible with connected monitoring and control devices and systems specified in other Sections.

1. Show interconnecting signal and control wiring and interfacing devices that prove compatibility of inputs and outputs.

2. For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements from manufacturers that input and output devices meet interoperability requirements of the network protocol.

E. Software Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals 2. Program Software Backup: On portable memory storage device, compact disc, or DVD,

complete with data files. 3. Printout of software application and graphic screens, or upon request, a live

demonstration of Control, Configure and Analyze functionality or a video demonstrating above stated system capabilities.

F. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Copy of applicable warranty.

I. Additional information as required on a project specific basis.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be one who is experienced in performing the work of this section, and who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

B. Manufacturer Requirements: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience manufacturing networked lighting control systems and shall provide 24/7 telephone support by qualified technicians.

C. Contractor shall ensure that lighting system control devices and assemblies are fully compatible and can be integrated into a system that operates as described in the lighting control notes on drawings and as described within this specification. Any incompatibilities between devices, assemblies, and system controllers shall be resolved between the contractor and the system provider, as required to ensure proper system operation and maintainability.

D. Performance Requirements: provide all system components that have been manufactured, assembled, and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.

E. Performance Testing Requirements

1. Manufacturer shall 100% test all equipment prior to shipment. Sample testing is not acceptable.

F. Code Requirements

1. System Control Unit and System Field Devices shall be cULus listed and certified. 2. All system components shall be FCC /IC compliant.



3. All system components shall be installed in compliance with National Electrical Codes and Canadian Electrical Code.

4. Building Codes: All units shall be installed in compliance with applicable, local building codes.

G. ISO Certification: System components shall be manufactured at ISO-9000 certified plants.

H. Coordination

1. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components. 1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting

control functions. 2. Display graphics showing building areas controlled; include the status of lighting

controls in each area.


A. System Field Devices (Input and Output Modules) shall meet the following Environmental Conditions:

1. Operating Temperature Range: -40 deg C (-40 deg F) to +55 deg C (131 deg F). 2. Humidity: 0% to 100% RH condensing rated for damp locations.

0% to 95% RH non-condensing rated for indoor locations.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging with intact identification labels.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials away from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. On-going system expansion, service and support shall be available from multiple factory certified vendors. Recommended service agreements shall be submitted at the time of bid complete with manufacturers suggested inventory and pricing for system parts and technical support labor.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lighting controls that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

C. Manufacturer’s Warranty: All equipment shall be warranted free of defects in materials and workmanship.

1. Warranty Period: All system hardware components shall have full warranty (non-prorated) for at least four (4) years and all software components shall carry a warranty of ninety (90) days from date of installation.

2. Owner Rights: Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under contract documents, or warranties of third party component manufacturers.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Controls: ENCELIUM® Energy Management System by OSRAM SYLVANIA, n-Light Acuity Controls, Wattstopper.

B. Sensors: ENCELIUM Sensors by OSRAM SYLVANIA, Leviton Mfg. Co., Hubbell Building Automation, Inc., SensorSwitch, Inc., PLC Multipoint Inc., The Watt Stopper, Inc. Cooper Controls or equivalent.

C. 0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts and/or 0-10V LED Drivers: OSRAM Sylvania, Inc., Tridonic, Universal Lighting Technologies, Philips Lighting or equivalent.

2.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The lighting control “system” shall include a fully distributed WAN/LAN network of global

controller/routers, individually addressable System Field Devices that are not integral to luminaires, sensors, switches, relays and other ancillary devices required for a complete and

operable system. The system WAN/LAN shall be commissioned by ENCELIUM® personnel or other

ENCELIUM certified commissioning contractors.

B. The basis of system design shall utilize non-proprietary industry standard 0-10V dimming or fixed output ballasts and/or 0-10V LED drivers, occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, etc.

C. UL 924 listed devices shall have the ability to control 120V/277V/347V/480V load.

D. System software interface shall have the ability to notify communication failures to system users via system & email messages. Email messages shall be available in html and text formats.

E. On-going system expansion, service and support shall be available from multiple factory certified vendors. Recommended service agreements may be submitted at the time of bid complete with manufacturers suggested inventory and pricing for system parts and technical support labor.

F. Lighting Control Software: The system shall offer central lighting control for the facility lighting administrator to perform energy management, configuration maintenance, monitoring operations, and providing support to building occupants.

1. Native central control software shall be utilized for energy reporting status and complete programming without the need for any third party hardware or software. Systems that require any third party linked software or graphics shall be unacceptable.

2. Software shall provide information on general system settings via mouse click on a floor plan. Left clicking over a device on the graphical software interface shall show a description of the selected device/function attribute.

1. Central Lighting Control: a. Shall provide an Interactive, Web-based graphical user interface (GUI) showing

floor plans and lighting layouts that are native to the lighting control software. The only means required to program and operate the lighting control system shall be programmed and operated from a user interface that is based on a plan view graphical screen on the user’s computer or the lighting control system’s main computer. Shall include the navigational features listed below to allow for user’s orientation within the controlled space, geographic heading and/or landmarks:

1. Interactive; 2. Vector based;



3. Zoom; 4. Rotate; 5. Pan; 6. Tilt.

b. Shall allow building operator to navigate through an entire facility both in two-

dimensional multi-floor view, allowing for fast and easy navigation. 3. All programming, assignments of lighting loads to control strategies, lighting status

and lighting energy reporting shall be native to the software and executed from this GUI. Editing shall be available from this GUI in a drag and drop format or from drop down menus without the need for any third party software. Systems that utilize or require third party linked graphics are unacceptable. The GUI shall continuously indicate the status of each connected device on the system and a warning indicator on the software if a device goes offline. Systems requiring spreadsheet editing for programming and that don’t offer real time feedback are not acceptable.

4. Software settings and properties shall be selectable per individual device, room based, floor based or global building based.

1. Lighting Control Software interface shall provide current status and enable configuration of all system zones including selected individual luminaire availability, current light level, maximum light level, on/off status, occupancy status, and emergency mode (response to an emergency signal) status.

5. Shall have the ability to display various lighting system parameters such as Lighting status (ON/OFF); Lighting levels, Load shedding status, or Lighting energy consumption, Occupancy status in a colorized gradient (“weather” map) type of graphical representation.

6. Energy Analysis data shall be exportable in CSV or image file formats. 7. Shall allow import of native AutoCAD files.

2. Reports: Reporting feature shall be native to the lighting control software and capable of reporting the following parameters for each device and zone individually without requiring any third party hardware and software: 1. Energy consumption broken down by energy management strategy. 2. Energy demand broken down by energy management strategy. 3. Occupancy data by zone. 4. Building wide occupancy status 5. Lighting energy consumption in a color gradient (“weather map” type) view 6. Energy performance reports shall be printable in a printer friendly format and

downloadable for use in spreadsheet applications, etc.

G. Daylight Harvesting (Light Regulation Averaging): In a photo sensor-equipped system, the Central Controller Unit shall rationalize changes to light levels when ambient (natural) light is available and shall maintain a steady light level when subjected to fluctuating ambient conditions where 0-10V dimming ballasts and/or drivers exist. Areas equipped with fixed output ballasts and/or drivers shall energize when natural light falls below foot-candle levels specified. System shall utilize light level inputs from common and/or remote sensor locations to minimize the number of photo sensors required. The System shall operate with multiple users in harmony and not react adversely to manual override inputs.

H. Time Clock Scheduling: The system shall be programmable for scheduling lights on or off via the Lighting Control Software interface.

1. Programming: User friendly, Outlook style interface shall be available for programming schedules.

2. Override: Manual adjustments via wall stations or personal control software shall temporarily override off status imposed by time clock schedule.



3. Response to Power Failure: In the event of a power failure, the time clock shall execute schedules that would still be in progress had they begun during the power outage.

4. Flick Warning: Prior to a scheduled lights-off event or expiry of a temporary override, the system shall provide two short light level drops as a warning to the affected occupants. Flick warning time shall have the ability to be programmed via software between 1 and 5 minutes.

5. Option to automatically turn on or wait for an input: Using this option, a group of luminaires can be made to turn on automatically in response to a scheduled event or wait for a signal from a wall station to turn the same group of luminaires on (and stay on) for the reminder of the scheduled event.

I. Load Shed Mode: An automatic load shedding mode shall be available where, when activated through the system, the control unit will reduce its output to a programmable maximum electrical demand load. The system shall not shed more load than required and load shedding priority shall be centrally configurable by control zone or by common uses (i.e., all hallways can be treated as one load shed group), with subsequent load shed priority groupings being utilized until the required defined load has been shed, for either a defined period, or until the demand response input has been removed. Systems that simply select a “load shed scene” whereby there is no guarantee that the defined required load will actually be shed are not acceptable unless the contractor provides (where allowed) and installs additional on-site peak power generation capacity via generators that are capable of carrying at least 20% of the connected load (but in no case less than a 25KW rating).

J. Emergency Mode: There shall be a mode, when activated through the system, that will immediately adjust lights to full light output and retain that level until the mode is deactivated in the event of an emergency. This setting shall override all other inputs. The system shall interface with the building emergency monitoring system at a convenient point and not require multiple connections.

K. Addressing: All ballasts and/or drivers shall be centrally addressable, on a per luminaire or multiple luminaire/zone basis, through the Central Control Software. The basis of design shall utilize 0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts and/or 0-10V LED Drivers connected to an Output Module. To simplify ongoing maintenance, the system shall not require manual recording of addresses for the purpose of commissioning or reconfiguration.

L. Programmable Task Tuning: Maximum light level programmability shall be available by individual luminaire.

M. Unoccupied State: The system shall provide two states when occupancy status is vacant as per an occupancy sensor - lights turn off or lights adjust to configurable (dimmed) light level.

N. Occupied State: The system shall be capable of creating “comfort” or “support” zones to ensure that occupants are not isolated by turning off lights in adjacent areas for occupant comfort and safety, such as a hallway path to exit the premises.

O. Overlapping Zones: System shall be capable of creating “overlapping” zones to ensure continuous lighting and safety of the occupants as they move from one lighting zone to another (for example, hallways) while minimizing the energy use.

P. Participation in Intelligent Building Framework: The system shall have the ability to be a component of Intelligent Building framework. Central Control Units and System server communication shall be based on TCP/IP over Ethernet backbone.

Q. LAN Operations: System shall be capable of operating independent of building’s existing network infrastructure if desired and shall not rely on tenant supplied PCs for operation. Network infrastructure shall only be utilized for Personal Control Software.



R. Firewall Security: Firewall technology shall be utilized to separate tenants from the lighting control network.

S. Lamp Burn In: The system software shall have the capability of not permitting dimming of new lamps prior to completion of lamp manufacturer recommended accumulated operation at full brightness.

T. Lighting Maintenance:

1. Percentage left in Lamp & Ballast Life Time shall be programmed to display in different colors for easier visual representation and quicker maintenance turnaround time.

2. 0-10V Dimming and/or Fixed Output Ballast/LED Driver replacements shall not require re-programming of the system or re-addressing of the said components.

U. Re-configurability: The assignment of individual luminaire to zones shall be centrally configurable by Central Control Software such that physical rewiring will not be necessary when workspace reconfiguration or re-zoning is performed. Removal of covers, faceplates, ceiling tiles, etc. shall not be required.

V. Sensor Control Parameters: Occupancy sensor time delays shall be configurable through software. Light level sensor parameters shall be configurable through software.

W. Automatic Time Adjustment: System shall automatically adjust for leap year and daylight savings time and shall provide weekly routine and annual holiday scheduling.

X. The system software shall have the capability of providing an optional web based energy dashboard to show real time energy savings data and carbon footprint reductions.

Y. Contact closure input: System shall be capable of receiving a momentary and sustained contact closure input from third party sources to control lighting zones.

Z. The system shall have the ability to control (dim/switch) a group of luminaires with loads up to 20A.

AA. System shall auto-configure lighting controls for spaces that have been combined or divided temporarily by moving wall or similar systems.

BB. System shall have the capability to emulate the changing colors of the natural daylighting cycle.

CC. System shall automatically lock wall stations and/or disable sensors based on one of the following system inputs: contact closure, a time schedule or the status of a monitored space.

DD. BAS Interface: The light management system shall be capable of interfacing digitally with a building automation system via either BACnet/IP or Tridium Niagara AX interface. The lighting control system shall be capable of communicating the status of output devices (lighting loads) as well as input devices (dry contacts, switches, occupancy sensors, vacancy sensors, and photocells) to the BAS. Building Automation System, utilize data from lighting control system input devices such as occupancy sensors to determine the status (occupied/unoccupied) of the mechanical control zones and perform climate adjustments accordingly.

EE. The light management system shall be capable of interfacing with audio-visual system (e.g. LCD Touch Screen Panel) via TCP/IP interface. Through this interface users can command various lighting scenarios depending on the audio & visual requirements of the room or building.



FF. Migration plan to control LED luminaire: System shall be capable of migrating from the control of 0-10V Ballasts to 0-10V LED Drivers utilizing the same Output Modules without the need to change control hardware.

GG. Minimized system down time: Communication bus shall be able to self diagnose and display communication shorts or open loops resulting in minimum system down time.

HH. AC Phase Cut Dimming circuit Integration: System shall have the ability to control Incandescent, Fluorescent or LED lighting load that are otherwise controlled by manual AC Phase Cut Dimmers.

II. Step Dimming & A/B Ballast Switching: System shall have the ability to perform Step Dimming & A/B Ballast Switching.

JJ. Wireless devices integration: System shall have the capability to communicate with wireless devices (sensors & wall stations) for the purpose of lighting control.

2.3 WALL STATIONS

A. Description: The system shall utilize low voltage and/or wireless wall stations.

Separate low voltage wall stations that at minimum meet the listed electromagnetic, mechanical, electrical and data specifications shall be included for each of the listed functionalities:

1. Software configurable wall station that provides on/off switching and dimming control for up to three lighting zones/scenes per wall station or more with allowable multi-gang configurations. Status is indicated by an LED display to indicate function, scene or zone. Allows manual override of the time schedule.

2. Manual dimming and/or switching wall station that provides local on/off and dimming control over at least three lighting zones. Allows manual dimming of light levels and override of the time schedule.

3. Scenes in the central control software shall be synchronized with the buttons on the wall station.

4. Wall stations shall fit in a standard Decorator style wall plate and may be ganged together as required.

B. General

1. Addressing: All wall stations shall be individually addressable & reconfigurable via Central Control Software.

2. Shall provide local on/off or dimming control over lighting zones 3. Shall utilizing a standard single-gang or multi-gang form factor 4. Shall have a terminal block that connects to lighting system with 18 AWG, polarity

independent , CMP rated and NEC/CEC Class 2 wire 5. Shall be manufactured with push-in wire receptacles 6. LED’s: All wall stations shall feature LED’s to indicate light on and light off status, as

required. 7. Color: All wall stations shall meet NEMA WD1 color specifications. 8. Style: All wall stations shall feature Decorator styling wall plates. 9. Lighting scenes reconfigure automatically based on scene changes from personal control

software. 10. Industrial wall stations shall also be available for damp location applications. 11. Shall comply at minimum with FCC Part 15/ICES-003

C. Mechanical Specifications:

1. Dimensions: Shall meet NEMA WD-6 spec.



2. Mounts in standard size wall box suitable for multi gang installation or on mounting brackets for low voltage devices.

3. Suitable for use with Decorator style wall plates.

D. Electrical Specifications:

1. Class 2 Low Voltage device 2. Power through interconnected 18 AWG cable with 2-pin header

E. Data Specifications:

1. NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus that uses pre-fabricated 18 AWG cable.

F. Shall comply or exceed the following electromagnetic requirements:

1. EN 61000-4-2 2. EN 61000-4-4 3. EN 61000-4-5

G. Environmental Specifications:

1. Maximum Operating Ambient Temperature: 60 deg C (140 deg F).

2.4 SYSTEM FIELD DEVICES (INPUT and OUTPUT MODULES)

A. General: Input Modules provide a common interface to low voltage occupancy sensors and photo sensors while Output Modules provide a common interface to 0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts and/or 0-10V LED Drivers. These modules automatically detect the type of devices they are connected to (i.e., photo sensor, occupancy sensor, 0-10V ballast or 0-10V LED drivers. The Central Control Unit (CU), through these modules, assigns addresses to the field devices during commissioning and establishes two-way communication. These individually addressable modules enable each lighting component to be independently controlled and configured to best meet the needs of the facility. These modules connect directly to the NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus.

1. Addressing: System Field Devices shall be individually addressable via Central Control Software.

2. System shall automatically address individual nodes during system commissioning thus eliminating the need to pre-address devices or record serial numbers during installation.

3. Modules shall at minimum meet the listed general, mechanical and environmental specifications set at below.

B. AIR GAP OFF

1. Definition: Air Gap Off shall refer to the physical disconnection of AC power to the ballast or driver when “OFF” is selected either automatically or manually, thus ensuring maximum energy savings by eliminating off-state phantom power losses as well as ensuring that no potentially lethal high-voltage is present at the ballast or driver when the lights appear to be off (for life-safety reasons).

2. Provisions: Provide an air-gap off relay for each control zone in the system. Where each luminaire is to be controlled (dimmed and/or switched) independently, provide one relay per luminaire. Where multiple luminaires are to be controlled (dimmed and/or switched), provide one relay per control zone, sized to handle both the inrush current as well as the maximum connected load, at the specified voltage.



3. Alternatively, for luminaire mounted at ceiling heights of 10’ or less, contractor may supply a label on each luminaire that is visible from 5’ AFF that states “WARNING: Potentially lethal voltage/currents may be present when lights are turned OFF”. Provide a sample of label as part of submittal process. For luminaire mounted above 10’, this provision is not an option.

C. General Specifications:

1. Shall supply 12VDC (up to 24VDC) to sensors. 2. Shall have 2 ports that accept 18 AWG, pre-fabricated, polarity independent quick

connecting NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus that supplies 24 VDC. 3. Two models one rated for regular indoor use and other for use in damp locations such as

basements, cold storage warehouse, roofed open parking garages, etc. shall be available.

4. Shall comply at minimum with FCC Part 15/ICES-003 5. Memory: Retains all system settings in non-volatile memory.

D. Mechanical Specifications:

1. Dimensions: 1.18" W X 2.38" L X 0.62" H (30mm W X 60.7mm L X 15.7mm H) 2. Suitable for fixture or junction box mounting in standard 1/2" knockout (7/8” dia.)

E. Electrical Specifications:

1. Rated for NEC/CEC Class 2 wiring 2. Power through interconnected 18 AWG cable with 2-pin header

F. Environmental Specifications:

1. Operating Temperature Range: -40 deg C (-40 deg F) to +55 deg C (131 deg F). 2. Humidity: 0% to 100% RH condensing rated for damp locations.

0% to 95% RH non-condensing rated for indoor locations.

2.5 AREA LIGHTING CONTROLLER

A. General: Provides a common interface (DIM/SWITCH) to a group of 0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts and/or 0-10V LED Drivers. These modules connect directly to the NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus.

The Central Control Unit (CU), during commissioning assign addresses to these controllers and establishes two-way communication.

1. Addressing: Area Lighting Controllers shall be individually addressable via Central Control Software.

2. System shall automatically address individual area lighting controllers during system commissioning thus eliminating the need to pre-address devices or record serial numbers during installation.

3. Area Lighting Controllers shall at minimum meet the general, mechanical and environmental specifications listed in 2.5 (B – F) below:

B. General Specifications:

1. Shall have 2 ports that accept 18 AWG, pre-fabricated, polarity independent quick connecting NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus that supplies 24 VDC.

2. Memory: Shall retain all system settings in non-volatile memory.



3. The internal relay shall control up to 20A for 120 to 347VAC general purpose loads, ballast, resistive, tungsten and motor loads of 1.5 HP for 120 to 277 VAC.

4. Shall be suitable for general purpose plug load control 5. Dimming interface installation shall be either as NEC/CEC Class 1 or Class 2 circuit

C. Shall comply at minimum with FCC Part 15/ICES-003

D. Shall comply or exceed the following electromagnetic requirements:

1. EN 61000-4-2 2. EN 61000-4-4 3. EN 61000-4-5

E. Mechanical Specifications:

1. Dimensions: 1.9" W X 2.4" L X 1.75" H (48.26mm W X 60.96mm L X 44.45mm H) 2. Mounting: Standard 1/2" electrical box knockout

F. Environmental Specifications:

1. Maximum Operating Temperature: 55°C (131°F) / MAX 20A @120-347 Vac

2.6 WIRELESS INTERFACE MODULE

A. General: Provides a common interface to wireless sensors & switches. The Central Control Unit, through this interface module, automatically detects and during commissioning addresses the compatible wireless sensors & switches it is connected to and establishes two-way communication. The wireless interface module can be directly connected to the NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus.

1. Addressing: System shall automatically address compatible wireless sensors & wall stations during system commissioning thus eliminating the need to pre-address the devices or record serial numbers during installation.

2. Wireless Interface modules shall at minimum meet the general, mechanical and environmental specifications per (B – E) below:

B. General Specifications:

1. Shall have 2 ports that accept 18 AWG, pre-fabricated, polarity independent quick connecting NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus that supplies 24 VDC and an external whip antenna for greater performance when communicating with other wireless devices such as sensors & wall stations.

2. Memory: Retains all system settings in non-volatile memory.

C. Mechanical Specifications:

1. Dimensions: 1.9" W X 2.4" L X 1.75" H (48.26mm W X 60.96mm L X 44.45mm H). 2. Mounting: Clamp or standard 1/2" electrical box knockout 3. An external whip antenna for enhanced communication with other wireless devices.

D. Signal Specifications:

1. Operating Frequency: 315 MHz 2. Conducted Output Power: 3 dBm 3. Receiver Sensitivity: -98 dBm @ 315 MHz



4. Radio Regulation: FCC CFR-47 Part 15 5. Coverage Angle: 3600

E. Environmental Specifications:

1. Operating Temperature Range: 0 deg C (32 deg F) to +65 deg C (149 deg F).

2.7 COMMUNICATION WIRE

A. Wiring: 18 AWG, pre-fabricated, polarity independent quick connecting wiring. The system shall have the capability to use both NEC/CEC Class 1 and Class 2 wiring. The maximum connected length of wiring shall be 2500 ft. per channel.

B. Field Bus: Integrates peripheral devices such as 0-10V ballasts and/or 0-10V LED drivers, occupancy sensors, photo sensors, relay-based controls, power packs, wall controls and wireless sensors and wall controls into a complete, networked programmable lighting control system. Provides power to photo sensors, PIR and dual-technology occupancy sensors. Devices may be connected randomly on the network and special termination of each network channel is not required. Minimize system down time by self diagnosing the field bus for any shorts and open loops.

C. Field bus shall at minimum meet the specifications listed below:

1. Specifications: a. Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18

AWG. b. Pre-fabricated 1 ft., 5 ft., 10 ft., 15 ft., 20 ft., 25 ft. and 50 ft. lengths. c. Daisy chain topology d. Pre-fabricated with 2-wire connectors. e. Flame rated jacket for plenum use NFPA 262 (UL: FT6, CSA: CMP). f. Power Supply: 12 VDC (up to 24 VDC) to sensors.

2.8 PHOTO SENSOR

General: System shall utilize low voltage photo sensors.

Low voltage photo sensors shall at minimum meet the specifications listed below:

A. General Specifications:

1. Shall be NEC/CEC Class 2 based. 2. Sensor shall be capable of a fully adjustable response in the range between 0 and

10,000 foot candles with a +/- 1% accuracy at 21 deg C (70 deg F). 3. Shall interface directly with the analog input of the Lighting Control System. 4. Sensors shall supply an analog signal to the Lighting Management System proportional

to the light measured. 5. Sensor housing shall be flame retardant and meet UL 94 HB standards.

B. Technical Specification:

1. Accuracy: +/-1% at 21 deg C (70 deg F), derated to +/-5% at 49 deg C (120 deg F) or at -18 deg C (0 deg F).

2. Output Voltage: 5VDC or 10VDC full output 3. Output Offset: 0VDC or 1VDC total Darkness 4. Operating Temp: -11 deg C (13 deg F) to 60 deg C (140 deg F).



C. Interior: Indoor sensors shall have a Fresnel lens, with a 60 degree cone of response. The indoor sensor range shall be between 0 and 750 FC.

D. Exterior: Outdoor models shall have a hood over the aperture to shield the sensor from direct sunlight. The outdoor sensor circuitry shall be completely encased in an optically clear epoxy resin. The Outdoor sensor range shall be between 0 and 750 FC.

E. Atrium: The Atrium sensors shall have a translucent dome with a 180 degree field of view. Atrium sensor range shall be from 2 to 2,500 FC.

F. Skylight: The Skylight sensors shall have a translucent dome with a 180 degree field of view. Skylight sensor range shall be between 10 and 7,500 FC.

2.9 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

System shall utilize low voltage and/or wireless occupancy sensors.

Low voltage occupancy sensors shall at minimum meet the specifications listed below:

A. General:

1. Shall be NEC/CEC Class 2 based. 2. Shall interface directly with the analog input of the Lighting Control System. 3. Sensors using passive infrared, ultrasonic, microphonic, and multi-technology shall be

available. 4. Shall allow timeouts configurable via system software. 5. Shall allow occupancy and vacancy sensor configurations via system software. 6. Depending on the software configuration shall switch or dim the luminaires. 7. Shall allow overlapping and comfort zone configurations via system software.

C. Mechanical: Sensors for mounting on ceilings and walls, including corners, must be available.

D. Environmental:

1. Operating Temperature Range: 0ºC (32 deg F) to 40ºC (104 deg F) 2. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95% non-condensing

2.10 CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT

A. General: The system Control Unit (CU) is a rack or wall mounted lighting control device that collects, processes and distributes lighting control information to System Field Devices and Wall Stations over NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus. Each CU has multiple NEC/CEC Class 2 communication channels and can control a large quantity of nodes (sensors, wall stations, 0-10V Dimming, Fixed Output Ballasts, 0-10V LED Drivers, wireless sensors, wireless wall stations, etc.) per channel, per the manufacturers recommended maximum. The CU is the central intelligence point for the area that it controls, collecting signal information from sensors, wall stations and personal control software and determining appropriate brightness levels or on/off status for each luminaire or zone. Each CU has an Ethernet connection for communication with a facility’s or tenant’s Local Area Network (LAN) to enable desktop personal control.

1. Shall interconnect with other CUs and System Server using standard Ethernet connection that employs TCP/IP protocol.

2. Control units shall at minimum meet the mechanical, electrical, data, electromagnetic and environmental specifications listed below.

3. Shall comply at minimum with FCC Part 15/ICES-003 4. Shall comply or exceed the following electromagnetic requirements:



1. EN 61000-4-2 2. EN 61000-4-4 3. EN 61000-4-5

B. Mechanical Specifications:

1. Shall mount in a standard 19” rack (1U width), or alternatively where no rack is shown, via an individual wall mount.

C. Electrical Specifications:

1. Power Supply: 120V/60Hz/200W. Provide dedicated 120V receptacle fed from a dedicated normal power circuit; do not connect to a UPS or normal/emergency power source.

D. Data Specifications:

1. Shall have 8 ports that accept 18 AWG, pre-fabricated, polarity independent quick connecting NEC/CEC Class 2 communication bus that supplies 24 VDC

2. Each CU channel shall support up to 100 nodes or 800 nodes in total. 3. Each CU shall have two Ethernet 10/100Base - Tx Cat 5 RJ45 ports that employ TCP/IP

protocol: 1. Lighting Control Network 2. Tenant LAN Access Point

4. Shall have a status LED on front of unit. 5. Shall have configuration stored in non-volatile flash memory.

E. Environmental Specifications:

1. Operating Temperature Range: -20 deg C (-4 deg F) to +40 deg C (104 deg F). 2. Humidity: 0% to 95% RH non-condensing.

2.11 SYSTEM SERVER

A. General: System Server shall host the lighting control system database for all the lighting control devices. In addition, it shall provide remote accessing capability to change system settings and/or parameters.

Server shall have the ability to:

1. Analyze system performance or energy data or generate system report; 2. Record energy consumption with average sampling every 5 minutes for unlimited

duration; 3. Host the web interface required for the web enabled Personal Control Software or web

based Central Control Software; 4. Reside on a client server (virtual server) thus eliminating the need for dedicated physical

hardware if desired; 5. Interconnect with CUs over standard Ethernet connection that employs TCP/IP protocol;

Hardware based servers shall at minimum meet the specifications listed below:

B. Specifications:

1. Mechanical Specifications: a. Shall mount in a standard 19” rack (1U width), or alternatively where no rack is

shown, via an individual wall mount.



2. Electrical Specifications: 1. Power Supply: 120V/60Hz/200W. Provide dedicated 120V receptacle fed from a

dedicated normal power circuit. 3. Data Specifications:

a. Each System Server shall have two Ethernet 10/100Base - Tx Cat 5 RJ45 ports that employ TCP/IP protocol.

4. Regulatory: a. FCC (US only) Class A. b. DOC (Canada) Class A. c. UL 60950. d. CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950.

2.12 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Personal Control Software: Enables individuals in a building to control lighting levels in their workspace from their own desktop PC. User can control the light level of each luminaire in their workspace or can control all of the luminaire together as a group. Preset lighting scenes may be stored, recalled and modified. This software shall have the capability of acting as a “virtual occupancy sensor” for the system by detecting keyboard or mouse activity on each PC for incremental occupancy status data.

1. Technical Information: a. TCP/IP network traffic < 2kb/s.

B. Web based Personal Control Software: This feature allows individuals to control lighting levels in their workspace without the requirement for installation of software on client PCs. Individuals can access the interface through the web browser and perform individual luminaire dimming control, on/off switching, modify and save preset lighting scenes.

C. Technical Information: Adobe Flash ® based user interface.

1. System Requirements: a. Internet web browser with Flash® Player 8 or later. b. Internet/Intranet connection. c. SSU enabled and configured to host dynamic website. d. Network connection with access to a network-enabled CU.

D. Web based Central Control Software: Central control software application is used to commission, configure and manage the system. Every system parameter in a building (or campus of buildings) is configured for each individual user or space and baseline settings are established for each of the following (depending on the basis of design) system features:

a. Daylight harvesting. b. Occupancy control. c. Smart time scheduling. d. Task tuning. e. Personal control. f. Load shedding.

Software utilizes a web based interface that permits a user to easily navigate between zones, floors or different buildings and allows a user to zoom in or zoom out of specific areas of a building. Both 3-dimensional and two-dimensional multi-floor views shall be available. System features such as creation of zone hierarchies, overlapping and support zone definitions, user access rights, timeout settings for occupancy sensors, calibration of light levels for daylight harvesting and the configuration of multiple time schedule profiles shall be available. A web based Graphical User Interface (GUI) application integral to the system will be used to develop a dynamic, real-time, point-and-click graphic of each floor plan with representation of all light



luminaire, wall stations, sensors, switches, etc. A central system server will be provided to support system data base and enterprise control management.

1. System Requirements: a. Software must be able to run on a Windows Operating systems (Windows XP or

newer) and also on Apple Mac Intel PCs (Mac OS 10.4 or newer). b. Must support all common browsers, i.e.,

• Internet Explorer 6.0 or later

• Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or later

• Safari

• Google Chrome c. Must provide network connection/access to all network-enabled CUs. a. Color gradient (“weather map” type) data view (see below for an example) must be

available to display the following criteria:

• Lamp & ballast life time

• Current energy consumption

• Current energy savings

• Current luminaire brightness

• Current luminaire status

• Current occupancy data

• Current load shedding status

• Other custom modes that may be specified elsewhere

2.13 AUDIO-VISUAL INTERFACE

A. General: Through this interface users can command (e.g. LCD Touch Screen Panel) various lighting scenarios depending on the audio & visual requirements of the room or building.

1. The lighting control system shall interface to the AV system via TCP/IP protocol using Telnet.

2. The lighting control system shall allow a common AV processor to individually control multiple rooms from a single TCP/IP port through unique room, zone, and scene addresses for lighting in each room.

2.14 BAS INTERFACE

A. General: Two separate software interfaces (BACnet/IP or Tridium Niagara AX) shall be available for integration with Building Automation System. The lighting control system, via these interfaces, communicate the status of output devices (lighting loads) as well as input devices (dry contacts, switches, occupancy sensors, vacancy sensors, and photocells) over to the building automation system. Building Automation System, utilize data from lighting control system to switch/dim lighting, perform load shedding of lighting load, to turn lights on in response to emergency signal through fire alarm and perform HVAC adjustments.

1. The Lighting Control System shall be able to share the following information with BAS clients: a. Light Zone State: State of the defined lighting zone – ON or OFF b. Light Zone Dimming: Light output level of the defined lighting zone, from 100%

(maximum light output) to 0% (minimum light output) c. Fire Alarm State: State of the fire alarm system – alarm activated or alarm not

activated d. Occupancy State: State of the defined occupancy sensor – occupancy detected or

not detected e. Photo Sensor Daylight Readings (available via BACnet interface only): Reports

daylight readings by photo sensors



f. Sheddable Load: Reports the total lighting load available for load reduction according to the Light Management System, defined in watts

g. Shed Status: Reports the total current load reduction achieved according to Light Management System defined prioritization, defined in watts

h. Shed Request: Requested total amount of load reduction, defined in watts or as a percentage of sheddable load

i. Sheddable Load (Group): (As above, for the selected group) j. Shed Status (Group): (As above, for the selected group) k. Shed Request (Group): (As above, for the selected group) l. Floor plans (available via Tridium Niagara AX only): Importing lighting control

software floor plans into Tridium Niagara AX framework for viewing current status and changing the proxy values.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification: Verify that wiring conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections or at a previous time, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Inspection: Inspect all material included in this contract prior to installation. Manufacturer shall be notified of unacceptable material prior to installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. The Electrical Contractor, as part of the work of this section, shall coordinate, receive, mount, connect, and place into operation all equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wire, connectors, hardware, and other incidental items necessary for properly functioning lighting control as described herein and shown on the plans (including but not limited to System Field Devices, 0-10V dimming ballasts, fixed output ballasts, 0-10V LED drivers and communication wire). The Electrical Contractor shall maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.

B. Power: The contractor shall test that all branch load circuits are operational before connecting loads to sensor system load terminals, and then de-energize all circuits before installation.

C. Related Product Installation: Refer to other sections listed in Related Sections for related products’ installation.

3.3 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Adjust sensitivity to cover area installed

B. Set time delay on occupancy sensors that are connect to the lighting control system to the minimum. Time delays shall be controlled via Central Control Software.

C. Sensor shall be powered through Input Module. No external power packs shall be used for powering sensors.

D. Install occupancy sensors on vibration free stable surface.

E. Install atrium and skylight light sensor facing toward window or skylight.

F. Install interior light sensor in ceiling facing the floor.



3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NEC & CEC. Separate power-limited and non power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.5 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backup copies of software and user-supplied values. Provide current site licenses for software.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing wall stations and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS & SUPPORT SERVICES

A. Commissioning: The manufacturer shall supply factory trained representatives to commission the lighting control system. Manufacturer shall start up all lighting control equipment and verify that it meets the requirements of this specification.

B. Training: As part of the standard commissioning process, the manufacturer shall train the owner’s representatives in the operation of the system to a maximum of 4 hours per building. Manufacturer shall also provide owner’s representatives with system operating manuals together with a system training video.

C. Technical Support: The manufacturer shall supply 24/7 technical telephone support to the client. If the manufacturer does not provide 24/7 support, they must provide a list of contacts (names and cell phone numbers) in the event of a system failure during non-business hours.

D. Replacement components: The manufacturer shall be able to ship replacement parts within 24 hours for any component that fails during the warranty period.



E. Extended Service Coverage: Maintenance agreements shall be available from the manufacturer to provide service for the system both during and after the warranty period.

F. Requests for commissioning shall be at least two weeks prior to date desired for commissioning.

G. Electrical contractor shall perform functional testing under the guidance of commissioning agent and in accordance with factory specified guidelines.

H. Factory appointed personnel shall provide commissioning services for the lighting control system.

1. Verify proper communication over control wires. 2. Map addresses of ballasts/LED drivers (via Output Modules in the case 0-10V control),

occupancy sensors (via Input Modules), light level sensors (via Input Modules), wall stations to control units and system server.

3. Verify communication to control units and system server. 4. Configure occupancy sensors, light level sensors, wall stations and other contacts to suit

design specifications. 5. Configure and program lighting control sequences as described on contract documents. 6. Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer proper operation of all areas the system is installed.

3.8 TESTING

A. Upon completion of all line, load and interconnection wiring, and after all luminaire are installed and lamped, a qualified factory representative shall completely configure and test the system.

B. At the time of checkout and testing, the owner’s representative shall be thoroughly instructed in the proper operation of the system.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel and building supervisors to adjust, operate, utilize, troubleshoot, conduct software installation, and maintain lighting controls and software training for PC-based control systems. Provide up to 4 hours of on-site training. Provide a hard copy of manuals and instructional videos on CD or DVD.



PANELBOARDS 262417-1

SECTION 262417 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 – GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS

A. Provide panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with fusible switches or thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers as indicated on the schedules.

B. Panelboards shall be Square D. Equivalent by G.E., Cutler Hammer or ITE Siemens.

2.2 BUSSING ASSEMBLY AND TEMPERATURE RISE:

A. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50 degrees C. rise above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67.

B. Provide tin-finished copper bars full length of panel with rating listed in schedule. Bus bar

connection to branch circuit breakers shall be "Phase Sequence" type designed and assembled so circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing adjacent breakers or removing main bus or branch circuit connectors. Provide bus bars with wire lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. Provide each panel with equipment tin finished copper grounding bus grounded to box and tin finished copper neutral bus insulated from box.

2.3 INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING

A. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating as indicated in the schedules. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed.

2.4 CABINET

A. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Provide branch circuit panelboard cabinets with latch and tumbler-type lock on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. Endwalls shall be removable. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel. Gray baked enamel finish electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized steel. Fusible panelboards and large distribution circuit breaker panelboards shall not be provided with doors.

2.5 SAFETY BARRIERS

A. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs or main breakers shall have barriers on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall have barriers.


PANELBOARDS 262417-2

2.6 UL LISTING

A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label. When required, panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment.

2.7 BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break with trip indication. Circuit breakers shall operate both manually for normal switch functions and automatically under overload and short circuit conditions. They shall provide circuit and self-protection when applied within their rating. Operating mechanisms shall be entirely trip free so that contacts cannot be held closed against a short circuit. Operating handle of circuit breaker shall open and close all poles of a multipole breaker simultaneously. Conforming to NEMA Standards Publications No. AB1-1964 and be approved by UL. Circuit breaker shall have a thermal magnetic trip unit for each pole for inverse time delayed overload protection and an instantaneous magnetic element for short circuit protection. Multiple pole trip elements shall operate a common internally connected trip bar to open all poles in case of overload or short circuit through any one pole.

2.8 INSTALLATION

A. Provide 3 1/2" housekeeping pad where two or more conduits penetrate floor or when equipment is floor/ground mounted.

B. Panels shall have branch circuit directory holders with clear plastic cover. Provide neatly typed

list of branch circuit loads corresponding to branch circuit numbers.

C. Provide panelboards labeled as indicated in Section 260502: Basic Materials and Methods. END OF SECTION 262417


SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES, AND COVERPLATES 262726-1

SECTION 262726 - SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES AND COVER PLATES PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide where shown on plans Leviton wiring devices. Part numbers shall be as listed for each device specified. Equivalent devices by Bryant, Hubbell.

1.2 INDUSTRY REFERENCES

A. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) Switches (UL 20) Receptacles, Plugs & Connectors (UL 498) Pin & Sleeve Connectors (UL 1286) Device Plates (UL 514) GFCI's (UL 943)

B. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD-1 (Devices, Plates, Colors) WD-6

C. U.S. Federal Specifications

Fed Spec Switches (WS-896E) Fed Spec Receptacles (WC-596F) Fed Spec Device Plates (W-P-455) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices in types, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated. Wherever possible, devices shall be back and side wired. All switches and receptacles shall incorporate a metal mounting strap: nonmetallic mounting straps are not acceptable. Switches shall be listed per UL 20 and certified by UL to Fed Spec. WS-596E. Receptacles shall be listed per UL 498 and certified by UL to Fed. Spec. WS-896E. Both switches and receptacles shall be visibly marked with the "UL-FS" mark to confirm certification. All devices shall be from the same manufacturer. All devices shall be gray unless otherwise on plans. All surface raceway shall be satin aluminum unless noted otherwise on plans.

B. Each switch outlet shall be equipped with an AC "Quiet" toggle switch of 20 ampere capacity.

Leviton Part No. #1221-2 Leviton Part No. #1221-2KL (Locking-Keyed)

C. Pilot light switches shall have illuminated toggles in the ON position for visual load monitoring.

Leviton Part No. #12-1-PLR

D. Each convenience receptacle outlet shall be equipped with a 20 ampere duplex plug receptacles except where otherwise noted. Receptacles shall be 3 wire grounding type NEMA No. 5-20R. Receptacle shall be constructed with Nylon face and base; .050 gauge brass backstrap with one-piece ground design; riveted self-grounding clip; and .040 gauge solid brass, triple-wipe contacts.



Receptacles denoted as "Emergency" shall be denoted as such with a device plate labeled with the word "EMERGENCY" in capital letters.

Leviton #5362A

E. Isolated Ground Receptacles shall be 3 wire grounding type NEMA No. 5-20R-IG. Receptacle shall be constructed with Nylon face and base; .050 gauge brass nickel-plated backstrap with isolated ground design; riveted self-grounding clip; and .040 gauge solid brass, nickel-plated, triple-wipe contacts. Receptacles shall be orange and have the IG symbol.

Leviton #5362-IG

F. Weatherproof receptacles shall be equipped with a ground fault interrupter receptacle which will automatically detect a ground fault current and will do-energize receptacle when fault current exceeds 5 milliamps. GFCI shall be certified Class A by Underwriter's Laboratories.

Leviton #6898

G. Each Weatherproof Receptacle shall be covered by a hinged die-cast metal weatherproof cover per NEC 406.8 (B).

Intermatic #WP1010MC/HMC

H. GFCI Receptacles shall detect a ground fault current and shall automatically de-energize receptacle when fault current exceeds 5 milliamps. GFCI shall be certified Class A by Underwriter's Laboratories, and listed under UL Standard 943. Receptacle shall be rated 20A. 120V. 2 pole, 3 wire grounding.

Leviton #6898

I. Surge Suppression Receptacles shall be isolated ground, duplex receptacle design, rated 20 ampere, 120 Volts and shall contain surge suppression device to protect appliances served by the receptacle. Receptacles shall provide 13,000 Amps Maximum Surge Current Line to Neutral; 6,500 ampere Max. Surge Current Line to Ground; and 6,500 ampere Max. Surge Current Neutral to Ground; each based on IEEE C62.41, * X 20 us waveform. Receptacle shall be certified by UL 1449 to have maximum clamping voltage of 500 Volts Peak Line to Neutral, Line to Ground, and Neutral to Ground based on Class B, 6KV, 3KA impulse, and shall be suitable for ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1980 installation categories A and B. Receptacles shall be gray. Receptacle shall have an audible alarm.

Leviton #5380 Leviton #5380-IG (isolated ground)

J. Four-In-One receptacles shall be installed where shown on plans. Product shall be manufactured in conformance with IEC 309-1 and 309-2, with an IP67 rating. Products shall also carry a UL1286 listing.

K. USB charging receptacles shall be equipped with a 20 ampere simplex plug receptacles and (2)

USB ports with a combined power of 2.1A. Receptacles shall be 3 wire grounding type NEMA No. 5-20R. Receptacle shall be constructed with Nylon face and base; .050 gauge brass backstrap with one-piece ground design; riveted self-grounding clip; and .040 gauge solid brass, triple-wipe contacts.

Leviton #T5830



2.2 SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE FLUSH WALL PLATES

A. Wall Plates: Wall plates for all flush outlets shall be satin stainless steel Type 430. All plates shall be listed per UL 514 and shall be of the same manufacturer as the devices furnished. Plates for surface mounted device outlets shall be drawn galvanized steel for steel boxes and cast for cast boxes.

B. Provide flush mounted wiring devices with standard stainless steel wall plates with satin finish

conforming to U.S. Bureau of Standards finish #32D.

C. Architectural Style Specification Grade devices shall be used where indicated on plans. Devices shall be Leviton "Decora Plus" with matching screwless, Lexan plates. Switches shall be 20 ampere, 277 volt rated. Receptacles shall be NEMA 5-20R configuration, 20 ampere, 125 volt.

D. Provide matching blank wall plates to cover outlet or junction boxes intended for future devices.

Provide matching blank wall plates with round knock out at all telephone outlet locations.

E. Provide factory engraved wall plates where indicated. Where engraved text is not outlined submit two copies of proposed text to A/E Officer for review.

F. Wall plates shall not support wiring devices. Provide wiring device with accessories as required

to properly install devices and wall plates.

G. Where wall plates for special devices are available only from manufacturer of device, provide designs and finishes equivalent to above specification.

H. Verify with Architect finish of any plate where it may be apparent a special finish or color should

have been specified.

I. Multiple switch plates shall be engraved to indicate what they control. 2.3 FLOOR BOXES

A. Reference plans for floor box types. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 Install wiring devices to manufacturer's recommendations and in strict accordance with applicable

sections of NEC.



OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 262816-1

SECTION 262816 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSES

A. Provide fuses by Bussman or Gould Shawmut.

B. Provide fuses of same characteristics as scheduled to insure selective coordination of power system.

C. Install fuses only after installation is complete and final tests and inspections have been made.

Label fuses, switches and other fused devices with warning labels affixed in prominent location indicating type and size of fuse installed and fuse manufacturer's catalog number.

D. Fuses 601 amp and larger shall be U/L Class L with minimum four (4) seconds time delay at

500% rating.

E. Fuses 600 amp and below shall be U/L Class J, RK-1 or RK-5 as scheduled time delay sized as shown on drawings or schedules.

F. Special temperature conditions, motors, motor loads or other conditions requiring other types or

sizes of fuses must be reviewed by the Contracting Officer. Fuse reducers are not permitted.

G. Furnish Owner with spare fuses of each size and type installed on job as follows:

1. 601 Amps or Larger - three (3) of each size and type 2. 600 Amps or Less - 10% with minimum of three (3) of each size and type Provide with spare fuse cabinet.

H. For fuse types and ampacities, see equipment schedules.



DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262817-1

SECTION 262817 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Provide heavy duty horsepower rated Safety Switches rated in accordance with NEMA enclosed Switch Standard KS 1-1969 and L98 Standard.

B. Enclosure shall be NEMA type required by switch location and environment. Enclosure door shall

latch with means for padlocking and cover interlock with defeater to prevent opening door when switch is energized or closing switch with door open. Switch shall have an embossed nameplate permanently attached to door front with switch rating, short circuit interrupting capacity and application information.

C. Line terminals shall be permanently marked and shielded. Contact shall be tin plated, equipped

with arch chutes and have movable contacts visible in off position with door open. Wiring terminals shall be pressure type suitable for copper or aluminum wire. Switching mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break spring driven anti-tease mechanism and shall be integral part of box. All current carrying parts shall be plated.

D. Fuse holders shall be high pressure suitable for use with dual element fuses or rejection type

current limiting fuses where required. Fuse holders shall be completely accessible from front of switch and fuses shall be installed so that the label may be easily read from the front and without removing the fuse.

E. All fuse holders shall have rejection clips installed.

2.2 INSTALLATION

A. All disconnect switches as specified shall be installed in strict accordance with rules set forth by NEC.

B. Approved disconnect switches shall include G.E., Cutler Hammer, or I.T.E. Siemens, Square D.



MOTORS 263000-1

SECTION 263000 - MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL (Reference Section 260500) 1.1 MOTORS A. Refer to plans and equipment schedules for specific motor applications and requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC MOTORS (1/3 HP and Smaller)

A. Motors 1/3 horsepower and smaller shall selected by manufacturer of driven equipment with motor speed and torque characteristics best suited for application.

B. Motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.15 for open dripproof enclosure and 1.00 for

totally enclosed motors. Wherever applicable provide motors with cushion bases. Motor enclosure shall be proper type required for operating environment.

C. Motors shall have a plus or minus 10% voltage tolerance and plus or minus 5% frequency

tolerance. Motors shall operate satisfactorily in ambient temperature range of 0 degrees C (32oF) to 140oC (104oF) at altitudes below 3300 feet.

D. Provide motors with built-in thermal overload protection. Motors readily accessible to operating

personnel shall have manual reset protector. All other shall have automatic reset protectors. E. Motors shall have AFBMA standard double-shielded ball bearings sized for average life of at least

100,000 hours under normal loading conditions. Bearings housing shall have provisions for adding new lubricant without major disassembly and shall have seals to prevent entrance of foreign matter and leakage of bearing lubricant.

F. Motor bolts, screws and other external hardware shall be treated with a corrosion resistant plating

and motor enclosure prime painted with corrosion resistant metal primer finished with a durable machinery enamel.

G. Unless indicated otherwise motors shall be rated for continuous operation at 115, 200, or 277 volt

single phase 60 hertz. Where equipment manufacturer offers a choice provide permanent split capacitor motors in lieu of shaded pole motors.

H. Motor leads shall be marked throughout entire length for easy identification and terminate with

brass or copper terminal lugs. Motor shall have permanently attached nameplate with electrical characteristics and wiring connection diagram.

2.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS (1/2 HP and Larger)

A. Provide equipment requiring electric motors with NEMA Standard motors. Shop drawings, submitted and equipment provided with electric motors shall include motor manufacturer, horsepower, voltage, full load amperes, NEMA design type, insulation class, shaft bearing type, mounting base type, and enclosure type. To greatest extent possible motors for this project shall be by one manufacturer.

B. Motors shall conform to current NEMA Standard MG1. Motor shall operate successfully without

derating under the following conditions.

1. 40 degrees C (104oF) maximum ambient temperature. 2. 3,300 Ft. maximum altitude.


MOTORS 263000-2

3. Voltage variations of plus or minus 10% of nameplate rating. 4. Frequency variations of plus or minus 5% of nameplate rating. 5. Combined voltage and frequency variation of plus or minus 10% total as long as

frequency does not exceed plus or minus 5%.

C. Motors shall meet or exceed locked rotor (Starting) and breakdown (maximum) torques specified for the NEMA design rating. Lock rotor currents shall not exceed NEMA maximum values for motor NEMA design rating.

D. Motor service factors shall be 1.15 for open dripproof motors and 1.00 for totally enclosed motors. E. Unless indicated otherwise motor insulation may be manufacturers standard for Class A, B or F

provided that maximum permissible temperature for insulation is not exceeded when motor is operating at its service factor load in a 40 Degrees C (104oF) ambient.

F. Motor frame/HP relationship shall conform to current NEMA Standard for "T" frames. Motors

shall have antifriction ball or roller bearings sized for average life of at least 100,000 hours under normal v-belt loading conditions. Bearings shall be AFBMA Standard and shield mounted ball bearings of ample capacity for motor rating. Bearing housing shall have provisions for adding new lubricant and draining out old lubricant without major motor disassembly. Bearing housing shall have seals to protect bearing from entrance of foreign matter and to prevent leakage of bearing lubricant.

G. Conduit box mounting shall rotate to allow conduit entrance from top, bottom or either side.

Conduit holes shall conform to NEC Standards. H. Motor leads shall have same insulation class as motor windings. Leads shall be marked

throughout entire length for easy identification and terminated with brass or copper terminal lugs. Motor shall have permanently attached nameplate with electrical characteristics and wiring connection diagram.

I. Motor bolts, screws and other external hardware shall be treated with a corrosion resistant

plating. Motor enclosure shall be prime painted with corrosion resisting metal primer and finished with a durable machinery enamel.

J. Unless indicted otherwise motors shall be rated for continuous operation at rated voltage, three

phase, 60 hertz. Motors shall be T-frame squirrel cage induction. Type NEMA design B with Class B insulation. Motors shall be drip proof totally enclosed or explosion-proof as required by motor environment.

2.3 INSTALLATION

A. Motors shall be installed in strict accordance with rules set forth by NEC and equipment manufacturer.



TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) 264313-1

SECTION 264313 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Section 262416 – Circuit Breaker Distribution Panelboards

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The TVSS units and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of the following:

1. UL Listed under UL 1449 and UL 1283 2. CSA certified per CSA 22.2 3. Equivalent: Siemens TPSE6240X series TVSS.

B. The UL 1449 suppression voltage ratings (SVR) and CSA label shall be permanently affixed to the

TVSS unit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:

1. Provide verification that the TVSS device complies with the required UL 1449 and UL 1283 SVR.

2. Provide actual let through voltage test data in the form of oscillograph results for both the ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 (combination wave) and B3 (ringwave) tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.

3. Provide spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying the device's noise attenuation exceeds 50 dB at 100 kHz.

4. For retrofit mounting applications, electrical/mechanical drawings showing unit dimensions, weights, installation instruction details, and wiring configuration.

5. Provide test report from a recognized independent testing laboratory verifying the suppressor components can survive published surge current rating on both a per mode and per phase basis using the IEEE C62.41, 8 x 20 microsecond current wave. Note that test data on individual module is not accepted.

Submit ten (10) copies of the above information.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a

minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.


A. TVSS units shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed.




A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Ten (10) copies of the equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided. B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:

1. Instruction books and/or leaflets 2. Recommended renewal parts list 3. Drawings and information required by section 1.06.

1.9 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. G.E.

D. Siemens.

1.10 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – GENERAL

A. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) equipment shall be Cutler-Hammer type Clipper Power Systems (CPS) or approved equal meeting all ratings and features specified herein.

B. Electrical requirements

1. Unit Operating Voltage -- Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. 2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) -- The MCOV shall be greater than

115% of the nominal system operating voltage. 3. Protection Modes -- For a wye configured system, the device must have directly

connected suppression elements between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and neutral-ground (N-G). For a delta configured system, the device must have suppression elements between line to line (L-L) and line to ground (L-G).

4. UL 1449 SVR -- The maximum UL 1449 SVR for the device must not exceed the following: Models 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 ________________________________________________________ L-N; L-G; N-G 400 V 800 V 1200 V L-L 800 V 1500 V 2000V ________________________________________________________

5. ANSI/IEEE Cat C3 Let Through Voltage -- The let through voltage based on IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category C3 surges (20 kV, 10 kA) shall be less than:

Models 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 __________________________________________________________ L-N 470 V 900 V 1300V __________________________________________________________



6. ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 Let Through Voltage -- Let through voltage based on IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for the ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 ringwave (6 kV, 5000 amps) shall be less than:

Models 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 __________________________________________________________ L-N 150 V 200 V 300V __________________________________________________________

C. TVSS Design

1. Balanced Suppression Platform -- The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating TVSS modules which do not provide a balanced impedance path to each MOV shall not be acceptable.

2. Electrical Noise Filter -- Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be 55 dB at 100 kHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. The unit shall be complimentary listed to UL 1283. Products not able to demonstrate noise attenuation of 55 dB @ 100 kHz shall be rejected.

3. Internal Connections -- No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors and compression fittings.

4. Safety and Diagnostic Monitoring -- Each unit shall be equipped with 200 kAIC internal fuses. Each unit shall provide the following three levels of monitoring:

a. Continuous monitoring of fusing system b. Internal infrared sensor system for monitoring individual MOVs (including neutral

to ground). The system must be capable of identifying open circuit failures not monitored by conventional fusing systems.

c. Thermal detection circuit shall monitor for overheating in all modes due to thermal runaway.

d. A green/red solid state indicator light shall be provided on each phase. The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light, shall indicate which phase(s) have been damaged. Fault detection will activate a flashing trouble light. Units which can not detect open-circuit damage, thermal conditions and over current will not be accepted.

5. Warranty -- The manufacturer shall provide a full five (5-) year warranty from the date of

shipment against any TVSS part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable national or local electric code.

6. TVSS devices shall be mounted such that they are seismically qualified for UBC and California Building Code Zone 4 applications.

7. The unit must be equipped with transient event counter and audible alarm. 8. Remote Status Monitor -- The TVSS device must include form C dry contacts (one NO

and one NC) for remote annunciation of unit status. The remote alarm shall change state if any of the three monitoring systems described detect a fault condition.

9. Push-To-Test Feature -- Each suppression unit shall incorporate an integral test feature which verifies the operational integrity of the unit's monitoring system.

1.11 SYSTEM APPLICATION

A. The TVSS applications covered under this section include switchgear, and switchboard assemblies. The branch panel located TVSS shall be tested and demonstrate they are suitable for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C1 environments.



B. Surge Current Capacity -- The minimum total surge current 8 x 20 microsecond waveform that the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table:

Min. Surge Current Current Application Per Phase Per Mode* Service Entrance (Switchboards Switchgear, MCC Main Entrance) 240 kA 125 kA

*L-G, L-N and N-G (WYE system); L-L, L-G (Delta system)

C. Switchgear and Switchboard Requirements

1. The TVSS application covered under this section is for switchboard locations. The service entrance TVSS shall be tested and suitable for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 environments.

2. Service entrance suppressor shall be installed by assembly manufacturer. 3. Withstand. Each unit must be capable of surviving more than 2500 ANSI/IEEE C62.41

Category C1 transients without failure or degradation of UL 1449 Suppression Voltage Rating.

4. Service entrance suppressors shall be installed in the assembly. 5. Locate suppressor on load side of main disconnect device, as close as possible to the

phase conductors and ground/neutral bar. 6. Provide a 30-amp disconnect. The disconnect shall be directly integrated to the

suppressor and assembly bus using bolted bus bar connections. 7. The suppressor and integral disconnect shall be installed to the switchboard using a direct

bus bar connection (no cable connection between bus bar and TVSS device). TVSS units that use a wire connection do not meet the intent of this specification.

All monitoring diagnostics features such as indicator lights, trouble alarms and surge counter (if specified) shall be mounted on the front of the switchboard.

1.12 ACCESSORIES

A. Push to test feature to verify operational integrity. B. Form C dry contacts one NO, one NC for remote status monitoring C. Provide audible alarm and surge counter as shown on the contract drawings

1.13 ENCLOSURES

A. All enclosed equipment shall have NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures, unless otherwise noted. Provide enclosures suitable for locations as indicated on the drawings and as described below:

1. NEMA 1 surface or flush-mounted general purpose enclosures primarily intended for

indoor use 2. NEMA 12 dust-tight enclosures intended for indoor use primarily to provide protection

against circulating dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids (Panelboards Only) 3. NEMA 3R raintight enclosures intended for outdoor use primarily to provide protection

against rain, sleet and damage from external ice formation

1.14 EXAMINATION

A. Factory testing

1. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards.



B. Installation

1. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings.



INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 - 1

SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior luminaires and accessories.

2. Lamps and light engines.

3. Ballasts, drivers and lighting power supplies.

4. Emergency lighting units.

5. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multi-pole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

3. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C78.377 – Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products

B. ANSI C82.1 – High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

C. ANSI C82.77 – Harmonic Emission Limits – Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting

D. IEEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code

E. IES LM-79-08 – Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid State Lighting Products

F. IES LM-80-08 – Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

G. NEMA SSL-3-2010 – High-Power White LED Binning for General Illumination

H. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

I. UL 935 – Standard for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

J. UL 1598 - Luminaires

K. UL 8750 – LED Equipment for Use in Lighting Products



1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B . CRI: Color-rendering index.

C . CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D . LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E . Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

F . RCR: Room cavity ratio.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast and driver. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type,

outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a currentaccreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings of all special or modified standard lighting equipment shall be submitted in reproducible form. Fixture fabrication details shall be drawn at either full size or half size scale. Fixture fabrication details shall illustrate a minimum of three (3) critical views indicating all fabrication, and assembly methods, materials, material gauges and finishes to be employed.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. 2. Mounting Details and coordination with surroundings. 3. Wiring connectors and harness assembly components.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1 . Lighting fixtures. 2 . Suspended or shaped ceiling components, coves, columns, niches. 3 . Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 4 . Other items in area, including the following:

a . Air outlets and inlets. b . Speakers. c . Sprinklers. d . Smoke and fire detectors. e . Occupancy sensors. f . Access panels. g . Piping, ductwork, conduit.



5. Moldings, decorations, mosaics.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.

E. Submittals required prior to project closeout shall include:

1. Field quality-control test reports. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and luminaires to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 3. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. All lighting fixtures shall be manufactured, furnished, and installed in compliance with all government agencies having jurisdiction. All fixtures shall bear the appropriate UL (or ETL) and IBEW identifications.

F. Manufacturers: Provide products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of interior and exterior lighting equipment of the types and ratings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA LE 4, "Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility" pertaining to recessed luminaires.

H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to interior lighting equipment.

I. Materials and equipment, as well as workmanship shall conform to the highest commercial standards and shall be as specified and/or as indicated on the drawings. Parts not specifically identified shall be made of materials most appropriate for their intended use.

J. Manufacturers: manufacturers listed as "prime spec" or approved equal in the lighting equipment schedule shall be assumed capable of supplying the listed fixtures unless clearly written exceptions are set forth in their quotations. Any such exceptions shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer and the Lighting Designer. Manufacturers not listed (as prime or approved equal) must comply with the following:

1. Experience: Manufacturers shall have not less than five years experience in design and manufacturing of lighting fixtures of the type and quality shown. Submission must include a list of completed projects and dated catalogue pages or drawings indicating length of experience.



2. Samples: Manufacturers shall submit a prototype sample of each fixture for review by the

Lighting Designer. Prototype samples shall be sufficiently detailed and operational to allow evaluation of compliance with the salient features of the specification. Preliminary design or shop drawings shall not be accepted in place of prototype samples.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


A. Lighting fixtures shall be wrapped for protection during delivery, storage, and handling. Wet or damp wrapping shall be removed, and disposed of, to prevent staining finish.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, protective packaging.

C. Store materials in original packaging in a manner to prevent soiling and physical damage, prior to installation.

D. Handle in a manner to prevent damage to finished surfaces.

E. Where possible, maintain protective covering until installation is complete and remove such coverings as part of final cleanup.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. All ballasts / drivers shall carry a minimum three (3) year warranty.

B. All LED lighting fixtures (unless noted otherwise) and accessories shall carry a minimum five year (5) warranty after final written acceptance by the Owner.

1.10 TECHNICAL AND ADMINISTRATIIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. All information identified in the following Schedules, Details, Layouts and Specifications [Section 265100 and 265600] shall be considered to form a complete and integrated Specification for Lighting Fixtures and Control Systems in the agreed upon Scope Areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the Architect/Engineer regarding the proper interpretation of all information indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedules, Fixture Cuts, Details and Specifications.

B. The submission of a proposal by the Contractor will be construed as evidence that a careful, complete and thorough examination of the premises, existing job conditions and Contract Documents has been made and later claims for labor, materials or equipment required or for difficulties encountered, which could have been foreseen had such an examination been made, will not be recognized. It shall also constitute a representation that the Contractor has checked and verified all quantities, work and materials involved and shall take complete responsibility for any deficiencies encountered thereafter.

C. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for verifying all fixture quantities, lengths and clearances required and shall inform the Architect/Engineer of job conditions at variance with fixtures as specified or detailed which affect installation or location at the time bid submission is made.



D. The Contractor shall insure that the lighting fixture manufacturer shall keep on file and make available for review by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner complete Quality Control and Quality Assurance records for all phases of production for all lighting fixtures to be supplied under this project.

E. Upon request the Contractor shall submit for review by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner verification that he has solicited pricing from all manufacturers which have been listed as "prime spec" and "approved equal." Upon request the Contractor shall submit for review itemized (line item) unit equipment costs for all fixtures to be provided under the Scope of this Contract.

F. Under multiple phase / separate contracts, same fixture type shall be provided by single manufacturer with exact same specifications. Later phase contractor shall submit specification to match earlier phase.

G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for coordinating and expediting the timely procurement and delivery for all lighting equipment, lamps, ballasts and related components for the project.

H. Specifications and drawings are intended to convey the salient features, function and character of the fixtures only, and do not undertake to illustrate or set forth every item or detail necessary for the work. Minor details not usually indicated on the drawings nor specified, but that are necessary or normally required for the proper execution, completion, installation and operation of the fixtures, shall be included, the same as if they were herein specified or indicated on the drawings.

I. Omissions: The Owner shall not be held responsible for the omission or absence of any detail, construction feature, etc. which may be normally required in the production of the lighting fixtures. The full and complete responsibility for accurately purchasing, fabricating and installing the lighting fixtures described herein to the fulfillment of those specifications including compliance with all regulatory bodies (i.e.: UL) shall rest solely with the Contractor.

1.11 SPARES

As part of this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the following:

A. Lamps / LED modules: 1 for each 10 [10%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 12 of each type.

B. Louvers/Lenses : 1 for each 20 [5%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 5 of each type.

C. Ballasts/ Drivers: 1 for each 20 [5%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 5 of each type.

D. Globes and Guards: 1 for each 10 [10%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 5 of each type.

1.12 SAMPLES

A. Upon request, the contractor shall submit for review one representative sample for each or any lighting fixture required under this Contract. After sample acceptance, the fixture shall be sent to the project for use as a standard. In the event the submission is rejected, the fixture will be returned to the manufacturer who shall immediately make a new submission which meets the contract requirements.

B. Shipping: The samples must be actual working unit of fixtures to be supplied and shall be submitted complete with specified lamp(s), 120 volt ballast/transformer complete with cord and plug set and ready for hanging, energizing and examining sample shall be shipped (prepaid) by Contractor to the Lighting Designer or as otherwise specified or directed.



1.13 MOCKUPS

The specific design requirements of several building conditions will mandate the necessity of full scale on site mockups prior to final authorization (release) to fabricate. The Contractor shall include as part of his bid provision for complete on site mockups of the following conditions. All mockup fixtures shall be installed as indicated on drawings / schedule and energized for review:

A. Provide (4) type W4 fixtures with all necessary control devices. Provide with minimum size of24”x24” final glass sample for mockup.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers listed on the Luminaire Schedule as the basis of design are the approved Manufacturers for each luminaire type. Those listed as approved equal Manufacturers are permitted to submit products meeting this specification and the performance criteria as scheduled. Listing as an approved equal manufacturer does not guarantee that products submitted by said equal manufacturer will be accepted for this project.

B. Luminaires shall be specification grade and listed by an approved agency for intended use and location.

C. Primary lighting sources shall be LED

D. Approved chip engine manufacturers for solid state luminaires listed on the Luminaire Schedule shall include the following:

1 . CREE 2 . GE 3 . Nichia 4 . Osram Sylvania 5 . Philips 6. Seoul Semiconductor 7. Soraa 8. Toshiba 9. Xicato.

2.2 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

A. Refer to EL-601 drawing for schedule of luminaire types specified for this project.

2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Lighting fixtures shall be of rigid construction, dimensionally stable, and shall be assembled with secure fastenings. Ferrous parts shall be protected from corrosion by plating or shall be finished with high reflectance enamel with non-yellowing binder and high pigment to binder ratio, with semi-gloss finish. Ferrous parts shall be prepared for finish by industry standard finishing process (see Finishes). Non ferrous metals (i.e. aluminum) unless otherwise noted be treated with a semi-gloss polyester powder coat enamel finish.

B. Provide each fixture with lamps as indicated in the lighting fixture schedule. Where/or if lamps are not indicated, contact the Architect/Engineer for clarification.

C. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding. Where possible fabricate frames to allow lamp installation/removal without tools. Hinge mechanism shall be designed to preclude accidental falling of hinged door closure frames during relamping operations and while secured in operating position.



D. Recessed, surface or pendant lighting fixtures shall be suspended from structural members or ceiling structure members of minimum 1-1/2" channels, by standard bar hangers, or other approved means. Fixture locations shall be coordinated with ceiling patterns. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plan for exact location of fixtures and architectural rooms finish schedule for ceiling construction details and mounting heights. The installing contractor shall provide all structural steel and related supports as required or necessary to properly and safely install and support the fixtures.

E. Fixture wiring shall be suitable for the temperature rating of the fixture; wiring through fluorescent channels shall be done with Type SFF2 wire. Where a junction box is required, to change from branch circuit to fixture wiring, use approved feed through, pre-wired fixture wiring, and install a separate junction box. The junction box shall be fully accessible after installation of covering materials. Where flexible conduit or portable cord is used, a grounding jumper shall be installed. All fixtures shall be grounded. Housings shall be so constructed that all electrical components are easily accessible and replaceable without removing fixtures from their mountings, or disassembling adjacent construction.

F. All recessed, pendant and surface mounted lighting fixtures unless otherwise noted or directed shall be UL listed for through-wiring and shall be furnished complete with all required integral wiring and all required flexible conditions, pigtails and related accessories necessary for suitable operation and installation.

G. All recessed fixtures, which are to be installed in insulated ceilings, shall be provided with UL listed thermocouple protection.

H. All materials, accessories, and other related fixture parts shall be new and free from defects which in any manner may impair their character, appearance, strength, durability and function, and be effectively protected from any damage or injury from the time of fabrication to the time of delivery and until final written acceptance of the work by the Owner.

I. Enclosures: Fabricate fixture enclosures with a minimum No. 20 gauge (0.0359 inch) thick cold rolled sheet steel. Enclosures may be constructed of other metals, provided they are equivalent in mechanical strength, durability and in compliance with local codes and acceptable for the purpose.

J. Sheet metal work: All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents, and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints shall be formed true of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly.

K. Castings: All aluminum, iron or composite castings shall be exact replicas of the approved patterns and shall be free of sand pits, blemishes, scales and rust, and shall be smoothly furnished. Tolerance shall be provided for any shrinkage of the metal castings in order that the finished castings will accurately fit in their designated locations. Unless otherwise noted for cast aluminum components use copper free 319 or 443 aluminum alloy only. For cast iron components use ASTM Spec A48-83 Class 30 gray iron.

L. Mounting frames and rings: If ceiling system requires, each recessed fixture shall be furnished with a mounting frame or ring compatible with the ceiling in which they are to be installed. The frames and rings shall be one piece or constructed with electrically welded butt joints and of sufficient size and strength to sustain the weight of the fixture.

M. Yokes, brackets and supplementary supporting members needed to mount lighting fixtures to carrier channels, suitable ceiling members or other structure shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.



N. For steel and aluminum fixtures all screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening and latching hardware shall be cadmium or equivalent plated. For stainless steel fixtures, all hardware shall be stainless steel. Whenever possible all fasteners shall be captive type. Where indicated provide tamper resistant fasteners.

O. Welding shall be in accordance with recommendations of the American Welding Society and shall be done with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the manufacturers of the metals being welded. Welds shall be continuous, except where spot welding is specifically permitted. Welds exposed to view shall be ground flush and dressed smooth. All welds on or behind surfaces which will be exposed to view shall be done so that finished surfaces will be free of imperfections such as pits, runs, splatter, cracks, warping, dimpling, depressions or other forms of distortion or discoloration. All welded surfaces shall be free of weld splatter and welding oxides.

P. Extruded aluminum frame and trim shall be rigid and manufactured from 6063-T3 aluminum alloy without blemish or warpage in the installed product. Miter cuts shall be accurate. Joints shall be flush and without burrs. Cuts shall maintain alignment with the light fixture located in its final position.

Q. All extruded aluminum fixtures shall be fabricated of 6063-T3 alloy (min. wall thickness .120) and in all cases shall be provided with heavy gauge internal alignment brackets in order to assure tight joints and a clean level and continuous appearance after installation. Unless otherwise noted, all end plates shall be continuously welded, filled and ground prior to application of final paint finishes so as to present a clean, seamless and monolithic appearance. Exposed fasteners on end plates shall be absolutely prohibited.

R. All fixtures with removable louvers, lenses, reflectors, refractors, cones or other shielding devices shall be supplied with integral safety chains. Contractor shall be responsible for insuring that all safety chains are securely fastened to shielding device and fixture housing.

S. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

T. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

U. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

V. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

W. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2 . Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3 . Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4 . Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

X. Adjustable Luminaires:

1. Recessed Luminaires shall be aimable using pan/tilt adjustment accessible through the aperture, either by means of worm drive screws or thumbwheels. Removal of trim or optic shall not be required.

2. Surface or Pendant Luminaires shall have mounts that permit maximum range of motion for aiming. Moving elements shall have set screw locking or otherwise suitable friction fittings to ensure that luminaire does not shift after aiming.

3. During installation, aim each luminaire in general target area as scheduled, so that luminaires may be visible during testing prior to commissioning.



4. Where applicable, allow slack at fixture whips to permit aiming without causing strain on conductors. After aiming, neatly dress remaining slack tight to fixture yoke or mounts.

Y. Luminaire Accessories:

1. Extra lenses, louvers, snoots, and other scheduled accessories shall be installed as directed by Specifier during system aiming and commissioning. All unused accessories shall be turned over to Owner after commissioning for attic stock.

2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

2.5 SOLID STATE (LED) LUMINAIRE SYSTEMS

A. Light emitting diodes used for interior applications shall have CRI as scheduled, with a minimum CRI of 80 if not identified. CRI of LEDs shall also have a CQS value matching the CRI, following the NIST color quality scale. CCT shall be as scheduled.

B. LED luminaires shall have integral light engine, heat sink, driver, and optic package. Minimum LM-80 depreciation to L70 at 50,000 hours under installed conditions. Minimum CRI of 85 with less than 50K CCT shift over mean life, binning to 2-step McAdams ellipse.

C. LED light engines shall be thermally fixed to heat sinks sized to appropriately dissipate gate heat under design load in the installed conditions. Lumen maintenance calculations shall be based upon the average ambient temperature at the luminaire housing or cavity area.

1. All interior LED luminaires shall be designed to meet an L70 mean life of at least 50,000 hours with scheduled drive currents.

2. All exterior LED luminaires shall be designed to meet an L70 mean life of at least 60,000 hours with scheduled drive currents.

D. LED drivers:

1. Drivers shall be solid state with integral heat sink. Driver shall have overload and short circuit protection, with a power factor of 0.9 to 1.0 and maximum THD of 20%.

2. Remote drivers shall be enclosed in NEMA enclosures. 3. Drivers shall be dimmable as scheduled. 4. Drivers shall have minimum mean life of 50,000 hours, with unlimited switching.

E. LED dimming and color control:

1. Verify that all scheduled LED luminaire drivers are compatible with the means of control indicated, either DMX-512, 0-10VDC, or low voltage dimmer.

2. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with individually specified luminaire and individually specified power supplies and/or drivers.



2.6 FINISHES

A. Painted surfaces shall be synthetic enamel with acrylic, alkyd, epoxy, polyester or polyurethane base, light stabilized, baked on at 350 degrees Fahrenheit minimum, catalytically or photochemically polymerized after application.

B. White finishes minimum 90% reflectance (semi-gloss).

C. Selection: Unless otherwise indicated, all external fixture finishes shall be as selected by the Architect/Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated, all fixture finishes shall be semi-gloss polyester powder coat enamel (color to be selected by Architect).

D. Undercoat: Except for stainless steel all ferrous metal surfaces shall be given a five stage phosphate treatment or other acceptable base bonding treatment before final painting and after fabrication.

E. Unpainted non-reflecting surfaces shall be satin finished and coated with a baked-on clear lacquer to preserve the finish. Where aluminum surfaces are treated with an anodic process, the clear lacquer coating may be omitted.

F. Unpainted aluminum surfaces: Finish interior aluminum trims with an anodized coating of not less than 7 mg. per square inch, of a color and surface finish as selected by the Architect/Engineer. Finish exterior aluminum and aluminum trims with an anodized coating of not less than 35 mg. per square inch of a color and surface finish as selected by the Architect/Engineer.

G. Metal finishes: Provide finishes of the color and type indicated and having the following properties:

1. Protection of metal from corrosion: 5-year warranty against perforation of erosion of the finish from weathering.

2. Color retention: 5-year warranty against fading, staining, or chalking from weathering including solar radiation.

2.7 REFLECTORS

A. Reflectors, cones or baffles shall be absolutely free of spinning lines, stains, ripples or any marks or indentations caused by riveting to other assembly techniques. No rivets, springs or other hardware shall be visible after installation.

B. Downlight reflectors shall provide minimum 45 degree lamp and lamp image cut-off unless otherwise specified.

C. Cone flanges shall be formed as an integral part of the cone and shall have identical color and finish as the cone, except as shown. The flange's major surface shall be perpendicular to the cone axis.

D. The reflecting surface of the cone or reflector shall be tested for proper sealing. Test per ASTM B136-63T. If any stain is visible, the specimen shall not be considered to have been properly sealed. Reflector cones shall be free of manufactured defects. The reflector inner surface shall be free of water spotting and shall maintain a reflectivity ratio of not less than 83% on clear specular finish.

E. All alzak parabolic cones shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer against discoloration for a minimum of ten years and in the event of premature discoloration shall be replaced by the manufacturer (including both materials and the cost of labor) at no cost to the Owner.

F. Where modification of standard fixtures are specified, fixtures shall be modified as required with



lamp sockets positioned to provide desired photometric performance.

G. Where or if a "specular black alzak insert" is specified, high gloss baked black enamel applied to the reflector shall be considered an acceptable alternate.

H. Specular clear alzak reflector cones and parabolic louvers specified with the use of compact fluorescent lamps or triphosphor fluorescent lamps shall be provided with clear non-iridescent coating.

I. All fixtures with removable reflectors, louvers or baffles shall be supplied with safety chains. Contractor shall be responsible for insuring that all safety chains are securely fastened to reflector and housing.

2.8 STEMS

A. Each stem shall have a brass or steel swivel, hang straight, or other self-aligning device.

B. Stems shall be made of rigid metallic (steel) pipe only, minimum wall thickness of 0.062".

C. Wherever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a surface mounted outlet box a finishing ring shall be utilized to conceal the box.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, all stems shall match in color and finish the color of the fixture which they support. Where no color is indicated, stems shall be semi-gloss baked white enamel.

E. Stems shall at the completion of installation and all other work be free of clamp marks, scratches and all other visual imperfections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, stems shall be provided in order to adequately mount and level each fixture run with proper structural support per manufacturer's recommendations.

G. Pendant Fixtures: Install pendant lighting fixtures plumb and at a height from the floor as specified on the drawings. In cases where conditions make this impractical, refer to the Architect/Engineer for direction. Use ball aligners and canopies on pendant fixtures unless otherwise noted.

H. Pendant stems shall be equally spaced along every fixture run. If field conditions or fixture construction do not allow for this condition, the installing Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer prior to commencement of the work.

2.9 LENSES, LOUVERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Lenses/Louvers: General:

1. All lenses, diffusers, and shielding media shall be properly and securely mounted within fixture assemblies. Lay in type lenses and louvers shall not be acceptable. All shielding materials shall be tightly fitted with no loose panels or parts and shall show no visible light leaks of unintentional or unscheduled light.

2. All fixtures with removable cones, louvers or other shielding devices shall be supplied with safety chains. Contractor shall be responsible for insuring that all safety chains are securely fastened to housing and shielding device.

B. Lenses: Plastic

1. Unless otherwise indicated or otherwise authorized, all plastic shielding, lenses and diffusers shall be white opal clear 100% UV stabilized virgin acrylic or in special cases high impact polycarbonate (lexan). Use of polycarbonate lenses shall be restricted to those areas outlined in the National Electric Code (latest Bulletin). Use of polystyrene



components is absolutely prohibited. 2. Plastic for lenses and diffusers shall be formed of colorless 100% virgin acrylic as

manufactured by Rohm & Haas, DuPont, G.E. or equally acceptable manufacturers. The quality of the raw material must meet American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) standards, as tested by an independent test laboratory. Acrylic plastic lenses and diffusers shall be properly cast, molded or extruded as specified and shall remain free of any dimensional instability, discoloration, embrittlement or loss of light transmittance for at least 15 years.

C. Lenses: Glass

1. Unless otherwise indicated or authorized all glass shielding, diffusers or lenses shall be clear tempered borosilicate glass. Soda lime glass material shall not be acceptable. Submit samples of glass elements upon request.

2. Glass used for lenses, refractors and diffusers in incandescent and tungsten halogen lighting fixtures shall be tempered for high impact and heat resistance; the glass shall be crystal clear in quality with a transmittance of not less than 92%. For exterior fixtures use tempered borosilicate glass, Corning No. 7740 or equal. For fixtures directly exposed to the elements and aimed above the horizontal with a radiant energy of 4.16 watts per square inch or greater, use Corning Vycor glass or equal.

3. Where optical lenses are used, they shall be free from spherical or chromatic aberrations and other imperfections, which may hinder the functional performance of the lenses.

4. Mechanical: All lenses, louvers or other light diffusing elements shall be removable but positively held so that hinging or other normal motion will not cause them to drop out.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm)

C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

E. Where (or if) indicated all remote step-down transformers and ballasts shall be properly wired to fixtures to insure that voltage drop does not exceed 5%, regardless of transformer's or ballast's location.

F. All remote step down transformers and ballasts shall be mounted in approved NEMA type enclosures and only located in areas previously deemed to be readily accessible by the Owner’s maintenance personnel.

G. Where indicated, all uplight or wallwash coves utilizing fluorescent equipment shall be installed so as to produce a continuous and unbroken band of light free of visual imperfections, socket shadows, light gaps, etc. The inability to provide this appearance shall be brought immediately to the Architect's/Engineer's attention prior to installation.

H. All fixture lengths whether straight or curvilinear shall be fabricated based upon the fixture manufacturer's or contractor's field verified dimensions only.

I. Fixture manufacturer shall coordinate conduit entry locations with installing contractor.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install lighting fixtures as noted on the drawings. Fixtures shall be completely wired and lamps installed and shall be in perfect operating condition at the time of completion.

B. Setting and Securing: The Contractor shall set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved shop drawings. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.

C. Mounting: Mounting heights specified or indicated are to bottom of fixture for suspended and ceiling mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before installation is commenced and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed.

D. Coordination: The installing Contractor shall communicate with other trades as appropriate to properly interface, schedule and coordinate installation of lighting fixtures with other work.

E. Grounding: The Contractor shall ground non current carrying parts of electrical equipment. Where the copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

F. Installation of fixture locations shall be in strict accordance with the intent of the contract drawings and approved shop, specifications and drawings.

G. Fixture locations: Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. In general, the architectural reflected ceiling plans indicate the proper locations of lighting fixtures, unless otherwise noted on architectural plans.

H. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, lighting fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately support the complete weight of the lighting fixture. The design of hangers and the method of fastening other than what is shown on the Contract Drawings, or herein specified, shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval.

I. The Contractor shall provide all hangers, rods, mounting brackets, supports, frames, earthquake clips and other equipment normally required for the proper, safe and distortion-free installation in the various surfaces in which they appear. Determine surface types from the architectural drawings.

J. Instructions: Each lighting fixture shall be packaged with complete illustration and instructions showing how to install. Install lighting fixtures in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

K. The Contractor shall rigidly align continuous rows of lighting fixtures for true aligned appearance.

L. The Contractor shall support all lighting fixtures independently of ductwork or piping.

M. Splices in internal wiring shall be made with approved insulated "wire nut" type mechanical connectors, suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to which they are subjected.

N. All wire utilized for connections to or between individual lamp sockets and lamp auxiliaries (i.e., wires which do not constitute "through circuit" wiring) shall be suitable for temperature, current, and voltage conditions to which it is subjected.



O. The Contractor shall install reflector cones, baffles, aperture plates, light controlling elements for air handling fixtures and decorative elements after completion of ceiling tiles, painting and general cleanup.

P. The Contractor shall replace blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed by the Owners’ representative.

Q. All pendant mounted lighting fixtures within the same room or area shall be installed plumb, and at a uniform height from the finished floor. Adjustment of desired height (if required) shall be made during the installation phase. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, stems and canopies shall be matched to the associated lighting fixtures.

R. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

S. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

T. Embedded luminaires: In-grade or floor-embedded luminaires shall be set flush to surrounding surface.

U. Remote power supplies, drivers, ballasts, and controllers shall be located in accessible areas, out of view of occupants. Coordinate locations with Architect and other trades.

V. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

W. Connect power and control wiring in accordance with Division 26 specifications and Manufacturer instructions.

X. Lamp Seasoning:

1. Operate all solid state luminaires for 50 hours at full output prior to request for checkout. Contractor shall identify and replace any luminaire observed to have changes in output or color exceeding the specified range during the seasoning period.

Y. Addressable Luminaires:

1. Configure digitally addressable luminaires so that their control address aligns with schedules and control system drawings. Follow Manufacturer instructions for configuration of address at each luminaire.

Z. All fixtures for gypsum board (including acoustical gyp) ceiling shall be installed for trimless spackle mud-in installation. Acoustic plaster ceiling back of panel shall be cut-out to install recessed mounting lighting fixture properly.



AA. All perimeter wall wash luminaires shall run wall-to-wall. Submittal shall include exact run length plan drawings for all locations based on field verified dimensions.


A. Tests: Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuits have been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

B. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.3 AIMING AD ADJUSTMENT

A. All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, locked, etc., by the Contractor under the supervision of the Lighting Designer. The Lighting Designer shall indicate the number of crews (foreman and apprentice) required. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is complete. All ladders, scaffolds, lift equipment, safety belts, flashlights, walkie talkie equipment, etc. required shall be furnished by the Contractor at the direction of the Lighting Designer. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking set screws and bolts and nuts shall be tightened securely.

B. Night work: Where possible, units shall be focused during the normal working day. However, where daylight interferes with seeing, aiming shall be accomplished at night.

C. Prior to final inspection, relamp all fixtures which have failed lamps, or lamps where visible color shift has occurred, and leave all lighting fixtures, equipment, and accessories in good, uniform operating condition. The Contractor shall replace any burned-out lamp during the first 100 days after the completion of the Contract.



EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5600 - 1

SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps, light engines, ballasts, and/or drivers.


1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior luminaires normally mounted on interior surfaces.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CRI: Color-rendering index.

B. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current

accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Ballasts and drivers, including energy-efficiency data. 7. Lamps and LED engines, including life, output, efficacy, chip binning, CRI, CCT. 8. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings of all special or modified standard lighting equipoment shall be submitted in reproducible form. Fixture fabrication details shall be drawn at either full size or half size scale. Fixture fabrication details shall illustrate a minimum of three (3) critical views indicating all fabrication, and assembly methods, materials, material gauges and finishes to be employed.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. 2. Mounting Details and coordination with surroundings / foundation. 3. Wiring connectors and harness assembly components.



C. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. All lighting fixtures shall be manufactured, furnished, and installed in compliance with all government agencies having jurisdiction. All fixtures shall bear the appropriate UL (or ETL) and IBEW identifications.

F. Manufacturers: Provide products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of interior and exterior lighting equipment of the types and ratings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to exterior lighting equipment.

H. Materials and equipment, as well as workmanship shall conform to the highest commercial standards and shall be as specified and/or as indicated on the drawings. Parts not specifically identified shall be made of materials most appropriate for their intended use.

I. Manufacturers: manufacturers listed as "prime spec" or approved equal in the lighting equipment schedule shall be assumed capable of supplying the listed fixtures unless clearly written exceptions are set forth in their quotations. Any such exceptions shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer and the Lighting Designer. Manufacturers not listed (as prime or approved equal) must comply with the following:

1. Experience: Manufacturers shall have not less than five years experience in design and manufacturing of lighting fixtures of the type and quality shown. Submission must include a list of completed projects and dated catalogue pages or drawings indicating length of experience.

2. Samples: Manufacturers shall submit a prototype sample of each fixture for review bythe Lighting Designer. Prototype samples shall be sufficiently detailed and operational to allow evaluation of compliance with the salient features of the specification. Preliminary design or shop drawings shall not be accepted in place of prototype samples.




A. According to Division 01 Specifications / spec section 265100 – 1.8

1.7 WARRANTY

A. All ballasts / drivers shall carry a minimum three (3) year warranty.

B. All LED lighting fixtures (unless noted otherwise) and accessories shall carry a minimum five year (5) warranty after final written acceptance by the Owner.

1.8 TECHNICAL AND ADMINISTRATIIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. All information identified in the following Schedules, Details, Layouts and Specifications [Section 265100 and 265600] shall be considered to form a complete and integrated Specification for Lighting Fixtures and Control Systems in the agreed upon Scope Areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the Architect/Engineer regarding the proper interpretation of all information indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedules, Fixture Cuts, Details and Specifications.

B. The submission of a proposal by the Contractor will be construed as evidence that a careful, complete and thorough examination of the premises, existing job conditions and Contract Documents has been made and later claims for labor, materials or equipment required or for difficulties encountered, which could have been foreseen had such an examination been made, will not be recognized. It shall also constitute a representation that the Contractor has checked and verified all quantities, work and materials involved and shall take complete responsibility for any deficiencies encountered thereafter.

C. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for verifying all fixture quantities, lengths and clearances required and shall inform the Architect/Engineer of job conditions at variance with fixtures as specified or detailed which affect installation or location at the time bid submission is made.

D. The Contractor shall insure that the lighting fixture manufacturer shall keep on file and make available for review by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner complete Quality Control and Quality Assurance records for all phases of production for all lighting fixtures to be supplied under this project.

E. Upon request the Contractor shall submit for review by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner verification that he has solicited pricing from all manufacturers which have been listed as "prime spec" and "approved equal." Upon request the Contractor shall submit for review itemized (line item) unit equipment costs for all fixtures to be provided under the Scope of this Contract.

F. Under multiple phase / separate contracts, same fixture type shall be provided by single manufacturer with exact same specifications. Later phase contractor shall submit specification to match earlier phase.

G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for coordinating and expediting the timely procurement and delivery for all lighting equipment, lamps, ballasts and related components for the project.

H. Specifications and drawings are intended to convey the salient features, function and character of the fixtures only, and do not undertake to illustrate or set forth every item or detail necessary for the work. Minor details not usually indicated on the drawings nor specified, but that are necessary or normally required for the proper execution, completion, installation and operation of the fixtures, shall be included, the same as if they were herein specified or indicated on the drawings.



I. Omissions: The Owner shall not be held responsible for the omission or absence of any detail, construction feature, etc. which may be normally required in the production of the lighting fixtures. The full and complete responsibility for accurately purchasing, fabricating and installing the lighting fixtures described herein to the fulfillment of those specifications including compliance with all regulatory bodies (i.e.: UL) shall rest solely with the Contractor.

1.9 SPARES

As part of this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the following:

A. Lamps / LED modules:1 for each 10 [10%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 12 of each type.

B. Ballasts/ Drivers: 1 for each 20 [5%] of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 5 of each type.

1.10 SAMPLES

A. Upon request, the contractor shall submit for review one representative sample for each or any lighting fixture required under this Contract. After sample acceptance, the fixture shall be sent to the project for use as a standard. In the event the submission is rejected, the fixture will be returned to the manufacturer who shall immediately make a new submission which meets the contract requirements.

B. Shipping: The samples must be actual working unit of fixtures to be supplied and shall be submitted complete with specified lamp(s), 120 volt ballast/transformer complete with cord and plug set and ready for hanging, energizing and examining sample shall be shipped (prepaid) by Contractor to the Lighting Designer or as otherwise specified or directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers listed on the Luminaire Schedule as the basis of design are the approved Manufacturers for each luminaire type. Those listed as approved equal Manufacturers are permitted to submit products meeting this specification and the performance criteria as scheduled. Listing as an approved equal manufacturer does not guarantee that products submitted by said equal manufacturer will be accepted for this project.

B. Luminaires shall be specification grade and listed by an approved agency for intended use and location.

C. Primary lighting sources shall be LED

2.2 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

A. Refer to EL-601 drawing for schedule of luminaire types specified for this project.

2.3 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.



C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2 . Specular Surfaces: 90 percent. 3 . Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 78 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and –tested luminaire before shipping.

M. actory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors. b. Color: Match Architect's sample of [manufacturer's standard] [custom] color. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.



1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

2. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: as specified by Architect.

O. Welding shall be in accordance with recommendations of the American Welding Society and

shall be done with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the manufacturers of the metals being welded. Welds shall be continuous, except where spot welding is specifically permitted. Welds exposed to view shall be ground flush and dressed smooth. All welds on or behind surfaces which will be exposed to view shall be done so that finished surfaces will be free of imperfections such as pits, runs, splatter, cracks, warping, dimpling, depressions or other forms of distortion or discoloration. All welded surfaces shall be free of weld splatter and welding oxides.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources.

3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s): a. IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting."



b. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 AIMING AD ADJUSTMENT

A. All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, locked, etc., by the Contractor under the supervision of the Lighting Designer. The Lighting Designer shall indicate the number of crews (foreman and apprentice) required. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is complete. All ladders, scaffolds, lift equipment, safety belts, flashlights, walkie talkie equipment, etc. required shall be furnished by the Contractor at the direction of the Lighting Designer. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking set screws and bolts and nuts shall be tightened securely.

B. Night work: Where possible, units shall be focused during the normal working day. However, where daylight interferes with seeing, aiming shall be accomplished at night.

C. Prior to final inspection, relamp all fixtures which have failed lamps, or lamps where visible color shift has occurred, and leave all lighting fixtures, equipment, and accessories in good, uniform operating condition. The Contractor shall replace any burned-out lamp during the first 100 days after the completion of the Contract.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS 265700 - 1

SECTION 265700 – EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS (Building A Only) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SPECIFICATION

A. This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics and requirements for a line interactive, single-phase, solid-state uninterruptible power supply, and hereafter referred to as the UPS system. The UPS shall provide high quality, computer grade AC power for today’s electronic lighting loads (power factor corrected and self-ballast fluorescent, incandescent, quartz re-strike, halogen, LED and HID) during emergency backup.

B. The UPS shall incorporate a high frequency pulse width modulated (PWM) sine wave inverter utilizing IGBT technology, a microprocessor controlled inverter and a temperature compensating battery charger, communication port, and a user friendly control panel with audible and visual alarms.

C. Myers Power Products, Inc. #3-IE-3-S-BA2012-M

1.2 DESIGN STANDARDS

A. The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the current revision of the following documents. Where a conflict arises between these documents and statements made herein, the statements in this specification shall supersede.

UL 924 Standard Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 924A Auxiliary Lighting ANSI C62.41 (IEEE 587) ANSI C62.42.45 (Cat. A & B) National Electrical Code NFPA- 101 ( Life Safety Code ) OSHA


A. Design Requirements - Electronics Module

1. Nominal input/output Voltage The Input and Output voltage of the UPS shall be pre-configured to match the user specified input and load requirements. Available voltages are 120, 208, 240, 277 or 480 Vac.

Input: _208_ VAC, 1-phase, 2 -wire-plus-ground Output: __120 VAC, 1-phase, 2 -wire-plus-ground

2. Output Load Capacity The output load capacity of the UPS shall be rated in kVA at unity power factor. The UPS shall be able to supply the rated kW from .5 lagging to .5 leading. Rating: 3 kVA / Kw

B. Design Requirement – Battery System

1. Battery Cells

The UPS shall be provided with sealed, valve regulated, lead acid batteries. 2. Reserve Time

The battery system shall be sized to provide the necessary reserve time to feed the inverter in case of a mains failure. Battery Reserve time: 90 minutes at full load



3. Recharge Time The battery charger shall recharge the fully discharged batteries within a 24-hour period. The

charger shall be an integrated 3-step, microprocessor controlled and temperature compensating.

C. Design Requirement - Transformer Module For systems with mixed input voltages the use of an isolation and / or autotransformer may be required. The transformer(s) is not bypassed when optional maintenance bypass circuit is activated.

D. Modes of Operation The UPS shall be designed to operate with less than a 2-millisecond transfer time:

1. Normal The UPS Inverter is a line interactive standby system and the commercial AC power continuously supplies the critical load. The input converter (bi-directional transformer) derives power from the commercial AC power source and supplies to the inverter while simultaneously providing floating charge to the batteries.

2. Emergency Upon failure of the commercial AC power the inverter instantaneously with a maximum of a 2-millisecond break, switches its power supply from the input converter to the battery system. There shall be no loss of power to the critical load upon the failure or restoration of the utility source.

3. Recharge

Upon restoration of commercial AC power after a power outage, the input converter shall automatically restart and start charging the batteries. The critical loads are powered by the commercial AC power again.

E. Performance Requirements

1. AC Input to UPS a. Voltage Configuration for Standard Units: 1-phase, 2-wire-plus-ground. b. Voltage Range: (+10%, -10%) c. Frequency: 60 Hz (+/- 3Hz) d. Power Factor: .5 lagging / leading e. Inrush Current: 1.25 times nominal input current, 10 times 1 line cycle for incandescent

loads f. Current Limit: 125% of nominal input current g. Current Distortion: 10% THD maximum from 50% to full load h. Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per standards set in

ANSI C62.41 (IEEE 587) & ANSI C62.42.45 (Cat. A&B)

2. AC Output, UPS Inverter a. Voltage Configuration for Standard Units: 1-phase, 2-wire-plus-ground b. Static Voltage Stability: Load current changes +/- 2%, battery discharge +/- 12.5% c. Dynamic Voltage Stability: +/- 2% (25% step load), +/- 3% (50% step load) d. Dynamic Recovery Time to within 1% of nominal: 3 cycles (0-100% load step) e. Output Harmonic Distortion: < 3% (with linear load) f. Frequency: 60 Hz (+/- .05Hz during emergency mode) g. Load Power Factor Range: 0.5 lagging to 0.5 leading h. Output Power Rating: kVA = kW i. Overload Capability: to 100% continuous rating to 115% for 10 minutes to 150% for 16

line cycles j. Crest Factor: <= 4.5



k. Efficiency 97 - 98% 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

The UPS shall be capable to operate within the specified design and performance criteria provided that the following environmental conditions are met:

1. Storage/Transport Temperature: -4 to 158 deg. F (-20 to 70 deg. C) without batteries 0 to 104 deg. F (-18 to 40 deg. with batteries* • Maximum recommended storage temperature for batteries is 77 deg. F for up to six months. Storage at up to 104 deg. F is acceptable for a maximum of three months.

2. Operating Temperatures: 32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C ); UL rating 68° to 86° F ( 20° to 30° C ). 3. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing: 4. Audible Noise: 45 dBA @ 1 meter from surface of the UPS

During Emergency Mode

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Proposal Submittals Submittals with the proposal shall include the following:

1. System configuration with single-line diagrams 2. Functional relationship of equipment including weights dimensions and heat

Dissipation 3. Descriptions of equipment to be furnished, including deviations from these

specifications 4. Size and weight of units to be handled by installing contractor

B. UPS Delivery Submittals Submittals upon UPS delivery shall include:

1. A complete set of submittal drawings

2. One set of instruction manuals. Manuals shall include a functional description of the equipment, installation, safety precautions, instructions, step-by-step operating procedures and routine maintenance guidelines, including illustrations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. UPS Module 1. The UPS manufacturer shall warrant the UPS module against defects in materials and

workmanship for 12 months after initial start-up or 18 months after ship date, whichever occurs first. The standard warranty will be increased to 2 years with the purchase of a factory start-up.

B. Battery

1. The battery manufacturer’s standard warranty shall be passed through to the end user. 2. Sealed Lead Calcium VRLA, 10-year life expectancy – one-year full replacement warranty

plus an additional nine years pro-rata.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. A minimum of 35 years experience in the design, manufacture, and testing of emergency

power systems is required.

B. Factory Testing 1. Before shipment, the manufacturer shall fully and completely test the system to assure

compliance with the specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 FABRICATION

A. All materials of the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, high grade, free from all defects and shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory testing.

B. The UPS module and batteries shall be housed in a single freestanding NEMA type 1 enclosure. Front access only shall be required for installation, adjustments and expedient servicing (MTTR: < 15 minutes). All components shall have a modular design and quick disconnect means to facilitate field service.

C. The UPS shall be powder painted with the manufacturer’s standard color. The UPS shall be constructed of replaceable subassemblies. Like assemblies and like components shall be interchangeable.

D. Cooling of the UPS shall be forced-air in emergency mode with internally mounted fans to

minimize audible noise. Fans shall not operate in the standby mode. The UPS shall provide fan power. No air filters shall be required.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. The UPS shall be comprised of the following components:

1. UPS Module - The UPS module shall contain an inverter, an AC distribution module with an input circuit breaker, back-feed relay, control, and monitoring subsystems.

2. Battery Module - The battery module shall contain the battery plant required to produce

the reserve energy to supply the inverter during abnormal AC mains conditions. The 90 - minute battery module shall be contained in same cabinet as electronics regardless of the system VA.

B. Battery Charger 1. General In the standard configuration the charger converts ac voltage to dc voltage. With commercial

power present, the inverter power transformer is powered and the IGBT modules are microprocessor controlled to recharge the batteries. The temperature compensated battery charger circuit supplies constant voltage and constant current to the batteries. Once the batteries have received a full recharge, a constant trickle charge maintains batteries at maximum level. Recharge time is 24 hours maximum at nominal ac input voltage. The ac ripple current of the dc output meets the battery manufacturer specification, thus ensuring the maximum battery lifetime.

2. AC Input Current The charger unit is provided with an ac input current limiting circuit whereby the maximum input

current shall not exceed 125% of the output full current rating. 3. Automatic Restart



Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage and after a full UPS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the UPS will automatically restart, performing the normal UPS start up.

4. DC Filter The charger shall have an output filter to minimize AC ripple voltage into the

battery. Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 2% RMS. 5. Battery Recharge The charger is capable of producing battery-charging current sufficient enough to recharge

the fully discharge battery bank within a 24-hour period. After the battery is recharged, the charger shall maintain full battery charge until the next emergency operation.

6. Over-Voltage Protection The charger is equipped with a DC over-voltage protection circuit so that if the DC voltage

rises above the pre-set limit, the charger shuts down automatically and initiates an alarm condition.

C. Inverter

1. General The inverter converts dc voltage supplied by the battery to ac voltage of a precisely stabilized

amplitude and frequency that is suitable for powering most sophisticated electrical equipment. The inverter output voltage is generated by sinusoidal pulse width modulation (PWM). The use of a high carrier frequency for PWM and a dedicated ac filter circuit consisting of a transformer and capacitors, ensure a very low distortion of the output voltage (THD<3% on linear loads).

2. Overload Capability The inverter during emergency modes shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for

overloads exceeding 100% and up to 150% of full load current for 16 line cycles, 115% for 10 minutes.

3. Output Power Transformer A dry type power transformer provides the inverter AC output. The transformer is built with

copper wiring exclusively. The hottest winding temperature of the transformer shall not exceed the temperature limit of the transformer insulation class of material at ambient temperature.

D. Display and Controls 1. Monitoring and Control

a. The UPS system provides operation monitoring and control, audible alarms, and diagnostics. The front-mounted control panel includes a 4-line by 20-character vacuum fluorescent display and a keypad for user interface. The display will be menu driven. The system will have a continuous scrolling display of the following: Date & time, System Status (AC Status, Battery Status, Charger Status) and any system faults: This allows the operator to easily “watch” system functions as they occur and check on virtually any aspect of the system’s operation. Monitoring and control are microprocessor-based for accuracy and reliability. To ensure only authorized personnel can operate the unit, the system is multi-level password protected for all control functions and parameter changes.

2. Metering

a. Scrolling through the meter functions can monitor the following measurements: - Utility input voltage - System output voltage - Battery voltage - Battery current - System output current - System output VA - Inverter wattage - System temperature - Date & time - System Days



D. Audible Alarm

1. Audible alarm will activate with any of the following conditions and automatically store the 75 most recent events.

- High battery charger voltage - Charger Fault - High AC input voltage - Low AC input voltage - Near low battery voltage - Low battery voltage - Load reduction fault - High Ambient temperature - Inverter fault - Output fault - Output overload - Output Overload shutdown

E. RS-232 Interface 1. The system shall be equipped with an RS-232 serial port (DB9) for remote

communications.

F. Manual and Programmable Testing 1. The system shall incorporate a manual test function and two automatic test modes. The

system will perform a programmable, self-diagnostic monthly test for 5 minutes, which is preset, for the 15th of every month and the user can program the event day and time. The yearly self-diagnostic test is for 90 minutes and the user can program the day and time the event is to take place. The microprocessor automatically records the last 75 test events in its own separate test result log.

G. Battery Assembly

1. The batteries are a sealed, lead-acid valve regulated battery cells with a one-year full, nine

year prorated warranty. Batteries shall be interconnected via cables and will be provided with shelf interconnects where required. A disconnect means shall be included for isolation of battery assembly from the UPS module.

H. System Options

1. Maintenance Bypass Switch:

a. This device is internally mounted in the system and permits maintenance personnel to easily

b. bypass the protected equipment directly to the AC utility power. The make before break switch isolates the system to perform routine maintenance or servicing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING

A. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Input and output wiring shall enter the cabinet in separate conduits.



3.2 UNIT START-UP and SITE TESTING

A. Site start-up and testing shall be provided by the manufacturer’s field service representative during normal working hours (Mon. - Fri. 8 a.m. - 5 p.m.). Individual scheduling requirements can usually be met with 7 working days advance notice. Site testing shall consist of a complete test of the UPS and accessories by the UPS manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer’s standards. Manufacturer’s approved service representative must perform commissioning for two-year warranty to apply.

3.3 REPLACEMENT PARTS

A. Parts shall be available through Field Service Centers throughout the country. Recommended spare parts shall be fully stocked by local field service personnel with back up available from manufacturing location.

3.4 MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS

A. A complete offering of preventive and full-service maintenance contracts for both the UPS system and batteries shall be available. An extended warranty and preventive maintenance packages shall be available. Factory-trained service personnel shall perform warranty and preventive maintenance service. A five-year maintenance contract will include a unit start-up and site testing.



ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 266100 - 1

SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals for the electrical equipment specified as described in Section 01010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOCELLS

A. Photocells shall be 3-wire and Grd type for hard wiring to contactor controls. Hubbell or equal.

CONTACTORS

A. The contactor shall switch a load at 120, 277, 208/1 or 480/1 volts, 60 hertz and shall have poles as required. Refer to drawings for descriptions of loads to each contactor.

B. The contactor shall be continuously rated for the amperage listed on drawings.

C. The contactor shall have totally enclosed, double-break silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts. Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring.

D. The contactor shall have straight-through wiring with all terminals clearly marked.

E. The contactor shall be approved per UL 508 and/or CSA, and be designed in accordance with NEMA ICS2-211B. They shall be industrial-duty rated for applications to 600 volts maximum.

F. The contactor shall have provisions for factory or field addition of:

1. Four (4) N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contact rated 6 amperes continuous at 600 volts.

2. Single or double circuit, N.O. or N.C., 30 or 60 ampere 600 volt power-pole adder.

3. Control-circuit fuse holder, one or two fuses.

G. The contactor shall have a NEMA Type I enclosure.

H. Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors: Coil-clearing contacts shall be supplied so that the contactor coils shall be energized only during the instance of operation. Both latch and unlatch coils shall be encapsulated.

I. Locate contactors on wall beside or above respective panelboards at mechanical rooms. Where panelboards are in occupied spaces locate contactors in nearest janitor’s room.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations.



ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION 269000-1

SECTION 269000 - ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION PART 1 – GENERAL Reference Section 260500 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


END OF SECTION 269000 END OF DIVISION 26


DIVISION 27 TABLE OF CONTENTS 270000-1

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 270500 - COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 271200 - CABLE TRAYS SECTION 271500 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS


COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 270500-1

SECTION 270500 – COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.


A. All contract documents including drawings; alternates, addenda and modifications preceding this division of this specification are applicable to contractors, subcontractors, and material suppliers.

1.3 SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITION

A. These Specifications are abbreviated form and contain incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "shall be", "as noted on the drawings", "according to the drawings", "a", "an", "the" and "all" are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference.

B. Engineer, wherever used in these specifications shall mean LATIMER, SOMMERS & ASSOCIATES, P.A., ENGINEERS, 3639 SW Summerfield Drive, Suite A, Topeka, Kansas 66614, 785-233-3232, FAX 785-233-0647.

C. Contractor and/or Telecommunications Contractor hereinafter abbreviated T/C, wherever used in these specifications, shall mean the Company that enters into contract with Owner to perform this work.

D. When a word, such as "proper", "satisfactory", "equivalent", and "as directed" is used, it required Engineer's review.


F. Architect-Engineer hereinafter abbreviated A/E shall mean both the Design Architects and the Design Engineers.

G. Equipment and/or materials manufacturer hereinafter abbreviated E/M shall mean the manufacturer of equipment or materials specified or referred to.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The contractor(s) responsible for work under this section shall have completed a job of similar scope and magnitude within the last 3 years. They shall provide a list of said projects including Project Name, Project Address, Contact Name, Contact Telephone and Project Status.

B. The contractor(s) shall employ an experienced, competent and adequate work force licensed in their specific trade and properly supervised at all times. Unlicensed workers and general laborers shall be adequately supervised to insure competent and quality work and workmanship required by this contract and all other regulations, codes and practices.

C. At all times the contractor(s) shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal guidelines, practices and regulations. Contractor may be required to submit a statement of qualifications upon request before any final approval and selection. Failure to be able to comply with these requirements is suitable reason for rejection of a bid.



D. The Telecommunications contractor must have vendor approved and certified technicians that will install the cable system. A copy of certification documents must be submitted with the quote in order for such quote to be valid. The Telecommunications Contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the specific vendor solution that is proposed.

E. The lead technician on the job site shall be certified by the manufacturer in the installation of the product and /or hold a BICSI, Technicians Level I or II certification.

F. The T/C shall have a BICSI Certified Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) employed by their company (on their staff not a contract employee) that will be involved with the installation and project management of the job. The RCDD’s name and company must be verifiable on the BICSI website and match the company name of bidder. A copy of certification documents must be submitted with the quote in order for such quote to be valid. Telecommunications Contractors that do not have an RCDD on staff may submit a list of (3) project references that include contact information, and project manager qualifications to Engineer prior to bid date to be considered. Submittal of references does not mean the Telecommunications Contractor will be approved to bid. Only the contractors receiving the invitation to bid, listed on a addendum, or approved in writing by Engineer will be considered.

G. The RCDD shall be required to inspect the installation on a regular basis and submit in writing that they certify the installation to meet all EIA/TIA and NEC standards and codes.

H. The RCDD shall review the individual cable test results and certify that they are within the acceptable parameters.

I. The RCDD shall also be required to put into writing that the installation was built per the specifications and construction drawings.


A. Visit site and determine existing local conditions affecting work in contract.

B. Failure to determine site conditions or nature of existing or new construction will not be considered basis for granting additional compensation.




A. Locations of equipment, conduit and other telecommunications work are indicated diagrammatically by telecommunications drawings. Layout work from dimensions on Architectural and Structural Drawings. Verify equipment size from manufacturers shop drawings.

B. Study and become familiar with contract drawings of other trades and in particular general construction drawings and details in order to obtain necessary information for figuring installation. Cooperate with other workers and install work in such a way to avoid interference with their Work. Minor deviations, not affecting design characteristics, performance or space limitation may be permitted if reviewed prior to installation by A/E.



C. Should the requirements of work or systems installed by other trades require specific placement of conduit, apparatus, appliances or other telecommunications item, these requirements shall be adhered to. Should these requirements result in major deviations in placement from that indicated on the plans or specifications, the condition shall be reviewed by A/E prior to the placement of the work.

D. Any conduit, apparatus, appliance or other telecommunications item interfering with proper placement of other work as indicated on drawings, specified, or required, shall be removed and if so shown relocated and reconnected without extra cost. Damage to other Work caused by this contractor, subcontractor, workers or any cause whatsoever, shall be restored as specified for new work.

E. Do not scale telecommunications drawings for dimensions. Accurately layout work from dimensions indicated on Architectural drawings unless such is found in error.

1.8 PERFORMANCE


1.9 WARRANTY

A. T/C warrants to Owner and Engineer the quality of materials, equipment, workmanship and operation of equipment provided under this specification division for a period of one year from and after completion of building and acceptance of telecommunications systems by Owner.

B. Contractor warrants to Owner and Engineer that on receipt of notice from either of them within one year of warranty period following date of acceptance all defects that have appeared in materials and/or workmanship, shall be promptly corrected to condition required by contract documents at T/C's expense.

C. The warranty above expressed shall not supersede any separately stated warranty or requirements required by law or by these specifications.

1.10 ALTERNATES

A. Refer to General Requirements and description for alternate bid items. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION

A. The intent of these specifications is to allow ample opportunity for Contractor to use ingenuity and ability to perform the work to his and Owner's best advantage, and to permit maximum competition in bidding on standards of materials and equipment required.

B. Material and equipment installed under this contract shall be first class quality, new, unused and without damage.

C. In general, these specifications identify required materials and equipment by naming first the manufacturer whose product was used as the basis for the project design and specifications. The manufacturer's product, series, model, catalog and/or identification numbers shall set quality and capacity requirements for comparing the equivalency of other manufacturer's products. Where other manufacturers names are listed they are considered an approved manufacturer for the product specified, however; the listing of their names implies no prior approval of any product



they may propose to furnish as equivalent to the first named product unless specific model or catalog numbers are listed in these specifications or in subsequent addenda. Where other than first named products are used for Telecommunications Contractor base bid proposal it shall be the responsibility of the Telecommunications Contractor to determine prior to bid time that the proposed materials and equipment selections are products of approved manufacturers which meet or exceed the specifications and are acceptable to the Engineer.

D. Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required items of first quality, adequate in every respect for intended use. Such items shall be submitted to Architect-Engineer for review and approval prior to procurement.

E. If the Contractor wishes to incorporate products other than those named in the Base Bid Specifications they shall submit a request for approval of equivalency in writing no later than (10) ten calendar days prior to bid date. Substitutions after this may be refused at Engineers option. Equivalents will ONLY be considered approved when listed by addendum.

F. Materials and equipment proposed for substitution shall be equal to or superior to that specified in construction efficiency, utility, aesthetic design, and color as determined by Architect-Engineer whose decision shall be final and without further recourse. Physical size of substitute brand shall be no larger than space provided including allowances for access, forward two copies of complete descriptive and technical data including manufacturer's name, model and catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions, operating characteristics and any other information needed for comparison.

G. Within 10 working days after bids are received, apparent low bidder shall submit to A/E for approval three copies of a list of all major items of equipment he intends to provide. As soon as practicable and within 3 working days after award of contract, Contractor shall submit shop drawings for equipment and materials to be incorporated in work for Architect/Engineer's review. Where 30 working day limit is insufficient for preparation of detailed shop drawings on major equipment or assemblies, Contractor shall submit manufacturer's descriptive catalog data and indicate date such detailed shop drawings will be submitted along with manufacturer's certifications that order was placed within 30 working day limit.

1.12 DRAWINGS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of two (2) sets of shop drawings of all materials and equipment. Architect/Engineer will retain one (1) set.

B. Where catalog cuts are submitted for review, conspicuously mark or provide schedule of equipment, capacities, controls, sizes, etc., that are to be provided. Mark each submitted item with applicable section and paragraph numbers of these specifications, or plan sheet number when item does not appear in specifications or specified equivalent, mark submittals with applicable alternate numbers, change order number or letters of authorization. Each submittal shall contain at least two (2) sets of original catalog cuts. Each catalog sheet shall bear equipment manufacturer’s name, address and phone number. All shop drawings on materials and equipment listed by UL shall indicate UL approval on submittal.

C. Contractor shall check all shop drawings to verify that they meet specifications and/or drawing requirements before forwarding submittals to the Architect/Engineer for their review.

D. All shop drawings submitted to Architect/Engineer shall bear Contractor's approval stamp which shall indicate that Contractor has reviewed submittals and that they meet specification and/or drawing requirements. Contractor's submittal review shall specifically check for but not be limited to the following: telecommunications and electrical characteristics, provisions for supply, and



drainage connections to building systems. All shop drawings not meeting contractor's approval shall be returned to supplier for resubmittal.

E. No shop drawing submittals will be considered for review by the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's approval stamp, or that have extensive changes made on the original submittal as a result of contractor's review.

F. Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for or the cost of returning shop drawing submittals that are submitted to them without Contractor's review and approval stamp.

G. Architect/Engineer's review of shop drawings will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviations from drawings and specifications unless such deviations have been specifically approved in writing by Owner or the representative, nor shall it relieve Contractor of responsibility for error in shop drawings. No work shall be fabricated until A/E's review has been obtained. Any time delay caused by correcting and resubmitting shop drawings will be Contractor's responsibility.

H. Submit with shop drawings of equipment, two (2) sets of operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists for all items of equipment provided. Instructions shall be prepared by equipment manufacturer.

I. Keep in safe place, keys and wrenches furnished with equipment under this contract. Present to Owner and obtain receipt for same upon completion of project.

J. Prepare a complete brochure, covering systems and equipment provided and installed under his contract. Submit brochures to Architect/Engineer for review before delivery to Owner. Contractor at his option may prepare this brochure or retain an individual to prepare it for him. Include cost of this service in bid. Brochures shall contain following:

K. Certified equipment drawings/or catalog data with equipment provided clearly marked as outlined under Section this specification.

L. Complete installation, operating, maintenance instructions and parts lists for each item of equipment.

M. Special emergency operating instructions with a list of service organizations (including addresses and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency service to various parts of system.

N. The drawings are to include cable routes and outlet locations. Outlet locations shall be identified by their sequential number as defined elsewhere in this document. Numbering, icons, and drawing conventions used shall be consistent throughout all documentation provided. The Owner will provide floor plans in paper and electronic (DWG, AutoCAD 2007) formats on which as-built construction information can be added. These documents will be modified accordingly by the telecommunications contractor to denote as-built information as defined above and returned to the Owner/Owner’s Representative.

O. The Contractors shall annotate the base drawings and return a hard copy (same plot size as originals) and compact disk (AutoCAD 2007) format.

P. Provide brochure bound in black vinyl three-ring binders with metal hinge. Reinforce binding edge of each sheet of loose-leaf type brochure to prevent tearing from continued usage. Clearly print on label insert of each brochure:

1. Project name and address.



2. Section of work covered by brochure, i.e., Telecommunications, Paging, etc. 1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Contractor shall do cutting and patching of building materials required for installation of work herein specified. Cut no structural members without Architect/Engineer’s approval and in a manner approved by him.

B. Patching shall be by mechanics of particular trade involved and shall meet approval of Architect/Engineer.

C. Drilling and cutting of openings through building materials requires Architect's review and approval. Make openings in concrete with concrete hole saw or concrete drill. Use of star drill or air hammer for this work will not be permitted.

1.14 MUTILATION

A. Mutilation of building finishes, caused by installation of telecommunications equipment, fixtures, outlets and other telecommunications devices shall be repaired at Contractor's expense to approval of Architect.


A. Work shall include mounting, alignment and adjustment of systems and equipment. Set equipment level on adequate foundations and provide proper anchor bolts and isolation as shown or specified. Level, shim, and grout equipment bases as recommended by manufacturer. Equipment failures resulting from improper installation shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor level with suitable structural support, platform or carrier in accordance with Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDM) and/or best recognized industry practice. Telecommunications contractor shall arrange for attachment to building structure, unless otherwise indicated on drawings or as specified. Provide hangers with vibration eliminators where required. Contractor shall verify that structural members of building are adequate to support equipment. Submit details of hangers, platforms and supports together with total weights of mounted equipment to Architect/Engineer for review before proceeding with fabrication or installation.


A. At final construction review, Telecommunications Contractor and major sub-contractors shall be present or shall be represented by a person of authority. Contractor shall demonstrate, as directed by Architect/Engineer, that the work complies with purpose and intent of plans and specifications. Contractor shall provide labor, services, instruments or tools necessary for such demonstrations and tests.


A. Contractor shall provide all boxes, access panels and sleeves for openings required to install his work, except structural openings incorporated in the structural drawings unless noted otherwise. Sleeves shall be installed for all cables passing through structural slabs and walls. Contractor shall set and verify the location of sleeves as shown on structural plans that pass through beams, only if so shown. All floor and wall penetrations shall be sealed to meet fire rating requirements.



CABLE TRAYS 271200 -1

SECTION 271200 – CABLE TRAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Continuous, rigid, welded steel or stainless steel wire mesh cable management system.

B. Cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to, straight sections, supports and

accessories. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 270500 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS A. References

1. IEC 61537 (2001) – Cable Tray Systems and Cable Ladder Systems for Cable Management 2. NEMA VE 1-2002/CSA C22.2 No. 126.1-02 – Metal Cable Tray Systems 3. ANSI/NFPA 70 (2005) – National Electrical Code (NEC) 4. TIA 569-A (1998) – Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways & Spaces 5. ASTM A 510 - Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire,

Carbon Steel 6. ASTM A 380 – Specification for Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of

Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems 7. ASTM B 633 – Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 8. ASTM A 123 – Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 9. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,

Structural (Physical) Quality 10. Norm NF/A 91-131 for Galvanized Steel 11. Norm NF/EN 12-329 for Electrozinc Coating 12. Norm NF/EN/ISO 14-61 for Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel 13. Norm NF 10-088-2 for Stainless Steel


A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Approval and Labeling: Provide cable trays and accessories specified in this Section that are

approved and labeled.

1. The Terms “Classified” pertaining to cable trays (rather than “Listed”) and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. Comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 392: Cable Trays; provide UL Classification

and labels. D. Comply with IEC 61537, Cable Tray Systems and Cable Ladder Systems for Cable Management. E. Comply with NEMA VE 1/CSA C22.2 No. 126.1, Metal Cable Tray Systems, for materials, sizes, and

configurations; provide cCSAus Certificate and labels.



F. Provide documentation of the following certifications:

1. ISO 9001 quality certification. 2. American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Product Design Assessment certification. 3. Det Norske Veritas (DNV) certification. 4. E 90 Fire Testing certification. 5. VDE certification.

G. Provide ETL test documentation showing cable compression/deformation testing.

H. Provide military test documentation showing compliance with the following standards:

1. MIL-S-901D (Navy) –Military Specification, Requirements for Shock Tests, High Impact;

Shipboard Machinery, Equipment and Systems 2. MIL-STD-167-1 (Ships) – Military Standards Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard Equipment

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray with other installations.

1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and as

approved by the Engineer. 2. Storage and Handling: Avoid breakage, denting and scoring finishes. Damaged products will not

be installed. Store cable trays and accessories in original cartons and in clean dry space; protect from weather and construction traffic. Wet materials will be unpacked and dried before storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: A. Cablofil, Inc., 8319 State Route 4, Mascoutah, IL, 62258. Phone: (618) 566-3230. Toll-Free: (800)

658-4641. Fax: (618) 556-3250. Website: www.cablofil.com. Email: [email protected]. Or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Cable Tray Materials: select one of the following:

1. Carbon steel wire, ASTM A 510, Grade 1008. Wire welded, bent, and surface treated after

manufacture.

B. Cable Tray Finishes: 1. Finish for Carbon Steel Wire after welding and bending of mesh; select one of the following:

a. Electrodeposited Zinc Plating: ASTM B 633, Type III, SC-1.

C. Cable tray will consist of continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management system, to allow continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation of heat, with UL Classified splices where tray acts as Equipment Grounding Conductor *EGC). Wire mesh cable tray will have continuous Safe-T-Edge T-welded top side wire to protect cable insulation and installers.

http://www.cablofil.com/

mailto:[email protected]



D. Provide splices, supports, and other fittings necessary for a complete, continuously grounded system.

1. Mesh: 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm). 2. Straight Section Lengths: 118 inches (3,000 mm). 3. Wire Diameter: Patented design includes varying wire sizes to meet application load

requirements; to optimize tray strength; and to allow tray to remain lightweight. 4. Safe-T-Edge: Patented Safe-T-Edge technology on side wire to protect cable insulation and

installers hands. 5. Fittings: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field-fabricated from straight tray sections, in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Item 2.3. 6. CF Series Cable Tray Size as indicated on the drawings.

a. Load Span Criteria:

1) Install and support cable management system in accordance with one of the following:

a) IEC 61537, with load span criteria of L/200 (to exceed standard requirements of

L/100) and a Safety Factor of 1.7.

2.3 CABLE TRAY SUPPORTS & ACCESSORIES A. Fittings/Supports: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field-fabricated from straight tray sections, in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Supports will include the FAS (Fast Assembly System) where possible so that screws, bolts, and additional tools are not required for cable tray mounting; installation time is reduced; and tray path can adapt to installation obstacles without the need for additional parts.

1. Ceiling-mounted supports mount to ceiling structure directly or with ¼”, 3/8” or ½” threaded rod. 2. Wall-mounted supports. 3. Splices, including those approved for electrical continuity (bonding), as recommended by cable

tray manufacturer. 4. Accessories: As required to protect, support, and install a cable tray system.

2.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FUNCTION & GROUNDING A. UL Classified cable trays may act as Equipment Grounding Conductors. Contact Cablofil for

approved sizes.

1. Use UL Classified splicing methods as recommended by Cablofil.

a. Ground cable trays at end of continuous run. b. Ground continuous cable tray runs every 60 feet.

2. Cable trays that are not UL Classified will be grounded per NEC requirements and manufacturer

recommendations.

a. Ground cable trays against fault current, noise, lightning, and electromagnetic interference by mounting grounding wire to each 10’ cable tray section with grounding clamp, Cablofil Model GNDCL.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance of cable trays. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cable tray level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions, original design, and

referenced standards.

1. Cutting: Field-fabricate changes in direction & elevation by cutting & bending cable tray.

a. Cut cable tray wires in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Cable tray wires must be cut with side-action bolt cutters with offset head to ensure integrity of protective galvanic layer.

c. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

2. Certified Installers: Cable tray installers must have successfully completed Cablofil’s Certified Installer program.



TELECOMMUNICATIONS 271500 -1

SECTION 271500 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SCOPE

A. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and installing Voice & Data. Horizontal cabling comprised of twisted pair category 6/6A, series 6 coax, and support systems are covered under this document.

B. The Horizontal (workstation) Cabling System shall consist of a minimum of 4-pair Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Copper Cables to each work area outlet unless otherwise noted for specific locations. Cables shall be installed from the Work Area Outlet to the Telecommunications Room (TR). In the Telecommunications Room, they shall be routed to the appropriate rack and terminated as specified in this document.

C. The work specified in this division of the specification and on the “T”, sheets must be completed thirty (30) days prior to substantial completion of the overall project. This thirty (30) day period is for the owner to provision the system prior to occupancy.

D. All cables and related terminations, support and grounding hardware shall be furnished, installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the Telecommunications Contractor as detailed in this document and the project drawings.

E. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. Typical installation details, cable routing and outlet location and types will be provided on the project drawings, an attachment to this document. If the bid documents are in conflict, this specification shall take precedence. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the cable system described in this document.

1.2 REGULATORY REFERENCES

A. All work and materials shall conform in every detail to the rules and requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, NEC, the local Electrical Code, authority having jurisdiction and present manufacturing standards.

B. All materials shall be UL Listed and shall be marked as such. If UL has no published standards for a particular item, then other national independent testing standards shall apply and such items shall bear those labels. Where UL has an applicable system listing and label, the entire system shall be so labeled.

C. The performance of all modular jacks, patch cords, consolidation points, and patch panels shall be Category 6/6A components and channel compliant and/or meet and adhere to the below defined standards.

D. The cabling system described in this is derived from the recommendations made in recognized telecommunications industry standards. The following documents are incorporated by reference:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements, May, 2001.

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components, June, 2002.



3. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.2-1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, Addendum 1 – Transmission Performance

Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ω Category 6/6A Cabling.

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components, May, 2001.

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569-A, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, February, 1998.

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 570-A, Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard, October, 1999.

7. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606 - A, Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings, February, 2002.

8. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, August, 1994.

9. ANSI/ TIA/EIA – 758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, April 1999.

10. BICSI - TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) – 11th Edition, 2007

a. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA – 70), National Electrical Code (NEC) –2002.

E. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation.

F. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The contractor is responsible for adherence of all codes, including local codes, and the authority having jurisdiction which may affect this project.

1.3 APPROVED CONTRACTOR

A. The Telecommunications contractor must have vendor approved and certified technicians that will install the cable system. A copy of certification documents must be submitted with the quote in order for such quote to be valid. The Telecommunications Contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the specific vendor solution that is proposed.

B. The lead technician on the job site shall be certified by the manufacturer in the installation of the product and /or hold a BICSI, Technicians Level I or II certification.

C. The T/C shall have a BICSI Certified Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) employed by their company (on their staff not a contract employee) that will be involved with the installation and project management of the job. The RCDD’s name and company must be verifiable on the BICSI website and match the company name of bidder. A copy of certification documents must be submitted with the quote in order for such quote to be valid. Telecommunications Contractors that do not have an RCDD on staff may submit a list of (3) project references that include contact information, and project manager qualifications to Engineer prior to bid date to be considered. Submittal of references does not mean the Telecommunications Contractor will be approved to bid. Only the contractors receiving the invitation to bid, listed on a addendum, or approved in writing by Engineer will be considered.

D. The RCDD shall be required to inspect the installation on a regular basis and submit in writing that they certify the installation to meet all EIA/TIA and NEC standards and codes.



E. The RCDD shall review the individual cable test results and certify that they are within the acceptable parameters.

F. The RCDD shall also be required to put into writing that the installation was built per the specifications and construction drawings.

1.4 APPROVED PRODUCTS

A. The approved products are specified in this document and on the drawings for the horizontal and backbone systems. The telecommunications drawings indicate the associated part number/equivalent. Product and item numbers are defined in later sections of this document or indicated on the drawings.

1.5 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor; equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this structured cabling system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The Telecommunications Contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete system whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not.

B. The work shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Furnish, install and terminate a complete communications infrastructure including wall plates, jacks patch panels, patch cords, cabinets and/or racks and any other material required to form a complete system.

2. Perform link testing (100% of horizontal and/or backbone links/channels) and certification of all components.

3. Furnish two (2) sets of test results of all cabling to the Owner/Owner’s Representative on compact disk and paper format, listed by each closet, then by workstation ID.

4. Adhere and comply with all requirements of the manufacturer of the products proposed in this specification.

5. Provide owner orientation of the overall cable system and cable system documentation. (As-built drawings)

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Under the provisions of this request for proposal, prior to the start of work the telecommunications contractor shall:

1. Submit copies of the certification of the company and names of staff that will be performing the installation and termination of the installation to provide proof of compliance of this specification.

2. Submit proof from manufacturer of contractor’s good standing in manufacturer’s program.

3. Submit appropriate cut sheets for all products, hardware and cabling if different from the products that are called out in this specification.

a. Work shall not proceed without the Owner/Owner’s Representative approval of the submitted items.

b. The telecommunications contractor must receive written approval from the Owner/Owner’s Representative on all substitutions of material. Substituted materials shall not be installed except by written approval from the Owner/Owner’s Representative.




A. The telecommunications contractor shall be a company specializing in communication cabling installation. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI), or the proposed system solution vendor, must certify 30 percent of the termination crew for copper and 10 percent of the termination crew for fiber with a Technicians Level of Training.

B. The T/C shall have a BICSI Certified Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) employed by their company that will be involved with the installation and project management of the job.

1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Cable shall be stored according to manufacturer's recommendations as a minimum. In addition, cable must be stored in a location protected from vandalism and weather. If necessary, cable shall be stored off site at the contractor's expense.

B. If the telecommunications contractor wishes to have a trailer on site for storage of materials, arrangements shall be made with the Owner/Owner’s Representative.

1.9 DRAWINGS

A. It shall be understood that the telecommunications details and drawings provided with the specification package are diagrammatic. They are included to show the intent of the specifications and to aid the telecommunications contractor in bidding the job. The telecommunications contractor shall make allowance in the bid proposal to cover whatever work is required to comply with the intent of the plans and specifications.

B. The telecommunications contractor shall verify all dimensions and be responsible for there accuracy.

C. Before submitting the bid, the telecommunications contractor shall call to the attention of the Engineer any materials or apparatus the telecommunications contractor believes to be inadequate and to any necessary items of work omitted.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. An Extended Product Warranty shall be provided which warrants functionality of all components used in the vendor system solution for 20 years from the date of registration. The Extended Product Warranty shall warrant the installed horizontal and/or backbone copper and fiber.

B. The Application Assurance Warranty shall cover the failure of the wiring system to support the applications that are designed for the link/channel specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA–568-B.2.1. These applications include, but are not limited to, 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, 1000BASE-T, and 155 Mb/s ATM.

C. The contractor shall provide a warranty on the physical installation of not less the one year at no cost to the owner. Information with regard to the proper procedures to follow if needed should be included with the warranty. They should include but not be limited to; contact name, contact telephone number, project reference, anticipated response time.

1.11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE & SYSTEM CERTIFICATION



A. Final Acceptance of the implemented cable system solution will be provided in writing from the Owner / Owner’s Representative. It will be issued upon successful completion of the installation, including but not limited to, final inspections, receipt of the successful test results and as-built documentation, and successful performance of the cabling system for a thirty-day period. Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the Owner/Owner’s Representative shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the Manufacturer of the installed system solution. This Extended Product Warranty shall be provided within thirty days of the completion of the project. Final payment will not be made until such warranty / numbered certificate is received.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS

A. Equivalents are listed on drawings where approved. 2.2 WORK AREA OUTLETS

A. Work area cables shall each be terminated at their designated work area location in the connector types described in the subsections below. Included are modular telecommunication jacks. These connector assemblies shall snap into a faceplate from the front.

B. The Telecommunications Outlet Assembly shall accommodate:

1. The number of jacks as noted on the project drawings.

2. Additional accommodations for specific locations as noted in the plans for optical fiber and/or additional copper cables as necessary.

3. A blank filler module will be installed when extra ports are not used.

4. The same orientation and positioning of jacks and connectors shall be utilized throughout the installation. Please refer to typical outlet configuration on project drawings prior to installation.

C. Printed labels shall be permanent and compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA–606-B standard specifications. Labels shall be machine printed. Hand written labels shall not be accepted.

1. Faceplates: The faceplates shall:

a. be constructed of stainless steel.

b. be UL listed and/or match the color of the raceway if installed in surface raceway.

c. be available as single-gang or dual-gang and provide for easy access for moves, adds and changes.

d. provide designation field to facilitate labeling and identification.

e. comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A work area labeling standard.

f. be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company.

D. Voice / Data Jacks

1. Voice/Data jacks shall be 8-position modular jacks and shall meet or exceed Category 6/6A performance standards as defined by the references in this document. All pair combinations must be considered, with the worst-case measurement being the basis for compliance. Modular jack performance shall be third-party verified by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory.

2. The modular jack shall be backwards compatible to Category 3, 5, and 5e.

3. The modular jack shall be center tuned to category 6/6A test specifications.



E. Video Jacks/Coax Connectors

1. Video jacks shall be “F” connectors and shall be installed in locations per the project drawing.

2.3 MODULAR PATCH PANELS

A. Modular Category 6/6A performance rated patch panels shall be used for the horizontal to terminate on. The panels shall be T568B standard, not high density, and use a standard 110-impact tool for termination.

B. Modular patch panel shall be used to terminate the backbone voice cable on. The panel shall be 8 position,

C. Modular Patch Panel kit shall be used to terminate coax cables. The kit shall provide for the placement of modules to be snapped in.

2.4 WIRE MANAGEMENT PANELS

A. Cable management shall be provided above and below every 48 ports of patch / distribution panels or as shown on construction drawings. The wire management panels shall provide horizontal organization of patch cables on the rack.

B. Wire management panels shall also be required for every 48 ports of network electronics, (i.e. switches, hubs), installed in a rack.

2.5 PATCH CABLES

A. Category 6/6A patch cables shall be provided and installed as part of the project. They shall be installed and the remainder to be delivered to the Owner prior to completion of the project. Patch cables shall be provided in the types and quantities indicated on the contract drawings. Owner to provide port assignments.

B. Fiber optic patch cables shall be provided as part of the project. They shall be installed and the remainder to delivered to the Owner prior to completion of the project. The fiber optic patch cables shall be provided in the types and quantities indicated on the contract drawings. Owner to provide port assignments.

2.6 FIBER TERMINATION CABINETS

A. Fiber shall be terminated in a rack mountable cabined that will secure, protect and organize fibers for interconnection.

2.7 FIBER AND CONNECTORS

A. Fiber cables shall be field terminated using LC fusion spliced pigtail type connectors. The connector shall be compliant TIA/EIA 604-3.



2.8 RACKS

A. All equipment, patch panels, wiring blocks, etc., shall be mounted in self-supporting equipment as indicated on the project drawing. The rack shall be able to support 19” panels and equipment. The equipment rack shall provide vertical cable management and support for the patch cords at the front of the rack and wire management, support, and protection for the horizontal cables inside the legs of the rack. Waterfall cable management shall be provided at the top of the rack, on both sides, for patch cords and for horizontal cables entering the rack channels for protection and to maintain proper bend radius and cable support. The rack shall include mounting brackets for cable tray ladder rack to mount to the top of the rack. Velcro cable ties shall be provided inside the rack channels to support the horizontal cable. Rack shall be black in color to match the patch panels and cable management. Refer to “Rack Detail” on drawings for specific information.

1. Free Standing Rack shall:

a. provide the necessary strain relief, bend radius and cable routing for proper installation of high performance cross connect products, meeting all specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.

b. have EIA hole pattern on front and rear.

c. be available with a standard channel depth.

d. be available with elcro straps for securing bulk cables inside the vertical U-channels.

e. provide floor and ceiling access for cable management and distribution.

f. provide pre-drilled base for floor attachment of rack.

g. be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company. 2.9 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLE

A. All horizontal cabling must be plenum rated Category 6/6A. The horizontal cable shall be terminated on Category 6/6A modular patch panels as specified on the drawings. The horizontal cable must pass all Category 6/6A testing parameters upon completion of installation and termination.

2.10 COAX CABLE

A. Plenum rated coax cable shall be installed to provide for video service within the facility. It shall run from the respective Telecommunications Room to specific locations as indicated on the project drawings.

2.11 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. The facility shall be equipped with a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB). This backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware that has the potential to act as a current carrying conductor. The TBB shall be installed independent of the building’s electrical and building ground and shall be designed in accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Standard.

B. The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be equipped with a telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB). Each telecommunications room shall be provided with a telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. The intent of this system is to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to the building electrical ground system. Therefore, ground loop current potential is minimized between telecommunications equipment and the electrical system to which it is attached.



C. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice cases, cable trays, etc. entering or residing in the TR or ER shall be grounded to the respective TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded green insulated copper bonding conductor and compression connectors, or as shown on drawings.

D. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with a green insulation. Black insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap of green tape. All cables and bus bars shall be identified and labeled in accordance with the System Documentation Section of this specification.

2.12 FIRESTOP

A. A firestop system is comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated structure, the opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the materials used to seal the penetrated structure. Firestop systems comprise an effective block for fire, smoke, heat, vapor and pressurized water stream.

B. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire rated structure). Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots and sleeves, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly fire stopped.

C. Fire stop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479).

2.13 CABLE TRAY

A. A welded wire mesh, cable management system shall be installed. The open mesh shall permit easy access to the tray and provides continuous ventilation of cables installed in the tray. The open mesh basket tray shall be produced from high mechanical strength steel wire. The welded wire mesh tray must meet applicable Underwriters Laboratories standards and requirements. The open mesh cable tray must have a continuous safety edge wire welded to the top of the tray and wire mesh welded at all intersections.

B. A continuous insulated number six (6) AWG, stranded green insulated ground conductor shall be

installed at one end with all open mesh cable trays. The ground conductor fixing system shall be accomplished by the use of the manufacturer’s approved splices and bonding jumpers. Refer to drawings for additional information.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 WORK AREA OUTLETS

A. Cables shall be coiled in the in-wall or surface-mount boxes if adequate space is present to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturers bend radius. In hollow wall installations where box-eliminators are used, excess wire can be stored in the wall. No more than 12” of UTP and 36” of fiber slack shall be stored in an “in-wall” box, modular furniture raceway, or insulated walls. Excess slack shall be loosely coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable.



B. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 document, manufacturer's recommendations, BICSI and best industry practices.

C. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 12 mm (one-half inch).

D. Bend radius of the horizontal cable shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the cable.

E. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25mm (one inch) of the termination point.

3.2 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Cable shall be installed in accordance with recommendations from the manufacturer, BICSI and best industry practices.

B. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8" minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any conduit.

C. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A maximum fill for the particular raceway type or 40%.

D. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices) except for transition points, or consolidation points as noted on the project drawings. Additional splices, transition points or consolidation points must be approved in writing by the Owner / Owner’s Representative.

E. Cables shall be routed to allow a minimum of three (3) feet of slack in a neat bundle, not coiled behind rack. This cable may be used for future rearrangements and re-terminations.

F. Where transition points, or consolidation points are allowed, they shall be located in accessible locations and housed in an enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose.

G. J-hook or trapeze system shall be used to support cable bundles. All horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 48 inch intervals. At no point shall cable(s) rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels or any other type of ceiling. They also shall not rest on tops of walls, duct work, or piping.

H. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of not more than 50 cables. Cable bundle quantities in excess of 50 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the bundle and degrade cable performance.

I. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cable system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices.

J. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires. Where support for horizontal cable is required, the contractor shall install appropriate carriers to support the cabling.

K. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation or test parameters during installation shall be replaced by the contractor before final acceptance at no cost to the Owner.



L. Cables shall be identified by a self-adhesive label in accordance with the System Documentation Section of this specification and ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. The cable label shall be applied to the cable behind the faceplate on a section of cable that can be accessed by removing the cover plate ( 6” back from termination point). Brady LAT-18-361-1 or submit sample to engineer for approval prior to installation.

M. Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends smaller than four times the outside diameter of the cable at any point in the run and at the termination field. The cable’s minimum bend radius shall not be exceeded.

N. Pulling tension on 4-pair UTP cables shall not exceed 25-lb. for a four-pair UTP cable. The cables maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded.

O. The installation of cable shall conform to the following clearances:

1. At 5 inches (127 millimeters) form power lines carrying 2KVA or less.

2. At least 12 inches (305 millimeters) from power lines carrying from 2 to 5 KVA.

3. At least 36 inches (915 millimeters) from power lines carrying more than 5 KVA.

4. At least 2 inches (305 millimeters) from all fluorescent lights and other sources of electromagnetic interference such as electric motors, HVAC equipment, arc welders, intercoms, etc.

3.3 HORIZONTAL CROSS CONNECT INSTALLATION

A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B standard, manufacturer’s and BICSI recommendations, and best industry practices.

B. Cable pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 13 mm (0.5 inch).

C. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter of the cable.

D. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame.

E. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25mm (1 inch) of the termination point.

F. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.

3.4 OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATION HARDWARE

A. Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber splice tray or enclosure. No slack loops shall be allowed external to the fiber panel.

B. Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective splice enclosure by mechanical means. The cable strength member shall be securely attached to the cable strain relief bracket in the enclosure.

C. Each fiber bundle shall be stripped upon entering the splice tray and the individual fibers routed in the splice tray.



D. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the splice enclosure. Cables labeled within the bundle shall not be acceptable.

3.5 BACKBONE CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables.

B. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8” minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any conduit.

C. Where cables are housed in conduits, the backbone and horizontal cables shall be installed in separate conduits

D. Where backbone cables and distribution cables are installed in a cable tray or wire way, backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution cables.

E. All backbone cables shall be securely fastened to the sidewall of the TR using ladder rack or some other comparable hardware.

F. Backbone cables spanning more than three floors shall be securely attached at the top of the cable run with a wire mesh grip and on alternating floors or as required by local codes.

G. Vertical runs of cable shall be supported to cable ladder, or other approved method to provide proper support for the weight of the cable.

H. Large bundles of cables and/or heavy cables shall be attached using metal clamps and/or metal banding to support the cables.

3.6 COPPER TERMINATION HARDWARE

A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B standard, manufacturer’s recommendations, BICSI and best industry practice.

B. Cable pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 12 mm (one-half inch).

C. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter of the cable. Bend radius of cables shall not be exceeded at any time.

D. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame.

E. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25 mm (one inch) of the termination point.

F. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.

3.7 RACKS



A. Racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using minimum 3/8” hardware or as required by local codes.

B. Racks shall be placed as shown on the construction drawings. When possible they shall be placed with a minimum of 36-inch clearance from the walls on all sides.

C. All racks shall be grounded to the telecommunications ground bus bar.

D. Rack mount screws not used for installing patch panels and other hardware shall be bagged and left with the rack upon completion of the installation.

E. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be mounted on 4’ x 8’ x .75” void free plywood. The plywood shall be mounted vertically 12” above the finished floor. The plywood shall be painted with two coats of white fire retardant paint.

3.8 CABLE TRAY

A. All open mesh cable tray, shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The open mesh cable tray shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) compliant upon installation completion.

B. The open mesh cable tray shall be installed using hardware, splice connectors, support components and accessories furnished by the manufacturer of the open mesh cable tray product.

C. The open mesh cable tray shall be installed above the equipment racks as defined on the construction drawings. The cable tray must be secured to the equipment racks. Components to secure the rack may be furnished by either the cable tray manufacturer of the equipment rack manufacturer.

D. It shall be contractor’s responsibility to inspect areas to receive the open mesh cable tray and notify the Owner / Owner’s Representative of conditions that would adversely affect the installation or subsequent utilization of the system. These conditions shall be corrected prior to installation of the open mesh cable tray.

E. The contract shall install and support the open mesh cable tray system in accordance with span load criteria of L/240.

3.9 FIRESTOP SYSTEM

A. All fire stop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local inspection authorities before cable system acceptance.

3.10 ROUNDING SYSTEM

A. The TBB shall adhere to the recommendations of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 standard, and shall be installed in accordance with best industry practice.

B. A licensed electrical contractor shall perform installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building service entrance ground.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING



A. Labeling shall be done as shown on construction drawings. At a minimum, the labeling system shall clearly identify all components of the system: racks, cables, panels and outlets. The labeling system shall designate the cables origin and destination and a unique identifier for the cable within the system. Racks and patch panels shall be labeled to identify the location within the cable system infrastructure. All labeling information shall be recorded on the red-lined as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect the appropriate labeling scheme. Labeling shall follow the guidelines of ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

B. All label printing will be machine generated. Labels will be used on cable jackets, appropriately sized to the OD of the cable, and placed within view at the termination point on each end. Outlet, patch panel and wiring block labels shall be installed on, or in, the space provided on the device.

3.12 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. General

1. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B including all addendums. All pairs of each installed cable shall be verified prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed at no cost to the Owner.

2. All cables shall be tested in accordance with this document, the ANSI/TIA/EIA standards, and the Manufacturer’s Certification Program Information Manual, BICSI and best industry practice. If any of these are in conflict, the Contractor shall bring any discrepancies to the attention of the Owner / Owner’s Representative for clarification and resolution.

3. The Engineer may request that the T/C verify at random that the patch cords meet test requirements defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2.1.

B. Copper link Testing

1. All twisted-pair copper cable links shall be tested for continuity, pair reversals, shorts, opens and performance as indicated below. Additional testing is required to verify Category performance. Horizontal cabling shall be tested using a Level III test unit for category 6/6A-performance compliance as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.

2. Continuity - Each pair of each installed cable shall be tested using a test unit that shows opens, shorts, polarity and pair-reversals, crossed pairs and split pairs. Shielded/screened cables shall be tested with a device that verifies shield continuity in addition to the above stated tests. The test shall be recorded as pass/fail as indicated by the test unit in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommended procedures, and referenced to the appropriate cable identification number and circuit or pair number. Any faults in the wiring shall be corrected and/or replaced and re-tested before final acceptance.

3. Length - Each installed cable link shall be tested for installed length using a Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) type device. The cables shall be tested from end to end, patch panel to patch panel, block to block, patch panel to outlet or block to outlet as appropriate. The cable length shall conform to the maximum distances set forth in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Standard. Cable lengths shall be recorded, referencing the cable identification number and circuit or pair number. For multi-pair cables, the longest pair length shall be recorded as the length for the cable.

C. Category 6/6A Performance

1. Follow the Standards requirements established in:



a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B .1, B.2-1

b. A Level III test unit is required to verify category 6/6A performances. The basic tests required are:

♦ Wire Map

♦ Length

♦ Attenuation

♦ NEXT (Near end crosstalk)

♦ Return Loss

♦ ELFEXT Loss

♦ Propagation Delay

♦ Delay skew

♦ PSNEXT (Power sum near-end crosstalk loss)

♦ PSELFEXT (Power sum equal level far-end crosstalk loss)

2. The Contractor shall test each link from end to end to ensure the performance of the system. A compete link test is required. The contractor will install patch cords to complete the circuit and then test the entire channel.

D. Fiber Testing

1. All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end-to-end system. There shall be no splices. Testing shall consist of an end-to-end power meter test performed per EIA/TIA-455-53A. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and/or 1300 nanometers for multimode fibers from both directions. These tests also include continuity checking of each fiber.

2. Backbone multimode fiber cabling shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm (or 1310 and 1550 nm for singlemode) in both directions.

3. Test set-up and performance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14 Standard, Method B.

4. Where links are combined to complete a circuit between devices, the Contractor shall test each link from end to end to ensure the performance of the system. ONLY LINK TEST IS REQUIRED. The contractor can optionally install patch cords to complete the circuit and then test the entire channel. The test method shall be the same used for the test described above. The values for calculating loss shall be those defined in the ANSI/TIA/EIA Standard.

5. Attenuation testing shall be performed with an approved hand held tester from an industry recognized test equipment manufacturer.

E. Coax Cable Testing

1. 100% of coax cables placed shall be tested. They shall be tested for continuity and length. The results shall be recorded and provided to the Engineer for review.

3.13 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION

A. Upon completion of the installation, the telecommunications contractor shall provide two (2) full documentation sets to the Owner / Owner’s Representative for approval. Documentation shall include the items detailed in the sub-sections below.

B. Documentation shall be submitted within ten (10) working days of the completion of each testing phase (e.g. subsystem, cable type, area, floor, etc.). This is inclusive of all test results and draft annotated drawings. Draft drawings may include annotations done by hand. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall be submitted within 30 working days of the completion of each testing phase. The telecommunications contractor shall provide copies of the original test results to the Owner / Owner’s Representative.



C. The Owner / Owner’s Representative may request that a 10% random field re-test be conducted on the cable system, at no additional cost, to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those defined above. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the telecommunications contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the Owner / Owner’s Representative, including a 100% re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.14 TEST RESULTS

A. Test documentation shall be provided to the Owner / Owner’s Representative within three weeks after the completion of the project. The telecommunications contractor shall provide one set of documentation, printed on paper and two copies on compact disk. The disk shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover with the words “Project Test Documentation”, the project name, and the date of completion (month and year). The results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and cable (or outlet) I.D., measurement direction, reference setup, and crew member name(s). The test equipment name, manufacturer, model number, serial number, software version and last calibration date will also be provided at the end of the document. Unless the manufacturer specifies a more frequent calibration cycle, an annual calibration cycle is mandatory on all test equipment used for this installation. The test document shall detail the test method used and the specific settings of the equipment during the test as well as the software version being used in the field test equipment.

B. The field test equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B including applicable TSB’s and amendments. The appropriate Level III tester shall be used to verify Category 6/6A cabling systems.

C. Printouts generated for each cable by the (wire or fiber) test instrument shall be submitted as part of the documentation package. The telecommunications contractor must furnish this information in electronic form (CD-ROM) and print out on paper.

D. When repairs and re-tests are performed, the problem found and corrective action taken shall be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be documented.

3.15 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are to include cable routes and outlet locations. Outlet locations shall be identified by their sequential number as defined elsewhere in this document. Numbering, icons, and drawing conventions used shall be consistent throughout all documentation provided. The Owner will provide floor plans in paper and electronic (DWG, AutoCAD 2007) formats on which as-built construction information can be added. These documents will be modified accordingly by the telecommunications contractor to denote as-built information as defined above and returned to the Owner/Owner’s Representative.

B. The Contractors shall annotate the base drawings and return a hard copy (same plot size as originals) and compact disk (AutoCAD 2007) format.



DIVISION 28 TABLE OF CONTENTS 280000 – 1

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 287210 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS


FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 287210-1


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This specification provides the requirements for the installation, programming and configuration of a complete Addressable Fire Detection and Alarm System. The system shall include, but not limited to: fire alarm control panel, automatic and manually activated alarm initiating and indicating peripheral devices, conduit and wiring, software and accessories required to furnish a complete and operational Life Safety System. The installed Fire Alarm System shall provide complete automatic and manual fire detection and alarm notification as required for this facility.

B. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, Local Code Requirements and National Electrical Code [Article 760].

C. System shall be UL listed for Power Limited Applications per NEC 760. All circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC article 760-23.

D. The fire alarm control panel shall, as a minimum, incorporate all devices shown on the plans and all existing fire alarm circuits.

E. The requirements of Section 26 05 00, General Provisions, apply to this work..

1.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide a Notifier 320 complete by Tech Electronics, addressable, microprocessor-based fire alarm system with initiating devices, notification appliances, and monitoring and control devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. Software: The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing instructions and operating sequences as necessary. The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.

C. History Logs: The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history.

D. Wiring/Signal Transmission: 1. Transmission shall be hard-wired, using separate individual circuits for each zone of

alarm operation as required or addressable signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only.

2. System connections for initiating, signaling line circuits and notification appliance circuits shall be Class B.

3. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the FACP. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.

Required Functions: The following are required system functions and operating features: 4. Priority of Signals: Fire alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are

queued in the order received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Priority Two, Supervisory and Trouble events have second-, third-, and fourth-level priority respectively. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all events regardless of priority or order received.

5. Noninterfering: An event on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or



devices are restored to normal. The activation of an addressable device does not prevent the receipt of signals from subsequent addressable device activations.

6. Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central station service transmitter provided under another contract.

7. Annunciation: Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated at the FACP and the remote annunciator, indicating the location and type of device.

8. General Alarm: A system general alarm shall include: a. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP and the annunciator(s). b. Identification of the device /zone that is the source of the alarm at the FACP and

the annunciator(s). c. Operation of audible and visible notification devices throughout the building until

silenced at FACP. d. Closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders. e. Unlocking designated doors. f. Shutting down supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is initiated. g. Closing smoke dampers on system serving zone where alarm is initiated. h. Notifying the local fire department.

9. Activation of any smoke detector in a single elevator lobby or an elevator equipment room shall, in addition to the actions described above, cause the recall of that bank of elevators to the 1st floor and the lockout of controls. In the event of recall initiation by a detector in the first floor lobby, the recall shall be to the alternate floor as determined by the AHJ.

10. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and machine rooms shall activate an elevator power shunt trip breaker. The heat detectors shall be rated at a temperature below the ratings of the sprinkler heads in respective locations to insure that the power shall be shut off before activation of sprinkler system.

11. Supervisory Operations: Upon activation of a supervisory device such as fire pump power failure, low air pressure switch, and tamper switch, the system shall operate as follows: a. Activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at

the control unit and the remote annunciator. b. Pressing the Supervisory Acknowledge Key will silence the supervisory audible

signal while maintaining the Supervisory LED "on" indicating off-normal condition. c. Record the event in the FACP historical log. d. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station. e. Restoring the condition shall cause the Supervisory LED to clear and restore the

system to normal. 12. Alarm Silencing: If the "Alarm Silence" button is pressed, all audible [and visible] alarm

signals shall cease operation. 13. System Reset

a. The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state. b. Should an alarm condition continue, the system will remain in an alarmed state.

14. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the notification appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated.

15. WALKTEST: "One Person Testing" mode of the system as follows: a. The city circuit connection and any suppression release circuits shall be bypassed. b. Control relay functions associated to one of the 8 testing groups shall be

bypassed. c. The control unit shall indicate a trouble condition. d. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. e. Any opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the

audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.

E. Analog Smoke Sensors: 1. Monitoring: FACP shall individually monitor sensors for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm

condition, and shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The control unit shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values.



2. Environmental Compensation: The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the sensor's smoke chamber value to automatically compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions that could affect detection operations.

3. Sensitivity Testing Reports: The FACP shall provide sensor reports that meet NFPA 72 calibrated test method requirements. The reports shall be viewed on a CRT Display or printed for annual recording and logging of the calibration maintenance schedule.

4. The FACP shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. The system shall provide a means to automatically indicate when a sensor requires cleaning.

5. The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each sensor which will check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition.]

6. Magnet test activation of smoke sensors shall be distinguished by its label and history log entry as being activated by a magnet.

F. Audible Alarm Notification: By horns in areas as indicated on drawings.

G. Fire Suppression Monitoring: 1. Water flow: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate general alarm operations. 2. Sprinkler valve tamper switch: The activation of any valve tamper switch shall activate

system supervisory operations.

H. Power Requirements 1. The control unit shall receive AC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit. 2. The Fire Alarm system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the

entire system upon loss of normal AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.

3. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control unit.

4. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be indicated at the control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously at the user interface while incoming power is present.

5. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery or a depleted battery condition, or disconnection of the battery shall be indicated at the control unit and displayed for the specific fault type.

6. The system shall support NAC Lockout feature to prevent subsequent activation of Notification Appliance Circuits after a Depleted Battery condition occurs in order to make use of battery reserve for front panel annunciation and control.

7. The system shall support 100% of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.

8. Loss of primary power shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP. FACP shall indicate when the system is operating on an alternate power supply.


A. Equipment: 1. Equipment cabinet assemblies shall be factory assembled and tested as a complete unit

to meet the requirements of this system. 2. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer

and shall display the manufacturer's name on each component. 3. The Manufacturer shall be a nationally recognized company specializing in fire alarm and

detection systems. This organization shall employ factory trained and NICET certified technicians, and shall maintain a service organization within 50 miles of this project location. The Manufacturer and service organization shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the fire protective signaling systems industry.



4. The fire alarm system specification is based on a system manufactured by Notifier Fire Alarm Systems and Technology. No other manufacturers will be considered.

B. Bidders: 1. Equipment supplier is to be that of Notifier Integrator by Honeywell. 2. The bidder shall have an in-place support facility with technical staff, spare parts

inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment. The installer shall have a resident fully qualified service organization equipped for on-site maintenance and repair within a 50 mile radius of the site.

C. Installer: 1. The system shall be installed by competent electricians, regularly employed by the fire

alarm manufacturer with full responsibility for proper operation of the fire management system including debugging and proper calibration of each component in the entire system.

2. Supplier and installer shall be able to refer to similar installations in the immediate area furnished and serviced by him during the past three years, providing satisfactory service.

3. The contractor shall employ on staff a minimum of one NICET level II technician or a professional engineer, registered in the State of the installation.

4. Contractors unable to comply with the provisions of Qualification of Installers shall present proof of engaging the services of a subcontractor qualified to furnish the required services.

5. Manufacturer's Representative: Provide the services of a factory trained and certified representative or technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. The representative shall be licensed in the State if required by law. The technician shall supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. The technician shall provide the required instruction to the owner's personnel in the system operation and maintenance.

6. The final checkout and verification of the Fire Alarm system shall be conducted by a technician certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). This technician shall be registered as level 2 or higher in the fire protection technology certification program. Provide NICET certification information with fire alarm submittal.

D. Codes and Approvals: 1. The complete fire management installation shall be in strict accordance to the Uniform

Fire Code and all local and state codes having jurisdiction for fire alarm/life safety systems. All devices designed for or used in line voltage applications shall be UL listed.

2. All microprocessor based remote devices shall be UL916 and UL864 Listed. 3. All fire management central equipment shall be UL916 Listed. 4. Other fire alarm equipment shall be listed under the appropriate following UL standards.

E. All system components shall be fault tolerant. They shall provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% of rated voltage and at +3 hertz variation in line frequency. Provide static, transient, and short circuit protection on all inputs and outputs as required. Communication lines shall be protected against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. Bus connected devices shall be ac coupled or equipped with equivalent preventative measures so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus communication.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's literature completely describing fire alarm system components, equipment, and accessories, and shop drawings illustrating system interconnecting wiring and connections.



1. The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal: a. AutoCAD floor plans and complete wiring diagrams that illustrate the wiring

requirements for each component in the proposed system. b. Power calculations including battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a

minimum of 125% of the calculated requirement. c. Equipment list of all proposed devices and equipment. d. Manufacturer's catalog data cut sheets on all equipment being provided for a fully

functional system. e. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete functioning system.

B. Instructions: Furnish Instruction Manual describing operation of fire alarm system.

C. Documentation: 1. Software documentation including description of programmed operation. 2. Submit maintenance brochure after completion of the project. Maintenance brochure

shall include operating instructions, specifications, and instruction sheets for the equipment.

3. A complete list identifying all specific deviations from the specified system components and operation.

D. See Section 26 01 00.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents as follows:

B. Strobe Units: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not less than one.

C. Smoke Detectors or Sensors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units of each type installed but not less than one of each type.

D. Detector or Sensor Bases: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type installed but not less than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A. General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems."

B. The following FACP hardware shall be provided: 1. Power Limited base panel with cabinet and door, 120 VAC input power. 2. Minimum point capacity of 200% of designed system’s point count, or a minimum

capacity of 318 points, whichever is larger. Points shall include any addressable initiating devices.

3. Provide a digital dialer in compliance with 2006 International Building Code requirements. 4. Installation of Zone Cards in-order to handle all existing zones that remains (field verify). 5. Programmable DACT for either Common Event Reporting or per Point Reporting.

C. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange unit so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures.



D. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Panel shall include an 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands.

2.2 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

A. General: Components include battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch.

B. Battery: Sealed lead-acid or nickel cadmium type. Provide sufficient capacity to operate the complete alarm system in normal or supervisory (non-alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this period of operation on battery power, the battery shall have sufficient capacity to operate all components of the system, including all alarm indicating devices in alarm or supervisory mode for a period of 5 minutes.

2.3 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Provide where required a remote LCD Annunciator with the same "look and feel" as the FACP operator interface. The Remote LCD Annunciator shall use the same Primary Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset Keys, Status LEDs and LCD Display as the FACP.

B. Annunciator shall have super-twist LCD display with two lines of 40 characters each.

C. Under normal conditions the LCD shall display a "SYSTEM IS NORMAL" message and the current time and date.

D. Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory or Trouble) shall flash. The unit audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steady for trouble and supervisory conditions.

E. The LCD shall display the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a point in the system: 1. 40 character custom location label. 2. Type of device (e.g., smoke, pull station, waterflow). 3. Point status (e.g., alarm, trouble).

F. Operator keys shall be key switch enabled to prevent unauthorized use. The key shall only be removable in the disabled position. Acknowledge, Silence and Reset operation shall be the same as the FACP.

2.4 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATIONS

A. Description: Addressable single- or double-action type, red LEXAN, with molded, raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Station will mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common with the control units.

2.5 SMOKE SENSORS

A. General: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Include the following features: 1. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification. 2. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal. 3. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore normal operation. 4. Each sensor base shall contain an LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the

Control Unit (once every 4 seconds). In alarm condition, the sensor base LED shall be on steady.



5. Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the sensor location.

6. Each sensor shall be scanned by the Control Unit for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type.

7. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. 8. Sensors include a communication transmitter and receiver in the mounting base having a

unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. Sensor address shall be located in base to eliminate false addressing when replacing sensors.

B. Type: Smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric or combination photoelectric / heat type. Where acceptable per manufacturer specifications, ionization type sensors may be used.

C. Bases: Relay output, sounder and isolator bases shall be supported alternatives to the standard base.

D. Duct Smoke Sensor: Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied. Sensor includes relay as required for fan shutdown. 1. Environmental compensation, programmable sensitivity settings, status testing, and

monitoring of sensor dirt accumulation for the duct sensor shall be provided by the FACP. 2. Duct Housing shall provide a magnetic test area and Red sensor status LED. 3. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes

by accessing them through the duct housing front cover. 4. Each duct sensor shall have a Remote Test Station with an alarm LED and test switch.

2.6 HEAT SENSORS

A. Thermal Sensor: Combination fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise unit with plug-in base and alarm indication lamp; 135-deg F fixed-temperature setting except as indicated.

B. Thermal sensor shall be of the epoxy encapsulated electronic design. It shall be thermistor-based, rate-compensated, self-restoring and shall not be affected by thermal lag.

C. Sensor fixed temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and] programmable to operate at 135-deg F or 155-deg F. Sensor rate-of-rise temperature detection shall be selectable at the FACP for either 15-deg F or 20-deg F per minute.

2.7 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT INTERFACE MODULES

A. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules: Arrange to monitor one or more system components that are not otherwise equipped for addressable communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve tamper, non-addressable devices, and for control of evacuation indicating appliances and AHU systems.

B. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box. Modules will include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting. Modules will receive their operating power from the signaling line or a separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply as required.

C. All Circuit Interface Modules shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control unit. Module identification shall be transmitted to the control unit for processing according to the program instructions. Modules shall have an on-board LED to provide an indication that the module is powered and communicating with the FACP. The LEDs shall provide a troubleshooting aid since the LED blinks on poll whenever the peripheral is powered and communicating.



2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units shall be listed to UL 228. Units shall be equipped for wall mounting as indicated, and shall be complete with matching door plate. Units shall be flush mounted. Unit shall operate from a 120VAC, a 24VAC or a 24VDC source, and develops a minimum of 25 lbs. holding force.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

C. Coordinate mounting locations with architect prior to rough-in.

2.9 STANDARD ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Horn: Piezoelectric type horn shall be listed to UL 464. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA @ 24VDC. The horn shall mount directly to a standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapter or trim rings.

B. Visible/Only: Strobe shall be listed to UL 1971. The V/O shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The V/O enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings. V/O appliances shall be provided with different minimum flash intensities of 15cd, 75cd and 110cd. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific Visible/Only appliance.

C. Audible/Visible: Combination Audible/Visible (A/V) Notification. Appliances shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific strobe. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA @ 24VDC. The audible/visible enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings. Devices installed outdoors shall be weatherproof.

D. Notification Appliance Circuit provides synchronization of strobes at a rate of 1Hz and operates horns with a Temporal Code Pattern operation. The circuit shall provide the capability to silence the audible signals, while the strobes continue to flash, over a single pair of wires. The capability to synchronize multiple notification appliance circuits shall be provided.

E. Accessories: The contractor shall furnish the necessary accessories.

2.10 NAC POWER EXTENDER

A. The NAC Power Extender panel shall be a stand-alone panel capable of powering a minimum of 4 notification appliance circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be Class B rated at 2 amps each. Panel shall provide capability to be expanded to 8 notification appliance circuits.

B. The internal power supply & battery charger shall be capable of charging up 12.7 Ah batteries internally mounted or 18Ah batteries mounted in an external cabinet.

C. The NAC extender panel may be mounted close to the host control panel or can be remotely located. T

D. When connected to a conventional (non-addressable panel) one or two standard notification appliance circuits from the main control panel may be used to activate all the circuits on the NAC power extender panel.



E. Alarms from the host fire panel shall signal the NAC power extender panel to activate. The panel shall monitor itself and each of its NACs for trouble conditions and shall report trouble conditions to the host panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The fire alarm system shall be designed, installed, and commissioned in a turnkey fully implemented and operational manner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation required for a fully functional fire alarm system. All wiring shall be in accordance to all local and national codes. All line voltage wiring and all wiring in equipment rooms shall be installed in conduit and in accordance with NEC and local codes.

B. Installation personnel shall be supervised by persons who are qualified and experienced in the installation, inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Factory trained and certified personnel. 2. National Institute of Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) fire alarm level II

certified personnel. 3. Personnel licensed or certified by state or local authority.

C. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be in a completely separate conduit system, except

where cable is allowed below. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled "Fire Alarm". All circuitry shall be concealed in walls and above ceilings.

2. Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation. All wiring shall have each conductor tagged and identified. Wiring for like functions shall be color-coded consistently throughout the systems.

3. Verify all circuiting requirements with equipment manufacturer before installation.

D. Provide interconnecting wiring from fire alarm systems control outputs to controlled devices and equipment. Provide connection of power supplies and or transformers for powering controlled device operators. 1. Provide connections for operation and wiring from output contacts to smoke dampers

operators.

E. Equipment Installation: 1. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on

the plans. Include sufficient control unit(s), annunciator(s), manual stations, automatic fire detectors, smoke detectors, audible and visible notification appliances, wiring, terminations, electrical boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system.

2. Water-Flow and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve required to be supervised.

3. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in the public space immediately adjacent to the device they monitor.

F. Wiring Installation: 1. System Wiring: Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use by an approval

agency acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate articles from the current approved edition of NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC).



2. Contractor shall obtain from the Fire Alarm System Manufacturer written instruction regarding the appropriate wire/cable to be used for this installation. No deviation from the written instruction shall be made by the Contractor without the prior written approval of the Fire Alarm System Manufacturer.

3. Color Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color code for alarm initiating device circuits wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color-code notification appliance circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. All circuitry shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike manner. All circuitry shall run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to prevent obstruction to devices and terminals. All electronic wiring shall be type and size as recommended by system manufacturer. 1. Where installed above accessible ceilings, fire alarm cabling may be installed in a neat

manner, tightly bundled and independently secured to building structure by approved means. Do not lay cable on ceiling and do not support from other conduit systems, ductwork or piping. Utilize plenum rated cable in return air plenums.

2. Where devices are to be installed on, or cabling is to pass through frame walls or hollow masonry walls the cabling shall be fished in the wall cavity to an appropriate flush outlet box firmly mounted in the wall.

3. Where devices are to be installed on or cabling is to be routed over solid masonry walls the cabling shall be installed in approved surface mounted raceways equal to Wiremold or equivalent. Where installed in rooms with accessible ceilings the surface raceways shall be routed vertically from the ceiling to the device in a neat and workman like manner. Verify all routing of surface raceways with the Architect.

4. Where prior approval of surface mounted raceways is received from the Architect, the device mounting boxes shall be finished surface boxes of suitable size for the device installation.

H. Labor to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram, or replace system components shall be furnished by the fire alarm contractor at no charge to the Owner during the warranty period.

I. All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.

J. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall maintain electronic copies of all data file and application software for reload use in the event of a system crash or memory failure. One copy shall be delivered to the Owner during training session, and one copy shall be archived by the fire alarm manufacturer.

K. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of all system equipment after completion of the installation.

L. Install additional audio/visual units in locations indicated to have inadequate sound levels based on the sound level testing.

3.2 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and adjusting controls and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to the site for this purpose.

C. Do not install smoke detectors before the status of construction and clean-up meets the requirements of NFPA. Clean all smoke detectors at the completion of the construction work.



Produce a log of all smoke detector sensitivity levels at system start-up and deliver to the Owner.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.

B. Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall be permitted to include, but shall not be limited to, individuals with the following qualifications: 1. Factory trained and certified. 2. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) fire alarm

certified. 3. International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) fire alarm certified. 4. Certified by a state or local authority. 5. Trained and qualified personnel employed by an organization listed by a national testing

laboratory for the servicing of fire alarm systems.

C. Coordinate the testing during occupied hours with the Owner to minimize disruption of the daily schedule.

D. Pretesting: Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.

E. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing to the Architect when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.

F. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72.

G. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards.

H. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log.

I. Final Test, Certificate of Completion, and Certificate of Occupancy: 1. Test the system as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in order to obtain a

certificate of occupancy.

3.4 INSTRUCTION

A. All training shall be by the Fire Alarm manufacturer's trained representative and shall utilize Operation and Maintenance manuals and as-built documentation. Manual documentation shall include: 1. Operation sequences with specific to specific hardware components - Wiring diagrams 2. System software documentation 3. Control Panel operation instructions 4. Maintenance instructions 5. Troubleshooting instructions



B. Following the completion of work, the Owner's representative shall be given a minimum of two (2) two hour sessions of instructions on operation and maintenance of the completed system. Training topics shall include: 1. Sequence of Operation review. 2. Sign on-Sign off. 3. Interpretation and selection of displays and reports. 4. Modifying English text. 5. Modifying alarm limits and start-stop times. 6. System initialization. 7. Purge and/or dump of historical data. 8. Troubleshooting of sensors (determining bad sensors). 9. Troubleshooting and selection of notification devices

C. Deliver to the Owner at the time of the first training session three complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3.5 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one year from the date of the completed and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use.

B. A representative of the manufacturer shall provide at least two inspections of the complete system during the one year warranty period.

C. Labor to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram, or replace system components shall be furnished by the Fire Alarm contractor at no charge to the Owner during the warranty period.

D. All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. All firmware or resident software updates and new releases shall be supplied and installed free of charge for two years after the project warranty is expired.

E. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the Owner a maintenance contract proposal to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72H guidelines, to begin after the warranty period expires.
